Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 9 OEM Eaton Corporation Electrical Sector 1111 Superior Ave. Cleveland, OH 44114 United States 877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273) Eaton.com (c) 2011 Eaton Corporation All other trademarks are property of their respective owners. All Rights Reserved Printed in USA Publication No. CA08100011E / MSC January 2011 Volume 9: OEM Volume 9--OEM Product Guide Tab 1--Circuit Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T1-1 Tab 2--Motor Control and Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-1 Tab 3--Logic Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-1 Tab 4--Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-1 Tab 5--Sensors and Limit Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T5-1 Tab 6--Machine Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T6-1 Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-1 9 Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units. Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in Eaton's Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton's electrical sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions. Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code(R) and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton's electrical sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty. Copyright (c)2013 Eaton, All Rights Reserved. Introduction Eaton Corporation is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what's important to you. Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: Reliability--maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime Efficiency--minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact Safety--identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: Volume 1--Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2--Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3--Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4--Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6--Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E) Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8--Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9--Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10--Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11--Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E) Volume 12--Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08105001E) Volume 13--Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)--Available in electronic format only Volume 14--Fuses (CA08100016E)--Available in electronic format only Volume 15--Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E) These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E) The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA) If you don't have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com i Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Circuit Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series G Motor Circuit Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series G Motor Protector Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers-- Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers-- Supplementary Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 1.2 1.3 V9-T1-5 V9-T1-8 V9-T1-10 1 1 1 V9-T1-19 1 V9-T1-25 V9-T1-27 V9-T1-29 V9-T1-32 V9-T1-40 V9-T1-41 Rotary Disconnect Switches Open Rotary Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosed Rotary Disconnects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 V9-T1-13 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C350 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotary Disconnect Switches V9-T1-2 V9-T1-42 V9-T1-58 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 For our complete product offering, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E and Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-1 1.1 1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Product Overview Circuit Breaker Selection Guide 1 1 1 1 Description 1 General Applications 1 1 1 Series G Molded Case Circuit Breaker Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers QUICKLAG(R) Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers Page V9-T1-5 Page V9-T1-13 Page V9-T1-19 Line protection--molded case switch, motor circuit protection (combination tested with Eaton starters and contactors) thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units. Line protection--feeder and branch thermalmagnetic trip unit. Used to provide branch circuit protection in cable-in/out panel or DIN-Rail mount applications. Technical Data Maximum current rating 2500A 600A 100A Maximum voltage--AC 690 Vac 480 Vac 240 Vac Maximum voltage--DC 250 Vdc 250 Vdc 80 Vdc Poles 1, 2, 3, 4 1, 2, 3 QC = 1, 2, 3, 4 QCD = 1, 2, 3 QCR/QCF = 1, 2, 3 1 Max. interrupting capacities Three-pole at 240V E = 200 kA J = 200 kA L = 200 kA Three-pole at 480V E = 100 kA J = 200 kA L = 200 kA Three-pole at 240V G = 25 kA (480/277) F = 25 kA J = 35 kA K = 35 kA L = 35 kA Three-pole at 480V GI = 14 kA (480/277) GD = 22 kA F = 14 kA J = 20 kA K = 20 kA L = 20 kA 65 kA at 240 Vac 5 kA at 80 Vdc 1 See individual catalogs for limitations and back-up protection requirements. UL(R) 489 IEC 60947-2 CE CSA(R) KEMA-KEUR CCC UL 489CE IEC 60947-2 CE CSA UL 489 CSA 22.2 1 1 1 1 Approvals 1 1 Environmental Data Humidity Non-condensing 100% relative humidity Non-condensing 100% relative humidity -- 1 Shock -- -- -- Vibration -- -- -- 1 Operating temperature -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) derating applies -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) derating applies 40C (104F) Dielectric strength Below 250A 6 kV Above 250A 8 kV Below 250A 6 kV Above 250A 8 kV 1960 Vac (acc. to UL 489) 1 1 1 Insulation resistance 750 Vac 750 Vac -- Endurance/life 250A: EG, JG = 8,000 operations 630A: LG = 6,000 operations 250A: Gi = 10,000 operations Fi = 8,000 operations 400A: Ji, Ki, Li = 6,000 operations >10,000 operations Approximate weight E Three-pole--2.88 lbs (1.04 kg) J Three-pole--5.06 lbs (2.30 kg) L Three-pole--12.36 lbs (5.61 kg) G Three-pole--2.10 lbs (0.95 kg) F Three-pole--4.5 lbs (2.0 kg) J Three-pole--12.50 lbs (5.7 kg) K Three-pole--11.50 lbs (5.2 kg) QC Mounting configuration Backpan, plug-in adapter, DIN-rail (E) Backpan, DIN-rail (G) Panel mount, front mount, 35 mm DIN-rail mountable 1 1 1 1 1 1 Single-pole--0.36 lbs (162.8 g) Two-pole--0.61 lbs (274.9 g) Three-pole--1.14 lbs (518.3 g) QCD Single-pole--0.43 lbs (195.3 g) Two-pole--0.89 lbs (401.9 g) Three-pole--1.34 lbs (605.6 g) QCR Single-pole--0.22 lbs (97.9 g) Two-pole--0.48 lbs (215.8 g) Three-pole--0.70 lbs (315.6 g) QCF Single-pole--0.24 lbs (109.9 g) Two-pole--0.50 lbs (225.2 g) Three-pole--0.74 lbs (335.1 g) For our complete product offering, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E. 1 V9-T1-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued 1 1 1 1 Description WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers-- Supplementary Protectors 1 Page V9-T1-25 Page V9-T1-27 1 Used to provide branch circuit protection in cablein/out DIN-Rail mount applications. Used to provide overcurrent protection where branch protection (for example UL 489 MCCB) is already provided or not required. Replacement for fuses used as supplementary protectors. 40A 63A General Applications 1 1 1 Technical Data Maximum current rating Maximum voltage--AC 480/277 Vac (240/415 Vac IEC) 480/277 Vac Maximum voltage--DC 48 Vdc 65 Vac Single-pole 130 Vac Two-pole Poles 1, 2, 3 1, 2, 3 Max. interrupting capacities 10 kA UL/CSA; 15 kA IEC/EN 60947-2 IEC 240/415V 10 kA UL/CSA 120V 10 kA 240V 10 kA 277V 6 kA 480V 6 kA See individual catalogs for limitations and back-up protection requirements. 1 1 1 1 1 Approvals UL 489 CE; IEC/EN 60947-2 CSA 22.2 UL 1077 CE; IEC/EN 60947-2; IEC/EN 60898 CSA 22.2 235 Humidity Acc. IEC 60068-2 (25 to 55C/ 77 to 131F, 90-95% RH) -- Shock Acc. IEC 60068-2-27 (40g half sine wave for 10 ms--3 axes) (15g half sine wave for 20 ms--3 axes) -- Vibration Acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 5-100 Hz/1.0 mm/0.7g (3 axes) -- 1 Operating temperature 30C (86F) -- Dielectric strength 1960 Vac (acc. to UL 489) -- 1 1 1 Environmental Data Insulation resistance 100M ohms at 500 Vdc -- Endurance/life >20,000 operations -- Approximate weight Single-pole--0.27 lbs (121.0g) Two-pole--0.53 lbs (242.0g) Three-pole--0.80 lbs (363.0g) Single-pole--0.26 lbs (120.0g) Two-pole--0.54 lbs (244.9g) Three-pole--0.83 lbs (376.5g) Mounting contribution 35 mm DIN rail mountable 35 mm DIN rail mountable 1 1 1 1 1 1 For our complete product offering, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E. 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-3 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker Selection Guide, continued 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers Page V9-T1-29 Page V9-T1-32 Solution for where space is at a premium or when equipment dimensions are critical when upgrading or retrofitting current systems. Offering the power and performance of a power breaker in the compact size of a molded case breaker. With its reduced weight and compact dimensions, you can mount two times as many feeder breakers and reduce the overall enclosure density up to 50%. Enables comprehensive solutions to meet and exceed the unique and wide-ranging requirements of today's global power distribution systems. Designed and engineered for ultimate custom configuration and application flexibility in metal enclosed switchgear and power distribution enclosures. General Applications 1 1 1 1 Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers Technical Data Maximum current rating 630-1600A 800-6300A 1 Maximum voltage--AC 220-690 Vac Up to 690 Vac Maximum voltage--DC -- -- 1 Poles 3, 4 3, 4 Max. interrupting capacities 65 kAIC at 480 Vac Max. withstand capacities 42 kAIC 200 kA at 480 Vac Max. withstand capacities 100 kAIC CL fuseless 200 kA at 635 Vac with integral limiters UL 1006 Component UL 489 Component IEC 60947-2 UL 1066 IEC 60947-2 KEMA 1 See individual catalogs for limitations and back-up protection requirements. 1 Approvals 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Environmental Data Humidity -- -- Shock -- -- Vibration -- -- Operating temperature -25 to 70C -25 to 70C Dielectric strength -- -- Insulation resistance -- -- Endurance/life 10,000 electrical operations 20,000 mechanical operations -- Approximate weight Three-pole breaker + cassette--85 lbs (39 kg) Three-pole breaker--53 lbs (24 kg) Four-pole breaker + cassette--104 lbs (47 kg) Four-pole breaker--67 lbs (30 kg) -- Mounting configuration Rear-connected, front-connected, surface mounting, mounting bracket, fixed, drawout breaker with cassette Fixed or drawout with cassette rear-connected, frontconnected 1 1 1 1 For our complete product offering, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E. 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Features Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 Field-fit accessories Common accessories through 630A Space-saving footprint High-performance current limiting designs up to 200 kAIC at 480V Global ready: UL, CSA, CE, IEC, KEMA-KEUR listings Complete breaker includes frame, trip unit, standard terminals and mounting hardware 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection Series G(R) Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 EG Frame 1 1 E G H 3 015 FF G Frame E Number of Poles Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA B E S H C K Performance 600Y/347 480 415 -- 18 18 18 25 25 22 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 Molded case switch 1 240 25 35 85 100 200 1 = One 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four--Neutral 0% Protected 7 = Four--Neutral 100% Protected Amperes 016 2 015 020 025 030 032 2 035 040 045 050 060 063 2 070 080 090 100 110 125 1 Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric B = Bolt-on -- 1 1 1 Trip Unit FF = Fixed fixed AF = Adjustable thermal fixed magnetic KS = Molded case switch 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Available only as 125 and 160A sizes. 2 Is not UL rated. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-5 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers JG Frame J G S 3 250 FA G C 1 1 Frame Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated J 1 Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 1 1 E S H C U X K 1 1 1 Performance 600 480 415 18 25 25 18 35 40 25 65 70 35 100 100 50 150 150 50 200 200 Molded case switch Number of Poles 240 65 85 100 200 200 200 2 = Two 3 = Three 4 = Four--Neutral 0% protected 8 = Four--Neutral 0-60% protected 9 = Four--Neutral 100% protected Amperes 050 070 080 090 100 125 150 160 175 200 225 250 1 1 1 L G S 3 600 FA G C 1 Frame 1 Rating Blank = 80% rated C = 100% rated L 1 Standard/Application G = IEC/CE/UL/CSA 1 1 E S H C U X K 1 1 1 Performance 600 480 415 18 35 35 25 50 50 35 65 70 50 100 100 65 150 150 65 200 200 Molded case switch Number of Poles 240 65 85 100 200 200 200 3 = Three 4 = Four--Neutral 0% protected 6 = Four--Neutral 60% protected 7 = Four--Neutral 100% protected 8 = Four--Neutral 0-60% protected 9 = Four--Neutral 0-100 protected 1 1 1 Trip Unit AA = Adjustable thermal Adjustable magnetic FA = Fixed thermal Adjustable magnetic KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG NN = Frame only (no trip) LG Frame 1 1 Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric E = Imperial end caps Imperial G = Line/load standard Metric Amperes 250 300 350 400 500 600 630 Terminations/Hardware Terminals Mounting Hardware M = Metric end caps Metric Imperial E = Imperial end caps G = Line/load standard Metric W = Without terminals -- Trip Unit 1 AA = Adjustable thermal Adjustable magnetic FA = Fixed thermal Adjustable magnetic KS = Molded case switch 33 = 310+ electronic LS 32 = 310+ electronic LSI 35 = 310+ electronic LSG 36 = 310+ electronic LSIG 38 = 310+ electronic ALSI 39 = 310+ electronic ALSIG NN = Frame only (no trip) Note 1 A = Arc reduction, L = Long, S = Short, I = Instantaneous, G = Ground. 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Product Selection 1 Series G Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 Approximate Dimensions are in Inches 1 EG Frame Maximum Continuous Amperes at 40C 1 Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D Fixed Thermal Fixed Magnetic IC Rating: 25 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Amperes at 40C Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D 1 Fixed Thermal Fixed Magnetic 1 IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 15 EGE3015FFG 15 EGH3015FFG 20 EGE3020FFG 20 EGH3020FFG 25 EGE3025FFG 25 EGH3025FFG 30 EGE3030FFG 30 EGH3030FFG 35 EGE3035FFG 35 EGH3035FFG 40 EGE3040FFG 40 EGH3040FFG 45 EGE3045FFG 45 EGH3045FFG 50 EGE3050FFG 50 EGH3050FFG 60 EGE3060FFG 60 EGH3060FFG 70 EGE3070FFG 70 EGH3070FFG 80 EGE3080FFG 80 EGH3080FFG 90 EGE3090FFG 90 EGH3090FFG 100 EGE3100FFG 100 EGH3100FFG 125 EGE3125FFG 125 EGH3125FFG 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 JG Frame Maximum Continuous Amperes Three-Pole 4.13 W x 7 H x 3.57 D Magnetic Range Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic IC Rating: 25 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac Maximum Continuous Amperes 1 Three-Pole 4.13 W x 7 H x 3.57 D Magnetic Range Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic 1 IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac 70 350-00 JGE3070FAG 70 350-700 JGH3070FAG 90 450-900 JGE3090FAG 90 450-900 JGH3090FAG 100 500-1000 JGE3100FAG 100 500-1000 JGH3100FAG 125 625-1250 JGE3125FAG 125 625-1250 JGH3125FAG 150 750-1550 JGE3150FAG 150 750-1550 JGH3150FAG 175 875-1750 JGE3175FAG 175 875-1750 JGH3175FAG 200 1000-2000 JGE3200FAG 200 1000-2000 JGH3200FAG 225 1125-2250 JGE3225FAG 225 1125-2250 JGH3225FAG 250 1250-2500 JGE3250FAG 250 1250-2500 JGH3250FAG 1 1 1 1 1 1 LG Frame Ampere Rating Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic Ampere Rating IC Rating: 35 kAIC at 415 and 480 Vac 1 Fixed Thermal Adjustable Magnetic 1 IC Rating: 70 kAIC at 415 Vac, 65 kAIC at 480 Vac LGE3250FAG 250 LGH3250FAG 300 LGE3300FAG 300 LGH3300FAG 350 LGE3350FAG 350 LGH3350FAG 400 LGE3400FAG 400 LGH3400FAG 500 LGE3500FAG 500 LGH3500FAG 600 LGE3600FAG 600 LGH3600FAG 250 1 Three-Pole 3 W x 5.5 H x 2.99 D Three-Pole 5.48 W x 10.13 H x 4.09 D 1 1 1 1 Note 1 16, 32, 63A are not UL listed ratings. 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-7 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features Series G Motor Circuit Protector 1 1 Instantaneous only protector Designed for use in combination with motor starters Adjustable to motor FLA UL recognized component, File E7819 motor circuit protectors 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Series G Motor Circuit Protectors 1 EG Frame--480 Vac, 600Y/347 Vac Maximum 1 1 Continuous Amperes 3 Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes 1 MCP Trip Setting 2 MCP Catalog Number Continuous Amperes Cam Setting Motor Full Load Current Amperes 1 MCP Trip Setting 2 MCP Catalog Number A 0.69-0.91 9 HMCPE003A0C 50 A 11.5-15.2 150 HMCPE050K2C B 1.1-1.3 15 B 19.2-22.9 250 1 C 1.6-1.7 21 C 26.9-30.6 350 D 2.0-2.2 27 D 34.6-38.3 450 1 E 2.3-2.5 30 E 38.4-42.1 500 F 2.6-2.8 33 F 42.2-43.5 550 A 1.5-2.0 21 A 16.1-30.6 210 B 2.6-3.1 35 B 26.9-32.2 350 1 7 1 1 HMCPE007C0C 70 C 3.7-3.9 49 C 37.6-42.9 490 D 4.8-5.2 63 D 48.4-53.7 630 E 5.3-5.7 70 E 53.8-59.1 700 F 5.8-6.1 77 F 59.2-60.9 770 A 3.4-4.5 45 A 23.0-30.6 300 1 B 5.7-6.8 75 B 38.4-46.0 500 C 8.0-9.1 105 C 53.8-61.4 700 1 D 10.4-11.4 135 D 69.2-76.8 900 E 11.5-12.6 150 E 76.9-84.5 1000 1 F 12.7-13.0 165 F 84.6-87.0 1100 A 3.9-9.1 90 A 38.4-46.0 500 B 11.5-13.7 150 B 57.6-65.2 750 1 C 16.1-18.3 210 C 76.9-84.5 1000 D 20.7-22.9 270 D 3 1250 1 E 23.0-25.2 300 E 3 1375 F 25.3-26.1 330 F 3 1500 1 1 1 1 1 15 30 HMCPE015E0C HMCPE030H1C 100 100 HMCPE070M2C HMCPE100R3C HMCPE100T3C Notes 1 Motor FLA ranges are typical. The corresponding trip setting is at 13 times the minimum FLA value shown. Where a 13 times setting is required for an intermediate FLA value, alternate cam settings and/or MCP ratings should be used. 2 For DC applications, actual trip levels are approximately 40% higher than values shown. 3 Settings above 10 x I are for special applications, where the ampere rating of the disconnecting means cannot be less than 115% of the motor full load ampere rating. n 1 1 V9-T1-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 JG Frame--600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range Amperes MCP Catalog Number 250 500-1000 HMCPJ250D5L 625-1250 HMCPJ250F5L 750-1500 HMCPJ250G5L 875-1750 HMCPJ250J5L 1000-2000 HMCPJ250K5L 1125-2250 HMCPJ250L5L 1250-2500 HMCPJ250W5L 1 1 1 1 1 1 LG Frame--600 Vac Maximum, 250 Vdc Maximum 1 Continuous Amperes MCP Trip Range Amperes MCP Catalog Number 1 600 1250-2500 HMCPL600L6G 1500-3000 HMCPL600N6G 1 1750-3500 HMCPL600R6G 2000-4000 HMCPL600X6G 2250-4500 HMCPL600Y6G 2500-5000 HMCPL600P6G 3000-6000 HMCPL600M6G 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-9 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features Series G Motor Protector Breakers 1 1 1 1 1 Eliminates need for separate overload relay Can be used with contactor to eliminate need for overload relay and still create manual motor control Meets requirement for motor branch protection, including: Disconnecting means Branch circuit short circuit protection Overload protection UL 489 listed, IEC60947-02 rated Phase unbalance, phase loss protection and high load alarm Optional pre-detection trip relay 1 1 1 1 Product Selection Series G Motor Protector Breakers 1 For pre-trip alarm option, order Style Number 5721B31G02. 1 JG Frame Motor Protector Circuit Breakers, 250A Maximum Rated Current 1 Continuous Amperes 35 kAIC Catalog Number 65 kAIC Catalog Number 1 50 JGMPS050G JGMPH050G 100 JGMPS100G JGMPH100G 1 160 JGMPS160G JGMPH160G 250 JGMPS250G JGMPH250G 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 LG Frame Motor Protector Circuit Breakers, 630A Maximum Rated Current Continuous Amperes 50 kAIC Catalog Number 65 kAIC Catalog Number 250 LGMPS250G LGMPH250G 400 LGMPS400G LGMPH400G 600 LGMPS600G LGMPH600G 630 1 LGMPS630G LGMPH630G Note 1 630A is not a UL listed rating. 600A is the maximum UL or CSA rating for LG breaker. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-10 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Accessories 1 Field Fit Kit Catalog Numbers Description Alarm Lockout Pole Location Terminal Shields Frame-- EG, JG and LG Alarm Lockout Auxiliary Switch Line 3 EG EFTS3K Right ALM1M1BEPK 1 Line 4 EG EFTS4K 2 make/2 break Right ALM2M2BEPK 2 Line or load 2, 3 JG FJTS3K Line or load 4 JG FJTS4K 1 Right AUX1A1BPK Number of Poles Frame Catalog Number 2A, 2B Right AUX2A2BPK 3 or 4 EG EIPBK 3 JG FJIPBK 4 JG FJIPBK4 3 or 4 LG IPB3 1 1 Flex Shaft Handles 120 Vac Left SNT120CPK 4 240 Vac Left SNT120CPK 4 1 Flex Shaft Handle Mechanisms Flexible Shaft Length in ft (m) Breaker Frame 4 (1.2) Catalog Number 7 (2.1) Catalog Number 12 Vdc Left SNT012CPK 24 Vdc Left SNT060CPK EG EHMFS04 EHMFS07 JHMFS04 JHMFS07 LHMFS04 LHMFS07 48 Vdc Left SNT060CPK JG 380-600 Vac Left SNT480CPK 5 LG 1 1 Left UVR120APK 208-240 Vac Left UVR240APK 24 Vac Left UVR024APK 24 Vdc Left UVR024DPK 48-60 Vdc Left UVR048DPK 12 Vac/Vdc Left UVR012CPK 48-60 Vac Left UVR048APK 120 Vdc Left UVR125DPK 220-250 Vdc Left UVR250DPK Frame 380-500 Vac Left UVR480APK Black Handle Color 525-600 Vac Left UVR600APK EG EHMCCBI EHMCCB JG JHMCCBI JHMCCB LG LHMCCBI LHMCCB Multiwire Connectors Ordering Information (Package of 3) High SCCR ratings are available for Power Distribution blocks with Series G MCCBs. See Tab 63. Maximum Amperes Wires per Terminal Wire Size Range AWG Cu Frame Kit Catalog Number 125 3 14-2 EG 3TA125E3K 125 6 14-6 EG 3TA125E6K 250 3 14-2 JG 3TA250FJ3 250 6 14-6 JG 3TA250FJ6 1 1 Undervoltage Release Mechanism 110-127 Vac 1 1 AUXALRMEPK 3 Shunt Trip--Standard 1 1 1A, 1B Right 1 1 Interphase Barriers (Package of 2) Auxiliary Switch -- Undervoltage Release Mechanism Frame IP30 Protection Catalog Number Make/break Auxiliary Switch/Alarm Lockout Shunt Trip Location Number of Poles 1 1 1 Universal Direct Handle Mechanism Universal Direct Handle Mechanisms With Interlock Catalog Number Without Interlock Catalog Number EHMCCRI EHMCCR JG JHMCCRI JHMCCR LG LHMCCRI LHMCCR 1 1 1 1 Red Handle Color EG 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Part number for JG and LG is ALM1M1BJPK. 2 Part number for JG and LG is ALM2M2BJPK. 3 Part number for JG and LG is AUXALRMJPK. 4 110-125 Vdc, 50/60 Hz. 5 380-600 Vdc, 50/60 Hz. 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-11 1.1 1 Rotary Handle Mechanisms 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers High Performance Rotary Handle Mechanisms (Complete Kit Includes Handle, Shaft and Mechanism) Color Rating Type UL IP EG Frame 1 Catalog Number JG Frame Catalog Number LG Frame Catalog Number Black/blue 1/12/3R 20/54/55 EGHMVD06B JGHMVD06B LGHMVD06B EGHMVD12B JGHMVD12B LGHMVD12B EGHMVD24B JGHMVD24B LGHMVD24B EGHMVD06R JGHMVD06R LGHMVD06R EGHMVD12R JGHMVD12R LGHMVD12R EGHMVD24R JGHMVD24R LGHMVD24R EGHMVD06BX JGHMVD06BX LGHMVD06BX EGHMVD12BX JGHMVD12BX LGHMVD12BX EGHMVD24BX JGHMVD24BX LGHMVD24BX EGHMVD06RX JGHMVD06RX LGHMVD06RX EGHMVD12RX JGHMVD12RX LGHMVD12RX EGHMVD24RX JGHMVD24RX LGHMVD24RX 1 1 Red/yellow 1/12/3R 20/54/55 1 Black/blue 1 1 Red/yellow 4/4X 4/4X 66 66 1 1 1 1 1 1 External Accessories 1 Description Fit Type Frame EG JG LG Non-padlockable handle block Field EFHB -- -- 1 Padlockable handle block Field EFPHB -- -- Padlockable handle block off-only Field EFPHBOFF FJPHBOFF LBHPOFF 1 Padlockable handle lock hasp Field EFPHL FJPHL LPHL Padlockable handle lock hasp off-only Field EFPHLOFF FJPHLOFF LPHLOFF Kirk key interlock kit 23 Field -- KYKJG KYKLG 1 Castell key interlock kit 34 Field -- CTKJG CTKLG Slide bar interlock 5 Field EFSBI FJSBI LGSBI 1 Walking beam interlock 1 Electrical operator 1 1 1 1 1 1 Three-pole EG3WBI JG3WBI LG3WBI Four-pole EG4WBI JG4WBI LG4WBI 120/240 Vac MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C 125 Vdc MOPEG240C MOPJG240C MOPLG240C Plug-in adapters Three-pole PAD3E PAD3J PAD3L Four-pole PAD4E PAD4J PAD4L Rear connecting studs Field EFRCSDL FJRCSDL 3P-LRCS3WK EFRCSDS FJRCSDS 4P-LRCS4WK EFRCSWL FJRCSWL -- EFRCSWS FJRCSWS -- Notes 1 Compatible with three-pole and four-pole EG breakers only. 2 Provision only. 3 See Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E, Tab 25, for bolt projection dimensions. 4 Castell bolt mounting hole must be 10 mm. 5 Requires two breakers. 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Features Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 Universal design for both NEMA(R) (UL 489) and IEC (IEC 947-2) standards Suitable for 50C application Factory-sealed thermal magnetic trip unit Standard interrupting ratings Includes mounting hardware and terminals 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers 1 Universal Molded Case 1 Gi 2 070 Frame Size Gi = Gi Frame Fi = Fi Frame Ji = Ji Frame Ki = Ki Frame Li = Li Frame 1 1 1 Number of Poles Gi Frame Fi Frame Ji Frame Ki Frame Li Frame 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 3 = Three-pole Gi Frame 015 = 15 amp 020 = 20 amp 030 = 30 amp 040 = 40 amp 050 = 50 amp 060 = 60 amp 070 = 70 amp 080 = 80 amp 100 = 100 amp 125 = 125 amp Fi Frame 015 = 15 amp 020 = 20 amp 030 = 30 amp 040 = 40 amp 050 = 50 amp 060 = 60 amp 070 = 70 amp 080 = 80 amp 100 = 100 amp 125 = 125 amp 150 = 150 amp 160 = 160 amp 175 = 175 amp 200 = 200 amp 225 = 225 amp Ampere Rating Ji Frame Ki Frame 250 = 250 amp 300 = 300 amp 350 = 350 amp 400 = 400 amp Li Frame 500 = 500 amp 600 = 600 amp 630 = 630 amp 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-13 1.1 1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection Universal Molded Case Circuit Breakers Three-Pole 1 Approximate Dimensions are in Inches 1 Universal G Frame 1 1 1 1 Universal J Frame Description Amperes Catalog Number 1 3 W x 4-7/8 H x 2-13/16 D (optional DIN-Rail kit available catalog number GDIN, package of ten) 15 Gi3015 20 Gi3020 25 Gi3025 Voltage Interrupting Rating Description 4-1/8 W x 10 H x 4-1/16 D Voltage Interrupting Rating 30 Gi3030 415 25/13K 380-415 18/5K 35 Gi3035 480 20K 480/277 14K 40 Gi3040 45 Gi3045 50 Gi3050 60 Gi3060 1 1 1 Universal F Frame 1 Description Amperes Catalog Number 1 4-1/8 W x 6 H x 3-3/8 D 15 Fi3015L 20 Fi3020L 1 5-1/2 W x 10-1/8 H x 4-1/16 D Voltage Interrupting Rating 415 25/13K 480 20K Voltage Interrupting Rating 30 Fi3030L 415 18/9K 35 Fi3035L 20K 40 Fi3040L 50 Fi3050L 1 60 Fi3060L 70 Fi3070L Description 1 80 Fi3080L 8-1/4 W x 10-3/4 H x 4.37 D 90 Fi3090L 100 Fi3100L Voltage Interrupting Rating 1 125 Fi3125L 415 25/13K 150 Fi3150L 480 20K 1 175 Fi3175L 200 Fi3200L 225 Fi3225L 1 1 480 1 1 225 Ji3225L 250 Ji3250L Amperes Catalog Number 1 300 Ki3300L 350 Ki3350L 400 Ki3400L Amperes Catalog Number 1 500 Li3500 600 Li3600 Universal L Frame Note 1 Metric mounting hardware. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-14 Catalog Number 1 Universal K Frame Description 1 Amperes Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Accessories 1 Internal Accessories Auxiliary Switch (Right-Pole Mounted) Bell Alarm (Right-Pole Mounted) Shunt Trip (Left-Pole Mounted) 1 UVR (Left-Pole Mounted) 1 1 Add This Suffix to Catalog Number Configuration Add This Suffix to Catalog Number 1NO/1NC A3 1 make/1 break B3 2NO/2NC A6 Configuration Voltage Range Add This Suffix to Catalog Number Voltage Range Add This Suffix to Catalog Number Universal G Frame If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add B13 to the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and bell alarm are 240V rated. 1NO/1NC A06 A13 1 make/1 break B06 If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add C05 to the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and bell alarm are 600V rated. 24 Vac S7 24 Vac 50/60 Hz T2 S1 48 Vac 50/60 Hz T3 240 Vac S2 60 Vac 50/60 Hz T4 12 Vdc S3 120 Vac 50/60 Hz T1 24 Vdc S4 240 Vac 50/60 Hz T8 220 Vac 50 Hz T7 440 Vac 50 Hz T11 480 Vac 60 Hz T12 1 1 1 1 1 1 12-24 Vac/Vdc S02 12 Vac U02 48-127 Vac or 48-60 Vdc S06 24 Vac U06 48 Vac/Vdc U38 208-380 Vac or 110-127 Vdc S10 110-127 Vac U14 208-240 Vac U18 415-600 Vac or 220-250 Vdc S14 380-480 Vac U22 525-600 Vac U26 12 Vdc U30 24 Vdc U34 125 Vdc U42 220-250 Vdc U46 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Universal J Frame 1NO/1NC A06 2 NO/2NC A13 1 make/1 break If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and bell alarm are 600V rated. B06 1 120 Vac Universal F Frame 2NO/2NC 1 12-24 Vac/Vdc S42 12 Vac U06 48-60 Vac/Vdc S50 24 Vac U10 110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc S10 48-60 Vac U14 110-127 Vac U18 380-440 Vac or 220-50 Vdc S14 208-240 Vac U22 380-480 Vac U26 480-600 Vac S18 12 Vdc T02 24 Vdc T06 48-60 Vdc T10 110-125 Vdc T14 220-250 Vdc T18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-15 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Internal Accessories, continued Auxiliary Switch (Right-Pole Mounted) Bell Alarm (Right-Pole Mounted) Shunt Trip (Left-Pole Mounted) UVR (Left-Pole Mounted) 1 1 1 Configuration Add This Suffix to Catalog Number Configuration Add This Suffix to Catalog Number 1 make/1 break B06 1 Universal K Frame 1 1NO/1NC A06 2NO/2NC A13 1 1 If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and bell alarm are 600V rated. 1 Voltage Range Add This Suffix to Catalog Number 12-24 Vac/Vdc S42 12 Vac U06 S50 24 Vac U10 110-240 Vac or 110-125 Vdc S10 48-60 Vac U14 110-127 Vac U18 380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc S14 208-240 Vac U22 380-480 Vac U26 480-600 Vac S18 12 Vdc T02 24 Vdc T06 48-60 Vdc T10 110-125 Vdc T14 220-250 Vdc T18 1 Universal L Frame 1 1NO/1NC A06 2NO/2NC A13 1 1 1 make/1 break If both an auxiliary switch and bell alarm are required, add CO5 to the catalog number (right-pole mounted). Auxiliary switch and bell alarm are 600V rated. 1 1 1 1 B06 12-24 Vac/Vdc S02 12 Vac U06 48-60 Vdc S06 24 Vac U10 48-60 Vac S86 48-60 Vac U14 110-240 Vac S10 110-127 Vac U18 110-125 Vdc S42 208-240 Vac U22 380-440 Vac or 220-250 Vdc S14 380-480 Vac U26 12 Vdc T02 480-600 Vac S18 24 Vdc T06 48-60 Vdc T10 110-125 Vdc T14 220-250 Vdc T18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-16 Add This Suffix to Catalog Number 48-60 Vac/Vdc 1 1 Voltage Range Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Handle Mechanisms 1.1 Handle Mechanisms 1 Type 1/12 Universal Rotary Ordering Information 1 Shaft Length in Inches (mm) Handle Color Complete Catalog Number Flange Flex Shaft Type 1, 3R, 12 Versions 6 (152.4) Black GHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F0S03C 12 (304.8) Black GHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F0S04C 6 (152.4) Red GHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F0S05C 12 (304.8) Red GHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F0S06C 6 (152.4) Black FHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F1S03C 12 (304.8) Black FHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F1S04C 6 (152.4) Red FHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F1S05C 12 (304.8) Red FHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F1S06C 1 1 Universal G Frame 1 1 1 Universal F Frame 1 1 1 7-ft length; order F1S07C 8-ft length; order F1S08C 1 9-ft length; order F1S09C 10-ft length; order F1S10C 1 1 Universal J Frame 6 (152.4) Black JHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F2S03C 12 (304.8) Black JHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F2S04C 6 (152.4) Red JHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F2S05C 12 (304.8) Red JHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F2S06C 1 1 7-ft length; order F2S07C 8-ft length; order F2S08C 1 9-ft length; order F2S09C 10-ft length; order F2S10C 1 1 Universal K Frame 6 (152.4) Black KHMVD06B 3-ft length; order F3S03C 12 (304.8) Black KHMVD12B 4-ft length; order F3S04C 6 (152.4) Red KHMVD06R 5-ft length; order F3S05C 12 (304.8) Red KHMVD12R 6-ft length; order F3S06C 1 1 7-ft length; order F3S07C 1 8-ft length; order F3S08C 9-ft length; order F3S09C 1 10-ft length; order F3S10C 1 Note 1 Only available as complete handle mechanism. Parts not sold separately. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-17 1.1 1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Terminals and Termination Accessory Devices Terminal/Termination Devices 1 1 Universal G Frame Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only) 15-20 A 25-100A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version 14-2 AWG Cu/Al 10-1/0 AWG Cu/Al 2.5-4 mm2 Cu/Al 4-50 mm2 Cu/Al (3) 14-2 AWG Order 3TA100G3K (6) 14-6 AWG Order 3TA100G6K 1 1 1 1 1 Universal F Frame 1 Terminals (Included with Breaker) 10-20A 25-100A 110-225A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version 1 14-10 AWG Cu/Al 14-1/0 AWG Cu/Al 4-4/0 AWG Cu/Al 2.5-4 mm2 Cu/Al 2.5-50 mm2 Cu/Al 25-95 mm2 Cu/Al (3) 14-2 AWG Order 3TA150F3K (6) 14-6 AWG Order 3TA150F6K 1 1 Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only) Universal J Frame 1 1 Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only) 70-250A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version 4-350 MCM AWG Cu/Al (3) 14-2 AWG Order 3TA250J3K (6) 14-6 AWG Order 3TA250J6K 25-150 mm2 Cu/Al 1 1 Universal K Frame Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only) 1 300-350A 400A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version 250-500 MCM AWG Cu/Al 3/0-200 (2) AWG Cu/Al 1 120-240 mm2 Cu/Al 95-120 mm2 Cu/Al (3) 12-2/0 AWG Order 3TA400K3K (6) 14-2/0 AWG Order 3TA400K6K 1 Universal L Frame 1 1 1 Terminals (Included with Breaker) Optional Multiwire Lugs (Load End Only) 500A 600A Three-Hole Version Six-Hole Version (2) 250-300 MCM Cu/Al (2) 400-500 MCM Cu/Al -- -- 120-150 mm2 Cu/Al 185-250 mm2 Cu/Al 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Features QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC 1 For Cable-In/Cable-Out Panel Mount Applications 1 Single-, two-, three- and four-pole options Built and listed to UL 489 All products UL and CSA listed All products 10-100A are HACR rated 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QC 1 Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers 1 1 QC 3 020 H Ampere Rating QC = QC breaker Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole 010 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 Ampere Rating = 10 amp 050 = 50 amp = 15 amp 055 = 55 amp = 20 amp 060 = 60 amp = 25 amp 070 = 70 amp = 30 amp 080 = 80 amp = 35 amp 090 = 90 amp = 40 amp 100 = 100 amp = 45 amp 1 Construction H = 240V (two-, threeand four-pole only) 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 QUICKLAG Type QC 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Note: For non-automatic switches, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E, Tab 24. Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Three-Pole, 240 Vac Catalog Number 10 QC1010 QC2010 -- 15 QC1015 12 QC2015 QC3015H 20 QC1020 12 QC2020 QC3020H 30 QC1030 QC2030 QC3030H 40 QC1040 QC2040 QC3040H 50 QC1050 QC2050 QC3050H 60 -- QC2060 QC3060H 70 -- QC2070 QC3070H 100 QC1100 QC2100 QC3100H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Switching duty rated for 120 Vac fluorescent light applications only. 2 For special low-magnetic breaker, order QC1015L1 or QC1020L1. 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-19 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QCD For Cable-In/Cable-Out DIN-Rail Mount HVAC Applications 1 1 1 1 Single-, two- and three-pole options Modular construction DIN mounted (symmetrical rail 35 in x 7.5 in DIN/EN 50 022) Flexible power feed connection: wire size, position Same breaker size for entire rating range Field-mountable accessories: finger-shroud proof, quick connect terminals, jumper units 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out Type QCD 1 QCD 3 020 H 1 Breaker Type QCD = QCD breaker 1 1 Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 1 1 1 1 010 015 020 025 030 035 040 045 Ampere Rating = 10 amp 050 = 50 amp = 15 amp 055 = 55 amp = 20 amp 060 = 60 amp = 25 amp 070 = 70 amp = 30 amp 080 = 80 amp = 35 amp 090 = 90 amp = 40 amp 100 = 100 amp = 45 amp Product Selection QUICKLAG Type QCD 10,000 Ampere I.C. Thermal-Magnetic Breakers 1 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Three-Pole, 240 Vac Catalog Number 1 10 QCD1010 QCD2010 -- 15 QCD1015 QCD2015 QCD3015H 1 20 QCD1020 QCD2020 QCD3020H 1 30 QCD1030 QCD2030 QCD3030H 40 QCD1040 QCD2040 QCD3040H 1 50 QCD1050 QCD2050 QCD3050H 60 QCD1060 QCD2060 QCD3060H 1 70 -- QCD2070 QCD3070H 100 -- QCD2100 QCD3100H 1 Construction H = 240V (two- and three-pole only) 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out 1/2-Inch Wide Types QCR, QCF 1 When Space is at a Premium QCR: For DIN-rail mount cable-in/cable-out applications QCF: For front-mount through-the-door cable-in/cable-out applications 1/2 in (12.7 mm) wide per pole Three-position handle: ON, tripped (center), OFF Thermal-magnetic protection Single-, two- and three-pole 10 kAIC at 120/240 Vac, 10-60A 10 kAIC at 240 Vac, 10-30A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out 1/2-Inch Wide Types QCR, QCF 1 QCR 1 020 T 1 Breaker Type QCR = QCD Breaker (rear mount) QCF = QCF Breaker (front mount) Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 010 015 020 025 = 10 amp = 15 amp = 20 amp = 25 amp Ampere Rating 030 = 30 amp 035 = 35 amp 040 = 40 amp 045 = 45 amp 050 = 50 amp 055 = 55 amp 060 = 60 amp Construction/Terminals H = 240V (two- and three-pole only) T = Ring or spade terminals (10-30A only) 1 1 1 Product Selection QUICKLAG Type QCR Breakers 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 1234 1 QUICKLAG Type QCF Breakers 10 kAIC Interrupting Ratings 123 Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Single-Pole 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Two-Pole 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Three-Pole 240 Vac Catalog Number Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Single-Pole 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Two-Pole 120/240 Vac Catalog Number Three-Pole 240 Vac Catalog Number 10 QCR1010 QCR2010 -- 10 QCF1010 QCF2010 -- QCR1010T QCR2010T -- QCF1010T QCF2010T -- QCR1015 5 QCR2015 QCR3015H QCF1015 5 QCF2015 QCF3015H QCR1015T 5 QCR2015T QCR3015HT -- -- QCF3015HT QCR1020 5 QCR2020 QCR3020H QCF1020 5 QCF2020 QCF3020H QCR1020T 5 QCR2020T QCR3020HT -- -- QCF3020HT 15 20 25 QCR1025 QCR2025 QCR3025H -- -- QCR3025HT 15 20 25 QCF1025 QCF2025 QCF3025H -- -- QCF3025HT QCR1030 QCR2030 QCR3030H -- -- QCR3030HT 35 QCR1035 QCR2035 -- 40 40 QCR1040 QCR2040 -- 50 QCF1050 QCF2050 -- 45 QCR1045 QCR2045 -- 60 6 QCF1060 QCF2060 -- 50 QCR1050 QCR2050 -- 55 QCR1055 -- -- 60 6 QCR1060 QCR2060 -- 30 30 QCF1030 QCF2030 QCF3030H -- -- QCF3030HT QCF1040 QCF2040 -- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 Standard breaker terminals are box type lugs. 2 Breakers with "T" catalog number suffix are suitable for line and load side ring terminal connection (#10-32 plus/minus terminal screw provided). 3 Breakers with "P" catalog number suffix are suitable for terminating two 10 AWG quick-connect type terminals per phase on breaker load side. 4 Breakers with shunt trip (extra pole required on breaker right-hand side) are available on single-, two- and three-pole. 5 All 15 and 20A single-pole breakers are SWD (switching duty) rated for fluorescent lighting applications. 6 60/75C Cu/Al wire on all ratings except 60A, which requires Cu only conductor. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-21 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Accessories Type QCR and QCF 1 Description Catalog Number 1 Steel mounting clip mounts QCR breaker if individual mounting is required. Quantity two required for single- and two-pole and four required for three-pole breakers. QCRMTGFT 1 Removable padlock device for single-pole QCR or QCF breaker. QCRFPL1P Removable padlock device for multi-pole QCR or QCF breaker. QCRFPLMP 1 Padlock bracket assembly for QCR or QCF single- or multi-pole breakers (OFF only). QCRFLOFF Padlock bracket for QCR, lock-off only. QCRPLOFF QUICKLAG Type C Spacer QUICKLAG Type C Spacer QCRSPACER QCR and QCF Ring or Spade Lug Terminals QCR and QCF ring or spade lug terminals (10-30A ratings only). Factory installed line and load side terminals each equipped with a #10-32 screw suitable for terminating one 10 AWG wire with insulated ring or spade type terminal as shown. Suffix "T" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Features QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers--Cable-In/Cable-Out 1/2-Inch Wide Types QCGF, QCGFEP 1 For Cable-In/Cable-Out Panel-Mount Applications QUICKLAG ground fault circuit breakers, Class A GFCI: Built and tested to UL 943 5 mA trip sensitivity QUICKLAG ground fault equipment protectors: Built and tested to UL 1053 30 mA trip sensitivity All products UL and CSA listed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 QUICKLAG Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers-- Cable-In/Cable-Out Ground Fault and Equipment Protector Types QCGF, QCGFEP 1 QCGFEP 1 020 Breaker Type QCGF = QC ground fault circuit protector QCGFEP = QC ground fault equipment protector Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 1 1 Ampere Rating 015 = 15 amp 030 = 30 amp 020 = 20 amp 040 = 40 amp 025 = 25 amp 050 = 50 amp 1 1 Product Selection 1 Types QCGF and QCGFEP Thermal-Magnetic Breakers Continuous Ampere Rating at 40C Single-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number 1 Two-Pole, 120/240 Vac Catalog Number 1 Ground Fault Circuit Breakers--5 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGF 10,000 Ampere I.C. 15 QCGF1015 QCGF2015 20 QCGF1020 QCGF2020 30 QCGF1030 QCGF2030 40 QCGF1040 QCGF2040 50 -- QCGF2050 1 1 1 1 Ground Fault Equipment Protectors--30 mA Sensitivity QUICKLAG Type: QCGFEP 10,000 Ampere I.C. 15 QCGFEP1015 QCGFEP2015 20 QCGFEP1020 QCGFEP2020 30 QCGFEP1030 QCGFEP2030 40 QCGFEP1040 QCGFEP2040 50 -- QCGFEP2050 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-23 1.1 1 Circuit Breakers Accessories Type QC Miniature Circuit Breakers 1 1 Circuit Protection Handle Locks 1 Accessory 1 Description Catalog Number Handle locks: Non-padlockable 2 QUICKLAG type P, B, C--single-pole QL1NPL QUICKLAG type P, B, C--two-, three-pole QL23NPL Handle locks: Padlockable QUICKLAG type P, B, C--single-pole QL1PL QUICKLAG type C--single-, two-, three-pole QC123PL QUICKLAG type C--single-, two-, three-pole (off only) QCD123PLOFF 1 1 1 1 1 Handle Tie Handle tie 1 QUICKLAG handle tie--single-pole QL1HT QUICKLAG handle tie--three-pole QL3HT 1 1 1 Hardware QUICKLAG type C face mounting clip QCFCLIP QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate--single-pole QC1FP QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate --two-pole QC2FP 1 QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate --three-pole QC3FP QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)--two-pole 3 QC2FPLOFF 1 QUICKLAG type C face mounting plate and lock-off (off only)--three-pole QC3FPLOFF QUICKLAG type C base mounting clamp QCBCLIP QUICKLAG base mounting plate--six poles total QC6BP QUICKLAG type C base mounting plate, six-poles total-- heavy-duty screw-secured QC6BPS QUICKLAG type C (QCD) two-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ2 QUICKLAG type C (QCD) four-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ4 1 QUICKLAG type C (QCD) six-way jumper unit with cover QCDJ6 QUICKLAG type C (QCD) two-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ2T 1 QUICKLAG type C (QCD) four-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ4T QUICKLAG type C (QCD) six-way jumper unit, no cover QCDJ6T QUICKLAG type QCD finger protection attachment QCDFP QUICKLAG type C DIN-rail adapter QCDINADAPT 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mounting hardware 1 1 Notes 1 See Page V9-T1-22 for QCR and QCF accessories. 2 Can lock in ON or OFF position. 3 Suitable for ground fault breakers. 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers UL 489 listed DIN-rail mounted miniature circuit breakers up to 40A current rating Current limiting design provides fast short circuit interruption that reduces let-through energy Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection available with C and D curve level of protection C curve--5-10X In--for medium inrush startup currents D curve--10-20X In--provides a magnetic range to allow for high inrush levels 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ring-tongue terminals available Complete line of accessories 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection WMZ UL 489 Miniature Circuit Breakers 1 WMZ UL 489 1 1 WMZ T 1 C 16 T Breaker Type WMZ = WMZ UL 489 circuit breaker Breaker Type T = 10 kAIC H = 14 kAIC D = 10 kAIC/DC Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole Protective Curve C = C curve (5-10X In) D = D curve (10-20X In) Ampere Rating X0 = 0.5A 10 = 10A 01 = 1A 13 = 13A X1 = 1.5A 15 = 15A 02 = 2A 16 = 16A 03 = 3A 20 = 20A 04 = 4A 25 = 25A 05 = 5A 30 = 30A 06 = 6A 32 = 32A 07 = 7A 40 = 40A 08 = 8A 1 Terminal T = Ring terminals 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-25 1.1 1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection WMZT UL 489 Circuit Breakers Ampere Rating C Curve (5-10X In Current Rating) Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole 1 Catalog Number D Curve (10-20X In Current Rating) Single-Pole 1 Two-Pole 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Three-Pole 1 Catalog Number 0.5 WMZT1CX0 WMZT2CX0 WMZT3CX0 WMZT1DX0 WMZT2DX0 WMZT3DX0 1 WMZT1C01 WMZT2C01 WMZT3C01 WMZT1D01 WMZT2D01 WMZT3D01 1 1.5 WMZT1CX1 WMZT2CX1 WMZT3CX1 WMZT1DX1 WMZT2DX1 WMZT3DX1 2 WMZT1C02 WMZT2C02 WMZT3C02 WMZT1D02 WMZT2D02 WMZT3D02 1 3 WMZT1C03 WMZT2C03 WMZT3C03 WMZT1D03 WMZT2D03 WMZT3D03 4 WMZT1C04 WMZT2C00 WMZT3C04 WMZT1D04 WMZT2D04 WMZT3D04 1 5 WMZT1C05 WMZT2C05 WMZT3C05 WMZT1D05 WMZT2D05 WMZT3D05 6 WMZT1C06 WMZT2C06 WMZT3C06 WMZT1D06 WMZT2D06 WMZT3D06 1 7 WMZT1C07 WMZT2C07 WMZT3C07 WMZT1D07 WMZT2D07 WMZT3D07 8 WMZT1C08 WMZT2C08 WMZT3C08 WMZT1D08 WMZT2D08 WMZT3D08 10 WMZT1C10 WMZT2C10 WMZT3C10 WMZT1D10 WMZT2D10 WMZT3D10 1 13 WMZT1C13 WMZT2C13 WMZT3C13 WMZT1D13 WMZT2D13 WMZT3D13 15 WMZT1C15 WMZT2C15 WMZT3C15 WMZT1D15 WMZT2D15 WMZT3D15 1 16 WMZT1C16 WMZT2C16 WMZT3C16 WMZT1D16 WMZT2D16 WMZT3D16 20 WMZT1C20 WMZT2C20 WMZT3C20 WMZT1D20 WMZT2D20 WMZT3D20 1 25 WMZT1C25 WMZT2C25 WMZT3C25 WMZT1D25 WMZT2D25 WMZT3D25 30 WMZT1C30 WMZT2C30 WMZT3C30 WMZT1D30 WMZT2D30 WMZT3D30 1 32 WMZT1C32 WMZT2C32 WMZT3C32 WMZT1D32 WMZT2D32 WMZT3D32 40 WMZT1C40 WMZT2C40 WMZT3C40 WMZT1D40 WMZT2D40 WMZT3D40 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 WMZH UL 489 Circuit Breakers--14 kAIC Amperes Single-Pole Catalog Number WMZD UL 489 Circuit Breakers--10 kAIC at 125 Vdc per Pole Two-Pole Catalog Number Three-Pole Catalog Number C Curve (5-10X In Current Rating) Amperes Single-Pole Catalog Number Two-Pole Catalog Number C Curve (5-10X In Current Rating) 15 WMZH1C15 WMZH2C15 WMZH3C15 2 WMZD1C02 WMZD2C02 1 16 WMZH1C16 WMZH2C16 WMZH3C16 3 WMZD1C03 WMZD2C03 20 WMZH1C20 WMZH2C20 WMZH3C20 4 WMZD1C04 WMZD2C04 1 25 WMZH1C25 WMZH2C25 WMZH3C25 5 WMZD1C05 WMZD2C05 6 WMZD1C06 WMZD2C06 1 13 WMZH1D13 WMZH2D13 WMZH3D13 7 WMZD1C07 WMZD2C07 15 WMZH1D15 WMZH2D15 WMZH3D15 8 WMZD1C08 WMZD2C08 16 WMZH1D16 WMZH2D16 WMZH3D16 10 WMZD1C10 WMZD2C10 20 WMZH1D20 WMZH2D20 WMZH3D20 13 WMZD1C13 WMZD2C13 15 WMZD1C15 WMZD2C15 16 WMZD1C16 WMZD2C16 20 WMZD1C20 WMZD2C20 25 WMZD1C25 WMZD2C25 30 WMZD1C30 WMZD2C30 32 WMZD1C32 WMZD2C32 40 WMZD1C40 WMZD2C40 1 1 1 1 1 D Curve (10-20X In Current Rating) WMZH UL 489 Circuit Breakers with Ring-Tongue Terminals Amperes Single-Pole Catalog Number Two-Pole Catalog Number Three-Pole Catalog Number C Curve (5-10X In Current Rating) 15 WMZH1C15T WMZH2C15T WMZH3C15T 1 16 WMZH1C16T WMZH2C16T WMZH3C16T 20 WMZH1C20T WMZH2C20T WMZH3C20T 1 25 WMZH1C25T WMZH2C25T WMZH3C25T 1 13 WMZH1D13T WMZH2D13T WMZH3D13T 15 WMZH1D15T WMZH2D15T WMZH3D15T 16 WMZH1D16T WMZH2D16T WMZH3D16T 20 WMZH1D20T WMZH2D20T WMZH3D20T 1 1 Note 1 For ring-tongue terminals, ADD suffix "T" to above catalog number. D Curve (10-20X In Current Rating) V9-T1-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Features WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers--Supplementary Protectors UL 1077 recognized DIN-rail mounted supplemental protectors up to 63A Current limiting design provides fast short circuit interruption that reduces let-through energy Thermal-magnetic overcurrent protection available with B, C and D curve levels of protection B curve--3-5X In--for maximum protection of control circuit wiring from low-level short circuit faults C curve--5-10X In--for medium inrush startup currents D curve--10-20X In--provides a magnetic range to allow for high inrush levels Ideal replacement for fuses that are applied as supplemental protection Complete line of accessories 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Catalog Number Selection WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers--Supplementary Protectors 1 WMZS UL 1077 Miniature Circuit Breakers 1 WMZS 1 B 10 Breaker Family WMZS = Supplementary protector Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole Protective Curve B = B curve (3-5X In) C = C curve (5-10X In) D = D curve (10-20X In) 1 00 = 0.5A 01 = 1A 02 = 2A 03 = 3A 04 = 4A Ampere Rating 05 = 5A 13 = 13A 06 = 6A 15 = 15A 07 = 7A 16 = 16A 08 = 8A 20 = 20A 10 = 10A 25 = 25A 1 30 = 30A 32 = 32A 40 = 40A 50 = 50A 63 = 63A 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 WMZS UL 1077 Supplementary Protectors Ampere Rating B Curve (3-5X In Current Rating) Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number C Curve (5-10X In Current Rating) Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number D Curve (10-20X In Current Rating) Single-Pole Two-Pole Three-Pole Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 0.5 -- -- -- WMZS1C00 WMZS2C00 WMZS3C00 WMZS1D00 WMZS2D00 WMZS3D00 1 -- -- -- WMZS1C01 WMZS2C01 WMZS3C01 WMZS1D01 WMZS2D01 WMZS3D01 2 -- -- -- WMZS1C02 WMZS2C02 WMZS3C02 WMZS1D02 WMZS2D02 WMZS3D02 3 -- -- -- WMZS1C03 WMZS2C03 WMZS3C03 WMZS1D03 WMZS2D03 WMZS3D03 4 -- -- -- WMZS1C04 WMZS2C04 WMZS3C04 WMZS1D04 WMZS2D04 WMZS3D04 5 -- -- -- WMZS1C05 WMZS2C05 WMZS3C05 WMZS1D05 WMZS2D05 WMZS3D05 6 WMZS1B06 WMZS2B06 WMZS3B06 WMZS1C06 WMZS2C06 WMZS3C06 WMZS1D06 WMZS2D06 WMZS3D06 7 WMZS1B07 WMZS2B07 WMZS3B07 WMZS1C07 WMZS2C07 WMZS3C07 WMZS1D07 WMZS2D07 WMZS3D07 8 WMZS1B08 WMZS2B08 WMZS3B08 WMZS1C08 WMZS2C08 WMZS3C08 WMZS1D08 WMZS2D08 WMZS3D08 10 WMZS1B10 WMZS2B10 WMZS3B10 WMZS1C10 WMZS2C10 WMZS3C10 WMZS1D10 WMZS2D10 WMZS3D10 13 WMZS1B13 WMZS2B13 WMZS3B13 WMZS1C13 WMZS2C13 WMZS3C13 WMZS1D13 WMZS2D13 WMZS3D13 15 WMZS1B15 WMZS2B15 WMZS3B15 WMZS1C15 WMZS2C15 WMZS3C15 WMZS1D15 WMZS2D15 WMZS3D15 16 WMZS1B16 WMZS2B16 WMZS3B16 WMZS1C16 WMZS2C16 WMZS3C16 WMZS1D16 WMZS2D16 WMZS3D16 20 WMZS1B20 WMZS2B20 WMZS3B20 WMZS1C20 WMZS2C20 WMZS3C20 WMZS1D20 WMZS2D20 WMZS3D20 25 WMZS1B25 WMZS2B25 WMZS3B25 WMZS1C25 WMZS2C25 WMZS3C25 WMZS1D25 WMZS2D25 WMZS3D25 30 WMZS1B30 WMZS2B30 WMZS3B30 WMZS1C30 WMZS2C30 WMZS3C30 WMZS1D30 WMZS2D30 WMZS3D30 32 WMZS1B32 WMZS2B32 WMZS3B32 WMZS1C32 WMZS2C32 WMZS3C32 WMZS1D32 WMZS2D32 WMZS3D32 40 WMZS1B40 WMZS2B40 WMZS3B40 WMZS1C40 WMZS2C40 WMZS3C40 WMZS1D40 WMZS2D40 WMZS3D40 50 WMZS1B50 WMZS2B50 WMZS3B50 WMZS1C50 WMZS2C50 WMZS3C50 -- -- -- 63 WMZS1B63 WMZS2B63 WMZS3B63 WMZS1C63 WMZS2C63 WMZS3C63 -- -- -- Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-27 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1 Accessories 1 WMZT UL 489 Description Catalog Number Description Rating Catalog Number 1 Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact/trip indicating contact WMZSAUXTRIP Auxiliary contact--1 NO/1 NC 230 Vac WMZSAUX Auxiliary contact WMZTAUX 230 Vac WMZSAUXTRIP Shunt trip 110-415 Vac WMZTST415 Two-pole contact or auxiliary contact/ trip indicating contact Shunt trip 12-110 Vac WMZTST110 1 1 1 1 1 1 WMZT UL 489 Undervoltage release WMZPLK Padlock hasp Busbar--single-pole 6 terminals Busbar--single-pole 12 terminals WMZT1P6T WMZT1P12T Busbar--single-pole 18 terminals WMZT1P18T Busbar--two-pole 6 terminals WMZT2P6T Busbar--two-pole 12 terminals WMZT2P12T Busbar--two-pole 18 terminals WMZT2P18T Busbar--three-pole 6 terminals WMZT3P6T Shunt trip 115 Vac WMZSUVR115 230 Vac WMZSUVR230 400 Vac WMZSUVR400 110-415 Vac WMZSST415 110-230 Vdc Shunt trip 12-110 Vac WMZSST110 12-60 Vdc Without Auxiliary Contacts Busbar--Single-pole 57 terminals 80A WMZS1P57T Busbar--Two-pole 56 terminals 80A WMZS2P56T Busbar--Three-pole 57 terminals 80A WMZS3P57T Busbar--Single-pole 57 terminals 100A WMZS1P57T25 Busbar--Two-pole 56 terminals 100A WMZS2P56T25 Busbar--Three-pole 57 terminals 100A WMZS3P57T25 Busbar-- Single-pole 37 terminals 80A WMZS1P37TAUX 1 Busbar-- Two-pole 46 terminals 80A WMZS2P46TAUX Busbar-- Three-pole 48 terminals 80A WMZS3P48TAUX 1 Busbar-- Single-pole 37 terminals 100A WMZS1P37T25AUX Busbar-- Two-pole 46 terminals 100A WMZS2P46T25AUX 1 Busbar-- Three-pole 48 terminals 100A WMZS3P48T25AUX Pin type incoming supply terminals 25 mm2 (~AWG 4) -- WMZSBCON Bus incoming supply terminals 50 mm2 (14-1 AWG) -- WMZS50EXT Busbar terminals cover -- WMZSBBTC Padlock hasp -- WMZPLK Fork connector--Two- and three-pole -- WMZS3CAP Fork connector--Single-pole -- WMZS1CAP 1 1 1 Busbar--three-pole 12 terminals Busbar--three-pole 18 terminals WMZT3P12T WMZT3P18T WMZT3PSHROUD Three-pole busbar shroud Extension terminal--35 mm (2-14 AWG) Bus connector--conductors up to 50 mm2 (~1/0 AWG) WMZT35EXT WMZTBCON Auxiliary/Trip Indicating Contacts 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-28 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Features Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers Rogowski coil does not saturate like iron core sensors, and one sensor accommodates 200-1600A range. Never change a sensor, and NO CTs are required Tension clamp secondary terminals--10A continuous rating at 600V meets UL/CSA/RoHS and UL-94 V0. Mounted directly to fixed breaker or drawout cassette they reduce wiring and provide clean, organized wiring schemes Breaker mounted communication modules for INCOMTM, Modbus(R) and PROFIBUS(R) mount directly to the cassette, reducing the space and room required for communication capability With the patent pending simple design of the fold-up cassette, all items in a cassette are replaceable without removing the cassette from the cell Plug-and-play accessories--no special tools needed. Accessories come with plug and wires ready to install 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Series NRXTM Low Voltage Power Breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-29 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1 Catalog Number Selection 1 Series NRX Power Breakers (Exclusionary Rules Apply) N S S6 08 3 W 52 8 A B A N 4 X N D X 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Breaker Frame Size N = Type NF, 630-1600A, (70 mm pole spacing) Standard, Mechanism, Device S = UL 1066, stored energy, power breaker X = UL 489, stored energy, insulated case breaker E = IEC 60947-2, stored energy, air breaker Frame Rating (Amperes) 12 = 1200 (UL only) 07 = 630 (IEC only) 13 = 1250 (IEC only) 08 = 800 16 = 1600 (On NF: IEC only) 10 = 1000 (IEC only) Poles, Phasing 3 = Three-pole, ABC 4 = Four-pole, NABC 1 Mounting Configuration W = Drawout B = Fixed mount rear connect, mounting bracket, with secondary terminal row R = Fixed mount rear connect, surface mount, with secondary terminal row T = Fixed mount front connect, surface mount, cable connect, with secondary terminal row F = Fixed mount front connect, mounting bracket, bus connect, with secondary terminal row S = Fixed mount front connect, surface mount, bus connect, with secondary terminal row 1 1 1 1 1 Trip Unit 1 52 53 5G 5H M2 M3 MA MB MG MH R2 1 1 1 1 R3 1 RA 1 RB RG 1 RH 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fault Current Rating S4 = 42 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC S5 = 50 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC S6 = 65 kA at 480 Vac UL or 415 Vac IEC 1 1 Future Use X = All product SW = 520 LSI, no ZSI = 520 LSI, with ZSI = 520 LSIG, no ZSI = 520 LSIG, with ZSI = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc = 520M LSI, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance SystemTM = 520M LSI, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System = 520M LSIA, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System = 520M LSIA, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System = 520M LSIG, no ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System = 520M LSIG, with ZSI, 24 Vdc, with Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System = Non-auto switch Drawout Breaker Shipping, Fixed Breaker Terminals, Door Frame Kit D = Drawout (or parent) breaker shipping alone, without door frame kit C = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, no terminals, with door frame kit K = Fixed breaker, no adapters, rear connector, with door frame kit, with mounting feet, with door frame kit A = Terminal adapters for rear connect, short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit E = Terminal adapters for rear connect, long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit F = Terminal adapters for rear connect, with mounting feet, short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit H = Terminal adapters for rear connect, with mounting feet, long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit 1 = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit 2 = Drawout breaker in cassette, no shutters, long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit 4 = Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters, short vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit 5 = Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters, long vertical/horizontal, with door frame kit 9 = Drawout breaker in cassette, with shutters, no terminals, with door frame kit Rating Plug (Amperes) = 200 7 = 630 = 250 8 = 800 = 300 A = 1000 = 400 B = 1200 = 500 C = 1250 = 600 D = 1600 Shunt Trip 1 N = No shunt trip A = 110-127 Vac/Vdc R = 208-240 Vac/Vdc L = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc Motor Operator 1 M = Manually operated B = 110-125 Vac W = 110-125 Vdc T = 208-250 Vac P = 220-250 Vdc L = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc Spring Release, Latch Check Switch 1 N = No spring release, no LCS A = 110-127 Vac/Vdc, no LCS R = 208-240 Vac/Vdc, no LCS UVR, Second Shunt Trip 1 N = None A = 110-125 Vac/Vdc UVR R = 220-250 Vac/Vdc UVR 1 = 110-127 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip 2 = 208-240 Vac/Vdc second shunt trip Padlock Provisions, Key Lock Provisions, Operations Counter 1 N = No PB covers, none, no counter N = X = Z = Auxiliary, Switches, Label Language 1 E = No auxiliary switches, no label (parent) 2 = 2 Form C, English 4 = 4 Form C, English M= Y = 1 = 2 = 3 = 4 = 5 = Trip Indicator and Bell Alarm/OTS, Secondary Terminal Blocks 1 No indicator, no OTS, secondary terminal blocks per breaker options Trip indicator provided, no OTS, secondary terminal blocks per breaker options Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, secondary terminal blocks per breaker options Interlock trip indicator provided, no OTS, secondary terminal blocks per breaker options Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, secondary terminal blocks per breaker options No indicator, no OTS, full complement secondary terminal blocks Trip indicator, no OTS, full complement secondary terminal blocks Trip indicator provided, 2 Form C OTS, full complement secondary terminal blocks Interlock trip indicator provided, no OTS, full complement secondary terminal blocks Interlock trip indicator provided, 2 Form C, full complement secondary terminal blocks Note 1 Contact Eaton for available voltages. Not all voltages are currently available. V9-T1-30 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection 1 Series NRX Cassettes 1 NX 12 3 F A B N S N N N C 1 Cassette Family and Breaker Frame NS = UL 1066 N Frame NX = UL 489 N Frame NE = IEC N Frame Cassette Shipping C = Cassette only B = Breaker shipped in cassette Arc Hood A = Arc hood installed (default) N B F C TOC Switches (Truck Operated Cell) N = Not included (default) Load Terminal Connections = With flat tapped pads only = With vertical/horizontal bus adapter kit (short style) = With front-connected kit = No cassette stabs (interunit only) 1 Future N = None Door Frame Gasket and Rejection Kits B = Door kit included (default), with rejection kit Poles and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three-pole ABC 4 = Four-pole NABC F G H N 1 Future N = None Continuous Ampere Range 08 = 800A (UL 1066) 12 = 800-1200A (UL 489) 16 = 630-1600A (IEC) 1 1 Secondary Contact Terminals Installed = None = Breaker defined, when breaker ships in cassette = Full complement = Common options when cassette ships alone Shutters N = Not included (default) S = Included 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection 1 Series NRX Low Voltage Power Breakers 1 Breaker Frame Industry Standard Fault Current Rating (kAIC) Frame Rating in Amperes Poles Mounting Trip Unit Rating Plug Part Number N UL 1066 42 800 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS4083W528 N UL 1066 42 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS4084B528 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS5083W528 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS5084B528 N UL 1066 50 800 3 Drawout N UL 1066 50 800 4 Fixed N UL 1066 65 800 3 Drawout N UL 1066 65 800 3 Fixed 1 1 2 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6083W528 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6083B528 N UL 1066 65 800 4 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084W528 N UL 1066 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084B528 N UL 489 42 800 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS4083W528 N UL 489 42 1200 4 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS4124W52B N UL 489 50 800 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS5083B528 N UL 489 50 1200 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS5124B528 N UL 489 65 800 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NXS6083W528 N UL 489 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NSS6084B528 N UL 489 65 1200 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS6123W52B N UL 489 65 1200 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1200 NXS6124B52B N IEC 42 630 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES4073W527 N IEC 42 1600 4 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES4164W52D N IEC 50 630 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES5073B527 N IEC 50 1600 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES5164B52D N IEC 65 630 3 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 630 NES6073W527 N IEC 65 800 4 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 800 NES6084B528 N IEC 65 1250 3 Fixed 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1250 NES6133B52C N IEC 65 1600 4 Drawout 1 520 LSI (No ZSI) 1600 NES6164W52D 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 See Page V9-T1-30 for cassette selection for drawout breakers. 2 See selection above for accessories in positions 12-20. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1 V9-T1-31 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers Features 1 1 1 1 1 1 Rated up to 6300A with interrupting ratings up to 200 kAIC and withstand ratings up to 100 kAIC Magnum(R) DS is UL 1066 listed for one-half second short-time withstand rating, and rated for 30 cycles. It is a switchgear class product to meet UL 1558 switchgear standards Magnum SB is a UL 1066 listed product with one-half second short-time withstand rating at three cycles to meet switchboard class product specifications, such as UL 891 Magnum DS MDDX is the highest interrupting performance in a non-current limiting breaker construction rated up to 200 kAIC with 100 kAIC short-time withstand The Magnum DS, Magnum SB and Magnum IEC lines all offer the smallest double narrow 4000A frame available 1 1 Magnum Low Voltage Power Breakers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-32 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Catalog Number Selection 1 Magnum ANSI/UL Low Voltage Power Breakers 1 MD S 4 12 3 V E A 06 MU A W C H N E H K L A X 1 Frame Use X = All breakers Breaker Type MD = Magnum DS SB = Magnum switchboard Frame Type S = Standard or double N = Narrow D = Double (MDDX only) Interrupting/ Withstand Rating 4 = 42 5 = 50 6 = 65 8 = 85 C = 100 E = 150 (DSE) X = 200 (DSX) L = 200 (DSL) Continuous Amperes and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 08 = 800 ABC 12 = 1200 ABC 16 = 1600 ABC 20 = 2000 ABC 25 = 2500 ABC 30 = 3000 ABC 32 = 3200 ABC or ABCABC 3N = 3200 AABBCC 4N = 4000 AABBCC 5N = 5000 AABBCC 6N = 6000 AABBCC 40 = 4000 ABCABC 50 = 5000 ABCABC 60 = 6000 ABCABC Poles and Neutral (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole, neutral left Mounting Configuration and Load Terminals H = Fixed horizontal V = Fixed vertical L = Drawout (MDN) W = Drawout (MDS) Nameplate Language E = English A = Spanish Current Limiter Selection A = Non-DSL H = MA800 (no limiter) K = MB1200 D = MA250 L = MB1600 E = MA300 M = MB2000 F = MA400 N = MD2500 G = MA600 P = MD3000 Sensor and Rating Plug Rating NN = None 13 = 1250 01 = 100 16 = 1600 02 = 200 20 = 2000 05 = 250 25 = 2500 03 = 300 30 = 3000 04 = 400 32 = 3200 06 = 600 40 = 4000 08 = 800 50 = 5000 10 = 1000 60 = 6000 12 = 1200 Breaker Shipping Options and Instructions A = Fixed breaker alone with door kit F = Fixed breaker alone without door kit A = Drawout breaker alone without door frame kit C = Drawout breaker in cassette (unwired) P = Drawout breaker in cassette (prewired) S = Drawout breaker in cassette (shutters) W = Drawout breaker in cassette (prewired and shutters) Double frame drawout breakers ship without cassette drawout. ACBs ship in narrow and universal cassettes only. Shunt Trip (ST) N = None A = 110-127 Vac/Vdc R = 208-240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc Trip Unit and Protection (and External Control Voltage When Required) NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit) 22 = 220 + LI 52 = 520 LSI 5G = 520 LSIG M2 = 520M LSI MT = 520M LSI (24/48 Vdc) MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac) MQ = 520M LSI (125 Vac) MG = 520M LSIG MH = 520M LSIG (24/48 Vdc) MM = 520M LSIG (120 Vac) MN = 520 LSIG (240 Vac) MX = 520M LSIG (125 Vac) ME = 520M LSIA (24/48 Vdc) MC = 520 LSIA (120 Vac) MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac) MZ = 520M LSIA (125 Vac) CT = 520MC LSI (24/48 Vdc) CU = 520MC LSI (120 Vac) CV = 520MC LSI (240 Vac) CQ = 520MC LSI (125 Vac) CH = 520MC LSIG (24/48 Vdc) CM = 520MC LSIG (120 Vac) CN = 520MC LSIG (240 Vac) CX = 520MC LSIG (125 Vac) CE = 520MC LSIA (24/48 Vdc) CC = 520MC LSIA (120 Vac) CF = 520MC LSIA (240 Vac) CY = 520MC LSIA (125 Vac) 1A = 1150 LSI (24/48 Vdc) 1C = 1150 LSI (120 Vac) 1E = 1150 LSI (240 Vac) 1Q = 1150 LSI (125 Vac) 1F = 1150 LSIG (24/48 Vdc) 1G = 1150 LSIG (120 Vac) 1H = 1150 LSIG (240 Vac) 1X = 1150 LSIG (125 Vac) 1J = 1150 LSIA (24/48 Vdc) 1K = 1150 LSIA (120 Vac) 1M = 1150 LSIA (240 Vac) 1Y = 1150 LSIA (125 Vac) Motor Operator M = Manual operated N = 110-125 Vac W = 110-125 Vdc T = 220-250 Vdc P = 220-240 Vac L = 24 Vdc K = 48 Vdc Spring Release Device (SRD) N = None A = 110-127 Vac/Vdc R = 208-240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc N A R C H E F J K 1 2 3 4 Undervoltage Release (UVR) or 2nd Shunt Trip (ST) = None = UVR (110-127 Vac) = UVR (208-240 Vac) = UVR (24 Vdc) = UVR (48 Vdc) = UVR (110-125 Vdc) = UVR (220-250 Vdc) = UVR (480 Vac) = UVR (600 Vac) = 2nd ST (110-127 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (208-240 Vac/Vdc) = 2nd ST (24 Vdc) = 2nd ST (48 Vdc) Auxiliary Switch N = None 2 = 2A/2B 4 = 4A/4B 6 = 6A/6B Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator OTS 2a/2b Trip Indicator E = No OTS No indicator N = No OTS With indicator Y = With OTS With indicator N= M= L = Y= C= D= Latch Check Switch/Trip Unit Metering Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit Latch Check 1150 Voltage Switch Connection None Upper terminals None Lower terminals LCS wired to SRD Upper terminals LCS wired to SRD Lower terminals LCS wired external Upper terminals LCS wired external Lower terminals 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 N K C R A Y L H Operations Counter and/or Keylock Provisions Keylock Counter Provisions = No counter No lock = No counter Kirk lock = No counter Castell lock = No counter Ronis lock = Counter No lock = Counter Kirk lock = Counter Castell lock = Counter Ronis lock Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons N = None M = Metal (block close and open) P = Plastic (block close and open) C = Metal (block close only) H = Plastic (block close only) S = Metal swbd lock-off (block close, depress open) Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-33 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Magnum ANSI/UL Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Cassettes M E 32 3 C A DN N NNN W C 1 1 Cassette Shipping CA = Cassette only BA = Breaker shipped in cassette Cassette Family M = Standard or double frame L = Narrow frame S = SB standard or double frame T = SB narrow frame 1 1 Future Use E = SB cassette (150 kAIC) N = Cassettes (up to 100 kA) L = MDSL cassettes (200 kA) X = MDSX cassettes (200 kA) D = MDDX breaker 1 1 1 Continuous Amperes 16 = Up to 1600A 20 = Up to 2000A 32 = 2500 to 3200A 40 = 4000A 50 = 5000A 1 1 1 Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole 1 Cassette Frame and Rear Terminals P = Basic cassette (without vertical bus stabs) C = Basic cassette with stabs (with vertical bus stab kit) H = Narrow frame cassette (with horizontal terminal pads) U = Universal cassette (with universal terminal pads) Cassette Wiring N = Unwired W = Cassettes wired Future Use NNN = All cassettes Shutters N = No shutters S = Shutters installed Arc Hood A = Arc hood installed Door Frame and Gasket Kit DN = Door frame and gasket kit included XN = Door frame and gasket kit not included 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-34 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers 1 MW I 4 08 3 H E A - 02 22 A M A A 2 E M K L A X Breaker Frame I = Standard or double N = Narrow K = Special 1100 Vac ACB Interrupting ICU 4 5 6 8 C 2 = 40 kA = 50 kA = 65 kA = 85 kA = 100 kA = 25 kA (1100 Vac MWK) Continuous Amperes and Phasing (Facing Front of Breaker) 08 = 800 ABC 10 = 1000 ABC 12 = 1250 ABC 16 = 1600 ABC 20 = 2000 ABC 25 = 2500 ABC 32 = 3200 ABC 4N = 4000 AABBCC 5N = 5000 AABBCC 6N = 6300 AABBCC 40 = 4000 ABCABC 50 = 5000 ABCABC 60 = 6300 ABCABC Poles and Neutral (Facing Front of Breaker) 3 = Three 4 = Four (neutral left) R = Four (reserved for neutral right) Sensor and Rating Plug Rating NN = None 13 = 1250 02 = 200 16 = 1600 05 = 250 20 = 2000 03 = 300 25 = 2500 04 = 400 30 = 3000 06 = 600 32 = 3200 07 = 630 40 = 4000 08 = 800 50 = 5000 10 = 1000 63 = 6300 12 = 1200 1 Future Use X = All ACBs Trip Unit Protection, (and External Control Voltage When Required) NN = Non-automatic (no trip unit) 22 = 220 LI 52 = 520 LSI 5W = 520i LSIG M2 = 520M LSI MT = 520M LSI (24-48 Vdc) MU = 520M LSI (120 Vac) MV = 520M LSI (240 Vac) MW = 520Mi LSIG MJ = 520Mi LSIG (24-48 Vdc) MK = 520Mi LSIG (120 Vac) ML = 520Mi LSIG (240 Vac) ME = 520M LSIA (24-48 Vdc) MC = 520M LSIA (120 Vac) MF = 520M LSIA (240 Vac) CT = 520MC LSI CU = 520MC LSI CV = 520MC LSI CE = 520MC LSIA CC = 520MC LSIA CF = 520MC LSIA CJ = 520MCi LSIG CK = 520MCi LSIG CL = 520MCi LSIG 1W = 1150i LSI (24-48 Vdc) 1N = 1150i LSI (120 Vac) 1P = 1150i LSI (240 Vac) 1R = 1150i LSIG/A (24-48 Vdc) 1S = 1150i LSIG/A (120 Vac) 1T = 1150i LSIG/A (240 Vac) Mounting Configuration and Load Terminals H = Fixed horizontal V = Fixed vertical L = Drawout horizontal Nameplate Language E = English A = Spanish 1 Auxiliary Switch N = None 2 = 2A/2B 4 = 4A/4B 6 = 6A/6B ACB Shipping Instructions A = Fixed ACB with door kit F = Fixed ACB without door kit A = D/O ACB only without door kit C = D/O ACB in cassette (unwired) P = D/O ACB in cassette (prewired) S = D/O ACB in cassette (shutters) W = D/O ACB in cassette (prewired and shutters) Double frame D/O ACBs ship without cassette Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) N = None A = 110-127 Vac R = 208-240 Vac C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc Motor Operator M = Manual operated N = 110-125 Vac W = 110-125 Vdc T = 220-250 Vdc P = 220-250 Vac L = 24 Vdc K = 48 Vdc Latch Checking Switch/Trip Unit Metering Voltage Connection for Digitrip 1150 Trip Unit Latch Check 1150 Voltage Switch Connection N = None Upper terminals M = None Lower terminals L = LCS wired to SRD Upper terminals Y = LCS wired to SRD Lower terminals C = LCS wired external Upper terminals D = LCS wired external Lower terminals Spring Release Device (SRD) N = None A = 110-127 Vac/Vdc R = 208-240 Vac/Vdc C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc Undervoltage Release (UVR) or 2nd Shunt Trip Attachment (STA) N = None A = 110-127 Vac R = 208-240 Vac C = 24 Vdc H = 48 Vdc E = 110-125 Vdc F = 220-250 Vdc G = 32 Vdc X = 380-415 Vac J = 480 Vac K = 600 Vac 1 = 2nd STA (110-127 Vac/Vdc) 2 = 2nd STA (208-250 Vac/Vdc) 3 = 2nd STA (24 Vdc) 4 = 2nd STA (48 Vdc) N K C R A T L H = = = = = = = = Operations Counter and/or Keylock Provisions Keylock Provisions Counter No counter No lock No counter Kirk lock No counter Castell lock No counter Ronis lock Counter No lock Counter Kirk lock Counter Castell lock Counter Ronis lock 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Padlock Provisions for Blocking Close and/or Open ACB Manual Pushbuttons N = None M = Metal (block close and open) P = Plastic (block close and open) C = Metal (block close only) H = Plastic (block close only) Bell Alarms Switch (OTS) with 2a/2b Contacts and/or Mechanical Trip Indicator OTS 2a/2b Trip Indicator E = No OTS No indicator N = No OTS With indicator Y = With OT With indicator 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-35 1.1 1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Magnum IEC Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker Cassettes E N 20 3 H A N N N N N N N C 1 1 Cassette Family E = Standard or double frame IEC (690 and 1100 Vac) N = Narrow frame IEC 1 1 Cassette Wiring C = Cassette only Cassette Wiring N = Unwired W = Cassette wired Future Use N = All cassettes 1 Door Frame and Gasket Kit X = Door frame and gasket kit included D = Door frame and gasket kit not included Continuous Amperes 20 = Up to 2000A 32 = 2500-3000A 40 = 4000A 63 = 5000-6300A 1 1 1 Future Use N = All cassettes Poles 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole 1 1 Future Use N = All cassettes Rear Terminals H = Horizontal stabs (upper and lower terminals) 1 1 Arc Hood A = Arc hood for 690 Vac K = Arc hood for 1100 Vac 1 1 Shutters N = No shutters S = Shutters installed Future Use N = All cassettes Future Use N = All cassettes 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-36 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.1 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection 1 Magnum DS Switchgear Class UL 1066 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers Frame Type Narrow Standard Narrow Standard Narrow Standard RMS Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Interrupting at 254 Vac Interrupting at 508 Vac Interrupting at 635 Vac 1 Short Time Current Rating Frame Amperes Breaker Type 2 800 MDN-408 42 42 42 42 50 50 50 50 MDN-508 65 65 65 65 MDN-608 100 100 65 20 42 42 42 42 65 65 65 65 MDS-608 85 85 85 85 MDS-808 100 100 100 85 MDS-C08 200 200 200 -- MDS-L08 3 200 200 4 30 MDS-X08 56 42 42 42 42 50 50 50 50 MDN-516 65 65 65 65 MDN-616 100 100 65 30 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 MDS-816 100 100 100 85 MDS-C16 200 200 200 -- MDS-L16 3 200 200 4 30 MDS-X16 5 65 65 65 65 100 100 65 35 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 MDS-820 100 100 100 85 MDS-C20 1 MDN-C08 800 1600 1 MDS-408 1 1 MDN-C16 1600 2000 MDS-616 1 1 MDS-620 1 200 200 -- MDS-L20 3 4 30 MDS-X20 5 65 65 65 65 85 85 85 85 MDS-832 100 100 100 85 MDS-C32 3200 200 200 50 3200 MDS-X32 85 85 4 85 4000 MDN-840 100 100 4 100 85 85 85 85 100 100 100 100 MDS-C40 200 200 4 50 MDS-X40 5 5 1 MDS-840 200 4 100 4000 MDD-X40 85 85 85 5000 MDS-850 100 100 100 100 MDS-C50 200 200 4 50 MDS-X50 57 200 200 4 100 MDD-X50 100 6000 MDS-C60 1 1 200 100 1 MDN-C40 4000 85 100 1 1 Double (N) 4 1 MDS-632 Double 200 1 MDN-C20 2000 200 100 1 MDN-620 200 200 1 1 200 100 1 MDN-416 4 Double 1 1 1 7 1 MDD-X60 Notes 1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short time current rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 See Page V9-T1-36 for selection of trip unit and accessories. See Page V9-T1-36 for cassette selection for drawout breakers. 3 Magnum MDSL current limiting power circuit breaker with integral current limiters. Current limiter selected determines short time and maximum instantaneous trip rating. Maximum voltage rating is 600 Vac. 4 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. 5 Magnum MDSX current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 6 Contact Eaton for availability. 7 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-37 1 1 1 1 1 1.1 1 1 Frame Type Narrow Standard 1 1 Narrow 1 1 1 Standard Narrow Interrupting at 508 Vac Interrupting at 635 Vac Short Time Current Rating Frame Amperes Breaker Type 2 800 SBN-508 50 50 35 20 65 65 42 20 SBN-608 100 100 65 20 SBN-C08 800 SBS-608 65 65 65 20 100 100 85 20 SBS-C08 200 150 2 30 SBS-E08 3 1200 SBN-512 50 50 35 25 65 65 42 25 100 100 65 25 65 65 65 25 100 100 85 25 SBS-C12 150 2 30 SBS-E12 3 SBN-612 SBN-C12 1200 SBN-516 50 50 35 30 65 42 30 100 100 65 30 65 65 65 30 100 100 85 30 SBS-C16 200 150 2 30 SBS-E16 3 65 65 65 35 100 100 65 35 65 65 65 35 100 100 85 35 SBS-C20 200 150 2 30 SBS-E20 3 65 65 65 45 100 100 85 45 SBS-C25 Double 200 150 2 50 SBS-E25 3 Standard 65 65 65 50 Standard 1 Narrow 1 Standard 1 1 1 1600 SBS-612 65 1 1 RMS Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 50/60 Hz 1 Interrupting at 254 Vac 200 1 1 Circuit Breakers Magnum SB Switchboard Class UL 1066 Insulated Case Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers 1 1 Circuit Protection SBN-616 SBN-C16 1600 2000 SBS-616 SBN-620 SBN-C20 2000 2500 3000 SBS-620 SBS-625 SBS-630 100 100 85 50 SBS-C30 Double 200 150 2 50 SBS-E30 3 Double (N) 85 85 3 85 100 100 3 100 SBN-C40 85 85 85 85 SBS-840 1 100 100 100 100 SBS-C40 200 150 2 50 1 85 85 85 85 100 100 100 100 SBS-C50 200 150 2 50 SBS-E50 34 100 100 100 100 1 1 Double 1 1 1 1 1 4000 SBS-E40 3 5000 6000 Notes 1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published short time current rating. These interruption ratings are based on the standard duty cycle consisting of an open operation, a 15-second interval and a close-open operation, in succession, with delayed tripping in case of short-delay devices. The standard duty cycle for short time ratings consists of maintaining the rated current for two periods of 1/2 seconds each, with a 15-second interval of zero current between the two periods. 2 Product to be tested. Contact Eaton for product rating. 3 Magnum SBSE current limiting power circuit breaker with fast opening contacts. 4 Breaker applied in a tested fan-cooled enclosure. 1 1 1 V9-T1-38 SBN-840 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com SBS-850 SBS-C60 4 Circuit Protection Circuit Breakers 1.1 Magnum IEC 60947-2 Rated Low Voltage Air Circuit Breakers rms Symmetrical Current Ratings kA 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800 Breaker Type 800 MWN-408 Narrow 40 40 40 40/-- -- MWN-508 Narrow 50 50 50 50/-- -- 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 Interrupting at 240 Vac ICU = ICS Available Current Sensor and Rating Plugs for Digitrip RMS Trip Unit (Establishes Breaker In Rating) Frame Amperes 1000 Frame Type Fixed Internal Inst. Trip Interrupting at 440 Vac ICU = ICS Interrupting at 690 Vac ICU = ICS Withstand Rating ICW 1-Sec/3-Sec MWN-608 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 -- MWI-608 Standard 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-808 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C08 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWN-410 Narrow 40 40 40 40/-- -- MWN-510 Narrow 50 50 50 50/-- -- MWN-610 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 -- MWI-610 Standard 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-810 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C10 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWN-412 Narrow 40 40 40 40/-- -- MWN-512 Narrow 50 50 50 50/-- -- MWN-612 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 -- MWI-612 Standard 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-812 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C12 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWN-516 Narrow 50 50 50 50/-- -- MWN-616 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 -- MWI-616 Standard 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-816 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C16 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWN-520 Narrow 50 50 50 50/30 -- MWN-620 Narrow 65 65 65 65/40 -- MWI-620 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 -- MWI-820 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C20 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWI-625 Standard 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-825 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C25 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWI-632 Standard 65 65 65 65/50 -- MWI-832 Standard 85 85 85 85/65 -- MWI-C32 Standard 100 100 85 85/65 85 MWI-64N Double 65 65 65 65/-- -- MWI-84N Double 85 85 85 85/-- -- MWI-C4N Double 100 100 100 100/-- -- 5000 MWI-85N Double 85 85 85 85/-- -- MWI-C5N Double 100 100 100 100/-- -- 6300 MWI-86N Double 85 85 85 85/-- -- MWI-C6N Double 100 100 100 100/-- -- 4000 1 1 1 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000 1 1 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250 1 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600 1 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000 1 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500 1 1 200, 250, 300, 400, 630, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500, 3200 1 1 2000, 2500, 3200, 4000 1 2500, 3200, 4000, 5000 1 3200, 4000, 5000, 6300 1 1 Note 1 Interrupting ratings shown based on breaker equipped with integral Digitrip RMS trip unit. Interruption ratings for non-automatic breakers are equal to the published breaker Icw rating. 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-39 1.2 1 1 Circuit Protection Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Product Overview Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description C350 Series Page V9-T1-41 Technical Data Number of poles Up to 3 Mounting 35 mm flat or 32 mm asymmetrical DIN rail (with optional adapter) Terminal ratings 600V, 30A Housing construction Thermoplastic UL 94VO flammability rating 1 Clip/terminal construction Tin-plated copper alloy Screw/pressure plate construction Zinc-plated steel 1 Dielectric strength 1200V Approvals 1 1 UL, CSA For our complete product offering, see Volume 4--Circuit Protection, CA08100005E. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-40 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.2 Circuit Protection Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders Features C350 Series Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 1 Space-saving design Rated 600V, 30A UL approved for motor loads 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Product Selection C350 Series 1 Fuse Blocks and Fuse Holders 1 250V Wire Termination Number of Poles 30A Catalog Number 600V Carton Qty. 60A Catalog Number Carton Qty. 30A Catalog Number Carton Qty. 60A Catalog Number Carton Qty. Class H Fuse Holders Single collar (box lug)--sized to ampere rating Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #10 max., Cu only Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and binding head screw, #10 max., Cu/Al Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #10 max., Cu only W231HA 10 W261HA 10 W631HA 10 W661HA 1 W232HA 5 W262HA 5 W632HA 5 W662HA 1 3 W233HA 5 W263HA 5 W633HA 1 W663HA 2 1 1 -- -- -- -- WM631F 10 -- -- 1 2 -- -- -- -- WM632F 8 -- -- 3 -- -- -- -- WM633F 6 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- WM631G 10 -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- WM632G 8 -- -- 3 -- -- -- -- WM633G 6 -- -- 1 WR231HA 10 -- -- WR631HA 10 -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- WR632HA 5 -- -- 3 WR233HA 5 WR263HA 1 WR633HA 5 WR663HA 5 1 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 2 -- -- -- -- WMR632F 1 -- -- 3 -- -- -- -- WMR633F 6 -- -- 1 -- -- -- -- WMR631G 10 -- -- 3 -- -- -- -- WMR633G 6 -- -- -- -- WRR633G 6 -- -- 3 -- -- 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Class R Fuse Holder, Type WRR Control Transformer Fuse Block Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and pressure plate screw, #14-#10 Cu only 1 1 Class R Fuse Holders Single collar (box lug)--sized to ampere rating 1 2 Class M Fuse Holders Combination of double quick-connect, 20A max., and binding head screw, #10 max., Cu/Al 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-41 1.3 1 1 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Open Rotary Disconnects Product Overview Rotary Disconnect Switch Selection Guide 1 1 1 1 Description 1 1 R9 Series Non-Fusible 30-100A Compact R9 Series Non-Fusible 100-1200A Page V9-T1-44 Page V9-T1-46 Page V9-T1-48 R5 Series (UL 508 listed) products are manually operated modular switches. Load break switching and isolation provide safety solutions for any low voltage circuit, particularly for machine and control circuits. The R5 Series products are manual motor controllers suitable as motor disconnect. The R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible 30-100A compact range ensures making or breaking on load and safety isolation for low voltage electrical circuits, particularly for machine control circuits up to 600V. The R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible 100-1200A are manually operated multipole load-break switches. Quick-make, quick-break design provides safety isolation for any low voltage circuit. UL 508 listed, Guide NLRV, File E165150 CSA C22.2 No.14, File 217736 IEC 60947-3, EN 60947-3 CCC UL 98, File E222859 CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 IEC 60947-3 EN 60947-3 UL 98, File E222859 CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 IEC 60947-3 EN 60947-3 R9 Series Fusible 30-800A R9 Series DC Rated Disconnects Manual Transfer Switches Page V9-T1-50 Page V9-T1-55 Page V9-T1-56 R9 Series (UL 98 listed) Fusible 30-800A manual operated multi-pole fusible disconnect switches use double break contacts per pole that ensure complete isolation of the fuse when the switch is in the OFF position. UL listed disconnect switches 600 Vdc for photovoltaic applications 100 to 400A R9 Series (UL 98 listed) non-fusible disconnects are heavy-duty manual transfer switches, they transfer load manually between two low voltage circuits and provide safety disconnection. Product Description 1 1 1 R5 Series Non-Fusible 16-80A Approvals 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Description 1 Product Description 1 1 When installed with fuses, they provide protection for low voltage electrical installations against short circuit and overload. 1 1 These switches are extremely durable and are tested and approved for use in the most demanding applications as resistive load or total system applications. Approvals UL 98, File E222859 for 30 to 800A ratings UL 489, File E305341 for H Frame switches CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 CSA 22.2 No. 5, File 217736, H Frame only IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1 IEC 60947-3, EN 60947-3 CE mark NFPA(R) 79 1 1 1 1 R9 Series (UL 98 listed) DC rated disconnects are manually operated multi-pole load break switches. They provide safety isolation for any low voltage circuit in a photovoltaic application. UL 98, cULus(R), File E222859 CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 1 IEC 60947-3 EN 60947-3 IEC 60-364-7-712 (Rules for the installations and sites special--photovoltaic applications) UL 98, cULus, File E222859 UL 1008 (2011) CSA 22.2 No. 4, File 217736 IEC 60947-3 EN 60947-3 Note 1 Q4 2010 1 V9-T1-42 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches 1.3 Catalog Number Selection 1 Disconnects 1 R5 A 3 016 U UL Listing R5 = UL 508 R9 = UL 98 R4 = UL 489 A B C V D E F G H I J K L M N = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = Frame Designation UL 508 (16-40A) UL 508 (60-80A) UL 98 Non-fusible (30-100A modular) UL 98 Non-fusible (60-100A visible blade) UL 98 Non-fusible (100-200A) UL 98 Non-fusible (400A) UL 98 Non-fusible (600A) UL 98 Non-fusible (800-1200A) UL 489 Fusible (30A compact) UL 98 Fusible (30A) UL 98 Fusible (30-60A) UL 98 Fusible (60-100A) UL 98 Fusible (200A) UL 98 Fusible (400A) UL 98 Fusible (600-800A) Phase 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole Ampere Rating 016 = 16A 025 = 25A 030 = 30A 040 = 40A 060 = 60A 080 = 80A 100 = 100A 200 = 200A 400 = 400A 600 = 600A 800 = 800A 1000 = 1000A 1200 = 1200A 1 Fuse Type Accepted CC = Class CC J = Class J L = Class L Blank = Non-fusible device 1 1 1 1 Protection U = Non-fusible F = Fusible 1 1 1 1 1 External Handles 1 SH B 00 4X F 1 Handle Type SH = Selector handle PH = Pistol handle Color B = Black/blue R = Red/yellow Size (Smallest to Largest) 00 = Size 00 0 = Size 0 1 = Size 1 2 = Size 2 3 = Size 3 4 = Size 4 NEMA Type Rating 12 = Type 1, 3R, 12 4X = Type 4, 4X Additional Features 1 T = Test position function Blank = No test function 1 1 1 Operation F = Front S = Right side Blank = Front or right side 1 1 1 Shafts SF 150 SH 5X5 Product Type SF = Shaft 1 1 Additional Features 2 55 90 150 200 320 400 500 Length = 55 mm = 90 mm = 150 mm = 200 mm = 320 mm = 400 mm = 500 mm Applicable Handle Type SH = Selector handle PH = Pistol handle Shaft Cross Section 5x5 = 5 mm x 5 mm 6x6 = 6 mm x 6 mm 10x10 = 10 mm x 10 mm 12x12 = 12 mm x 12 mm 15x12 = 15 mm x 12 mm 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 HV at the end of some catalog numbers indicates use with H and V switches only. Not all handles are designed to go with all disconnects. Consult specific section of the catalog for available options. 2 H at the end of some catalog numbers indicates use with H Frame switches only. Not all shafts are designed to go with all disconnects. Consult specific section of the catalog for available options. 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-43 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features R5 Series Non-Fusible 16-80A 1 1 1 Up to 65 kAIC short-circuit rating Direct or external operation Compact footprint DIN rail or base mount Wide range of accessories Modular design Padlockable design (direct, toggle and external handles) 1 1 1 1 1 R5 Series Non-Fusible 16-80A 1 6 1 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 4 2 1 1 3 1 1 1 Product Identification 1 2 3 1 4 1 6 5 External front handle Shaft extension for external handle Direct handle Auxiliary contacts Switched fourth-pole module Terminal shroud Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-44 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.3 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Product Selection 1 Direct Operation External Operation + Switch body + + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 1 External handle 1 R5 Series 1 1 1 Ampere Rating Three-Pole Toggle Switch Only 1 Three-Pole Rotary Switch Only Direct Handle 16 -- R5A3016U DHR5 25 -- R5A3025U 30 T5A3030U R5A3030U 40 T5A3040U R5A3040U 60 T5B3060U R5B3060U 80 T5B3080U R5B3080U 1 Front and Right External Handle SH00 (Choose One) Front and Right External Handle SH0 (Choose One) Three-Position Front External Handle SH00 (Black) 2 Shaft for SH0 and SH00--5 x 5 mm-- In (mm) SH00 Black 3R, 12 SHB00N12 SH0 Black 3R, 12 SHB0N12 SH00 4, 4X I-0-II Open transition SHB00MTSOT 2.20 (55.5) SF55SH5X5 3.50 (90.0) SF90SH5X5 SH00 Red 3R, 12 SHR00N12 SH0 Red 3R, 12 SHR0N12 1 5.90 (150.0) SF150SH5X5 1 SH00 Black 4, 4X SHB00N4X SH0 Black 4, 4X SHB0N4X SH00 4, 4X I-I+II-II Closed transition SHB00MTSCT 7.90 (200.0) SF200SH5X5 1 12.60 (320.0) SF320SH5X5 1 SH00 Red 4, 4X SHR00N4X SH0 Red 4, 4X SHR0N4X 1 1 1 1 1 Accessories 1 1 1 Ampere Rating Switched Fourth-Pole Module Unswitched Neutral Module Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) Terminal Shrouds Conversion Kit (Choose One) 2 Door Mounting Kit 3 16 S4PR516 UNMR5A S4PR525 1NO + 1NC AC1NON 1P TS1R5A 6/8 pole CKR568 DMK 25 30 S4PR530 3P TS3R5A Changeover switch Open transition I-0-II MTSCKR5OT 40 S4PR540 60 S4PR560 2 80 S4PR580 2 2NO AC2N UNMR5B 1P TS1R5B 3P TS3R5B 1 1 1 1 1 Changeover switch Closed transition I-I+II-II MTSCKR5CT 1 Notes 1 Toggle version includes direct handle. 2 Available Q2 2011. 3 Includes shaft and accessory cap. 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-45 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features Non-Fusible 30-100A Compact 1 1 Rating three-pole from 30A to 100A Direct or external operation handle (padlockable in ON position) Double breaking per phase Small footprint 1 1 1 1 1 1 R9 Series Non-Fusible 30-100A Compact 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 5 6 1 7 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 2 Product Identification 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Direct handle Door interlocked external handle Shaft extension Terminal shrouds Unswitched neutral pole Switch body Switched fourth-pole module Modular type auxiliary contacts Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device. 1 V9-T1-46 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches 1.3 Product Selection 1 Direct Operation External Operation + Switch body + + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 1 External handle 1 R9 Series 30-100A 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) Number of Poles Switch Body Only Direct Handle 30 (C Frame) 3 R9C3030U DHR9 60 (C Frame) 3 R9C3060U 100 (C Frame) 3 R9C3100U Front and Right External Handle SH00 (Choose One) Front and Right External Handle SH0 (Choose One) SH00 Black 3R, 12 SHB00N12 SH0 Black 3R, 12 SHB0N12 SH00 Red 3R, 12 SHR00N12 SH0 Red 3R, 12 SHR0N12 SH00 Black 4, 4X SHB00N4X SH0 Black 4, 4X SHB0N4X SH00 Red 4 4X SHR00N4X SH0 Red 4 4X SHR0N4X Shaft for SH0 and SH00 Handles-- In (mm) (Choose One) 2.20 (55.5) SF55SH5X5 3.50 (90.0) SF90SH5X5 1 Switched Fourth-Pole Module Unswitched Neutral Module Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) Terminal Shrouds (Choose One) S4PR930 Neutral UNMR9C 1NO + 1NC AC1NONC 1P TS1R9 2NO AC2N 3P TS3R9CV S4PR960 1 1 1 1 S4PR9100 5.91 (150.0) SF150SH5X5 1 7.87 (200.0) SF200SH5X5 1 12.60 (320.0) SF320SH5X5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-47 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features Non-Fusible 100-1200A 1 High thermal and dynamic withstand ratings Arduous categories of applications High electrical and mechanical endurances 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R9 Series Non-Fusible 100-1200A 1 4 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 Product Identification 1 2 1 1 3 4 External front handle Shaft extensions for external handle Configurable U-type ACs, for pre-break and signalling or TEST Terminal Screens Note: For further details, please see the installation instructions supplied with each device. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-48 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches 1.3 Product Selection 1 Direct Operation External Operation + Switch body + 1 + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 External handle 1 R9 Series Non-Fusible 100-1200A 1 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) Number of Poles Switch Body Only Direct Handle 100 (D Frame) 3 R9D3100U DHR9DE 4 R9D4100U 200 (D Frame) 400 (E Frame) 3 R9D3200U 4 R9D4200U 3 R9E3400U 4 R9E4400U Door Interlocked External Pistol Handle (Choose One) Size 2, Black 1, 3R, 12 Defeatable PHB2N12F Size 2, Red 1, 3R, 12 Defeatable PHR2N12F Size 2, Black 4, 4X Defeatable PHB2N4XF Terminal Screens (Choose One) Terminal Lugs 3 7.90 (200.0) SF200PH10X10 3-pole, Line side only TS3R9DT LK3R9DL 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH10X10 15.70 (400.0) SF400PH10X10 1NO + 1NC AC1N0NCDE AC1N0NCDELL 2NO + 2NC AC2N0NCDE AC2N0NCDELL 3 R9F3600U 4 R9F4600U 3 R9G3800U 4 R9G4800U 1000 (G Frame) 3 R9G31000U 4 R9G41000U 1200 (G Frame) 3 R9G31200U 4 R9G41200U 800 (G Frame) DHR9FG Size 3, Black 4, 4X Defeatable PHB3N4XF Size 3, Red 4, 4X Defeatable PHR3N4XF Size 4, Black 4, 4X Defeatable PHB4N4XF 3-pole, Load side only TS3R9DB 1 1 LK4R9DL LK3R9DL 1 LK4R9DL 4-pole, Line or load side TS4R9DTB 3-pole, Line side only TS3R9ET 19.70 (500.0) SF500PH10X10 Size 2, Red 4, 4X Defeatable PHR2N4XF 600 (F Frame) 1 Shaft Extensions for External Handle-- In (mm) Auxiliary (Choose One) Contacts 1 LK3R9EM 1 LK4R9EM 3-pole, Load side only TS3R9EB 1 4-pole, Line or load side TS4R9ETB 1 1 7.90 (200.0) SF200PH15X12 1NO AC U Type AC1N0R9 2 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH15X12 1NC AC U Type AC1NCR9 2 1 LK3R9FN TS4R9F 1 LK4R9FN TS3R9G 1 LK6R9G LK8R9G TS3R9F TS4R9G 1 1 1 1 1.70 (400.0) SF400PH15X12 1 19.7 (500.0) SF500PH15X12 1 1 Size 4, Red 4, 4X Defeatable PHR4N4XF 1 1 Notes 1 Top (line side) supplied as standard. 2 Auxiliary contact requires holder (catalog number ACHFG) when used on F and G Frame switches (non-fusible 600-1200A). 3 Each catalog number is for line or load side. For both line and load, please order two sets. 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-49 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features Fusible 30-800A 1 1 1 1 1 Load break functionality Double break contacts Up to 200 kA short-circuit rating with Class CC, J or L fuses Compact footprints Defeatable pistol handles automatically re-latch when the panel door is closed Front or right side operation NFPA 79 compliant kits Two-, three- and four-pole devices 1 1 1 1 1 R9 Series Fusible 30-800A R9 Fusible 30A/J-800A/L (I-N Frames)-- Direct and External Operation R9 Fusible 30A/CC and 30A/J (H Frame)-- Direct and External Operation 7 1 1 3 1 6 1 2 1 4 4 1 2 1 4 1 1 5 1 1 1 Product Identification 1 2 3 4 3 External front handles Direct handle Shaft extensions for external handles Configurable U Type ACs, for pre-break and signaling or TEST 1 Product Identification 1 1 2 1 3 4 1 5 6 7 1 External front handles External right side handle (not applicable for N Frame 600/800A) Direct handle Shaft extensions for external handles Configurable U Type ACs, for pre-break and signaling or TEST Side auxiliary contacts Terminal shrouds 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-50 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.3 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Product Selection 1 Direct Operation External Operation + Switch body + + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 1 External handle 1 Front and Right Side Operation 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) (Fuse Class) Number of Poles Switch Body Only Direct Handle 30 Compact (H Frame) (CC) 3 R4H3030FCC DHR9HC 30 (H Frame) (CC) 3 + switched neutral R4H3030FCCSN 30 Compact (H Frame) (J) 3 R4H3030FJ 30 (H Frame) (J) 3 + switched neutral DHR9HJ External Selector Handle (Choose One) Shaft Extension for Selector Handle Only (Choose One) Black 1,3R,12 SHB0N12HV Red 1,3R,12 SHR0N12HV External Front Pistol Handle External Right Side Pistol Handle 7.90 (200.0) SF200SH5X5H Black 1,3R,12 PHB1N12F -- 12.60 320.0) SF320SH5X5H Red 1,3R,12 PHR1N12F 15.70 (400.0) SF400SH5X5H Black 4,4X SHB0N4XHV R4H3030FJSN 30 (I Frame) (CC) 30 (J Frame) (J) 60 1 (J Frame) (J) 3 R9I3030FCC 4 R9I4030FCC 2 R9J2030FJ 3 R9J3030FJ 4 R9J4030FJ 2 R9J2060FJ 3 R9J3060FJ 4 R9J4060FJ DHR9J2M -- 1 1 1 1 Black 4,4X PHB1N4XF Red 4,4X SHR0N4XHV -- 1 1 Red 4,4X PHR1N4XF Black 4,4X (w/ TEST Position) PHB1N4XFT Red 4,4X (w/ TEST Position) PHR1N4XFT 1 1 1 Black 4, 4X PHB1N4XS 1 Red 4, 4X PHR1N4XS 1 1 Note 1 100 kA short-circuit rating. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-51 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Front and Right Side Operation, continued 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) (Fuse Class) Number of Poles Switch Body Only 30 Compact (H Frame) (CC) 3 R4H3030FCC 30 (H Frame) (CC) 3 + switched neutral R4H3030FCCSN 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH5X5 30 Compact (H Frame) (J) 3 R4H3030FJ 15.70 (400.0) SF400PH5X5 30 (H Frame) (J) 3 + switched neutral R4H3030FJSN 30 (I Frame) (CC) 3 R9I3030FCC 4 R9I4030FCC 2 R9J2030FJ 3 R9J3030FJ 4 R9J4030FJ 2 R9J2060FJ 3 R9J3060FJ 4 R9J4060FJ 30 (J Frame) (J) 60 1 (J Frame) (J) 1 7.90 (200.0) SF200PH5X5 7.90 (200.0) SF200PH10X10 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH10X10 15.70 (400.0) SF400PH10X10 19.70 (500.0) SF500PH10X10 NFPA79H Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) S Type Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) Terminal Shrouds 1 AC NO AC1NOR9 -- Integral to switch 1 AC NC AC1NCR NFPA79JKL 1 AC NO + NC AC1NO1NCJ2N 2 AC NO + NC AC2NO2NCJ2N 1 AC NO + NC w/ TEST AC1NO1NCJ2NT 2 AC NO + NC w/ TEST AC2NO2NCJ2NT 1 1 Shaft Extensions for Pistol Handle Only In (mm) NFPA (Choose One) 79 Kit Note 1 100 kA short-circuit rating. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-52 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches 1.3 Front and Right Side Operation, continued 1 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) (Fuse Class) 60 1 (K Frame) (J) 100 (K Frame) (J) 200 (L Frame) (J) 400 (M Frame) (J) Number of Poles Switch Body Only Direct Handle (Black) 2 R9K2060FJ DHR9J2M 3 R9K3060FJ 4 R9K4060FJ 2 R9K2100FJ 3 R9K3100FJ 4 R9K4100FJ 2 R9L2200FJ 3 R9L3200FJ 4 R9L4200FJ 3 R9M3400FJ 4 R9M4400FJ External Front Pistol Handle (Choose One) External Right Side Pistol Handle (Choose One) Black 1,3R,12 PHB2N12F Black 4, 4X PHB2N4XS Red 1,3R,12 PHR2N12F Red 4, 4X PHR2N4XS 1 1 1 1 1 Black 4,4X PHB2N4XF Red 4,4X PHR2N4XF 1 1 -- 1 Black 4,4X (w/ TEST Position) PHB2N4XFT 1 1 Red 4,4X (w/ TEST Position) PHR2N4XFT 600 (N Frame) (J) 800 (N Frame) (L) 2 R9N2600FJ 3 R9N3600FJ 4 R9N4600FJ 2 R9N2800FL 3 R9N3800FL 4 R9N4800FL DHR9N 1 Black 4, 4X PHB3N4XF 1 1 Red 4,4X PHR3N4XF 1 1 Note 1 200 kA short-circuit rating. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-53 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Front and Right Side Operation, continued 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ampere Rating (Frame) (Fuse Class) 2 R9K2060FJ 3 R9K3060FJ 4 R9K4060FJ 100 (K Frame) (J) 2 R9K2100FJ 3 R9K3100FJ 4 R9K4100FJ 2 R9L2200FJ 3 R9L3200FJ 200 (L Frame) (J) 1 1 1 4 R9L4200FJ 400 (M Frame) (J) 3 R9M3400FJ 4 R9M4400FJ 600 (N Frame) (J) 2 R9N2600FJ 3 R9N3600FJ 4 R9N4600FJ 800 (N Frame) (L) 2 R9N2800FL 1 1 1 3 R9N3800FL 4 R9N4800FL 1 Shaft Extensions for External Handle In (mm) (Choose One) 7.90 (200.0) Pistol SF200PH10X10 NFPA 79 Kit NFPA79JKL 12.60 (320.0) Pistol SF320PH10X10 15.70 (400.0) Pistol SF400PH10X10 Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) 1 AC NO AC1NOR9 1 AC NO + NC AC1NO1NCJ2N 1 AC NC AC1NCR9 2 AC NO + NC AC2NO2NCJ2N 1 AC NO + NC w/ TEST AC1NO1NCJ2NT 19.70 (500.0) Pistol SF500PH10X10 7.90 (200.0) Pistol SF200PH12X12 Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) 2 AC NO + NC w/ TEST AC2NO2NCJ2NT NFPA79N 1 AC NO + NC AC1NO1NCJ2N 2 AC NO + NC AC2NO2NCJ2N 15.70 (400.0) Pistol SF400PH12X12 Note 1 200 kA short-circuit rating. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-54 Terminal Shrouds Integral to switch TSR9L2 TSR9L3 TSR9L4 TSR9M3 TSR9M4 TSR9N2 TSR9N3 TSR9N4 12.60 (320.0) Pistol SF320PH12X12 19.70 (500.0) Pistol SF500PH12X12 1 1 Switch Body Only 60 1 (K Frame) (J) 1 1 Number of Poles Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com TSR9N2 TSR9N3 TSR9N4 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches 1.3 Features DC Rated Disconnects 1 Switching technology Up to 600 Vdc according to UL 98/CSA Up to 1000 Vdc according to IEC 947-3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R9 Series DC Rated Disconnects 1 Product Selection + Switch body + + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 1 External handle 1 Front Operation--Three- and Four-Pole 1 1 1 Ampere Number Switch Rating of Poles Body 100 200 3 R9D3100UDC 4 R9D4100UDC 3 R9D3200UDC 4 R9D4200UDC Direct Handle DHR9DE Shaft for External External Handle Handle Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) In (mm) (Choose One) (Choose One) S2 Type Black 1, 3R, 12 1 PHB2N12F Red/Yellow 1, 3R, 12 1 PHR2N12F 7.90 (200.0) SF200PH10X10 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH10X10 15.7 0 (400.0) SF400PH10X10 C Type 1st Contact NO+NC AC1NONCDE C Type 2nd Contact NO+NC AC2NONCDE Terminals Shroud Terminal Lugs 3P 2 TS3R9DT 3P 4 LK3R9DL 2 pieces DCJUMPD2 1 3P 3 TS3R9DB 4P 4 LK4R9DL 3 pieces DCJUMPD3 1 400 3 R9E3400UDC 4 R9E4400UDC 1 1 4P 4 TS4R9DTB 1 Black 4, 4X 1 PHB2N4XF Red/Yellow 4, 4X 1 PHR2N4XF 1 Jumpers for Connecting Poles in Series 1 3P 2 TS3R9ET 3 3P TS3R9EB 4 2 pieces DCJUMPE2 1 4 3 pieces DCJUMPE3 1 3P LK3R9EM 4P LK4R9EM 1 4P 4 TS4R9ETB 1 Notes 1 Defeatable handle. 2 Top (line side). 3 Bottom (load side). 4 Top or bottom (line or load side). 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-55 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features Manual Transfer Switches 1 1 Three load break positions (I, 0, II) On load switching Direct or external handle 480 Vac total system 600 Vac resistive load 1 1 1 1 1 1 Manual Transfer Switches 1 5 1 1 4 1 3 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 Product Identification 1 2 1 1 3 4 5 External front handle Direct handle Shaft extension for external handle Pre-break ACs (standard on 600-1200A) Terminal Screen 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-56 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.3 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Product Selection 1 Direct Operation External Operation + Switch body + + Direct handle Switch body + 1 + Shaft + 1 1 External handle 1 Manual Transfer Switches--UL 98 Standard 1 1 1 1 Ampere Rating Number Switch of Poles Body Only 1 100 3 RMTS3100U 4 RMTS4100U 3 RMTS3200U 4 RMTS4200U 200 400 3 RMTS3400U 4 RMTS4400U Direct Handle (Black) DHMTSSL External ThreePosition Handle (Choose One) Size 2, Black I-0-II Type 4/4X PHB2N4X3P Size 2, Red I-0-II Type 4/4X PHR2N4X3P Size 3, Black I-0-II Type 4/4X PHB3N4X3P Size 3, Red I-0-II Type 4/4X PHR3N4X3P 600 800 1200 3 RMTS3600U 4 RMTS4600U 3 RMTS3800U 4 RMTS4800U 3 RMTS31200U 4 RMTS41200U DHMTSDL DHMTSDLM Size 4, Black I-0-II Type 4/4X PHB4N4X3P Size 4, Red I-0-II Type 4/4X PHR4N4X3P 1 Shaft Extensions for External Handle In (mm) (Choose One) Bridging Bars Auxiliary Contacts Terminal Screens 2 7.90 (200.6) SF200PH10X10 3P BB3P200 NO/NC AC1NONCMTS400 3P TS3MTS200TB 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH10X10 4P BB4P200 4P Low level AC1NONCMTS400LL 3 TS4MTS200TB 1 15.70 (398.8) SF400PH10X10 1 1 1 1 7.90 (200.6) SF200PH15X12 3P BB3P400 3P TS3MTS400TB 1 12.60 (320.0) SF320PH15X12 4P BB4P400 4P TS4MTS400TB 1 1 15.70 (398.8) SF400PH15X12 3P BB3P600 NO/NC contact standard 1 3P TS3MTS600 4P BB4P600 4P TS4MTS600 3P BB3P1200 3P TS3MTS1200 4P BB4P1200 4P TS4MTS1200 1 1 1 1 Notes 1 All ratings, 100-1200A, are UL 98 listed. Switches are to be UL 1008 listed in 2011. 2 Line or load (top or bottom); for both line and load, order two kits. 3 Low level auxiliary contact--gold plated for minimal resistance--for PLC applications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-57 1.3 1 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Features Enclosed Rotary Disconnects 1 1 1 1 1 Padlockable in the OFF position (up to three padlocks) to meet OSHA lockout requirements Available in 16-80A ratings 600 Vac, three- and four-pole non-fusible device Rated for making and breaking loads Accepts auxiliary contacts; capability to signal PLC controllers Ground lug connection provided Possibility of adding one power pole and one auxiliary contact NEMA Type 1, 3R, 12, 4, 4X 65kAIC rating when applied downstream from appropriate fusing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Enclosed Rotary Disconnects Provide users with the ability to lock directly wired motor loads in the OFF position to comply with OSHA lockout/ tagout regulations. Also for machine applications that require compact, economical disconnect switches. 1 Enclosed rotary disconnect switches allow safe control and safe disconnect of any motor application. Open rotary disconnects can be found on Pages V9-T1-42 to V9-T1-57 and full information in Volume 5, Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 34. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 V9-T1-58 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 1.3 Circuit Protection Rotary Disconnect Switches Product Selection 1 1 Enclosed Rotary Non-Fusible NEMA 1 1 Enclosure Indoor NEMA 12 1 2 Enclosure Dust-Tight/ Rainproof NEMA 4X 1 Enclosure Corrosion-Resistant, Stainless Steel NEMA 4X 1 Enclosure Corrosion-Resistant, Non-Metallic NEMA 4X Enclosure PolycarbonateNon-Metallic Maximum Horsepower Ratings Ampere Rating Three-Phase AC 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 1 1 1 Three-Pole, 600 Vac 16 3 5 10 10 ER53016UG ER53016UD ER53016UW ER53016UX -- 25 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER53025UG ER53025UD ER53025UW ER53025UX -- 1 30 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER53030UG ER53030UD ER53030UW ER53030UX ER53030UPYR 34 40 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER53040UG ER53040UD ER53040UW ER53040UX -- 60 15 15 30 30 ER53060UG ER53060UD ER53060UW ER53060UX ER53060UPYR 34 80 15 20 40 40 ER53080UG ER53080UD ER53080UW ER53080UX -- 1 1 1 Four-Pole, 600 Vac 16 3 5 10 10 ER54016UG ER54016UD ER54016UW ER54016UX -- 25 7-1/2 7-1/2 15 20 ER54025UG ER54025UD ER54025UW ER54025UX -- 30 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER54030UG ER54030UD ER54030UW ER54030UX -- 40 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 ER54040UG ER54040UD ER54040UW ER54040UX -- 1 1 1 1 Accessories for Enclosed Rotary Disconnects 56 Disconnect Ampere Rating Switched Fourth Pole Unswitched Neutral Pole Auxiliary Contacts (Choose One) Terminal Shrouds 16 S4PR516 UNMR5A 25 S4PR525 1NO + 1NC AC1NONC Single-pole TS1R5A 30 S4PR530 40 S4PR540 2NC AC2NC Three-pole TS3R5A 7 60 S4PR560 80 S4PR580 7 UNMR5B 7 1 1 1 Single-pole TS1R5B 1 Three-pole TS3R5B 1 Notes 1 For CSA listed switches, add prefix letter "C" to the front of the catalog number. 2 NEMA Type 12 enclosures (16-80A) can be field modified to meet NEMA Type 3R rainproof requirements when a factory-provided drain hole is opened. 3 YR suffix indicates Yellow cover with Red handle. For Gray cover with Black handle, replace "YR" with "GB." For Gray cover with Red handle, replace "YR" with "GR." 4 cULus only. 5 Ordered and shipped as separate components--not integral to enclosed device. 6 Enclosed disconnects can accept one power pole, neutral or up to two auxiliary contacts (one mounted on either side of switch). 7 Available 2011. 1 1 1 1 Contact the Safety Switch Flex Center (1-888-329-9272) for factory-installed accessories or other special modifications. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T1-59 Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2.1 Contactors Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Definite Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT IEC Miniature Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT IEC Contactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 V9-T2-7 V9-T2-9 V9-T2-15 V9-T2-17 V9-T2-19 V9-T2-22 V9-T2-23 V9-T2-26 V9-T2-32 V9-T2-36 V9-T2-37 V9-T2-41 Soft Starters Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS7 Soft Start Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DS6 Soft Start Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S611 Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S801+ Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S811+ Soft Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft Starters V9-T2-5 Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers V9-T2-3 Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D65 Series Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D65C Series Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XT Electronic Overload Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays V9-T2-2 V9-T2-47 V9-T2-48 V9-T2-50 V9-T2-51 V9-T2-55 V9-T2-58 Drives Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Max Machinery Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVX9000 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T2-65 V9-T2-66 V9-T2-68 For our complete product offering, see Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E and Volume 6--Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100007E. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Drives 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-1 2.1 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Product Overview Contactors Selection Guide 2 2 2 2 2 Description 2 Type 2 Approvals 2 Definite Purpose Contactors XT IEC Miniature Contactors XT IEC Contactors Page V9-T2-3 Page V9-T2-7 Page V9-T2-9 Definite purpose IEC IEC UL(R) Recognized, CSA(R), CE, ARI, RoHS UL, IEC EN 60947, CE, CSA, RoHS UL, IEC EN 60947, CE, CSA, RoHS Technical Data 2 Pole configurations 1P, 2P, 3P, 4P 3P, 4P 3P, 4P Inductive Amp ratings To 360A To 8.8A (AC-3) To 1600A (AC-3) 2 Resistive Amp ratings To 360A To 20A (AC-1) To 3185A (AC-1) Typical electrical operations To 300,000 To 750,000 To 1,400,000 2 For our complete product offering, see Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2.1 Features Compact Definite Purpose Contactors 2 Insulation voltage: 690V Current rated and hp/kW rated Magnet coil: Class F, 155C Contact arc covers are standard on all contactors 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Selection Compact Definite Purpose Contactors--Open Type 2 Ampere Ratings 1 2 2 Resistive Locked Rotor 240-277V Catalog Number 2 30 40 150 C25ANB130_ 40 50 240 C25ANB140_ 2 2 Inductive Full Load 2 Single-Pole Single-Pole with Shunt 30 40 150 C25CNB130_ 40 50 240 C25CNB140_ 2 25 35 150 C25BNB225_ 2 30 40 150 C25BNB230_ 40 50 240 C25BNB240_ Two-Pole Magnet Coil Selection AC Coil Voltage 50/60 Hz Coil Suffix 24 T 110-120 A 208-240 B 2 2 Notes 1 Rating per pole. 2 Replace underscore (_) in catalog number with coil suffix letter from table at left. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-3 2.1 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Catalog Number Selection Definite Purpose Contactors Definite Purpose Contactors 2 C 25 D N A 2 15 A A 2 2 2 Model C = Contactor A = Three-phase starter B = Single-phase starter 2 Type 25 = Non-reversing contactors 27 = Non-reversing starters 29 = Non-reversing starters 65 = Reversing contactors 2 2 2 Contactor Frame Size A = Compact, single-pole B = Compact, two-pole C = Compact, single-pole w/shunt D = 15-50A, two- and three-pole E = 25-40A, four-pole F = 60-75A, two- and three-pole G = 90A, two- and three-pole H = 120A, two- and three-pole K = 200 and 300A, three-pole L = 360A, three-pole For Starters Only C = Common control wiring S = Separate control wiring 2 2 2 2 2 2 Enclosure Type N = Open with metal mounting plate R = Open with DIN rail mounting adapter (two- and three-pole, 15-50A contactors only) G = NEMA Type 1 Enclosed 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Auxiliary Contacts (Side Mount) A = 1NO pressure plate B = 1NC pressure plate C = 1NO-1NC pressure plate L = 1NO-1NC snap switch QC only M = 2NO-2NC snap switch QC only Coil Selection A = 110-120 Vac, 50/60 Hz R = 12 Vac, 50/60 Hz B = 208-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz T = 24 Vac, 50/60 Hz C = 440-480 Vac, 50/60 Hz 1R = 12 Vdc D = 550-600 Vac, 50/50 Hz 1T = 24 Vdc H = 277 Vac, 60 Hz 1W = 48 Vdc J = 220-240 Vac, 50/60 Hz 1A = 120 Vdc L = 380-415 Vac, 50 Hz Number of Poles 1 = Single-pole 2 = Two-pole 3 = Three-pole 4 = Four-pole 15 = 15A 25 = 25A 30 = 30A 40 = 40A Power Terminals A = Binding head screw B = Binding head screw and quick connect terminals (side-by-side) C = Screw/pressure plate 1 D = Screw/pressure plate and quick connect terminals (side-by-side) 1 E = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew) F = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew) and quick connect terminals (side-by-side) G = Binding head screw and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line) H = Screw/pressure plate and quick connect ZZ terminals (vertical in-line) 1 J = Box lugs (posidrive setscrew) and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line) K = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew) L = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew) and quick connect terminals (side-by-side) M = Box lugs (hex socket allen head setscrew) and quick connect terminals (vertical in-line) Note 1 Not available on 50A devices. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-4 Current Rating 50 = 50A 120 = 120A 60 = 60A 200 = 200A 75 = 75A 300 = 300A 90 = 90A 360 = 360A Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2.1 Features 50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors Contactors are dual-rated with inductive and resistive ratings, as well as horsepower and kilowatt ratings Contactors rated 15-50A are available with DIN rail mount as a factory installed option Magnet coil: Class B (C25E, F, G, H and K), 130C Ambient temperature: 150F (65C) maximum 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Selection 2 50 mm C25 Definite Purpose Contactors 2 C25 Contactors--Open Type Rating, Amperes Resistive Inductive Full Load per Pole 15 20 25 35 30 40 40 50 50 65 60 75 75 90 Line Voltage C25DND315_ C25DRD315_ 2 90 2 3 75 -- 5 575 60 -- 5 230 150 3 7-1/2 C25DND325_ 460 125 -- 10 C25END425_ 575 100 -- 10 230 180 5 10 C25DND330_ 460 150 -- 15 C25END430_ 575 120 -- 15 230 240 7-1/2 10 C25DNF340_ 460 200 -- 20 C25ENF440_ 575 160 -- 20 230 300 10 15 460 250 -- 30 575 200 -- 30 230 360 10 20 460 300 -- 40 575 240 -- 40 230 450 15 20 460 375 -- 50 575 300 -- 50 Coil Suffix 24 4 24 T 110-120 5 110-120 5 A 208-240 5 208-240 B AC 2 230 50 Hz 3 Maximum Motor Horsepower Single-Phase Three-Phase Open Type with DIN Rail Adapter Catalog Number 12 460 Magnet Coil Selection Voltage 60 Hz Locked Rotor Open Type with Metal Mounting Plate Catalog Number 12 Notes 1 Replace underscore (_) in catalog number with magnet coil suffix from table at left. 2 Carton quantities including 20 individually packaged units are available for two- and three-pole units through 60A inductive. 2 C25DRD325_ 2 2 C25DRD330_ 2 2 C25DRF3340_ 2 C25DNJ350_ C25DRJ350_ C25FNF360_ -- 2 2 2 C25FNF375_ 2 -- 2 2 3 4 5 Class H AC coils available as option for 15-50A contactor. Add 2 before AC coil suffix letter. Available through 120A. 104-120V 50/60 Hz for 60A, 75A and all four-pole contactors (25-40A). 6 Contactors with DC coils (only available up to 75A) include an early break NC auxiliary contact, C320KGD1. 2 2 2 DC 6 24 2 1T 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-5 2.1 2 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Reversing and Two-Speed Contactors--Open Type--Unwired, Mechanically Interlocked Only 2 Rating, Amperes Inductive Full Load Resistive per Pole 2 15 20 2 25 35 2 2 30 40 2 2 40 50 2 2 50 65 2 2 2 2 2 Magnet Coil Selection Voltage 60 Hz Coil Suffix 2 50 Hz 24 24 T 110-120 3 110-120 3 A 208-240 4 208-240 B Line Voltage Locked Rotor Maximum Motor Horsepower Open Type with Metal Mounting Plate Single-Phase Three-Phase Catalog Number 1 C65DND315_ 230 90 2 3 460 75 -- 5 575 60 -- 5 230 150 3 7-1/2 460 125 -- 10 575 100 -- 10 230 180 5 10 460 150 -- 15 15 575 120 -- 230 240 7-1/2 10 460 200 -- 20 575 160 -- 20 230 300 10 15 460 250 -- 30 575 200 -- 30 C65DND325_ C65DND330_ C65DNF340_ C65DNJ350_ Notes 1 Replace underscore (_) with magnet coil suffix from table at left. 2 Class H AC coils available as option for 15-50A contactor. Add 2 before AC coil suffix letter. 3 104-120V 50/60 Hz for 60A, 75A. 4 Available through 50A. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.1 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Features XT IEC Miniature Contactors 2 Reversing or non-reversing Three- and four-pole configurations Three-pole XTMC Four-pole XTMF Panel or DIN rail mounting IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof Direct mount with XTOM miniature overload relays 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection XT IEC Miniature Contactors 2 Miniature Contactors 2 2 XT MC 6 A 10 A Designation XT = XT IEC power control Type MC = Three-pole FVNR mini IEC contactor Current Rating, AC-3 XTMC 6 = 6.6A 9 = 8.8A Frame Size A = 45 mm mini Integral Auxiliary Contact 01 = 1NC 10 = 1NO A B T TD = = = = 2 Coil Codes 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz 24V 50/60 Hz 24 Vdc 2 2 2 Product Selection 2 Full Voltage Non-Reversing Miniature Contactors Operational Current AC-3 Amp Rating 380/400V Conventional Free Air Thermal Current AC-1 at 50C Maximum kW Ratings AC-3 Maximum Three-Phase Motor Ratings Three-Phase Motors, 50-60 Hz Single-Phase hp Ratings 220-240V 380-400V 550V 660/690V 115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V Number of Power Auxiliary Catalog Number-- Poles Contacts Screw Terminals 1 6.6 20 1.5 3 3 3 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 3 3 1NO XTMC6A10_ 6.6 20 1.5 3 3 3 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 3 3 1NC XTMC6A01_ 8.8 20 2.2 4 4 4 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 5 3 1NO XTMC9A10_ 8.8 20 2.2 4 4 4 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 5 3 1NC XTMC9A01_ 8.8 20 2.2 4 4 4 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 5 4 -- XTMF9A00_ Magnet Coil Suffix Coil Voltage Suffix Code 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B 24V 50/60 Hz T 24 Vdc TD 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D 208V 60 Hz E IEC Utilization Categories AC-1: Non-inductive or slightly inductive loads. AC-3: Squirrel cage motors-- starting, switching of motors during running. Three-Phase hp Ratings 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See table at left. 2 With DC operation: Integrated diode resistor combination, coil rating 2.6W. 2 2 2 2 AC-4: Squirrel cage motors-- starting, plugging, inching. 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-7 2.1 Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2 Accessories 2 Front Mount Auxiliary Contacts 1 2 2 Conventional Free Air Thermal Current, Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps Contact Contact Configuration Sequence Package Catalog Number-- Qty. Screw Terminals 10 1NO-1NC 5 XTMCXFA11 5 XTMCXFA22 5 XTMCXFA31 5 XTMCXFA40 53 61 54 62 2 10 2NO-2NC 2 2 2 10 3NO-1NC 53 61 71 83 54 62 72 84 53 61 73 83 54 62 74 84 10 4NO 2 53 63 73 83 54 64 74 84 2 2 XT IEC Miniature Contactors Package Qty. Catalog Number 2 Description Mechanical interlock 5 XTMCXML 2 Reversing link kit--main current wiring for reversing contactors and starters 1 XTMCXRL 2 2 Connector--for mechanically arranging contactors and timing relays in combinations 50 XTMCXCN 3 2 Notes 1 For two contactors with AC or DC operated magnet system that are horizontally or vertically mounted, the distance between contactors is 0 mm, and the mechanical lifespan is 2.5 x 106 operations. The following control cables are integrated as part of the electrical interlock: K1M: A1--K2M: 21; K1M: 21--K2M: A1. 2 Reversing link kit does not include mechanical interlock. 3 0 mm distance between contactors. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2.1 Features XT IEC Contactors Reversing or non-reversing contactors AC-3 contactor ratings to 1600A and AC-1 contactor ratings to 2000A Panel or DIN rail mounting to 65A IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof Built-in NO or NC auxiliary contacts to 32A Built-in surge suppression on DC coils XTCE Frame B-G and AC or DC coils on XTCE Frame L-R Can be used with XT or C396 overload relays Can be used with XTPR MMPs for manual motor controllers or UL508 Type F combination motor controllers 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection XT IEC Contactors 2 Contactors 2 2 XT CE 007 B 01 A 2 Designation XT = XT line of IEC control Coil Codes See Page V9-T2-12. Type CE = Three-pole FVNR IEC contactor CS = Three-pole FVNR S Series IEC contactor 007 = 7A 009 = 9A 012 = 12A 015 = 15A 018 = 18A 025 = 25A 032 = 32A 040 = 40A 050 = 50A 065 = 65A 072 = 72A 2 2 Built-In Auxiliary Contact 01 = 1NC 00 = 0NO-0NC 10 = 1NO 22 = 2NO-2NC Current Ratings, AC-3 080 = 80A 570 = 570A 095 = 95A 580 = 580A 115 = 115A 650 = 650A 150 = 150A 750 = 750A 170 = 170A 820 = 820A 185 = 185A C10 = 1000A 225 = 225A C14 = 1400A, AC-1 250 = 250A C16 = 1600A, AC-3 300 = 300A C20 = 2000A, AC-1 400 = 400A 500 = 500A 2 2 Frame Size Designation B = 45 mm L = 140 mm C = 45 mm M = 160 mm D = 55 mm N = 250 mm F = 90 mm P = 260 mm G = 90 mm R = 515 mm H = 140 mm 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-9 2.1 2 2 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Product Selection Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors, Frames B-G UL/CSA Ratings UL General Purpose Amp Rating IEC Ratings Single-Phase hp Ratings Three-Phase hp Ratings 115V 200V 230V 200V 230V 460V 575V AC-3 Ie (A) AC-1 (40C) Ie = Ith (A) Maximum kW Ratings AC-3 Three-Phase Motors 50-60 Hz 220/230V 380/400V 415V Auxiliary 660/690V Contacts Catalog Number-- Screw Terminals 12 Frame B 2 20 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7 22 2.2 3 4 3.5 1NO XTCE007B10_ 20 1/4 3/4 1 1-1/2 2 3 5 7 22 2.2 3 4 3.5 1NC XTCE007B01_ 2 20 1/2 1 1-1/2 3 3 5 7-1/2 9 22 2.5 4 5.5 4.5 1NO XTCE009B10_ 20 1/2 1 1-1/2 3 3 5 7-1/2 9 22 2.5 4 5.5 4.5 1NC XTCE009B01_ 2 20 1 2 2 3 3 10 3 10 12 22 3.5 5.5 7 6.5 1NO XTCE012B10_ 3 20 1 2 2 3 3 10 10 12 22 3.5 5.5 7 6.5 1NC XTCE012B01_ 20 1 2 3 5 5 10 3 10 15.5 22 4 7.5 8 7 1NO XTCE015B10_ 2 20 1 2 3 5 5 10 3 10 15.5 22 4 7.5 8 7 1NC XTCE015B01_ 2 40 2 2 3 5 5 10 3 15 18 40 5 7.5 10 11 1NO XTCE018C10_ 40 2 2 3 5 5 10 3 15 18 40 5 7.5 10 11 1NC XTCE018C01_ 40 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 45 7.5 11 14.5 14 1NO XTCE025C10_ 2 40 2 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 20 25 45 7.5 11 14.5 14 1NC XTCE025C01_ 40 3 5 5 10 10 20 25 32 45 10 15 18 17 1NO XTCE032C10_ 2 40 3 5 5 10 10 20 25 32 45 10 15 18 17 1NC XTCE032C01_ 63 3 5 7-1/2 10 15 30 40 40 60 12.5 18.5 24 23 -- XTCE040D00_ 80 3 7-1/2 10 15 20 40 50 50 80 15.5 22 30 30 -- XTCE050D00_ 88 5 10 15 20 25 50 60 65 98 20 30 39 35 -- XTCE065D00_ 2 88 5 10 15 20 25 50 60 72 98 22 37 41 35 -- XTCE072D00_ 2 125 7-1/2 15 15 25 30 60 75 80 110 25 37 48 63 -- XTCE080F00_ 125 7-1/2 15 15 25 40 75 75 95 130 30 45 57 75 -- XTCE095F00_ 2 Frame G 160 10 25 25 40 50 100 100 115 160 37 55 70 90 -- XTCE115G00_ 180 10 25 30 40 60 125 125 150 190 48 75 91 96 -- XTCE150G00_ 225 4 10 25 30 40 60 125 125 170 225 52 90 100 96 -- XTCE170G00_ 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Frame C Frame D Frame F Notes The 7-32A XTCE contactors have positively driven contacts between the integrated auxiliary contact and the auxiliary contact module as well as within the auxiliary contact modules. The 40-65A XTCE contactors have positively driven contacts within the auxiliary contact module. Six auxiliary contacts are possible with a combination of side mounted and front mount auxiliary contacts. DC operated contactors (Frames B-G, 7-150A) have a built-in suppressor circuit. Frames B-C contactors with 1NC built-in auxiliary are mirror contacts (XTCE...B01_-XTCE...C01_). 1 2 2 2 2 3 4 Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-12. For spring cage terminals, insert C after the fourth digit of the catalog number. Example: XTCE C 007B10A. For 7-12A XTCEC contactors, the power, auxiliary and coil terminals are spring cage. For 18-32A XTCEC contactors, the auxiliary and coil terminals are spring cage. For 40-150A XTCEC contactors, the coil terminals only are spring cage. For electrical life contactor application data, see Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E, Tab 27. For 180-225A, use 2 x 3/0 AWG wire. 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-10 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.1 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors, Frames H-R UL/CSA Ratings UL General Purpose Amp Rating 2 IEC Ratings Three-Phase hp Ratings 200V 230V 460V 575V AC-3 Ie (A) AC-1 (40C) Ie = Ith (A) Maximum kW Ratings AC-3 Three-Phase Motors 50-60 Hz 220/230V 380/400V 415V 660/690V 1 1000V 1 Auxiliary Contacts Catalog Number 2 2 Frame H--Electronic Coil 250 50 60 125 150 185 337 55 90 -- 140 108 2NO-2NC XTCE185H22_ 250 60 75 150 200 225 386 70 110 -- 215 108 2NO-2NC XTCE225H22_ 2 2 2 Frame L--Standard Coil (110/120V, 230/240 Vac Coil Only) 300 75 100 200 250 250 429 75 132 148 240 108 2NO-2NC XTCS250L22_ 350 100 125 250 300 300 490 90 160 -- 195 132 2NO-2NC XTCS300L22_ 2 2 Frame L--Electronic Coil 300 75 100 200 250 250 429 75 132 148 240 108 2NO-2NC XTCE250L22_ 350 100 125 250 300 300 490 90 160 -- 195 132 2NO-2NC XTCE300L22_ 2 Frame M--Standard Coil (110/120V, 230/240 Vac Coil Only) 450 125 150 300 400 400 612 125 200 240 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCS400M22_ 550 150 200 400 500 500 857 155 250 300 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCS500M22_ 2 2 Frame M--Electronic Coil 450 125 150 300 400 400 612 125 200 240 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCE400M22_ 550 150 200 400 500 500 857 155 250 300 344 132 2NO-2NC XTCE500M22_ 2 Frame N--Electronic Coil 2 630 200 200 400 600 580 980 185 315 348 560 600 2NO-2NC XTCE580N22_ 3 700 200 250 500 600 650 1041 205 355 390 630 600 2NO-2NC XTCE650N22_ 3 800 250 300 600 700 750 1102 240 400 455 720 800 2NO-2NC XTCE750N22_ 3 850 290 350 700 860 820 1225 260 450 500 750 800 2NO-2NC XTCE820N22_ 3 1100 350 420 850 980 1000 1225 315 560 610 1000 1000 2NO-2NC XTCEC10N22_ 3 2 -- -- -- 1714 -- -- -- -- -- 2NO-2NC XTCEC14P22_ 3 2 1200 1300 1600 2200 500 900 900 1600 1700 2NO-2NC XTCEC16R22_ 3 2 2NO-2NC 3 Frame P--Electronic Coil 1400 -- -- Frame R--Electronic Coil 1600 2000 560 -- 640 -- -- -- -- 2450 -- Contactor Application Data Catalog Prefix Electrical Life (Operations) for 10 hp, 480V (14.2A) Applications XTCE012B 1 million XTCE015B 1.2 million XTCE018C 2 million -- -- -- -- XTCEC20R22_ Full Voltage Non-Reversing Three-Pole Contactors-- Contact Sequence (Circuit Symbols), Standard Offering Contactor Frame Auxiliary Contacts B-C 1NO Contact Sequence A2 2 4 6 14 1NC A1 1 3 5 21 D-G -- A1 1 3 5 Notes AC and DC operated contactors have a built-in suppressor circuit (Frames L-R, 185-2000A). 1 2 3 2 2 2 2 A2 2 4 6 2NO-2NC 2 2 A2 2 4 6 22 L-R 2 2 A1 1 3 5 13 B-C 2 A1 1 3 5 13 21 31 43 2 A2 2 4 6 14 22 32 44 2 For 185-500A contactors at 660/690V or 1000V: Do not reverse directly. Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-12. When operating the 580-2000A XTCE contactors with frequency inverters, the suppressor on the load side must be removed. The load side suppressor must also be removed when performing a high-voltage test--see Pub51204, Pub51209. 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-11 2.1 2 Motor Control and Protection Contactors Magnet Coil Suffix Coil Voltage Suffix Code Coil Voltage Suffix Code 2 Frames B-F 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A 100-120V 50/60 Hz A 2 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B 190-240V 50/60 Hz B 24V 50/60 Hz T 480-500V 50/60 Hz C 24 Vdc TD 24-27 Vdc TD 2 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C Frames L-M, S-Series 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D 110-120V 50/60 Hz A 2 208V 60 Hz E 220-240V 50/60 Hz B 2 100-120V 50/60 Hz A 110-250V 40-60 Hz/DC A 2 190-240V 50/60 Hz B 250-500V 40-60 Hz C 24V 50/60 Hz T 24-48 Vdc TD 2 24-27 Vdc TD Frames P-R 480-500V 50/60 Hz C 220-250V 50-60 Hz/DC 2 Frame H Frame G Frame N B 2 2 XTCR Reversing Contactor Components Qty. Frame B C D F G 2 Contactor XTCE...B01_ XTCE...B01_ XTCE...D00_ XTCE...F00_ XTCE...G00_ 2 2 Auxiliary contact XTCEXFAC20 XTCEXFAC20 XTCEXFBG11 XTCEXFBG11 XTCEXFBG11 1 Mechanical interlock XTCEXMLB XTCEXMLC XTCEXMLD XTCEXMLG XTCEXMLG 2 1 Reversing link kit XTCEXRLB XTCEXRLC XTCEXRLD XTCEXRLG XTCEXRLG 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Contactors 2.1 Accessories 2 Auxiliary Contacts--Frames B-G Conventional Thermal Current, Open at 60C Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps Poles Frames B-C Contact Configuration 2 Circuit Symbol Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number-- Screw Terminals 2 5 XTCEXFAC20 2 5 XTCEXFAC11 5 XTCEXFAC40 5 XTCEXFAC22 Frames B-C--Front (Top) Mount 1 16 2 2NO 16 2 1NO-1NC 53 63 2 54 64 53 61 2 54 62 16 4 4NO 16 4 2NO-2NC 53 6373 83 2 54 6474 84 5361 71 83 2 2 54 62 72 84 Frame B Frame B--Side Mount 12 16 1 1NO 53 1 2 XTCEXSAB10 2 2 54 16 1 1NC 51 1 2 XTCEXSAB01 2 52 Frame C 2 Frame C--Side Mount 1 10 2 1NO-1NC 13 23 33 43 1 2 XTCEXSCC11 1 14 24 34 44 Frames D-G 2 2 Frames D-G 3 16 2 2NO 13 23 16 2 1NO-1NC 13 21 16 4 4NO-0NC 13 23 33 43 5 XTCEXFBG20 5 XTCEXFBG11 5 XTCEXFBG40 5 XTCEXFBG22 2 14 24 2 2 14 22 2 14 24 34 44 16 4 2NO-2NC 13 21 31 43 2 14 22 32 44 2 Notes Interlocked opposing contacts, to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively driven), within the auxiliary contact modules (not NO [early make] and NC [late break] contacts) and for the built-in auxiliary contacts of the XTCE007_-XTCE032_ Auxiliary break contact can be used as mirror contact to IEC/EN 60947-4-1 Annex F (not NC [late break] contact). No auxiliary contacts can be fitted between two contactors. 1 2 3 2 2 Frames B-C cannot use both a side AND a top mount auxiliary contact at the same time. Can be mounted to the left side of contactor only. Cannot be used in combination with front (top) mount auxiliary contacts or mechanical interlocks. For Frame D, six auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units). 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-13 2.1 Contactors Side Mount Auxiliary Contacts--Frames D-R, 40-2000A 2 Conventional Free Air Thermal Current, Ith = Ie, AC-1 in Amps 2 Poles Contact Configuration Circuit Symbol 2 1NO-1NC 13 14 13 14 Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number-- Screw Terminals 1 XTCEXSBN11 1 XTCEXSBR11 Frame D-R 12 43 22 44 21 32 43 22 31 2 21 31 10 44 Frames D-R 32 2 Motor Control and Protection 2 2 Frames H-R (Screw Mount) 2 Frames H-R 10 2 1NO-1NC 2 2 2 Mechanical Interlock 3 2 2 For Use with ... Package Qty. Catalog Number XTCEXMLB XTCE007B-XTCE015B, XTCF020B 5 XTCEXMLB XTCEXMLC XTCE018C-XTCE032C 1 XTCEXMLC 2 2 2 XTCF032C-XTCF045C 2 XTCF063D-XTCF080D 1 XTCEXMLD XTCE080F-XTCE170G 1 XTCEXMLG 4 XTCE185H-XTCE570M 1 XTCEXMLM XTCE580N-XTCEC10N 1 XTCEXMLN 4 XTCE500M-XTCE570M with XTCE500N-XTCEC10N 1 XTCEXMLNM 4 For Use with ... Package Qty. Catalog Number 2 XTCE007B-XTCE015B 1 XTCEXRLB 5 XTCE018C-XTCE032C 1 XTCEXRLC 2 XTCE040D-XTCE065D 1 XTCEXRLD XTCE080F-XTCE150G 1 XTCEXRLG XTCE040D-XTCE072D 2 2 XTCF125G-XTCF200G XTCEXMLM 2 2 2 2 2 Reversing Link Kits Reversing Link Kits 2 2 Notes 1 For Frame D, six auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units). 2 For Frames F-R, eight auxiliary contacts maximum (can be a combination of side and top mount units). 3 For two contactors with AC or DC operated magnet system which are horizontally or vertically mounted. For B-G frames, mechanical lifespan is 2.5 x 106 operations and the distance between contactors is 0 mm. For L-N frames, mechanical lifespan is 5 x 106 operations and no auxiliary contact can be mounted between the mechanical interlock and the contactor--the distance between contactors is 15 mm. 4 XTCEXMLG, XTCEXMLN and XTCEXMLNM consist of an interlock element and mounting plate. 5 Also includes interlocking bridge (XTCEXLBB). The following control cables are integrated for electrical interlock: K1M: A1-K2M: 21; K1M: 21-K2M: A1; K1M: A2-K2M: A2. 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-14 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Product Overview 2 Monitoring Relays Selection Guide 2 2 2 2 Description 2 D65 Series D65C Series Page V9-T2-17 Page V9-T2-19 2 cULus, CE RoHS, cURus, cULus, CE 2 Various combinations of protection available Compact cases for easy mounting LED indicators for quick troubleshooting Monitors AC single-phase currents from 0.1-10 A External CT can be used to extend ranges LED indicates output relay status Choice of fixed or user-adjustable settings Configuration SPDT or DPDT -- Maximum allowable load 10A Less than 5 VA Approvals Features 2 2 2 Contact Data 2 Material -- -- Resistance -- -- Dielectric strength 2000V -- 2 AC 24-480 Vac -- 2 DC 24-120 Vdc -- VA (Vac) 5 VA -- Watts (Vdc) -- -- 2 Coil Data 2 Power 2 2 General Data Ambient temperature Operational Maximum pick-up Maximum release -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C) <= 500 milliseconds <= 500 milliseconds 2 -20 to 131F (-28 to 55C) Overcurrent: Adjustable throughout current range monitored Undercurrent: Fixed at 5% above adjustable drop-out setting 2 2 Overcurrent: Fixed at 95% of pick-up setting for D65CE; adjustable from 50-95% of pick-up setting for D65CEK Undercurrent: Adjustable throughout current range monitored 2 2 Life Mechanical operations 10 million 10 million Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 2 2 For our complete product offering, see Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E. 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-15 2.2 2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Overload Relays Selection Guide 2 2 2 Description XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays XT Electronic Overload Relays Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays Page V9-T2-22 Page V9-T2-23 Page V9-T2-26 Page V9-T2-32 2 Relay type Thermal bi-metal Thermal bi-metal Electronic Electronic FLA range 0.1-12A 0.1-630A 0.1-1500A 1-540A 2 FLA max.:min. ratio Approx. 1.5:1 Approx. 1.5:1 5:1 18:1 and 9:1 Trip class 10 10 Selectable 10A/10/20/30 5-30, stepped by 1's 2 Reset type Selectable manual/automatic Selectable manual/automatic Selectable manual/automatic/remote Selectable manual/automatic/remote 2 Direct connect to XT contactor Yes, XTMC Yes, XTCE Yes, XTCE -- Direct connect to DP contactor -- -- Yes -- 2 Standalone mounting -- Panel or DIN Panel or DIN Panel Thermal overload protection Yes Yes Yes Yes, programmable 2 Jam -- -- -- Yes, programmable Current unbalance protection -- -- Yes, selectable Yes, programmable 2 Single-phasing -- -- Yes, fixed level Yes, fixed on or off Ground fault -- -- Yes, fixed Yes, programmable Phase reversal -- -- -- Yes, programmable 2 Undercurrent -- -- -- Yes, programmable Overcurrent -- -- -- -- 2 Low power/high power -- -- -- Yes, programmable Overvoltage/undervoltage -- -- -- Yes, programmable 2 Voltage unbalance -- -- -- Yes, programmable 2 Current per phase and average rms -- -- -- Yes Current unbalance percent -- -- Yes Yes 2 Ground fault current -- -- Yes Yes Voltage per phase and average rms -- -- -- Yes 2 Voltage unbalance percent -- -- -- Yes Power/power factor -- -- -- Yes 2 2 2 Thermal capacity -- -- Yes Yes 2 Frequency -- -- Yes Yes Motor run hours -- -- -- Yes 2 Motor starts count -- -- -- Yes Time to restart after fault -- -- -- Yes 2 Overload status -- -- Yes Yes Programmable reset timers/attempts -- -- -- Yes Programmable trip delays -- -- -- Yes Programmable auxiliary contact -- -- -- Yes (120 Vac control-power version) Communications with I/O -- -- Yes Yes (Modbus(R) RTU, DeviceNetTM, PROFIBUS(R), (Modbus RTU, DeviceNet, PROFIBUS, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP) Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP) Remote display -- -- -- Yes (NEMA 1, 12, and 3R) Lockable user interface or tamperproof -- -- Yes Yes Alarm no-trip mode -- -- -- Yes, for GF and line faults Diagnostics -- -- -- Yes, 10 fault queue 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 For our complete product offering, see Volume 5--Motor Control and Protection, CA08100006E. V9-T2-16 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Catalog Number Selection 2 D65 Series Monitoring Relays 2 D65 Series 2 D65 VML S 120 2 Type D65 = D65 Series VML PLR VMC PAR Function = Full-featured voltage/phase monitor = Phase loss/reversal = Phase reversal = Phase loss/reverse/undervoltage Monitoring S = Surface mount P or blank = Plug-in octal 120 = 120V 208 = 208V 240 = 240V 2 Voltage 400 = 400V 480 = 240-480V 600 = 600V 2 2 2 D65 Series Full-Featured Voltage/Phase Monitor 2 Features Full-featured voltage/phase monitoring relays Undervoltage, overvoltage, phase imbalance, phase loss (single-phasing), phase reversal Universal voltage range of 208-480V provides the flexibility to cover a variety of applications; 120V and 600V units also available Automatic or manual reset after the fault condition is corrected 2 User-adjustable settings include nominal voltage, percent phase imbalance, undervoltage drop-out, time delay on undervoltage and time delay on restart after fault 2 2 2 2 Product Selection D65VML_ 2 D65VML Series Style Operating Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number Surface-mount (DIN rail or panel) 120V D65VMLS120 208-480V D65VMLS480 600V D65VMLS600 120V D65VMLP120 208-480V D65VMLP480 1 8-pin socket -- D3PA2 2 8-pin IP20 rated socket -- D3PA6 Plug-in (DIN rail) 2 2 2 2 2 2 D65 Series Phase Reversal Monitoring Relays 2 Features Protects against phase reversal One version works on 208-480V three-phase systems 2 10A SPDT output contacts 2 2 Product Selection D65VMC_ D65VMC Series Style Nominal Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number Plug-in 120V D65VMC120 208-480V D65VMC480 1 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Requires a 600V rated socket when used on system voltages greater than 300V. 2 The D3PA2 socket is rated 10A, 600V. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V9-T2-17 2.2 2 2 2 Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays D65 Series Phase Loss and Reversal Monitoring Relays Features 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Protects against phase loss and phase reversal LED indicates both normal and fault conditions 10A SPDT output contacts Product Selection D65PLR Series D65PLR_ 2 Style Nominal Voltage, 50/60 Hz Catalog Number Plug-in 120V D65PLR120 208V D65PLR208 240V D65PLR240 400V D65PLR400 1 480V D65PLR480 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 D65 Series Phase Loss, Reversal and Undervoltage Features Protects against phase loss, phase reversal and undervoltage 2 Product Selection 2 D65PAR_ 2 2 2 2 Undervoltage setting is adjustable from 75-95% of nominal LED indicates both normal and fault conditions 10A SPDT output contacts D65PAR Series Style Nominal Voltage, 60 Hz Undervoltage Range Catalog Number Plug-in 120V 90-115V D65PAR120 208V 156-198V D65PAR208 240V 180-230V D65PAR240 400V 300-380V D65PAR400 1 480V 360-460V D65PAR480 1 Note 1 Requires a 600V rated socket when used on system voltages greater than 300V. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Catalog Number Selection 2 D65C Series Monitoring Relays 2 D65C Series 2 D65C E K 2 C10 T 2 Type D65C = Current monitors Function E = Standard H = Overcurrent L = Undercurrent Drop-Out Setting K = Adjustable Blank = Fixed Number of Poles 1 = 1 PDT 2 = 2 PDT Current Range C01 = 0.1-1A C5 = 0.5-5A C10 = 1-10A Voltage T = 24 Vac A = 120 Vac 2 2 2 2 2 D65CE Standard Current Monitoring Relays Features Monitors AC single-phase currents 2 Three separate current monitoring ranges covering 0.1-10 amperes External CT can be used to extend ranges Fixed 100 ms pick-up and drop-out time delay 2 2 Product Selection D65CE_ 2 D65CE Series Pick-Up Setting Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage Current Range Monitored Catalog Number 24 Vac 0.1-1A D65CE1C01T 0.5-5A D65CE1C5T 2 2 SPDT--8-Pin Plug-In Adjustable Fixed (at 95% of pick-up) 120 Vac Adjustable (50-95% of pick-up) 24 Vac 120 Vac 1-10A D65CE1C10T 0.1-1A D65CE1C01A 0.5-5A D65CE1C5A 1-10A D65CE1C10A 0.1-1A D65CEK1C01T 0.5-5A D65CEK1C5T 2 2 2 2 2 1-10A D65CEK1C10T 0.1-1A D65CEK1C01A 0.5-5A D65CEK1C5A 1-10A D65CEK1C10A 2 2 2 DPDT--11-Pin Plug-In Adjustable Fixed (at 95% of pick-up) 24 Vac 120 Vac Adjustable (50-95% of pick-up) 24 Vac 120 Vac 0.1-1A D65CE2C01T 0.5-5A D65CE2C5T 1-10A D65CE2C10T 0.1-1A D65CE2C01A 0.5-5A D65CE2C5A 1-10A D65CE2C10A 0.1-1A D65CEK2C01T 0.5-5A D65CEK2C5T 1-10A D65CEK2C10T 0.1-1A D65CEK2C01A 0.5-5A D65CEK2C5A 1-10A D65CEK2C10A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-19 2.2 2 2 2 2 Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays D65CH Series, Overcurrent Monitors Features 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Monitors AC single-phase currents for overcurrent conditions Three separate current monitoring ranges covering 0.1-10 amperes External CT can be used to extend ranges Adjustable pick-up setting with either fixed or adjustable drop-out setting Adjustable time delay of 0.1-10 seconds on pick-up Fixed 100 ms time delay on drop-out LED indicates output Product Selection D65CH_ 2 D65CH Series Pick-Up Setting 2 Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage Current Range Monitored Catalog Number SPDT--8-Pin Plug-In Adjustable 2 Fixed (at 95% of pick-up) 2 24 Vac 120 Vac 2 2 Adjustable (50-95% of pick-up) 24 Vac 2 120 Vac 2 2 0.1-1A D65CH1C1T 0.5-5A D65CH1C5T 1-10A D65CH1C10T 0.1-1A D65CH1C1A 0.5-5A D65CH1C5A 1-10A D65CH1C10A 0.1-1A D65CHK1C1T 0.5-5A D65CHK1C5T 1-10A D65CHK1C10T 0.1-1A D65CHK1C1A 0.5-5A D65CHK1C5A 1-10A D65CHK1C10A DPDT--11-Pin Plug-In 2 Adjustable Fixed (at 95% of pick-up) 24 Vac 2 120 Vac 2 2 Adjustable (50-95% of pick-up) 2 2 24 Vac 120 Vac 2 0.1-1A D65CH2C1T 0.5-5A D65CH2C5T 1-10A D65CH2C10T 0.1-1A D65CH2C1A 0.5-5A D65CH2C5A 1-10A D65CH2C10A 0.1-1A D65CHK2C1T 0.5-5A D65CHK2C5T 1-10A D65CHK2C10T 0.1-1A D65CHK2C1A 0.5-5A D65CHK2C5A 1-10A D65CHK2C10A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 D65CL Series, Undercurrent Monitoring Relays 2 Features Monitors AC single-phase currents for undercurrent conditions Three separate current monitoring ranges covering 0.1-10 amperes External CT can be used to extend ranges Adjustable drop-out setting with fixed pick-up setting 2 Adjustable time delay of 0.1-10 seconds on drop-out Fixed 100 ms time delay on pick-up 2 2 2 Product Selection D65CL_ 2 D65CL Series Pick-Up Setting Drop-Out Setting Input Voltage Current Range Monitored Catalog Number 2 24 Vac 0.1-1A D65CL1C1T 2 0.5-5A D65CL1C5T 1-10A D65CL1C10T 0.1-1A D65CL1C1A 0.5-5A D65CL1C5A 1-10A D65CL1C10A 0.1-1A D65CL2C1T 0.5-5A D65CL2C5T 1-10A D65CL210T 0.1-1A D65CL2C1A 0.5-5A D65CL2C5A 1-10A D65CL2C10A SPDT--8-Pin Plug-In Adjustable Fixed (at 5% of drop-out) 120 Vac 2 2 2 2 SPDT--11-Pin Plug-In Adjustable Fixed (at 5% of drop-out) 24 Vac 120 Vac 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-21 2.2 2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Features XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays 2 2 2 Trip class 10A Ambient temperature compensated -5 to 50C (23 to 122F) Selectable manual/automatic reset 1NO-1NC auxiliary contact as standard Direct mount with XTMC contactors 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 XT IEC Miniature Overload Relays 2 Miniature Overload Relays XT OM P16 A C1 2 2 Designation XT = XT IEC power control 2 Type OM = Mini overload relay P16 P24 P40 P60 001 1P6 2 2 = 0.1-0.16A = 0.16-0.24A = 0.24-0.4A = 0.4-0.6A = 0.6-1A = 1-1.6A Overload Release 2P4 = 1.6-2.4A 004 = 2.4-4A 006 = 4-6A 009 = 6-9A 012 = 9-12A Trip Class C1 = Class 10A Frame Size A = 45 mm mini 2 2 Product Selection 2 Miniature Overload Relays 12 2 Overload Release It Trip Class 2 0.1-0.16A 10A 0.16-0.24A 20 1 2 0.24-0.4A 20 2 Short Circuit Protection (A) Contact Sequence 97 95 2 4 6 98 96 Contact Configuration Type 1 Coordination, gG/gL Type 2 Coordination, gG/gL Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse Catalog Number 1NO-1NC 20 0.5 15 -- XTOMP16AC1 15 -- XTOMP24AC1 15 -- XTOMP40AC1 0.4-0.6A 20 2 15 -- XTOMP60AC1 0.6-1A 20 4 15 3 XTOM001AC1 2 1-1.6A 20 6 15 6 XTOM1P6AC1 1.6-2.4A 20 6 15 6 XTOM2P4AC1 2 2.4-4A 20 10 15 15 XTOM004AC1 4-6A 20 10 15 20 XTOM006AC1 6-9A 20 10 15 35 XTOM009AC1 9-12A -- -- -- 45 XTOM012AC1 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Short-circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device mounting. See MN03402002E for more information. 2 When fitted directly to the contactor, a clearance of at least 5 mm is required between the overload relays. 2 2 V9-T2-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Features XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays 2 Direct mount to XT contactors or separate mount Class 10A Up to 630A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays 2 Thermal Overload Relays 2 2 XT OB P16 B C1 S Designation XT = XT line of IEC control 2 Mounting Blank = Direct to contactor S = Separate mount Type OB = Bimetallic overload relay OT = Current transformer overload relay 2 2 Overload Release Frame B P16 = 0.1-0.16A P24 = 0.16-0.24A P40 = 0.24-0.4A P60 = 0.4-0.6A Frame C P16 = 0.1-0.16A P24 = 0.16-0.24A P40 = 0.24-0.4A P60 = 0.4-0.6A 001 = 0.6-1A Frame D 010 = 6-10A 016 = 10-16A 024 = 16-24A Frame F 035 = 25-35A 050 = 35-50A Frame G 035 = 25-35A 050 = 35-50A 070 = 50-70A Frame L and H 070 = 50-70A 100 = 70-100A CT Type 063 = 42-63A 090 = 60-90A 125 = 85-125A 001 1P6 2P4 004 = 0.6-1A = 1.0-1.6A = 1.6-2.4A = 2.4-4A 006 010 012 016 = 4-6A = 6-10A = 9-12A = 12-16A 1P6 2P4 004 006 = 1.0-1.6A = 1.6-2.4A = 2.4-4A = 4-6A 010 016 024 032 = 6-10A = 10-16A = 16-24A = 24-32A Trip Class C1 = Class 10A C3 = Class 30 2 2 2 Frame Size Designation B = 45 mm C = 45 mm D = 55 mm G = 90 mm H = 140 mm L = 140 mm Blank = XTOT only 2 2 040 = 24-40A 057 = 40-57A 065 = 50-65A 075 = 65-75A 070 = 50-70A 100 = 70-100A 100 = 70-100A 125 = 95-125A 150 = 120-150A 175 = 145-175A 125 = 95-125A 160 = 120-160A 220 = 160-220A 250 = 200-250A 2 160 = 110-160A 240 = 160-240A 290 = 190-290A 400 = 270-400A 540 = 360-540A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-23 2.2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2 Product Selection 2 XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays 2 Overload Releases, Ir 2 Frame B--Direct Mount to XTCE...B Contactor 7-15A 2 0.16-0.24 7-15A 0.24-0.4 7-15A 0.4-0.6 2 Short-Circuit Protection (A) Contact Sequence Contact Configuration For Use with Contactor Ampere Range Maximum Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse Catalog Number 25 3 XTOBP16BC1 25 3 XTOBP24BC1 25 3 XTOBP40BC1 7-15A 25 3 XTOBP60BC1 0.6-1 7-15A 25 3 XTOB001BC1 1-1.6 7-15A 25 6 XTOB1P6BC1 2 1.6-2.4 7-15A 25 6 XTOB2P4BC1 2.4-4 7-15A 25 15 XTOB004BC1 2 4-6 7-15A 25 20 XTOB006BC1 6-10 7-15A 25 35 XTOB010BC1 9-12 9-15A 25 45 XTOB012BC1 2 12-16 12-15A 30 45 XTOB016BC1 2 0.6-1 18-32A 25 3 XTOB001CC1 1-1.6 18-32A 25 6 XTOB1P6CC1 2 1.6-2.4 18-32A 25 6 XTOB2P4CC1 2.4-4 18-32A 25 15 XTOB004CC1 4-6 18-32A 25 20 XTOB006CC1 2 6-10 18-32A 25 25 XTOB010CC1 10-16 18-32A 30 25 XTOB016CC1 2 16-24 18-32A 30 25 XTOB024CC1 24-32 25-32A 30 25 XTOB032CC1 2 2 2 2 0.1-0.165 1NO-1NC Frame C--Direct Mount to XTCE...C Contactor 1NO-1NC Frame D--Direct Mount to XTCE...D Contactor 2 6-10 40-72A 25 25 XTOB010DC1 10-16 40-72A 25 25 XTOB016DC1 2 16-24 40-72A 30 25 XTOB024DC1 24-40 40-72A 125 125 XTOB040DC1 2 40-57 50-72A 150 150 XTOB057DC1 50-65 65-72A 150 200 XTOB065DC1 65-75 72A 150 200 XTOB075DC1 2 1NO-1NC 2 Frames F-G--Direct Mount to XTCE...F or XTCE...G Contactor 80-170A 150 200 XTOB050GC1 2 50-70 80-170A 150 200 XTOB070GC1 70-100 80-170A 400 400 XTOB100GC1 2 95-125 80-170A 500 400 XTOB125GC1 120-150 80-170A 600 600 XTOB150GC1 145-175 150-170A 600 600 XTOB175GC1 2 2 2 2 35-50 1NO-1NC Notes Short circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device mounting. See MN03402001E for more information on overload relays for Frames B-G. Trip Class: 10A Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors. EC prototype test certificate available upon request. Observe manuals MN03402001E and MN03407001E. See documentation--manuals for overload monitoring of EEx e-motors. 2 2 V9-T2-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays XTOB, XTOT Thermal Overload Relays, continued 2 Short-Circuit Protection (A) Contact Configuration For Use with Contactor Ampere Range Maximum Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse Catalog Number 2 1NO-1NC 80-170A 150 200 XTOB050GC1S 2 50-70 80-170A 150 200 XTOB070GC1S 70-100 80-170A 400 400 XTOB100GC1S 95-125 80-170A 500 400 XTOB125GC1S 120-150 80-170A 600 600 XTOB150GC1S 145-175 150-170A 600 600 XTOB175GC1S 2 185-250A 150 200 XTOB070HC1 2 70-100 185-250A 400 400 XTOB100HC1 95-125 185-250A 500 400 XTOB125HC1 120-160 185-250A 600 600 XTOB160HC1 160-220 185-250A 600 800 XTOB220HC1 200-250 225-250A 600 700 XTOB250HC1 185-250A 150 200 XTOB070LC1 70-100 185-250A 400 400 XTOB100LC1 95-125 185-250A 500 400 XTOB125LC1 120-160 185-250A 600 600 XTOB160LC1 160-220 185-250A 800 800 XTOB220LC1 200-250 225-250A 600 700 XTOB250LC1 Overload Releases, Ir Contact Sequence Frames F-G--Separate Mount 35-50 2 2 Frame H--Separate Mount 50-70 1NO-1NC 1 3 5 97 95 2 4 6 98 96 2 2 2 2 Frame L--Direct Mount to XTC (E or S)...L or Separate Mount 50-70 1NO-1NC 2 2 2 2 Current Transformer Operated Overload Relay 2 Short-Circuit Protection (A) Overload Releases, Ir Contact Sequence Contact Configuration For Use with Contactor Ampere Range Maximum Circuit Breaker CEC/NEC Fuse Catalog Number 1NO-1NC 300-500A 600 700 XTOT240C3S 2 2 Frames M-N--Separate Mount 160-240 190-290 300-500A 600 700 XTOT290C3S 270-400 300-500A 1000 1000 XTOT400C3S 360-540 500A 600 1000 XTOT540C3S 420-630 630A 600 1000 XTOT630C3S 2 2 2 2 Accessories Adapter 2 DIN-Rail or Panel-Mount Adapter, Frames C-D 1 For Use With... Package Qty. Catalog Number XTOB...CC1 5 XTOBXDINC XTOB...DC1 2 XTOBXDIND 2 2 2 Notes Short circuit protection: Observe the maximum permissible fuse of the contactor with direct device mounting. See MN03402001E for more information on overload relays for Frames B-G. 2 Trip Class: 10A Suitable for protection of EEx e-motors. EC prototype test certificate available upon request. 2 Observe manuals MN03402001E and MN03407001E. See documentation--manuals for overload monitoring of EEx e-motors. 2 1 Can be snap fitted on a top hat rail (DIN rail) or can be screw fitted. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V9-T2-25 2.2 2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Features XT Electronic Overload Relays 2 2 2 2 Direct mount to XT contactors or separate mount Standard version: selectable trip class (10A, 10, 20, 30) with selectable manual or auto reset Broad 5:1 FLA range Self-powered design, will accept AC voltages from 12-690V 50/60 Hz Electrically isolated 1NO-1NC contacts (push-to-test) FLA range of 0.1-1500A 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 XT Electronic Overload Relays 2 XT Electronic Overload Relay--IEC 1 XT OE 1P6 C CS S 2 2 Mounting Blank = Direct to contactor S = Separate mount (Frames C and G only) Designation XT = XT line of IEC control 2 Type OE = Electronic overload relay 2 Trip Type CS = Selectable Class 10A, 10, 20, 30 GS = Ground fault with selectable Class 10, 20 2 Overload Range 2 1P6 005 020 1P6 005 020 045 045 100 100 175 2 2 2 2 2 2 = = = = = = = = = = = 0.33-1.65A 1-5A 4-20A 0.33-1.65A 1-5A 4-20A 9-45A 9-45A 20-100A 20-100A 35-175A Contactor Frame B = 45 mm C = 45 mm D = 55 mm F, G = 105 mm G, H = 110 mm Note 1 See Page V9-T2-27 for Product Selection. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Product Selection 2 XT Electronic Overload Relays 45 mm XT for Direct Mount 2 XT Electronic Overload Relays for Direct Mount to XT Contactors For Use with XT Contactor Frame B C For Use with Contactor Overload Range (Amps) XTCE007B..., XTCE009B..., XTCE012B..., XTCE015B... 0.33-1.65 XTCE018C..., XTCE025C..., XTCE032C 0.33-1.65 Contact Sequence 97 95 Auxiliary Contact Configuration Type Catalog Number 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65 XTOE1P6BCS ZEB12-5 XTOE005BCS ZEB12-20 XTOE020BCS ZEB32-1,65 XTOE1P6CCS ZEB32-5 XTOE005CCS ZEB32-20 XTOE020CCS ZEB32-45 XTOE045CCS ZEB65-45 XTOE045DCS ZEB65-100 XTOE100DCS 1-5 4-20 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm NO-NC 1-5 4-20 2 4 6 98 96 9-45 D F XTCE040D..., XTCE050D..., XTCE065D..., XTCE072D... 9-45 XTCE080F..., XTCE095F... 20-100 97 95 20-100 2 Frame Size 45 mm NO-NC 55 mm H 45 mm XT for Direct Mount with Ground Fault XTCE115G..., XTCE150G..., XTCE170G... 20-100 XTCE185H... 35-175 97 95 35-175 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100 XTOE100GCS ZEB150-175 XTOE175GCS 2 ZEB225-175 XTOE175HCS 2 110 mm NO-NC 2 B C Catalog Number 45 mm NO-NC ZEB12-1,65-GF XTOE1P6BGS ZEB12-5-GF XTOE005BGS ZEB12-20-GF XTOE020BGS ZEB32-1,65-GF XTOE1P6CGS 1-5 ZEB32-5-GF XTOE005CGS 4-20 ZEB32-20-GF XTOE020CGS ZEB32-45-GF XTOE045CGS XTCE007B..., XTCE009B..., XTCE012B..., XTCE015B... 0.33-1.65 XTCE018C..., XTCE025C..., XTCE032C 0.33-1.65 97 95 1-5 4-20 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 45 mm NO-NC 2 4 6 98 96 9-45 D 2 Type Contact Sequence XTCE040D..., XTCE050D..., XTCE065D..., XTCE072D... 9-45 F XTCE080F..., XTCE095F... 20-100 G XTCE115G..., XTCE150G..., XTCE170G... 20-100 XTCE185H... 35-175 97 95 20-100 45 mm NO-NC 55 mm ZEB65-45-GF XTOE045DGS ZEB65-100-GF XTOE100DGS H 35-175 2 2 2 2 NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS 55 mm NO-NC ZEB150-100-GF XTOE100GGS ZEB150-175-GF XTOE175GGS 2 ZEB225-175-GF XTOE175HGS 2 2 2 110 mm 2 4 6 98 96 2 55 mm 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 2 2 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 2 2 Auxiliary Contact Configuration Overload Range (Amps) 2 XTOE100GCS Frame Size For Use with Contactor 2 ZEB150-100 XT Electronic Overload Relays with Ground Fault for Direct Mount to XT Contactors For Use with XT Contactor Frame 2 NO-NC 110 mm 2 4 6 98 96 2 55 mm 2 4 6 98 96 G 2 2 2 4 6 98 96 97 95 2 110 mm NO-NC 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-27 2.2 2 1-5A OL with CTs Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays XT Electronic Overload Relays for use with Large Frame XT Contactors (L-R) Use CTs and 1-5A XT overload relay. CT kit does not include overload relay (order separately). 2 XT Contactor Frame For Use with IEC Contactor Amp Range (AC-3) CT Range (Amps) 2 L, M 185-500A 60-300 M, N 300-820A N R 2 CT Kit Catalog Number Terminal Size Overload Relay Catalog Number Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number 300: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated lugs ZEB-XCT300 750 kcmil (2) 250 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS 120-600 600: 5 panel-mount CT kit with integrated, pass through holes ZEB-XCT600 (2) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS 580-1000A 200-1000 1000: 5 panel-mount CT kit ZEB-XCT1000 with integrated, pass through holes (3) 750 kcmil 3/0 Cu/Al XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS 1600A 300-1500 1500: 5 panel-mount CT kit ZEB-XCT1500 with integrated, pass through holes (4) 750 kcmil 1/0 Cu/Al XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS 2 2 2 2 2 2 45 mm XT for Separate Mount XT Electronic Overload Relays for Separate Mount Overload Range (Amps) 2 Description Frame Size Contact Sequence Type Overload Relay Catalog Number Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number ZEB32-1,65/KK XTOE1P6CCSS XTOE1P6CGSS ZEB32-5/KK XTOE005CCSS XTOE005CGSS ZEB32-20/KK XTOE020CCSS XTOE020CGSS ZEB32-45/KK XTOE045CCSS XTOE045CGSS Overload Relay 2 0.33-1.65 2 4-20 45 mm 1 3 5 97 95 1-5 2 4 6 98 96 9-45 2 2 2 20-100 55 mm ZEB150-100/KK XTOE100GCSS XTOE100GGSS 35-175 110 mm ZEB150-175/KK XTOE175GCSS XTOE175GGSS XT Electronic Overload Relay for Pass-Through Design Pass-through design does not include any lugs to land wires. Terminate motor leads directly on contactor. 2 2 2 2 Overload Range (Amps) Frame Size 35-175 110 mm Contact Sequence 1 3 5 97 95 Type Overload Relay Catalog Number Overload Relay with Ground Fault Catalog Number ZEB150-175/PT XTOE175GCSP XTOE175GGSP 2 4 6 98 96 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-28 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Accessories 2 CT Kits 2 Accessories Description Safety Cover Catalog Number 2 Safety Cover Clear Lexan cover that mounts on top of the FLA dial and DIP switches when closed. ZEB-XSC 2 2 2 Reset Bar 2 Reset Bar Assembles to the top of the overload to provide a larger target area for door mounted reset operators. ZEB-XRB 2 2 2 Remote Reset Remote Reset Remote reset module (24 Vdc) 1 Remote reset module (120 Vac) 1 Remote reset module (24 Vac) 1 2 C440-XCOM ZEB-XRR-120 2 ZEB-XRR-24 2 Communication The C440 is provided with two levels of communication capability. Advanced Basic Communication via Communication-- Expansion Module-- Monitoring and Control Monitoring Only C440 also has the ability to Basic communication on communicate on industrial the C440 is accomplished protocols such as DeviceNet, using an expansion module. PROFIBUS, Modbus RTU and The expansion module plugs Modbus TCP, and Ethernet into the expansion bay on (planned) while providing the C440 overload relay, control capability using I/O. enabling communications with the overload via their An expansion module Modbus RTU (RS-485) (mentioned earlier) combined network. No additional parts with a communication are required. See adapter and a communication figure below. module allows easy integration onto the customer's network. See figure below. 2 2 Advanced Communication-- Communication Module The communication adapter comes standard with four inputs and two outputs (24 Vdc or 120 Vac) while providing the customer with flexible mounting options (DIN rail or panel). See figure below, 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Basic Communication-- Modbus 2 Advanced Communication-- Communication Adapter with Communication Module 2 Note 1 Customer can wire remote mounted button to reset module (that is, 22 mm pushbutton, catalog number M22-D-B-GB14-K10). Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2 V9-T2-29 2.2 2 2 2 2 Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays The following information can be viewed using the communication option: Motor status--running, Percent thermal capacity Overload relay settings-- stopped, tripped or trip class, DIP switch Fault codes (only available resetting selections, reset selections prior to reset) Individual rms phase Modbus address (can be Percent phase unbalance currents (A, B, C) set over the network) Ground fault current and Average of three-phase percent rms current 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Communication Accessories Description Catalog Number Expansion Module Expansion module (Remote Reset/Modbus RTU, RS-485 Communication) C440-XCOM Communication Adapter Communication adapter kit (DIN C Panel mounted adapter, required for advance communication option) C440-COM-ADP DeviceNet communication module kit--120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441K + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DN-120 DeviceNet communication module kit--24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441L + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DN-24 2 PROFIBUS communication module kit--120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441S + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DP-120 PROFIBUS communication module kit--24V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441Q + C440-COM-ADP) C440-DP-24 2 Modbus communication module kit--120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441N + C440-COM-ADP) C440-MOD-120 Modbus communication module kit--24 Vdc I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441P + C440-COM-ADP) C440-MOD-24 Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module kit--120V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441U) C440-ET-120 Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module kit--24V I/O (consists of C440-XCOM + C441V) C440-ET-24 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-30 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Short Circuit Ratings (North America CSA, cUL) Changes to UL 508A and NEC in recent years have brought a focus to control panel safety with regard to short-circuit current ratings (SCCR). Eaton's C440 electronic overload relays combined with XT series IEC and Freedom Series NEMA contactors provide a wide variety of SCCR solutions needed for a variety of applications. The SCCR data in this document reflects the latest information as of April 2010. 2 C440/XT Standalone Overload Relays (XT, C440) 2 Standard-Fault Short Circuit Data Overload FLA Range Maximum Operating Voltage 0.33-1.65A 600 Vac 1-5A 600 Vac 2 2 High-Fault Short Circuit Data Maximum Breaker Size (A) Fuses (RK5, J, CC) 600V (kA) Maximum Fuse Size (A) (RK5) 480V (kA) 1 6 15 -- 5 20 20 Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 600V (kA) Maximum Fuse Size 480V (kA) 600V (kA) Maximum Breaker Size -- -- -- -- -- 100 100 30 100 35 20 2 2 2 4-20A 600 Vac 5 80 80 100 100 100 100 35 80 9-45A 600 Vac 5 175 175 100 100 100 100 35 100/175 (480/600) 20-100A 600 Vac 10 400 400 100 100 200 150 35 250/400 (480/600) 28-140A 600 Vac 10 450 500 100 100 400 100 65 400 35-175A 690 Vac 10 500 (gG) 350 (690 Vac) 320 (415 Vac) 100 100 500 (gG) 100 (415 Vac) -- 350 (LGC3350) 320 (NZMH3) 2 2 2 2 IEC XT Starters with XT Electronic Overload Relays 2 High-Fault Short Circuit Data Contactor Frame Size Maximum Operating Voltage Fuses (RK5, J, CC) 480V 600V Maximum Fuse Size 480V 600V Maximum Breaker Size 2 B 1-5A 100 100 30 -- -- -- 4-20A 100 100 30 -- -- -- 2 C Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers 1-5A 100 100 60 -- -- -- 4-20A 100 100 60 -- -- -- 9-45A 100 100 60 -- -- -- 9-45A 100 100 200 65 35 175 20-100A 100 100 200 65 35 175 F 20-100A 100 100 200 65 65 350 G 20-100A 100 100 200 65 65 350 35-175A 100 100 400 65 30 250 (480 Vac) 350 (600 Vac) 35-175A 100 100 400 65 30 400 D H 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-31 2.2 2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Features Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays 2 2 2 2 Power, voltage and current monitoring, ground fault, flexible communications, motor and line protection in a single package Monitor energy consumption at individual loads to avoid peak demand charges Protect pumps from dead-head or starved conditions 0-660V, 1-540A with two relays Remote display allows for configuration without opening the panel, providing additional operator safety 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 Motor Insight Overload and Monitoring Relays 2 Motor Insight Overload Relays C441 B A NOUI 2 2 2 Device Type C441 = Motor Insight overload relay 2 2 Overload Relay Power Source Voltage B = 240 Vac (170-264 Vac) C = 480 Vac (323-528 Vac) D = 600 Vac (487-660 Vac) Blank = 120 Vac control power (170-660 Vac) Overload Relay Current Rating A = 1-9A (1-540A refer to Page V9-T2-33) B = 5-90A (5-90A refer to Page V9-T2-33) 0109 = 120 Vac control power (0-660 Vac, 1-9A) 0590 = 120 Vac control power (0-660 Vac, 5-90A) 2 2 Internal User Interface Blank = With user interface (line powered models) NOUI = Without user interface (120 Vac control models) Motor Insight Overload Relays--Communications Modules and Accessory Types C441 K 2 2 Device Type C441 = Motor Insight overload relay 2 Communication Module DeviceNet module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac DeviceNet module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc Modbus RTU module Modbus RTU module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac Modbus RTU module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc PROFIBUS module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac S = PROFIBUS module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc T = Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc Accessory Type 1 = Type 1 and 12 remote mounted display 3 = Type 3R kit for remote display CMP1 = Conversion plate K L M N P Q R 2 2 2 2 2 2 = = = = = = = 2 2 2 V9-T2-32 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Product Selection Motor Insight 2 Motor Insight Power Source Monitoring Range Current Range Catalog Number 240 Vac (170-264) 170-264 Vac 1-9A C441BA 5-90A C441BB 480 Vac (323-528) 323-528 Vac 1-9A C441CA 5-90A C441CB 600 Vac (489-660) 489-660 Vac 1-9A C441DA 5-90A C441DB 1-9A C4410109NOUI 5-90A C4410590NOUI 120 Vac (93.5-132) 170-660 Vac 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Motor Insight CT Multiplier and Wire Wrap Schedule Motor FLA Catalog Number 1 2 Number of Loops Number of Conductors Through CT Primary CT Multiplier Setting External CT Kit Catalog Number 2 3 4 4 -- 2 Current Range: 5-90A C441_B and C4410590NOUI 5-22.5A 2 2 6.67-30A 2 3 3 -- 10-45A 1 2 2 -- 20-90A 0 1 1 -- 2 1 2 2 -- 2 Current Range: 1-9A C441_A and C4410109NOUI 1-5A 2-9A 0 1 1 -- 60-135A 0 1 150-(150:5) C441CTKIT150 120-270A 0 1 300-(300:5) C441CTKIT300 240-540A 0 1 600-(600:5) C441CTKIT600 2 2 2 Notes 1 Underscore indicates Operating Voltage Code required. Operating Voltage Codes: Code Voltage B 240 Vac C 480 Vac D 600 Vac 2 2 2 2 <empty> 120 Vac Control Power 2 Any manufacturer's CTs may be used. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-33 2.2 2 Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays Modbus Communication Module Description I/O Catalog Number 2 Modbus communication module None C441M Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441N 2 Modbus communication module 4IN/2OUT 240 Vdc C441P Description I/O Catalog Number PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441S PROFIBUS communication module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441Q Description I/O Catalog Number DeviceNet communication module 120 Vac C441K DeviceNet communication module 24 Vdc C441L 2 2 2 PROFIBUS Communication Module 2 2 2 2 2 DeviceNet Modules Ethernet Communication Module 2 Description I/O Catalog Number Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module 4IN/2OUT 120 Vac C441R 2 Modbus TCP / EtherNet/IP communication module 4IN/2OUT 24 Vdc C441T 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-34 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Motor Protection and Monitoring Relays 2.2 Accessories 2 Motor Insight Remote Display Description Catalog Number Remote display Type 1 C4411 2 2 2 2 Kit for Remote display Type 3R kit for remote display (remote display not included) 2 C4413 2 2 Adaptive mounting plate Communication Cables The Remote Display requires a communication cable to connect to the Motor Insight overload relay. 2 C441CMP1 2 2 Communication Cable Lengths Length in Inches (meters) Catalog Number 9.8 (0.25) D77E-QPIP25 39.4 (1.0) D77E-QPIP100 78.7 (2.0) D77E-QPIP200 118.1 (3.0) D77E-QPIP300 2 2 2 2 Note 1 Underscore indicates operating voltage code required. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-35 2.3 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Product Overview Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Selection Guide 2 2 2 2 2 XTPB Pushbutton Manual Motor Protectors XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors XTSC Manual Motor Controllers Page V9-T2-37 Page V9-T2-37 Page V9-T2-41 Page V9-T2-41 Operator style Pushbutton Rotary Rotary Rotary 2 Components Manual motor protector Manual motor protector Manual motor protector contactor connector kit Manual motor protector contactor connector kit line side adapter 2 UL 508 Type E -- Yes, with line side adapter -- -- UL 508 Type F -- -- -- Yes 2 Branch motor circuit functions Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect Disconnect Controller (manual) Controller (manual) Controller (manual and remote) Controller (manual and remote) Short circuit protection Short circuit protection Short circuit protection Short circuit protection Motor overload protection Motor overload protection Motor overload protection Motor overload protection 0.1-25A 0.1-65A 0.1-65A 0.1-65A 2 2 Description 2 2 FLA range 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-36 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com XTFC Combination Motor Controllers Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2.3 Features XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors 2 ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout provision Class 10 overload protection Motor applications from 0.1-63A Built-in heater and magnetic trip elements to protect the motor Adjustment dial for setting motor FLA XTPR Rotary MMP with a lineside adapter is rated for UL 508 Type E 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection XT IEC Manual Motor Protectors 2 Manual Motor Protectors 2 2 XT PR 012 B C1 Designation XT = XT IEC power control Type PB = Manual motor protector-- pushbutton PR = Manual motor protector-- rotary Current Ratings Frame B Frame D P16 = 0.16A 016 = 16A P25 = 0.25A 025 = 25A P40 = 0.40A 032 = 32A P63 = 0.63A 040 = 40A 001 = 1A 050 = 50A 1P6 = 1.6A 058 = 58A 2P5 = 2.5A 063 = 63A 004 = 4A 6P3 = 6.3A 010 = 10A 012 = 12A 016 = 16A 020 = 20A 025 = 25A 032 = 32A Frame Size B = 45 mm D = 55 mm Trip Class C1 = Class 10 Blank = Magnetic only (no thermal trip) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-37 2.3 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2 Product Selection 2 XTPB Pushbutton Manual Motor Protectors--Global and North American Ratings Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip 2 Note: Service Factor (SF)--Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor: SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot 2 2 2 2 Rated Uninterrupted Current-- Iu = Ie (Amps) Maximum Motor Ratings 1 Maximum hp Rating--P (hp) UL 508/CSA C 22.2 No. 14 Three-Phase FLA Adjustment Range/Overload Release--Ir (A) Short Circuit Release-- Irm (A) Maximum kW Rating AC-3--P (kW) Three-Phase 220-240V 380-415V 440V 500V 660-690V 200V 240V 480V 600V 0.1-0.16 2.2 -- -- -- -- 0.06 2 2 2 2 XTPBP16BC1 2 2 2 XTPBP25BC1 Screw Terminals-- Catalog Number Frame B 0.16 2 0.25 0.16-0.25 3.5 -- 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.12 2 0.4 0.25-0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 2 2 2 2 XTPBP40BC1 2 0.63 0.4-0.63 8.8 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.25 2 2 2 2 XTPBP63BC1 1 0.63-1 14 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 2 2 1/2 1/2 XTPB001BC1 1.6 1-1.6 22 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.75 1.1 2 2 3/4 1 XTPB1P6BC1 2.5 1.6-2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTPB2P5BC1 4 2.5-4 56 0.75 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 1 1 2 3 XTPB004BC1 2 6.3 4-6.3 88 1.1 2.2 3 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTPB6P3BC1 10 6.3-10 140 2.2 4 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPB010BC1 2 12 8-12 168 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPB012BC1 16 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 9 12.5 3 5 10 10 XTPB016BC1 2 20 16-20 280 5.5 9 11 12.5 15 5 5 10 15 XTPB020BC1 25 20-25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 20 XTPB025BC1 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only. 2 In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC(R) 430.6(A)(1). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-38 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2.3 XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors with Screw Terminals--Global Ratings and North American Ratings Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip 2 Note: Service Factor (SF)--Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor: SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot 2 Rated Uninterrupted Current-- Iu = Ie (Amps) Maximum Motor Ratings 1 Maximum hp Rating--P (hp) UL 508/CSA C 22.2 No. 14 Three-Phase 2 FLA Adjustment Range/Overload Release--Ir (A) Short Circuit Release-- Irm (A) Maximum kW Rating AC-3--P (kW) Three-Phase 220-240V 380-415V 440V 500V 660-690V 200V 240V 480V 600V 0.1-0.16 2.2 -- -- -- -- 0.06 2 2 2 2 XTPRP16BC1 2 2 2 XTPRP25BC1 2 XTPRP40BC1 Screw Terminals-- Catalog Number 3 Frame B 0.16 2 2 2 0.25 0.16-0.25 3.5 -- 0.06 0.06 0.06 0.12 2 0.4 0.25-0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.12 0.18 2 2 2 0.63 0.4-0.63 8.8 0.09 0.12 0.18 0.25 0.25 2 2 2 2 XTPRP63BC1 1 0.63-1 14 0.12 0.25 0.25 0.37 0.55 2 2 1/2 1/2 XTPR001BC1 1.6 1-1.6 22 0.25 0.55 0.55 0.75 1.1 2 2 3/4 1 XTPR1P6BC1 2.5 1.6-2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTPR2P5BC1 4 2.5-4 56 0.75 1.5 1.5 2.2 3 1 1 2 3 XTPR004BC1 6.3 4-6.3 88 1.1 2.2 3 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTPR6P3BC1 10 6.3-10 140 2.2 4 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPR010BC1 12 8-12 168 3 5.5 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTPR012BC1 16 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 9 12.5 3 5 10 10 XTPR016BC1 20 16-20 280 5.5 9 11 12.5 15 5 5 10 15 XTPR020BC1 25 20-25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 20 XTPR025BC1 32 25-32 448 7.5 15 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 25 30 XTPR032BC1 2 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 9 12.5 3 5 10 15 XTPR016DC1 2 25 16-25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 15 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTPR025DC1 32 25-32 448 7.5 15 17.5 22 22 10 10 25 30 XTPR032DC1 40 32-40 560 11 20 22 24 30 10 15 30 40 XTPR040DC1 50 40-50 700 14 25 30 30 45 10 15 30 40 XTPR050DC1 58 50-58 812 17 30 37 37 55 -- -- 40 -- XTPR058DC1 65 55-65 882 18.5 34 37 45 55 -- -- -- -- XTPR063DC1 Frame D 16 Notes 1 Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only. 2 In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1). 3 Catalog number shown comes with screw terminals. For Frame B devices up to 16A, spring cage terminals are available. For spring cage terminals on line and load sides, insert a "C" into the catalog number in the 5th position--Example: XTPRC _BC1. For spring cage terminals on the load side only, insert an "SC" into the catalog number in the 5th and 6th positions--Example: XTPRSC _BC1. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-39 2.3 2 2 2 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers XTPR Manual Self-Protected Motor Starters--North American Ratings, UL 508 Type E 2 Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip Note: A UL 508 Type E self-protected manual combination starter (XTPR) consists of a manual motor protector (XTPR) and a UL listed line side adapter (e.g., XTPAXLSA). The Type E self-protected manual combination starter alone is a legitimate short-circuit protective device and disconnect means for the downstream motor, while the contactor has been added to provide remote operation of the motor circuit. Rated Uninterrupted Current-- Iu = Ie (Amps) Maximum Motor Ratings 1 FLA Adjustment Range/Overload Release--Ir (A) Short Circuit Release-- Irm (A) 220V 240V 480-277V 600-247V 240V 480-277V 600-247V Manual Motor Protector Line Side Adapter-- Screw Terminals-- 2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Maximum hp Rating--P (hp) Three-Phase Rated Short Circuit Breaking Capacity (kA) 2 Frame B 0.16 0.1-0.16 2.2 3 3 1/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP16BC1 2 0.25 0.16-0.25 3.4 3 3 1/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP25BC1 0.4 0.25-0.4 5.6 3 3 1/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP40BC1 0.63 0.4-0.63 8.8 3 3 1/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPRP63BC1 3 2 2 1 0.63-1 14 3 1/2 1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR001BC1 1.6 1-1.6 22 3 3 3/4 3/4 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR1P6BC1 2 2.5 1.6-2.5 35 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR2P5BC1 4 2.5-4 56 3/4 1 2 3 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR004BC1 2 6.3 4-6.3 88 1 1-1/2 3 5 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR6P3BC1 10 6.3-11 140 3 3 7-1/2 10 50 50 50 XTPAXLSA XTPR010BC1 12 8-12 168 3 3 7-1/2 -- 42 42 -- XTPAXLSA -- 2 16 10-16 224 3 5 10 -- 42 42 -- XTPAXLSA XTPR016BC1 20 16-20 280 5 5 -- -- 42 42 -- XTPAXLSA XTPR020BC1 2 25 20-25 350 5 7-1/2 15 -- 18 18 -- XTPAXLSA XTPR025BC1 32 25-32 448 7-1/2 10 25 -- 18 18 -- XTPAXLSA XTPR032BC1 2 2 Frame D 2 16 10-16 224 3 5 10 10 50 50 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR016DC1 25 16-25 350 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 50 50 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR025DC1 2 32 25-32 448 10 10 25 30 50 50 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR032DC1 40 32-40 560 10 10 30 40 50 50 50 XTPAXLSAD XTPR040DC1 50 40-50 700 10 15 30 -- 65 65 -- XTPAXLSAD XTPR050DC1 58 50-58 812 15 15 40 -- 65 65 -- XTPAXLSAD XTPR058DC1 65 55-65 882 15 15 40 -- 65 65 -- XTPAXLSAD XTPR063DC1 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only. 2 UL 508 Type E starters are assembled from a standard XTPR and a special incoming terminal line side adapter (XTPAXLSA or XTPAXLSAD). 3 In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1). 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-40 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2.3 Features XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers ON/OFF rotary handle with lockout provision Class 10 overload protection Adjustment dial for setting motor FLA Built-in surge suppression on DC coils as standard Assembled manual motor controllers consist of manual motor protector, contactor, connector kit and 1NO-1NC auxiliary contact for MMP Assembled combination motor controllers consist of manual motor protector, contactor, connector kit, 1NO-1NC auxiliary contact for MMP and line side adapter Combination motor controllers are UL 508 Type F rated, and provide the following functions in a single device Disconnect, short circuit protection, motor overload protection, motor controller 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection XT IEC Manual and Combination Motor Controllers 2 Manual and Combination Motor Controllers 2 2 XT SC 012 B B A Design XT = XT IEC power control Type SC = Manual motor controller-- FVNR FC = Combination motor controller, UL 508 Type F--FVNR Rated Current of MMP Frame B Frame D P16 = 0.16A 016 = 16A P25 = 0.25A 025 = 25A P40 = 0.40A 032 = 32A P63 = 0.63A 040 = 40A 001 = 1A 050 = 50A 1P6 = 1.6A 058 = 58A 2P5 = 2.5A 063 = 63A 004 = 4A 6P3 = 6.3A 010 = 10A 012 = 12A 016 = 16A 020 = 20A 025 = 25A 032 = 32A Frame Size--Contactor B = 45 mm, 7 to 15A C = 45 mm, 18 to 32A D = 55 mm, 40 to 65A Frame Size--MMP B = 45 mm, 0.1 to 32A D = 55 mm, 16 to 63A A B C D E T TD Coil Voltage = 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz = 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz = 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz = 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz = 208V 50 Hz = 24V 50/60 Hz = 24 Vdc 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-41 2.3 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2 Product Selection 2 XTSC Manual Motor Controllers (MMC)/Starter Combinations Factory Assembled Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip + Contactor 2 Maximum Motor Ratings--P 2 220-240V 380-415V 500V 660-690V 200V 240V 480V 600V Assembled Manual Motor Controller 3 Non-Reversing-- Catalog Number 3.2 -- -- -- 0.06 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTSCP16BB_ 3.5 -- 0.06 0.06 0.12 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTSCP25BB_ 0.25-0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTSCP40BB_ 0.4-0.63 8.82 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.25 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTSCP63BB_ 4 Short Circuit Release-- Irm (A) 2 FLA Adjustment Range (A) 1 2 Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor 0.1-0.16 2 0.16-0.25 2 Maximum kW Rating AC-3--P (kW) Three-Phase Maximum hp Rating--P (hp) Three-Phase 2 0.63-1 14 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 4 1/2 1/2 XTSC001BB_ 1-1.6 22.4 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.1 4 4 3/4 1 XTSC1P6BB_ 2 1.6-2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTSC2P5BB_ 2.5-4 56 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 1 1 2 3 XTSC004BB_ 4-6.3 88.2 1.1 2.2 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTSC6P3BB_ 2 6.3-10 140 2.2 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTSC010BB_ 8-12 168 3 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTSC012BB_ 2 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 3 10 10 XTSC016BB_ 2 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 3 10 10 XTSC016BC_ 16-20 280 5.5 9 12.5 15 5 5 10 15 XTSC020BC_ 20-25 350 5.5 11 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 20 XTSC025BC_ 2 25-32 448 7.5 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 20 25 XTSC032BC_ 2 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 5 10 15 XTSC016DC_ 16-25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTSC025DC_ 2 25-32 448 7.5 15 17.5 22 10 10 25 30 XTSC032DC_ 2 2 2 Frame B MMP + Frame C Contactor Frame D MMP + Frame C Contactor Frame D MMP + Frame D Contactor 32-40 560 11 20 22 30 10 -- 30 30 XTSC040DD_ 2 40-50 700 14 25 30 45 15 15 30 40 XTSC050DD_ 50-58 812 17 30 37 55 -- -- 40 -- XTSC058DD_ 2 55-65 882 18.5 34 37 55 -- -- 40 -- XTSC063DD_ 2 Notes The assembled Manual Motor Controller (MMC) consists of an XTPR Manual Motor Protector (MMP) and an XTCE contactor. For Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor assemblies, the XTSC can be mounted directly on DIN rail without an adapter. The contactors are supported mechanically with a mechanical connection element (included in XTPAXTPCB). For 16A and above, the assembly is mounted via a DIN rail adapter plate (XTPAXTPCPC, XTPAXTPCPD) and the electrical connection is made with electrical contact modules (XTPAXECMC, XTPAXECMD), both included in XTPAXTPCC and XTPAXTPCD. Service Factor (SF)--Setting Ir of current scale in dependence of load factor: SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot 2 2 2 1 2 3 2 4 Overload release--Ir. Select manual motor protectors by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only. Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See Page V9-T2-43. In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1). 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-42 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2.3 XTFC Combination Motor Controllers (CMC), UL 508 Type F Factory Assembled Motor Protective Device with Thermal and Magnetic Trip + Contactor + Required Line Side Adapter Maximum Motor Ratings--P 2 FLA Adjustment Range (A) 1 Short Circuit Release-- Irm (A) 220-240V 380-415V 500V 660-690V 200V 240V 480V 600V Assembled Manual Motor Controller 3 Non-Reversing-- Catalog Number -- -- 0.06 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTFCP16BB_ Maximum kW Rating AC-3--P (kW) Three-Phase Maximum hp Rating--P (hp) Three-Phase 2 2 2 2 Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor 0.1-0.16 2.2 -- 0.16-0.25 3.5 -- 0.06 0.06 0.12 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTFCP25BB_ 0.25-0.4 5.6 0.06 0.09 0.12 0.18 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTFCP40BB_ 0.4-0.63 8.82 0.09 0.18 0.25 0.25 4 4 1/2 1/2 XTFCP63BB_ 4 1/2 1/2 XTFC001BB_ 4 3/4 1 XTFC1P6BB_ 0.63-1 14 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 4 1-1.6 22.4 0.25 0.55 0.75 1.1 4 1.6-2.5 35 0.37 0.75 1.1 1.5 1/2 1/2 1 1-1/2 XTFC2P5BB_ 2.5-4 56 0.75 1.5 2.2 3 1 1 2 3 XTFC004BB_ 2 2 2 2 2 4-6.3 88.2 1.1 2.2 3 4 1-1/2 1-1/2 3 5 XTFC6P3BB_ 6.3-10 140 2.2 4 4 7.5 3 3 7-1/2 10 XTFC010BB_ 8-12 168 3 5.5 5.5 11 3 3 7-1/2 -- XTFC012BB_ 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 5 10 -- XTFC016BB_ 2 2 2 Frame B MMP + Frame C Contactor 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 5 10 -- XTFC016BC_ 16-20 280 5.5 9 12.5 15 5 5 -- -- XTFC020BC_ 20-25 350 5.5 11 15 22 5 7-1/2 15 -- XTFC025BC_ 25-32 448 7.5 15 22 30 7-1/2 10 20 -- XTFC032BC_ 2 2 2 Frame D MMP + Frame C Contactor 10-16 224 4 7.5 9 12.5 3 5 10 10 XTFC016DC_ 16-25 350 5.5 12.5 12.5 22 7-1/2 7-1/2 20 25 XTFC025DC_ 25-32 448 7.5 15 17.5 22 10 10 25 30 XTFC032DC_ 2 2 Frame D MMP + Frame D Contactor 32-40 560 11 20 22 30 10 10 30 40 XTFC040DD_ 40-50 700 14 25 30 45 10 15 30 -- XTFC050DD_ 50-58 812 17 30 37 55 15 15 40 -- XTFC058DD_ 55-65 882 18.5 34 37 55 15 15 40 -- XTFC063DD_ Magnet Coil Suffix Coil Voltage Suffix Code 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B 24V 50/60 Hz T 24 Vdc TD 5 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D 208V 60 Hz E Notes The assembled Combination Motor Controller (CMC) consists of an XTPR Manual Motor Protector (MMP) and an XTCE contactor and a required Line Side Adapter. For Frame B MMP + Frame B Contactor assemblies, the XTFC and XTFR can be mounted directly on DIN rail without an adapter. The contactors are supported mechanically with a mechanical connection element (included in XTPAXTPCB, XTPAXRPCRB). For 16A and above, the assembly is mounted via a DIN rail adapter plate (XTPAXTPCPC, XTPAXTPCPD) and the electrical connection is made with electrical contact modules (XTPAXECMC, XTPAXECMD), both included in XTPAXTPCC and XTPAXTPCD. SF = 1.15 -> Ir = 1 x In mot SF = 1 -> Ir = 0.9 x In mot 1 2 3 4 5 2 2 Overload release--Ir. Select combination motor controllers by full load amperes. Maximum motor ratings (kW, hp) are for reference only. Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See table at left. In this range, calculate motor rating according to rated current. Specified values to NEC 430.6(A)(1). With DC operation: Integrated dioderesistor combination, coil rating 2.6W. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-43 2.3 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers 2 Accessories 2 Auxiliary Contacts 2 Contact Configuration 2 1NO-1NC Contact Sequence Screw Terminals Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 5 XTPAXSA11 5 XTPAXFA11 Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number Side-Mount 2 2 2 Front-Mount 1NO-1NC 2 2 2 Rotary Handle Mechanism IP65 Rotary Handle Mechanism 123 Description Complete Kits--Includes Handle, Shaft and Required Hardware 2 2 2 2 2 Rotary handle mechanism IP65 black--for use on main switches to IEC/EN 60204. 1 XTPAXRHMB Rotary handle mechanism IP65 red/yellow--for use on main switch with emergency-stop function to IEC/EN 60204. 1 XTPAXRHMRY Rotary handle mechanism IP65 black--for use on main switches to IEC/EN 60204 where XTPR is mounted 90 from vertical. 1 XTPAXRHM90B Rotary handle mechanism IP65 red/yellow--for use on main switch with emergency-stop function to IEC/EN 60204 where XTPR is mounted 90 from vertical. 1 XTPAXRHM90RY 2 2 Shunt Release 2 2 2 Shunt Release Pkg. Qty. Screw Terminals-- Catalog Number 2 XTPAXSR120V60H 2 XTPAXSR240V60H 2 XTPAXSR480V60H 2 XTPAXSR24VDC 2 2 Undervoltage Release 2 2 2 2 Undervoltage Release Pkg. Qty. Screw Terminals-- Catalog Number 2 XTPAXUVR120V60H 2 XTPAXUVR240V60H 2 XTPAXUVR480V60H Notes 1 With ON/OFF switch position and "+" (tripped), lockable with three padlocks, 4-8 mm hasp. Can be locked in the OFF position, if required. 2 Rotary handle mechanisms ship with door interlock disabled. See instruction publication with product for how to enable door interlock. 3 Not for use with XTPAXFAEM20 early-make front-mount auxiliary contact. 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-44 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.3 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Three-Phase Commoning Links 1 For Use With... MMP--Frame B Length of Link (mm) Unit Width (mm) Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number 2 90 45 10 XTPAXCLKA2 3 135 45 10 XTPAXCLKA3 4 180 45 10 XTPAXCLKA4 5 225 45 10 XTPAXCLKA5 Frame B MMP with no side-mounted auxiliaries or voltage releases MMP--Frame D 2 Qty MMP 2 2 2 2 2 Frame D MMP with no side-mounted auxiliaries or voltage releases 2 110 55 1 XTPAXCLKA2D 2 3 165 55 1 XTPAXCLKA3D 2 4 220 55 1 XTPAXCLKA4D 2 2 Incoming Terminal 2 Incoming Terminal for Three-Phase Commoning Link 2 For Use With... Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number B Frame XTPR, XTPB 5 XTPAXIT 2 2 2 Line-Side Adapter Line-Side Adapter 3 For Use With... Pkg. Qty. Catalog Number B Frame XTPR to create a UL 508 type E/F manual combination starter 5 XTPAXLSA D Frame XTPR to create a UL 508 type E/F manual combination starter 1 XTPAXLSAD 4 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 Protected against accidental contact. B Frame short circuit proof Ue = 690V, Iu = 63A; D Frame short circuit proof Ue = 690V, Iu = 128A. Frame B links can be combined by rotating mounting. Frame D links cannot be combined. 2 For three-phase commoning link, protected against accidental contact, Ue = 690V, Iu = 63A; for conductor crosssections: 2.5-25 mm2 stranded; 2.5-16 mm2 flexible with ferrules, AWG 14-6. 3 XTPAXLSA is for three-phase commoning link, finger- and back-of-hand proof, Ue = 690V, Iu = 60A; for conductor cross sections: 2.5-25 mm2 stranded, 2.5-16 mm2 flexible with ferrule, AWG 14-6. 4 XTPAXLSAD cannot be combined with three-phase commoning links. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-45 2.3 2 Non-Reversing Starters 2 Motor Control and Protection Manual Motor Protectors and Controllers Combination Connection Kits for Connection of XTPR MMP with XTCE Contactor For Use With... Std. Pack Catalog Number Comprised of: 1 XTPAXTPCB 1 XTPAXTPCC 1 XTPAXTPCD Non-Reversing Starters XTPR...B + XTCE...B 2 Mechanical connection element for XTPR...B and contactor Main current wiring between XTPR...B and contactor in tool-less plug connection 2 Cable guidance 2 Use contactor auxiliary switch XTCEXFAT_. Control cable guidance: max. six cables up to 2.5 mm2 external diameter or four cables up to 3.5 mm2 external diameter. 2 XTPR...B + XTCE...C XTPR...D + XTCE...D 2 Comprised of: DIN rail adapter plate Main current wiring between XTPR and contactor 2 2 Description Insulated Enclosures Insulated Enclosures for Surface Mounting 2 Degree of Protection 2 XTPB Pushbutton Manual Motor Protectors--North American Usage 12 For Use With... Description Catalog Number IP65 NEMA 3R, 4X, 12, 13 XTPB MMP only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPBXFAEM20, XTPAXSA_, XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_, XTPAXCL With actuating diaphragm XTPBXENAS65 2 IP65 NEMA 3R, 4X, 12, 13 XTPB MMP only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPBXFAEM20, XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_, XTPAXCL With emergency-stop (E-stop) pushbutton actuator, red/yellow XTPBXENASES65 2 B Frame (0.1-32A) XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors--North American Usage 3 2 IP55 NEMA 1, 12, 3R 2 D Frame (10-65A) XTPR Rotary Manual Motor Protectors 45 2 IP65 NEMA 1, 12, 3R, 4X 2 2 B Frame XTPR Only or with: XTPAXSA_ and XTPAXFA_, XTPAXUVR_ and XTPAXFA_, XTPAXSR_ and XTPAXFA_, XTPAXCL D Frame XTPR only or with: XTPAXFA_, XTPAXFAEM20, XTPAXSA_, XTPAXSATR_, XTPAXUVR_, XTPAXSR_, XTPAXCL With red/yellow rotary handle for use as emergency-stop switch to VDE 0113 XTPAXENAS55RY With red/yellow rotary handle for use as emergency-stop switches to IEC/EN 60204 XTPAXENCSD65RY Notes 1 Built-in terminal for PE(N). 2 North American enclosures come with conduit adapters for use with 1/2 NPT. 3 Built-in N and PE terminal, lower part without knockouts. 4 Integrated terminal for PE(N) connection. 5 % Metric knockouts: Top / bottom: M25/M32 In backplate: M25/M32 Control cable entry: M20 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-46 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Product Overview 2 Soft Starters Selection Guide 2 2 2 2 2 Description DS7 DS6 S611 S801+ S811+ Page V9-T2-48 Page V9-T2-50 Page V9-T2-51 Page V9-T2-55 Page V9-T2-58 Current range (A) 4-32 41-200 26-414 11-1000 11-1000 Phases Two-phase control Two-phase control Three-phase Three-phase Three-phase 2 2 Power 2 Input voltage (line voltage) 0-460V 0-460V 0-600V 0-600V; 690V on V and T Frame 0-600V; 690V on V and T Frame Horsepower range 460V: 2-20 hp 460V: 30-150 hp 460V: 40-350 hp 460V: 25-800 hp 460V: 25-800 hp Internal run-bypass Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Inside-the-delta control -- -- -- Yes Yes 2 2 2 Control User interface Dials Dials LED and keypad Dials and DIP switches LCD and keypad Control voltage 24 Vac/Vdc or 120-240 Vac 24 Vdc 120 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 2 Communications -- -- Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS, DeviceNet -- Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP 2 Program relays -- -- Yes Yes Yes 2 Voltage ramp initial current 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 2 Voltage ramp time 1-30 sec 1-30 sec 0.5-180 sec 0.5-180 sec 0.5-180 sec Current limit -- -- 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT Soft Start 2 2 Current limit time -- -- 0.5-180 sec 0.5-180 sec 0.5-180 sec Kick start current -- -- 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT 5-85% LRT Kick start time -- -- 0-2 sec 0-2 sec 0-2 sec Jog -- -- -- Yes Yes 2 Stop ramp time 0-30 sec 0-30 sec 0-60 sec 0-60 sec 0-60 sec Pump control -- -- Optional Optional Optional 2 2 Soft Stop 2 Environmental Operating temperature 0 to 40C 0 to 40C -20 to 50C -30 to 50C -30 to 50C Humidity 0-95% noncondensing 0-95% noncondensing 0-95% noncondensing 0-95% noncondensing 0-95% noncondensing Altitude <2000M <2000M <2000M <2000M <2000M 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-47 2.4 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Features DS7 Soft Start Controller 2 2 2 2 Small size Patented asymmetric delay angle control--makes torque behavior similar to a three-phase control device Integrated bypass It can take 24 Vac/Vdc or 110V/230 Vac control voltage Mechanical and electrical toolless assembly with MMPs Low cost solution compared to three-phase control devices Full UL approval 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Product Selection DS7 Soft Start Controller Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection. DS7 Soft Start Controller--Frame 1 DS7 Soft Start Controllers--Horsepower Ratings-- 10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C 1 Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Rated Allowable Allowable Current (A) 200V 230V 480V Breaker Size Fuse Size 2 3.7 2 0.75 0.75 2 HFD3015 Recommended Recommended XTOB Overload (Direct Connect) 2 XTOE Overload 2 MMP 2 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS Connection Kit to MMP XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB Catalog Number DS7-340SX004NO-N 3 DS7-342SX004NO-N 4 2 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 3 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 3 20A Class RK5 XTOB012BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR012BC1 XTPAXTPCB 6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 2 7.8 2 2 5 HFD3020 2 11 3 3 7.5 HFD3030 XTOB006BC1 1 DS7-342SX007NO-N 4 DS7-342SX009NO-N 4 DS7-340SX012NO-N 3 DS7-342SX012NO-N 4 2 15.2 2 3 5 10 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 3 DS7-342SX016NO-N 4 22 5 7.5 15 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 3 32 7.5 10 20 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB032CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR032BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 3 2 DS7-342SX024NO-N 4 2 DS7-342SX032NO-N 4 2 Notes 1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA. 2 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V. 3 24 Vac/Vdc device. 4 120/230 Vac device. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-48 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Please refer to Application Note AP03901006E for additional information on proper size selection. DS7 Soft Start Controller--Frame 1 2 DS7 Soft Start Controllers--Horsepower Ratings-- 10 Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 400% Current Limit at 40C 1 Motor Power (hp) Maximum Maximum Rated Allowable Allowable Current (A) 200V 230V 480V Breaker Size Fuse Size 3 0.5 0.5 1.5 HFD3015 2 Recommended Recommended XTOB Overload (Direct Connect) 2 XTOE Overload 2 MMP 2 15A Class RK5 XTOB004BC1 XTOE005BCS Connection Kit to MMP XTPR004BC1 XTPAXTPCB Catalog Number DS7-340SX004NO-N 3 DS7-342SX004NO-N 4 4.8 1 1 3 HFD3015 15A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX007NO-N 3 DS7-342SX007NO-N 4 6.9 1.5 2 3 HFD3020 20A Class RK5 XTOB006BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR6P3BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX009NO-N 3 DS7-342SX009NO-N 4 9 2 2 5 HFD3030 20A Class RK5 XTOB010BC1 XTOE020BCS XTPR010BC1 XTPAXTPCB DS7-340SX012NO-N 3 DS7-342SX012NO-N 4 11 3 3 7.5 HFD3035 25A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE020CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX016NO-N 3 DS7-342SX016NO-N 4 17.5 5 5 10 HFD3060 40A Class RK5 XTOB016CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR016BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX024NO-N 3 DS7-342SX024NO-N 4 22 5 7.5 15 HFD3070 50A Class RK5 XTOB024CC1 XTOE045CCS XTPR025BC1 XTPAXTPCC DS7-340SX032NO-N 3 DS7-342SX032NO-N 4 Notes 1 Actual motor FLAs vary. Verify these devices cover the motor specific FLA. 2 Selections are based on motor FLA value at 480V. 3 24 Vac/Vdc device. 4 120/230 Vac device. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-49 2.4 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Features DS6 Soft Start Controller 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Run bypass mode greatly reduces internal heating created by the power dissipation across the SCRs. The bypass contactor directly connects the motor to the line and improves system efficiency by reducing internal power losses Less heat minimizes enclosure size and cooling requirements, and maximizes the life of all devices in the enclosure LED displays device status and provides fault indication Variable ramp times and voltage control (torque control) settings provide unlimited starting configurations, allowing for maximum application flexibility Minimizes the peak inrush current's stress on the power system Minimizes peak starting torque to diminish mechanical system wear and damage Product Selection DS6 Soft Start Controller For 400% ramp, see Volume 6--Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100007E, Tab 1. DS6 Soft Start Controller--Horsepower Rating, 10-Second Ramp, One Start per Hour, 300% Current Limit at 40C 460V Maximum Allowable Breaker Size a Maximum Allowable Fuse Size 1 Recommended XTOB Overload Recommended C396 Overload Catalog Number 10 30 HFD3150L 150A Class RK5 XTOB040DC1 2 C396A2A045SELAX DS6-34DSX041N0-N 15 20 40 HFD3200L 200A Class RK5 XTOB057DC1 2 C396B2A075SELAX DS6-34DSX055N0-N 2 65 20 25 50 HJD3250 200A Class RK5 XTOB065DC1 2 C396B2A075SELAX DS6-34DSX068N0-N 77 25 30 60 HKD3300 300A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C396B2A110SELAX DS6-34DSX081N0-N 2 96 30 30 75 HKD3350 350A Class RK5 XTOB100GC1S C396B2A110SELAX DS6-34DSX099N0-N 124 40 50 100 HKD3400 500A Class RK5 XTOB125GC1S C396C2A150SELAX DS6-34DSX134N0-N 2 156 50 60 125 HLD3450 500A Class RK5 XTOB160LC1 3 C396A2A005SELAX 4 DS6-34DSX161N0-N 180 60 75 150 HLD3500 500A Class RK5 XTOB220LC1 3 C396A2A005SELAX 4 DS6-34DSX196N0-N 2 2 2 2 Motor Power (hp) Rated Current (A) 200V 230V 40 10 52 Power Supply Selection 2 Description Catalog Number 85-264V input and 24V output ELC-PS01 2 380-480V input and 24V output PSS25F 100-240 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60E 380-480 Vac input and 24 Vdc output PSG60F 2 2 2 Notes 1 Maximum values may be higher than allowed per NEC 430.52 and UL 508A 31.1. 2 XTOBXDIND panel mounting adaptor must be used with this overload. 3 XTOBXTLL line and load lugs must be used with this overload. 4 C396CTK300 current transformer must be used with this overload. 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-50 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Features S611 Soft Starter Integrated bypass Integrated electronic overload protection 120V control Power monitoring Intuitive user interface Field serviceability (control board, contactors) Pump control option Modbus RTU native Plug-and-play EtherNet IP / Modbus TCP / PROFIBUS / DeviceNet adapters Control board mounted underneath the cover High fault combination rating up to 100 kA Available in NEMA 1/12/3R/4/4X enclosures 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection S611 Soft Starter 2 Solid-State Soft Starter 2 S 611 B 125 N 3 S 2 S = Soft starter 2 S = Standard soft starter A B C D E F 2 Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole device 611 = Non-combination soft starter Frame Size = 52-77A = 99-125A = 156-180A = 242A = 302-361A = 414A 2 Options N = No options P = Pump control 2 2 Ampere Rating 052 = 52A 180 = 180A 065 = 65A 242 = 242A 077 = 77A 302 = 302A 099 = 99A 361 = 361A 125 = 125A 414 = 414A 156 = 156A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-51 2.4 2 2 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Product Selection Horsepower Ratings Note: Always refer to motor plate FLA and ensure that the motor plate FLA is equal to or lower than the maximum current value in the tables. S611 Standard Duty--300% Current for 15 Seconds, 115% Continuous Maximum Current (Amps) Horsepower Rating 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number 52 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S 2 65 20 20 50 60 S611A065N3S 77 25 25 60 75 S611A077N3S 2 99 30 30 75 100 S611B099N3S 125 40 40 100 125 S611B125N3S 2 156 50 60 125 150 S611C156N3S 180 60 60 150 150 S611C180N3S 242 75 75 200 250 S611D242N3S 2 302 100 100 250 300 S611E302N3S 361 125 150 300 350 S611E361N3S 2 414 150 150 350 450 S611F414N3S 2 2 2 Standard Duty Plus--350% FLA for 30 Seconds, 115% Continuous 2 Maximum Current (Amps) Horsepower Rating 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number 52 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S 2 65 20 20 50 60 S611A065N3S 71 20 25 60 75 S611A077N3S 2 99 30 30 75 100 S611B099N3S 119 40 40 100 125 S611B125N3S 156 50 60 125 150 S611C156N3S 180 60 60 150 150 S611C180N3S 242 75 75 200 250 S611D242N3S 2 302 100 100 250 300 S611E302N3S 361 125 150 300 350 S611E361N3S 2 407 150 150 350 400 S611F414N3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-52 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Note: Always refer to motor plate FLA and ensure that the motor plate FLA is equal to or lower than the maximum current value in the tables. S611 2 2 Heavy Duty--500% FLA for 30 Seconds, 125% Continuous Maximum Current (Amps) Horsepower Rating 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number 49 15 15 40 50 S611A052N3S 83 25 30 60 75 S611B099N3S 142 40 60 125 150 S611C156N3S 225 75 75 200 200 S611D242N3S 256 75 100 200 250 S611E361N3S 285 100 125 250 300 S611F414N3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 Severe Duty--600% FLA for 30 Seconds, 125% Continuous Maximum Current (Amps) Horsepower Rating 208V 240V 480V 600V Catalog Number 41 10 15 30 40 S611A052N3S 69 20 30 60 60 S611B099N3S 117 30 50 100 125 S611C180N3S 187 60 75 150 200 S611D242N3S 213 75 75 150 200 S611E361N3S 238 75 100 200 250 S611F414N3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 Accessories 2 Optional Accessory Kits Description S611 Current Rating Accessory Kit Part Number 2 User interface remote mounting kit --3.28 ft (1m) 52-414A S611-RMK-100 User interface remote mounting kit--6.56 ft (2m) 52-414A S611-RMK-200 2 User interface remote mounting kit--9.84 ft (3m) 52-414A S611-RMK-300 User interface communication cable--3.28 ft (1m) 52-414A D77E-QPIP100 User interface communication cable--6.56 ft (2m) 52-414A D77E-QPIP200 User interface communication cable--9.84 ft (3m) 52-414A D77E-QPIP300 Lug kit--mechanical 52-77A S611-LUG-M01 99-125A S611-LUG-M02 156-242A S611-LUG-M03 302-414A S611-LUG-M04 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-53 2.4 2 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Options Pump Control For pump control option, change the 8th digit in the Catalog Number to P, as in S611XXXP3S. 2 Replacement Parts 2 S611 Replacement Components Description Part Number 2 User interface S611-KEYPAD 2 User interface communication cable--0.25m (0.82 ft) D77E-QPIP25 Control board assembly--52A standard S611-PCB-052S 2 Control board assembly--65A standard S611-PCB-065S Control board assembly--77A standard S611-PCB-077S 2 Control board assembly--99A standard S611-PCB-099S Control board assembly--125A standard S611-PCB-125S Control board assembly--156A standard S611-PCB-156S 2 Control board assembly--180A standard S611-PCB-180S Control board assembly--242A standard S611-PCB-242S 2 Control board assembly--302A standard S611-PCB-302S Control board assembly--361A standard S611-PCB-361S 2 Control board assembly--414A standard S611-PCB-414S Control board assembly--52A pump S611-PCB-052P Control board assembly--65A pump S611-PCB-065P 2 Control board assembly--77A pump S611-PCB-077P Control board assembly--99A pump S611-PCB-099P 2 Control board assembly--125A pump S611-PCB-125P Control board assembly--156A pump S611-PCB-156P Control board assembly--180A pump S611-PCB-180P 2 Control board assembly--242A pump S611-PCB-242P Control board assembly--302A pump S611-PCB-302P 2 Control board assembly--361A pump S611-PCB-361P Control board assembly--414A pump S611-PCB-414P 2 Frame A/B CT S611-CT-AB Frame C/D CT S611-CT-CD Frame E/F CT S611-CT-EF Contactor assembly--52-180A C25DNY172 Contactor assembly--242-414A C25DNY173 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-54 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Features S801+ Soft Starters 2 Smaller size Physically fits in place of most NEMA and IEC starters Built-in run bypass contactor Built-in overload protection Adjustable ramp times Adjustable kick start control Dial and DIP switch user interface (CIM) Alarm and warning capability Analog input 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection S801+ Soft Starter 2 S801+ Open Soft Starters 12 2 S 801+ N66 N 3 S S = Soft starter 801+ = Non-combination soft starter 2 2 S = Standard soft starter N37 = N66 = R10 = R13 = T18 = T24 = T30 = U36 = U42 = Ampere Rating 37A U50 = 66A V36 = 105A V42 = 135A V50 = 180A V65 = 240A V72 = 304A V85 = 360A V10 = 420A 500A 3 360A 420A 500A 650A 720A 850A 1000A Options N = Standard 2 Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole device 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 S801+T_, S801+U_ and S801+V_ units require lug kits found on Pages V9-T2-63. 2 All units require a 24 Vdc power supply found on catalog Pages V9-T2-63, or equivalent. 3 S801+U50N3S unit does not have IEC certification. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-55 2.4 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2 Product Selection 2 Standard Duty 2 S801+ Standard Duty--15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40C, Inline Connection Three-Phase Motors kW Rating (50 Hz) 2 Max. Current 2 hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 230V 1.15SF 1.0SF 460V 1.15SF 1.0SF 575-600V 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF Catalog Number Frame Size N 2 2 37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S801+N37N3S 66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S801+N66N3S Frame Size R 2 105 30 55 59 30 25 40 30 75 60 100 75 S801+R10N3S 135 40 63 80 40 30 50 40 100 75 125 100 S801+R13N3S 2 Frame Size T 180 51 90 110 60 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S801+T18N3S 2 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801+T24N3S 304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+T30N3S 2 Frame Size U 2 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+U36N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801+U42N3S 2 500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+U50N3S 1 Frame Size V 2 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+V36N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S801+V42N3S 500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+V50N3S 2 650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801+V65N3S 720 220 400 450 -- -- 300 250 600 500 700 600 S801+V72N3S 2 850 257 475 500 -- -- 350 300 700 600 900 700 S801+V85N3S 1000 277 525 550 -- -- 400 350 800 700 900 800 S801+V10N3S 2 2 Note 1 S801+U50N3S does not have IEC certification. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-56 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 2.4 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Severe Duty S801+ 2 Severe Duty-->30 Second Ramp, >300% Current Limit 2 Three-Phase Motor kW Rating (50 Hz) Max. Current hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 230V 1.15SF 1.0SF 460V 1.15SF 1.0SF 575V 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF Catalog Number 2 2 Frame Size N 22 5.5 10 11 5 5 7-1/2 5 15 10 20 15 S801+N37N3S 42 11 18.5 22 10 10 15 10 30 25 40 30 S801+N66N3S 2 2 Frame Size R 65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S801+R10N3S 80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S801+R13N3S 2 2 Frame Size T 115 33 59 63 30 30 40 30 75 75 100 100 S801+T18N3S 150 45 80 90 50 40 50 50 100 100 150 125 S801+T24N3S 192 55 100 110 60 50 75 60 150 125 200 150 S801+T30N3S 2 2 Frame Size U 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801+U36N3S 305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+U42N3S 365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+U50N3S 2 1 Frame Size V 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S801+V36N3S 305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S801+V42N3S 365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S801+V50N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S801+V65N3S 480 147 257 295 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S801+V72N3S 525 160 280 335 150 150 200 150 450 350 500 450 S801+V85N3S 600 185 315 375 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S801+V10N3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 Note 1 S801+U50N3S unit does not have IEC certification. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-57 2.4 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Features Type S811+ Soft Starters 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 S811+ Soft Starter 2 S811+ Open Soft Starters 1 S 811+ T 30 N 3 S 2 2 2 S = Soft starter 2 2 2 2 2 2 S = Soft starter 811+ = Non-combination soft starter 2 2 Smaller size Physically fits in place of most NEMA and IEC starters Built-in run bypass contactor Built-in overload protection Adjustable ramp times Adjustable kick start control Native Modbus RTU and QCP communication kW and power factor measurement Cloning feature Alarm and warning capability Analog input Digital interface Pump control option Inside-the-delta capability 37 = 37A 66 = 66A 10 = 105A 13 = 135A 18 = 180A Frame Size 2 N = 65 mm R = 110 mm T = 200 mm U = 200 mm V = 290 mm Ampere Rating 24 = 240A 30 = 304A 36 = 360A 42 = 420A 50 = 500A 3 Options N = No options 4 P = Premium, 600V rated 5 V = Premium, 690V rated (S811+T18V35 through S811+V85V35) 67 Number of Poles 3 = Three-pole device 65 = 650A 72 = 720A 85 = 850A 10 = 1000A Notes 1 All units require a 24 Vdc power supply found on catalog Page V9-T2-63, or equivalent. 2 S811+T_, S811+U_ and S811+V_ units require lug kits found on Page V9-T2-63. 3 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification. 4 Level/Edge Sense, Inline or Inside-the-Delta wiring configuration. 5 Level/Edge Sense, Inline or Inside-the-Delta wiring configuration, pump control and extended ramp. 6 Not available in S811+U_. 7 Level/Edge Sense, Inline wiring configuration, pump control, extended ramp. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-58 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Product Selection 2 Standard Duty 2 S811+ Standard Duty--15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40C, Inline Connection 2 Three-Phase Motors kW Rating (50 Hz) Max. Current hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 230V 1.15SF 1.0SF 575-690V 1 460V 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF Catalog Number 2 2 Frame Size N 37 10 18.5 18.5 10 10 10 10 25 20 30 30 S811+N37N3S 66 18.5 30 37 20 15 20 20 50 40 60 50 S811+N66N3S 2 2 Frame Size R 105 30 55 59 30 25 40 30 75 60 100 75 S811+R10N3S 135 40 63 80 40 30 50 40 100 75 125 100 S811+R13N3S 2 50 60 60 150 125 150 150 S811+T18N3S 2 Frame Size T 180 51 90 110 60 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811+T24N3S 304 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+T30N3S Frame Size U 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811+U36N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S811+U42N3S 500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+U50N3S 2 Frame Size V 360 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 S811+V36N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 175 150 350 300 450 350 S811+V42N3S 500 150 257 300 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+V50N3S 650 200 355 425 250 200 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811+V65N3S 720 220 400 450 -- -- 300 250 600 500 700 600 S811+V72N3S 850 257 475 500 -- -- 350 300 700 600 900 700 S811+V85N3S 1000 277 525 550 -- -- 400 350 800 700 900 800 S811+V10N3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Notes 1 690V is available only from S811+T18V3S through S811+V85V3S. Not available on S811+U...V3S. 2 S811+U5O_ rating does not have IEC certification. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-59 2.4 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Severe Duty S811+ Severe Duty--30 Second Ramp and/or 450% Current Limit at 50C, Inline Connection Three-Phase Motors kW Rating (50 Hz) 2 Max. Current 2 hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 230V 575-690V 1 460V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF Catalog Number Frame Size N 2 2 22 5.5 10 11 5 5 7-1/2 5 15 10 20 15 S811+N37N3S 42 11 18.5 22 10 10 15 10 30 25 40 30 S811+N66N3S Frame Size R 2 65 15 30 33 15 15 20 15 50 40 50 50 S811+R10N3S 80 22 40 45 25 20 30 25 60 50 75 60 S811+R13N3S 2 Frame Size T 115 33 59 63 30 30 40 30 75 75 100 100 S811+T18N3S 2 150 45 80 90 50 40 50 50 100 100 150 125 S811+T24N3S 192 55 100 110 60 50 75 60 150 125 200 150 S811+T30N3S 2 Frame Size U 2 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811+U36N3S 305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+U42N3S 2 Frame Size V 240 75 110 147 75 60 75 75 200 150 200 200 S811+V36N3S 2 305 90 160 185 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+V42N3S 365 110 185 220 125 100 150 125 300 250 350 300 2 S811+V50N3S 420 129 220 257 150 125 150 150 350 300 450 350 S811+V65N3S 2 480 147 257 295 150 150 200 150 400 350 500 450 S811+V72N3S 525 160 280 335 150 150 200 150 450 350 500 450 S811+V85N3S 2 575 172 303 370 200 150 250 200 500 450 600 500 S811+V10N3S Note 1 690V is available only from S811+T18V3S through S811+V85V3S. Not available on S811+U...V3S. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-60 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Inside-the-Delta, Standard Duty S811+ 2 Standard Duty--15 Second Ramp, 300% Current Limit at 40C, Inside-the-Delta Connection 2 Three-Phase Motor Max. Continuous Motor Line Current kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 460V 575V 2 1.15SF Catalog Number 50 50 S811+N37N3S 100 75 S811+N66N3S 2 150 125 S811+R10N3S 200 150 S811+R13N3S 2 200 250 250 S811+T18N3S 300 250 300 300 S811+T24N3S 150 400 300 400 400 S811+T30N3S 2 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+U36N3S 300 250 550 450 700 550 S811+U42N3S 2 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+U50N3S 12 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+V36N3S 257 250 200 300 250 550 450 700 550 S811+V42N3S 300 250 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+V50N3S 900 750 S811+V65N3S -- -- S811+V72N3S 230V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 65 10 18.5 18.5 15 15 15 15 40 30 114 18.5 30 37 30 25 30 30 75 60 182 30 55 59 50 40 60 50 125 100 234 40 63 80 60 50 75 60 150 125 311 51 90 110 100 75 100 100 250 415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 526 90 160 185 150 125 150 623 110 185 220 200 150 727 129 220 257 250 200 865 150 257 300 250 623 110 185 220 727 129 220 865 150 257 1125 200 355 425 400 300 400 300 750 700 1246 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- 1.0SF 2 Frame Size N Frame Size R 2 2 Frame Size T Frame Size U Frame Size V 1471 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- S811+V85N3S -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- S811+V10N3S Notes 1 15 sec start, 300% inrush, 40C, 1 start every 15 minutes. If these start parameters are exceeded, please refer to S811+V50_. 2 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-61 2.4 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Inside-the-Delta, Severe Duty S811+ Severe Duty--30 Second Ramp and/or 450% Current Limit at 50C, Inside-the-Delta Connection Three-Phase Motor 2 Max. Continuous Motor Line Current 2 kW Rating (50 Hz) hp Rating (60 Hz) 200V 230V 460V 575V 230V 380-400V 440V 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF 1.0SF 1.15SF Catalog Number 2 Frame Size N 39 5.5 10 11 7-1/2 7-1/2 10 7-1/2 25 15 30 25 S811+N37N3S 2 73 11 18.5 22 15 15 25 15 50 40 60 50 S811+N66N3S 111 15 30 33 25 25 30 25 75 60 75 75 S811+R10N3S 2 138 22 40 45 40 30 50 40 100 75 120 100 S811+R13N3S 2 199 33 59 63 50 50 60 50 125 125 150 150 S811+T18N3S 257 45 80 90 75 60 75 75 150 150 250 200 S811+T24N3S 2 324 55 100 110 100 75 100 100 250 200 300 250 S811+T30N3S 415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 300 250 300 300 S811+U36N3S 2 526 90 160 185 150 120 150 150 400 300 450 400 S811+U42N3S 623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+U50N3S 1 2 Frame Size V 415 75 110 147 125 100 125 125 300 250 300 300 S811+V36N3S 2 526 90 160 185 150 120 150 150 400 300 450 400 S811+V42N3S 623 110 185 220 200 150 250 200 450 400 550 450 S811+V50N3S 727 129 220 257 250 200 250 250 550 450 700 550 S811+V65N3S 2 816 147 257 295 250 250 300 250 600 550 750 700 S811+V72N3S 908 160 280 335 250 250 300 250 700 550 750 700 S811+V85N3S 2 -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- S811+V10N3S 2 Note 1 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification. Frame Size R 2 Frame Size T Frame Size U 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-62 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters 2.4 Accessories 2 Lug Kits S811+T_, S811U_ and S811+V_ soft starters each have different lug options based on your wiring needs. Each lug kit contains three lugs that can be mounted on either the load or line side. Lug Kit 2 2 2 2 Lug Kits S811+ Catalog Number S811+T_, S811+U_ S811+V_ Description Kits Required Catalog Number 2 cable connections, 4 AWG to 1/0 cable 2 EML22 1 cable connection, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML23 2 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML24 1 cable connection, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML25 2 cable connections, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML26 2 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable 2 2 2 2 2 2 EML28 4 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML30 6 cable connections, 4/0 to 500 kcmil cable EML32 4 cable connections, 2/0 to 300 kcmil cable EML33 1 2 2 2 Power Supplies 24 Vdc power supply that can be used with the S811+ SSRV or as a stand-alone device. Power Supplies Description 85-264 Vac input 24 Vdc output 360-575 Vac input 24 Vdc output Catalog Number PSG240E PSG240F Lug Cover Kits Replacement covers for the S811+T_, S811+U_ and S811+V_ soft starters are available in case of damage to the existing covers. IP20 Kits Lug Cover Kits Description Catalog Number Lug cover S811+T_, S811+U_ EML27 Lug cover S811+V_ EML34 2 IP20 Kits Description Catalog Number S811+N_ SS-IP20-N S811+R_ SS-IP20-R S811+T_ and S811+U_ SS-IP20-TU S811+V_ SS-IP20-V 2 2 2 2 2 2 Surge Suppressors The surge suppressor can mount on either the line or load side of the soft starter. It is designed to clip the line voltage (or load side induced voltage). Surge Suppressor 2 2 2 2 Surge Suppressors Catalog Number 2 600V MOV for S811+_ units EMS39 690V MOV for S811+_ units 2 EMS41 2 Description 2 2 Notes 1 The EML33 does not have a CSA listing. 2 S811+T_ only. 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-63 2.4 Motor Control and Protection Soft Starters Mounting Plates The mounting plates are designed to help make it easy to install or retrofit the soft starter into enclosures and MCCs. The soft starter can be mounted onto the plate prior to installation. The mounting plate is designed with tear drop mounting holes for easier installation. Vibration Plates The vibration plates allow the soft starter to be applied in high shock and vibration applications. The vibration plate allows vibration up to 5g and shock in up to 40g. The soft starter is mounted onto the vibration plate prior to installation in the panel. 2 Mounting Plates Vibration Plates 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number S811+N_ EMM13N S811+N_ EMM14N S811+R_ EMM13R S811+R_ EMM14R S811+T_ and S811+U_ EMM13T S811+T_ and S811+U_ EMM14T S811+V_ EMM13V S811+V_ EMM14V Adapter Plates The adapter plate allows customers to retrofit a S811+V_ soft starter with the S811+U_ soft starter. Adapter Plates Description Catalog Number Adapter plates EMM13U Control Wire Connector Control Wire Connector Catalog Number Description 12-pin, 5 mm pitch connector EMA75 for control wiring 2 2 2 Options S811+ Premium In addition to what is already there in the S811+ standard, these devices offer pump control and extended ramp functions. S811+ Premium 690V Option In addition to what is already there in S811+ standard, this product offers 690V, pump control and extended ramp functions. S811+ Premium S811+ Premium 690V Option Current Range Catalog Number Current Range Catalog Number Cooling Fan Kit 11-37 S811+N37P3S 56-180 S811+T18V3S Description Catalog Number 20-66 S811+N66P3S 75-240 S811+T24V3S Fan kit EMM18 32-105 S811+R10P3S 95-304 S811+T30V3S 42-135 S811+R13P3S 112-360 S811+V36V3S 2 56-180 S811+T18P3S 131-420 S811+V42V3S 75-240 S811+T24P3S 156-500 S811+V50V3S 2 95-304 S811+T30P3S 203-650 S811+V65V3S 112-360 S811+U36P3S 225-720 S811+V72V3S 2 131-420 S811+U42P3S 265-850 S811+V85V3S 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 156-500 S811+U50P3S 112-360 S811+V36P3S 2 131-420 S811+V42P3S 156-500 S811+V50P3S 2 203-650 S811+V65P3S 225-720 S811+V72P3S 265-850 S811+V85P3S 312-1000 S811+V10P3S 2 2 2 2 Cooling Fan Kit The EMM18 cooling fan kit mounts on either side of any frame size S811+ soft starter to provide additional printed circuit board cooling in high ambient operating temperatures. 1 Note 1 S811+U50_ unit does not have IEC certification. 2 2 V9-T2-64 Digital Interface Module The Digital Interface Module (DIM) is available as a replacement part. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com DIM Description Catalog Number Blank cover (filler) EMA68 DIM for standard unit EMA91 Panel mounting kit 3 ft cable EMA69A 5 ft cable EMA69B 8 ft cable EMA69C 10 ft cable EMA69D Motor Control and Protection Drives 2.5 Product Overview 2 Drives Selection Guide 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Description M-Max Machinery Drives SVX9000 Drives Page V9-T2-66 Page V9-T2-68 2 2 Frame FS1 FS2 FS3 FR4 FR5 FR6 FR7 FR8 FR9 2 Height 6.16 7.68 10.33 12.9 16.5 2.2 24.8 30.1 45.3 Width 2.58 3.54 3.94 5 5.6 7.6 9.3 11.5 18.9 2 Depth 4.02 4.13 4.41 7.5 8.4 9.3 10.1 13.5 13.4 Dimensions (in Inches) 2 I/O Six digital inputs Two analog inputs (V and mA) One analog output One digital output Two relay outputs RS-485 interface (Modbus RTU) 2 Six digital inputs Two analog inputs (V and mA) Two digital outputs, form C relays One digital output, open collector One analog output Varied communication options 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-65 2.5 2 Motor Control and Protection Drives Features M-Max Machinery Drive 2 2 2 2 2 Ease of use--plug and play, start-up wizard, advanced diagnostic capability, copy/paste parameters without powering drive Compact, space-saving design Availability--short lead-times, stocked at multiple locations Aftermarket support organization with industry-leading drive specialists for pre- and post-sale support Rugged and reliable--50C rating, 150% overload for one min., 200% starting current for two secs. in every 20 sec. period, conformal coated boards, two year warranty RoHS compliance 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 M-MaxTM Machinery Drive 2 Machinery Drive MMX 1 1 AA 1D1 F 1 - 0 2 2 Base Catalog Number Phase 1 = Single-phase 3 = Three-phase 2 Enclosure Class 0 = NEMA 0 or IP00 1 = IP21 or NEMA 1 2 Voltage 1 = 115V 4 = 480V 2 = 230V 2 Software Designation Series AA Output Current 1D6 = 1.6A 010 = 10A EMC Filter F = Filter N = No filter 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-66 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Option 0 = Full version 2.5 Motor Control and Protection Drives Product Selection 2 M-Max Machinery Drive P (kW) P (hp) IN (A) Catalog Number P (kW) P (hp) IN (A) Catalog Number Input 115V Single-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase Input 480V Three-Phase Out 480V Three-Phase 0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX11AA1D7N0-0 0.37 1.3 MMX34AA1D3F0-0 0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX11AA2D4N0-0 0.55 0.75 1.9 MMX34AA1D9F0-0 0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX11AA2D8N0-0 0.75 1 2.4 MMX34AA2D4F0-0 0.75 1 3.7 MMX11AA3D7N0-0 1.1 1.5 3.3 MMX34AA3D3F0-0 1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX11AA4D8F0-0 1.5 2 4.3 MMX34AA4D3F0-0 2.2 3 5.6 MMX34AA5D6F0-0 0.5 Input 230V Single-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase 0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX12AA1D7F0-0 3 4 7.6 MMX34AA7D6F0-0 0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX12AA2D4F0-0 4 5.5 9 MMX34AA9D0F0-0 0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX12AA2D8F0-0 5.5 7.5 12 MMX34AA012F0-0 0.75 1 3.7 MMX12AA3D7F0-0 7.5 10 14 MMX34AA014F0-0 1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX12AA4D8F0-0 Input 575V Three-Phase Out 575V Three-Phase 1.5 2 7 MMX12AA7D0F0-0 1 1.7 2 MMX35AA1D7N0-0 2.2 3 9.6 MMX12AA9D6F0-0 2 2.7 3.6 MMX35AA2D7N0-0 3 3.9 5 MMX35AA3D9N0-0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Input 230V Three-Phase Out 230V Three-Phase 0.25 0.33 1.7 MMX32AA1D7N0-0 5 6.1 7.6 MMX35AA6D1N0-0 0.37 0.5 2.4 MMX32AA2D4N0-0 7.5 9 10.4 MMX35AA9D0N0-0 0.55 0.75 2.8 MMX32AA2D8N0-0 0.75 1 3.7 MMX32AA3D7N0-0 1.1 1.5 4.8 MMX32AA4D8F0-0 1.5 2 7 MMX32AA7D0F0-0 2.2 3 11 MMX32AA011F0-0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Accessories 2 Kits Description Catalog Number Drive to PC communication module MMX-COM-PC Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 1 MMX-IP21-FS1 Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 2 MMX-IP21-FS2 Type 1 and IP21 kit for Frame 3 MMX-IP21-FS3 2 2 2 2 2 Optional Communication Modules Description Catalog Number Communication adapter kit MMX-NET-XA CANopen network card XMX-NET-CO-A PROFIBUS DP network card with serial connection XMX-NET-PS-A PROFIBUS DP network card with sub-D connection XMX-NET-PD-A DeviceNet network card XMX-NET-DN-A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-67 2.5 2 Motor Control and Protection Drives Features SVX9000 Drives 2 2 2 2 2 2 Integrated 3% line reactors standard on drives from FR4 through FR9 EMI/RFI filters standard up to 200 hp IH 480V, 100 hp IH 230V Quick start wizard built into the programming of the drive ensures a smooth start-up LOCAL/REMOTE operation from keypad Copy/paste function allows transfer of parameter settings from one drive to the next Standard Type 12 keypad on all drives Hand-held auxiliary 240V power supply allows programming/ monitoring of control module without applying full power to the drive 2 2 Catalog Number Selection 2 SVX9000 Drives 2 SVX9000 SVX 010 A 1 - 4 A 1 B 1 2 _ _ _ _ _ _ 2 2 Product Family SVX = Open drives SVX = Open drives FR10 and greater Board Modifications 1 = Standard boards 2 = Conformal (varnished) coating 2 2 2 2 2 2 F07 F15 007 010 050 125 350 700 Horsepower Rating = 3/4 hp 800 = 800 hp = 1-1/2 hp 900 = 900 hp = 7-1/2 hp H10 = 1000 hp = 10 hp H12 = 1200 hp = 50 hp H13 = 1350 hp = 125 hp H15 = 1500 hp = 350 hp H16 = 1600 hp = 700 hp H20 = 2000 hp 2 2 2 Keypad A = Alphanumeric Enclosure 12 0 = Chassis 1 = NEMA Type 1 2 = NEMA Type 12 2 2 Input Options 3 1 = Three-phase, EMC H 2 = Three-phase, EMC N 4 = Three-phase, EMC L AFD Software Series A = Standard software 2 2 Brake Chopper Options 4 N = No brake chopper circuit B = Internal brake chopper circuit Voltage Rating 2 = 230 (208-240) V 4 = 480 (380-500) V 5 = 575 (525-690) V Options Options appear in alphabetical order. Extended I/O Card Options B1 = 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc B2 = 1 RO (NC-NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm B4 = 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT + 24 Vdc B5 = 3 RO (NO) B8 = 1 ext +24 Vdc/EXT +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B9 = 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42-240 Vac input Communication Cards CA = Johnson Controls(R) N2 CI = Modbus TCP CJ = BACnet(R) CK = Ethernet IP C2 = Modbus C3 = PROFIBUS DP C4 = LonWorks(R) C5 = PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) C6 = CANopen (slave) C7 = DeviceNet C8 = Modbus (D9 Type connector) D3 = RS-232 with D9 connection Notes 1 480V drives 250 hp (IH) and larger are available with enclosure style 0 (chassis); 690V drives 200 hp (IH) and larger are available with enclosure style 0 (chassis). 2 480V and 690V FR10 freestanding drives are available with enclosure style 1 (NEMA Type 1) and enclosure style 2 (NEMA Type 12). FR11 freestanding drives only available with enclosure style 1 (NEMA Type 1). 3 All 230V drives and 480V drives up to 200 hp (IH) are only available with input option 1 (EMC level H). 480V drives 250 hp (IH) or larger are available with input option 2 (EMC level N). 480V drives are available with input option 4 (EMC level L). 575V drives 200 hp (IH) or larger are only available with input option 2. 575V drives up to 150 hp (IH) are only available with input option 4 (EMC level L). 4 480V drives up to 30 hp (IH) are only available with brake chopper option B. 480V drives 40 hp (IH) or larger come standard with brake chopper option N. 230V drives up to 15 hp (IH) are only available with brake chopper option B. 230V drives 20 hp or larger come standard with brake chopper option N. All 575V drives come standard without brake chopper option (N). N = No brake chopper. 2 2 2 V9-T2-68 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Drives 2.5 Product Selection 2 208-240V, Type 1 Drive 525-690V, Type 1 Drive Frame Size Delivery Code hp (IH) Current (IH) hp (IL) Current (IL) FR4 W 3/4 3.7 1 4.8 1 4.8 1-1/2 6.6 1-1/2 6.6 2 7.8 2 7.8 3 3 11 -- -- 12.5 5 5 17.5 7-1/2 25 FR5 FR6 FR7 FR8 FR9 W W W W W 2 Catalog Number Frame Size Delivery Code hp (IH) Current (IH) hp (IL) Current (IL) Catalog Number SVXF07A1-2A1B1 FR6 W 2 3.33 3 4.5 SVX002A1-5A4N1 SVX001A1-2A1B1 3 4.5 -- 5.5 SVX003A1-5A4N1 SVXF15A1-2A1B1 -- 5.5 5 7.5 SVX004A1-5A4N1 11 SVX002A1-2A1B1 5 7.5 7-1/2 10 SVX005A1-5A4N1 12.5 SVX003A1-2A1B1 7-1/2 10 10 13.5 SVX007A1-5A4N1 17.5 SVX004A1-2A1B1 10 13.5 15 18 SVX010A1-5A4N1 7-1/2 25 SVX005A1-2A1B1 15 18 20 22 SVX015A1-5A4N1 10 31 SVX007A1-2A1B1 20 22 25 27 SVX020A1-5A4N1 25 27 30 34 SVX025A1-5A4N1 30 34 40 41 SVX030A1-5A4N1 40 41 50 52 SVX040A1-5A4N1 10 31 15 48 SVX010A1-2A1B1 15 48 20 61 SVX015A1-2A1B1 20 61 25 75 SVX020A1-2A1N1 25 75 30 88 SVX025A1-2A1N1 30 88 40 114 SVX030A1-2A1N1 FR7 FR8 W W 50 52 60 62 SVX050A1-5A4N1 60 62 75 80 SVX060A1-5A4N1 75 80 100 100 SVX075A1-5A4N1 100 100 125 125 SVX100A1-5A4N1 40 114 50 140 SVX040A1-2A1N1 50 140 60 170 SVX050A1-2A1N1 60 170 75 205 SVX060A1-2A1N1 125 125 150 144 SVX125A1-5A4N1 75 205 100 261 SVX075A1-2A1N1 150 144 -- 170 SVX150A1-5A4N1 100 261 -- -- SVX100A1-2A1N1 -- 170 200 208 SVX175A1-5A4N1 FR9 W 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 380-500V, Type 1 Drive 2 Frame Size Delivery Code hp (IH) Current (IH) hp (IL) Current (IL) Catalog Number FR4 W 1 2.2 1-1/2 3.3 SVX001A1-4A1B1 FR5 FR6 FR7 FR8 FR9 W W W W W 1-1/2 3.3 2 4.3 SVXF15A1-4A1B1 2 4.3 3 5.6 SVX002A1-4A1B1 3 5.6 5 7.6 SVX003A1-4A1B1 5 7.6 -- 9 SVX005A1-4A1B1 -- 9 7-1/2 12 SVX006A1-4A1B1 7-1/2 12 10 16 SVX007A1-4A1B1 10 16 15 23 SVX010A1-4A1B1 15 23 20 31 SVX015A1-4A1B1 20 31 25 38 SVX020A1-4A1B1 25 38 30 46 SVX025A1-4A1B1 30 46 40 61 SVX030A1-4A1B1 40 61 50 72 SVX040A1-4A1N1 50 72 60 87 SVX050A1-4A1N1 60 87 75 105 SVX060A1-4A1N1 75 105 100 140 SVX075A1-4A1N1 100 140 125 170 SVX100A1-4A1N1 125 170 150 205 SVX125A1-4A1N1 150 205 200 261 SVX150A1-4A1N1 200 245 250 300 SVX200A1-4A1N1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-69 2.5 2 2 2 Motor Control and Protection Drives Accessories Option Board Kits Option Kit Description 1 Allowed Slot Locations 2 Field Installed Catalog Number Factory Installed Option Designator SVX Ready Programs Basic Standard I/O Cards 2 2 RO (NC/NO) B OPTA2 -- X 6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1AO, 1 +10 Vdc Ref, 2 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc A OPTA9 -- X 2 Extended I/O Card Options 2 RO, therm--SPX only B OPTA3 A3 -- 2 Encoder low volt +5V/15V/24V--SPX only C OPTA4 A4 -- 2 Encoder high volt +15V/24V--SPX only C OPTA5 A5 -- Double encoder--SPX only C OPTA7 A7 X 2 6 DI, 1 DO, 2 AI, 1 AO--SPX only A OPTA8 A8 -- 3 DI (encoder 10-24V), out +15V/+24V, 2 DO (pulse+direction)--SPX only C OPTAE AE X 2 6 DI, 1 ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc B, C, D, E OPTB1 B1 -- 1 RO (NC/NO), 1 RO (NO), 1 therm B, C, D, E OPTB2 B2 -- 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 AI (mA isolated), 2 AO (mA isolated), 1 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc B, C, D, E OPTB4 B4 X 3 RO (NO) B, C, D, E OPTB5 B5 -- 1 Ext +24 Vdc/Ext +24 Vdc, 3 Pt100 B, C, D, E OPTB8 B8 -- 1 RO (NO), 5 DI 42-240 Vac input B, C, D, E OPTB9 B9 -- Communication Cards Modbus D, E OPTC2 C2 X Johnson Controls N2 3 D, E OPTC2 CA -- Modbus TCP D, E OPTCI CI X BACnet D, E OPTCJ CJ X Ethernet IP D, E OPTCK CK X PROFIBUS DP D, E OPTC3 C3 X LonWorks D, E OPTC4 C4 X PROFIBUS DP (D9 connector) D, E OPTC5 C5 X DeviceNet D, E OPTC7 C7 X Modbus (D9 type connector) D, E OPTC8 C8 X Adapter--SPX only D, E OPTD1 D1 X Adapter--SPX only D, E OPTD2 D2 X RS-232 with D9 connection D, E OPTD3 D3 X 9000X series local/remote keypad (replacement keypad) -- KEYPAD-LOC/REM -- -- 2 9000X series remote mount keypad unit (keypad not included, includes 10 ft cable, keypad holder, mounting hardware) -- OPTRMT-KIT-9000X -- -- 2 9000X Series RS-232 cable, 13 ft -- PP00104 -- -- 2 2 2 2 2 Keypad Notes 1 AI = Analog Input; AO = Analog Output, DI = Digital Input, DO = Digital Output, RO = Relay Output. 2 Option card must be installed in one of the slots listed for that card. Slot indicated in bold is the preferred location. 3 OPTC2 is a multi-protocol option card. 2 2 2 2 2 V9-T2-70 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Motor Control and Protection Drives 2.5 Miscellaneous Options Description Catalog Number 9000XDrive A PC-based tool for controlling and monitoring of the SVX9000. Features include: loading parameters that can be saved to a file or printed, setting references, starting and stopping the motor, monitoring signals in graphical or text form, and real-time display. To avoid damage to the drive or computer, SVDrivecable must be used. 9000XDRIVE SVDrivecable 6 ft (1.8m) RS-232 cable (22 gauge) with a 7-pin connector on each end. Should be used in conjunction with the 9000XDrive option to avoid damage to the SVX9000 or computer. The same cable can be used for downloading specialized applications to the drive. SVDRIVECABLE 2 2 2 2 2 2 NEMA Type 12 Conversion Kit 2 Note: The NEMA Type 12 kit option is used to convert a NEMA Type 1 to a NEMA Type 12 drive. The NEMA Type 12 kit consists of a metal drive shroud, fan kit for some frames, adapter plate and plugs. Frame Size Delivery Code Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Length Width FR4 W 13 (330) FR5 W 16 (406) FR6 W 21 (533) Height Approximate Weight in lb (kg) Catalog Number 7 (178) 4 (102) 4 (1.8) OPTN12FR4 8 (203) 7 (178) 5 (2.3) OPTN12FR5 10 (254) 5 (127) 7 (3.2) OPTN12FR6 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T2-71 Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Relays Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Block Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Plug-In Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Type AA Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XTRE Control Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solid-State Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TR Series Timing Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easy Programmable Relay 3.2 V9-T3-2 V9-T3-8 V9-T3-9 V9-T3-23 V9-T3-24 V9-T3-26 V9-T3-29 Programmable Controllers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fusion Integrated Machine Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easy Programmable Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV Series HMI-PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T3-33 V9-T3-36 V9-T3-37 V9-T3-41 V9-T3-42 V9-T3-44 V9-T3-46 XC152 PLCs 3.3 Preset Counters Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 3.5 3.7 Hour Meters V9-T3-52 V9-T3-53 V9-T3-54 V9-T3-55 V9-T3-56 V9-T3-57 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-58 V9-T3-59 V9-T3-60 V9-T3-61 V9-T3-62 Encoders Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shaft Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 3 Totalizers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromechanical Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers . . . . . . . . . Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preset Counters V9-T3-51 Hour Meters Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromechanical Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic LCD Hour Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 V9-T3-50 Ratemeters Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV HMI-PLCs V9-T3-49 3 V9-T3-63 V9-T3-64 3 3 3 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E 3 3 Encoders 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-1 3.1 3 3 Logic Devices Relays Product Overview Relays Selection Guide 3 3 3 Description 3 3 Approvals 3 Features 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 D1 Series D2 Series Page V9-T3-8 Page V9-T3-9 Page V9-T3-11 Pluggable relay allows easy field replacement, LED indicator standard, functional plug-in bridges available Polycarbonate cover Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel and DIN mounting Panel, DIN and flange mounting Only 6.2 mm wide for SP and 14 mm wide for DP 3 3 XR Series Terminal Block Relays Latching DIN rail mounting Contact Data Configuration SPDT DPDT OctoCoupler SPDT DPDT DPDT Latching 4PDT Maximum allowable load 6A or 10A 6A 2A 20A 10A 10A 10A Material -- Silver alloy Silver alloy Dielectric strength between poles -- 1500V 1500V AC 24 Vac or 120 Vac 6-240 Vac 6-240 Vac DC 12, 24, 110 Vdc 6-110 Vdc 6-110 Vdc Coil Data Power VA (Vac) 1.5 0.9 VA 1.2 VA Watts (Vdc) 0.12 0.7 Watts 0.9 Watts Storage -- -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Operational -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) Available upon request 20 milliseconds 20 milliseconds Mechanical operations 20 million 10 million 10 million Electrical operations -- 100,000 200,000 General Data Ambient temperature Response time Life For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.1 Logic Devices Relays Relays Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Description D3 Series D4 Series D5 Series Page V9-T3-13 Page V9-T3-15 Page V9-T3-16 3 3 Approvals Features 3 Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel and DIN mounting Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp available Panel and DIN mounting Socket has built-in hold-down spring Polycarbonate cover Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel, DIN and PC board mounting 8- or 11-pin octal plug-in 3 3 Latching (D3PR version) Contact Data Configuration 3 DPDT 3PDT SPDT DPDT DPDT 3PDT 16A 16A 10A at 250 Vac 5A at 240 Vac 16A 16A 3 Maximum allowable load 16A Material Silver alloy AgCdO Silver alloy Dielectric strength between poles 1500V 5000V 1500V 3 AC 6-240 Vac 6-240 Vac 6-240 Vac 3 DC 6-110 Vdc 6-110 Vdc 6-110 Vdc 3 VA (Vac) 3 VA,1.4 Watts (D3PRand DPF) 0.9 VA 3 VA Watts (Vdc) 2 VA 1.64 Watts (D3PR5 latching) 0.5 Watts 1.4 Watts 3 3 Coil Data Power 3 General Data Ambient temperature 3 Storage -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Operational -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) -40 to 158F (-40 to 70C) -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) 20 milliseconds 15 milliseconds 206 milliseconds 3 Mechanical operations 5 million (D3PR and D3PF) 10 million (D3PR5 latching) 10 million 5 million 3 Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100,000 3 Response time Life For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-3 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Relays Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 3 Description 3 Approvals 3 Features 3 3 3 D7 Series D8 Series D9 Series Page V9-T3-18 Page V9-T3-20 Page V9-T3-22 Polycarbonate cover Dust cover Dust cover Indicator lamp and pushbutton available Panel, DIN and flange mounting Pushbutton available Panel, DIN and flange mounting Quick-connect and screw terminals Panel mounting Screw terminals Contact Data Configuration 4PST SPDT DPDP 3PDT 4PDT SPST-NO DPST-NO NO NC 3 Maximum allowable load 20A 15A 15A 15A 30A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 25A at 220 Vac 8A at 220 Vac 3 Material Silver alloy AgCdO AgCdO Dielectric strength between poles 1500V 1500V 2500V 2500V 4000V 4000V 3 Coil Data AC 6-240 Vac 6-240 Vac 24-240 Vac 3 DC 6-110 Vdc 12-24 Vdc 12-110 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Power VA (Vac) 1.2 VA 1.2 VA 1.5 VA 1.5 VA 2.5 VA 2.6 VA Watts (Vdc) 0.9 Watts 0.9 Watts 1.4 Watts 1.5 Watts 1.9 Watts 2.0 Watts -4 to 185F (-20 to 85C) -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) General Data Ambient temperature Storage -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) Operational -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) -4 to 131F (-20 to 55C) -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) 20 milliseconds (30 milliseconds for latching) 30 milliseconds 50 milliseconds Mechanical operations 10 million 5 million 1 million Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100,000 Response time Life 100,000 200,000 200,000 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Relays Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Description Type AA Series XTRE Series D93 Series Page V9-T3-23 Page V9-T3-24 Page V9-T3-26 3 3 Approvals Features 3 Available blowout magnets for high DC switching Four-pole configurations Available auxiliary switches Positively driven contacts between the relay and auxiliary contact modules as well as within the auxiliary contact modules Combo head screws for simple hook-up Riveted construction for long service life IP20 finger and back-of-hand proof All solid-state circuitry with no moving parts to wear 3 Compact, panel mounting for flexible installation 3 Isolated input and output terminals to protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry to protect the SSR from transients Contact Data 3 3 Configuration DPDT NO-NC variations in a four-pole relay plus four-pole auxiliary module SPST-NO (Triac, Zero-cross or MOSFET) Maximum allowable load 40A 16A 10-75A Material Silver cadmium oxide, gold flashed -- -- 3 Dielectric strength between pole 1500V 6000 Vac 4000 Vac 3 AC 6-600 Vac 12-600 Vac 90-280 Vac DC 6-220 Vdc 24-240 Vdc 3-32 Vdc 3 VA (Vac) 10 VA 3.3 VA Available upon request 3 Watts (Vdc) 4 Watts 3 Watts Available upon request -40 to 185F (-40 to 85C) -40 to 176 (-40 to 80C) -40 to 100C 3 3 Coil Data Power 3 General Data 3 Ambient temperature Storage Operational -40 to 131F (-40 to 55C) -13 to 140F (-25 to 60C) -40 to 80C 35/50 milliseconds 12/31 milliseconds Available upon request Mechanical operations -- 20 million -- Electrical operations 6000 100,000 -- Response time 3 3 Life 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-5 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Relays Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Description D96 Series D99 Series Universal TR Series Page V9-T3-27 Page V9-T3-28 Page V9-T3-29 All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear 3 Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs) 3 Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Universal input voltages from 12 or 24-240 Vac or Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil voltages Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Compact, DIN rail mountable case reduces panel size Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients Advanced LED indication makes troubleshooting easy 3 3 Approvals 3 Features 3 3 Staggered terminal locations allow access to lower-level terminals after wiring 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 SPDT or DPDT contacts with 8A ratings Contact Data Configuration SPST-NO (DC switch, zero-cross or random) SPST-NO (zero cross) SPDT and DPDT Maximum allowable load 8-15A 10-40A 8A Material -- -- -- Dielectric strength between pole 2500 (4000 on random) Vac 4000 Vac -- AC 90-280 Vac 90-280 Vac 24-240 Vac SPDT, 12-240 Vac DPDT DC 3-32 Vdc (3.5-32 Vdc on DC switch) 3-32 Vdc 24-240 Vdc SPDT, 12-240 Vdc DPDT Coil Data Power VA (Vac) Available upon request Available upon request 4 VA SPDT, 6 VA DPDT Watts (Vdc) Available upon request Available upon request 1.5 Watts SPDT, 2W DPDT General Data Ambient temperature Storage -40 to 100C -40 to 100C -25 to 70C Operational -30 to 80C -30 to 80C -25 to 55C Available upon request Available upon request 100 ms Mechanical operations -- -- 20,000,000 Electrical operations -- -- 200,000 Response time Life For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Relays Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Description TMR5 Series TMR6 Series TMRP Series Page V9-T3-30 Page V9-T3-31 Page V9-T3-32 3 3 Approvals Features 3 Various configurations available with fixed or adjustable time delays Provides OFF delay function without requiring input voltage during OFF time delay Single operating voltage for simple set-up Duplicates operation of pneumatic OFF delay timers Plugs in standard 8- or 11-pin octal sockets Each unit has eight timing ranges built in, covering 0.05 seconds to 30 minutes Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs) Universal input voltages from 12-240 Vac/Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil voltages Selecting a range is easy using a rotary switch (no math is required or DIP switches to set) Timing ranges up to 9990 hours Uses industry-standard 8-pin octal socket Flexible design for backpanel, through-panel (45 mm x 45 mm cutout), or DIN rail mounting 10A DPDT output contacts Dual LED indication makes troubleshooting easy 3 3 3 3 SPDT or DPDT contacts with 12A ratings 3 Plastic dust cover keeps out contaminants and eliminates accidental set point changes 3 Use with standard Eaton D3 sockets 3 3 Contact Data Configuration DPDT DPDT SPDT and DPDT Maximum allowable load 10A 10A 12A Material -- -- -- Dielectric strength between pole 2000V 2000V -- AC 12-240 Vac 24, 120 or 240 Vac 12-240 Vac DC 12-240 Vdc 24, 120 or 240 Vdc 12-240 Vdc VA (Vac) 2 VA 2 VA 2.5 VA Watts (Vdc) -- -- 2 Watts Storage -- -- -40 to 85C Operational -4 to 149F (-20 to 65C) -18 to 150F (-28 to 65C) -10 to 55C 100 milliseconds -- 25 milliseconds 3 Mechanical operations 10 million 2,000,000 10 million Electrical operations 100,000 100,000 100000 3 3 3 Coil Data 3 3 Power 3 General Data 3 Ambient temperature Response time 3 Life For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-7 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features Terminal Block Relays 3 3 Pluggable relay allows for field replacement Functional plug-in bridges LED status indication Only 6.2 mm wide for single pole versions, 14 mm wide for double pole 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 Terminal Block Relays 3 Terminal Block Relays XR U 1 D120 G 3 3 Type XR = XR Terminal block relay 3 3 3 3 3 Connection Type U = Screw P = Spring-cage Number of Poles 1 = 1 PDT 2 = 2 PDT Coil Voltage D12 = 12 Vdc D1204 = 120 Vac/110 Vdc D24 = 27 Vdc D246 = 24 Vac/Vdc Size G = Yes Blank = No Product Selection Standard Terminal Block Relays Rated Current Supply Voltage Standard Pack Catalog Number No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU1D12 3 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120U Yes 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU1D120UG 3 No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU1D24 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24U 3 Yes 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU1D24UG 3 Contacts 1PDT Screw Connection 3 1PDT Spring-Cage Connection No 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRP1D12 3 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRP1D120U No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRP1D24 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRP1D24U 6A 12 Vdc 10 XRU2D12 3 3 DPDT Screw Connection No 3 No 6A 120 Vac/110 Vdc 10 XRU2D120U No 6A 24 Vdc 10 XRU2D24 3 No 6A 24 Vac/Vdc 10 XRU2D24U 3 3 V9-T3-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D1 Series Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents The contact operation can be easily checked by push-to-test button Panel and DIN rail mounting Flag indicator shows relay status in manual or powered condition LED status lamp shows coil "ON" or "OFF" status--ideal for use in low light applications Push-to-test button allows for manual operation of relay without the need for coil power Lock-down door holds pushbutton and contacts in the operate position when activated Finger-grip cover allows operator to remove relays from sockets easily ID tag/write label to identify relays in multiple-relay circuits Bi-polar LED allows for reverse polarity applications 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 D1 Series 1 3 3 D1PF 1 A A Family Type D1PR = Standard relay D1PF = Full-featured relay Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT Standard Features = LED, test button, flag indicator, flange mounting, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, I.D. tag Blank = Mechanical flag indicator A 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-9 3.1 3 3 Logic Devices Relays Product Selection General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D1PR/D1PF Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 3 6 Vac SPDT 12.2 D1PF1AP 6 Vac 6 Vdc SPDT 47 SPDT 12.2 D1PR1P D1PF1AP1 6 Vac SPDT 47 3 12 Vac SPDT D1PR1P1 46 D1PF1AR 12 Vac SPDT 46 12 Vdc D1PR1R SPDT 188 D1PF1AR1 12 Vac SPDT 188 3 D1PR1R1 24 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 180 D1PF1AT 24 Vac SPDT 750 D1PR1T1 3 24 Vdc SPDT 750 D1PF1AT1 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PR1W 48 Vac SPDT 720 D1PF1AW 48 Vac SPDT 2,600 D1PR1W1 3 48 Vdc SPDT 2,600 D1PF1AW1 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PR1A1 110 Vdc SPDT 13,800 D1PF1AA1 120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4,430 D1PR1A 3 120 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 4,430 D1PF1AA 240 Vac SPDT 15,270 D1PR1B 240 Vac 50/60 Hz SPDT 15,720 D1PF1AB 3 3 Coil Voltage Full Featured Plain Cover 3 Accessories 3 D1PR/D1PF Socket and Accessories 3 Type 3 3 Standard Pack Catalog Number Socket 10 D1PAA Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D11 Metal spring clip 25 PMC-1781 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-10 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D2 Series Ultra-high sensitivity relay with quick response Designed small, two-pole type break 5A load and four-pole type, 3A load High reliability, long life Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting Small size 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 D2 Series 1 3 3 D2PF 2 A A Family Type D2PF D2PR Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT 4 = 4PDT 5 = DPDT latching Standard Features Blank = Plain cover (only with D2PR) A = LED, test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (only with D2PF) 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 D2PF/D2PR Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Socket Clip D2PR2 D2PF2 D2PAL PWC-D24 D2PR4 D2PF4 3 3 PQC-1782 D2PA6 PQC-1342 D2PAP PWC-D24 3 3 PQC-1782 D2PA7 PWC-D24 3 PQC-1782 D2PR5 D2PA6 PQC-1342 D2PA4 PYC-A1 3 3 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-11 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D2PR/D2PF Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Coil Voltage Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D2PF2AP 6 Vdc 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PF2AP1 12 Vdc DPDT 40 D2PR2P1 DPDT 160 12 Vac DPDT 46 D2PF2AR 24 Vac D2PR2R1 DPDT 180 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D2PF2AR1 D2PR2T 24 Vdc DPDT 650 24 Vac DPDT 180 D2PR2T1 D2PF2AT 48 Vdc DPDT 2,600 3 24 Vdc DPDT D2PR2W1 650 D2PF2AT1 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 48 Vdc DPDT D2PR2A1 2,600 D2PF2AW1 120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D2PR2A 3 110/125 Vdc 120 Vac DPDT 11,000 D2PF2AA1 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D2PR2B DPDT 4,430 D2PF2AA 6 Vac 4PDT 9.6 3 220/240 Vac D2PR4P DPDT 15,720 D2PF2AB 6 Vdc 4PDT 40 D2PR4P1 12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PF4AR 12 Vac 4PDT 46 D2PR4R 12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PF4AR1 12 Vdc 4PDT 160 D2PR4R1 3 24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PF4AT 24 Vac 4PDT 180 D2PR4T 24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PF4AT1 24 Vdc 4PDT 650 D2PR4T1 3 48 Vdc 4PDT 2,600 D2PF4AW1 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PR4A1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Coil Voltage Full Featured Style Plain Cover Style 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 11,000 D2PF4AA1 120 Vac 4PDT 4,430 D2PR4A 120 Vac 4PDT 4,430 D2PF4AA 220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PR4B 220/240 Vac 4PDT 15,720 D2PF4AB 3 Accessories 3 D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories 3 Type Standard Pack Catalog Number Socket 1 D2PAL 1 Socket 10 D2PA6 Socket 1 D2PAP 1 Socket 10 D2PA7 1 Socket 5 D2PA4 Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D2D72 Plastic ejector clip 10 PWC-D24 3 Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1782 Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1342 3 Hold-down spring 100 PYC-A1 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529 IP20. 3 3 3 3 Contact Configuration 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D3 Series Compact relay capable of breaking relatively large load currents The contact operation can be easily checked by push-to-test button Panel and DIN rail mounting 8- or 11-pin octal plug-in 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection General Purpose Plug-In Relays 3 D3 Series 1 3 3 D3PR 2 3 A Family Type D3PR = Standard relay D3PF = Full-featured relay Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT (8-pin) 3 = 3PDT (11-pin) 5 = DPDT latching (11-pin) 2 Options Blank = Plain cover relay (only with D3PR) A = LED, test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (D3FF only) 1 = Indicating Light (D3PR only) 3 Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vac W1 = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 D3 Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Socket Clip D3PR2 D3PF2 D3PA6 PQC-1332 D3PAL8 PQC-1351 D3PA2 PQC-1351 D3PA7 PQC-1332 D3PAL11 PQC-1351 D3PA3 PQC-1351 D3PA7 PQC-1351 D3PAL11 PQC-1351 D3PA3 PQC-1351 D3PR3 D3PF3 D3PR5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Notes 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 2 D3PR only. 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-13 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D3PR/D2PF Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Coil Voltage 120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D3PF2AA 6 Vdc 240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D3PF2AB 12 Vac 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D3PF2AR1 12 Vdc 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PF2AT1 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 3 120 Vac 3PDT 220/240 Vac 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Coil Voltage Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number DPDT 32 D3PR2P1 DPDT 18 D3PR2R DPDT 120 D3PR2R1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D3PR2T D3PF2AW1 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D3PR2T1 1,700 D3PF3AA 48 Vac DPDT 290 D3PR2W 3PDT 7,200 D3PF3AB 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D3PR2W1 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D3PF3AP1 120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D3PR3A 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PF3AT 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D3PR3A1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PF3AT1 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7,200 D3PR3B 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D3PF3AW1 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D3PR3R 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D3PR3R1 Full Featured Style Contact Configuration Plain Cover Style, continued Plain Cover Style 3 120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D3PR2A 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D3PR3T 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D3PR2A1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D3PR3T1 3 220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D3PR2B 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D3PR3W1 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D3PR2P 3 3 Accessories 3 D2PF/D2PR Sockets and Accessories 3 Type 3 Socket 1 D3PA6 1 Socket 10 D3PAL8 1 3 Socket 10 D3PA2 Socket 1 D3PA7 1 3 Socket 10 D3PAL11 1 Socket 10 D3PA3 Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1332 Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1351 3 3 3 Standard Pack Catalog Number Note 1 Protection category (finger safe) EN 60529 IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-14 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D4 Series 3 Slim-styled power relay Socket has built-in hold-down clip Panel or DIN rail mounting 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D4 Series 3 D4 Series 1 3 3 D4PR 1 1 A Type D4PR = D4PR standard relay Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT 2 = DPDT A A1 B P P1 R R1 T T1 W1 Options 1 = Indicating light 3 Coil Voltage = 120 Vac = 110 Vdc = 240 Vac = 6 Vac = 6 Vdc = 12 Vac = 12 Vdc = 24 Vac = 24 Vdc = 48 Vdc 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 D4 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 Relay Type Socket Hold Down Clip D4PR1 D4PA1 2 D4PR2 D4PA2 2 3 3 3 D4 Series Coil Voltage 3 Catalog Number Standard SPDT 24 Vac Coil Voltage 3 Catalog Number Standard DPDT D4PR1T Coil Voltage 3 3 DIN Rail Sockets 24 Vac D4PR2T Single-Pole D4PA1 D4PA2 3 PFP-M 3 120 Vac D4PR1A 120 Vac D4PR2A Two-Pole 24 Vdc D4PR1T1 12 Vdc D4PR2R1 Accessories 24 Vdc D4PR2T1 DIN rail end stop SPDT with Indicating Light 3 Catalog Number 24 Vac D4PR11T DPDT with Indicating Light 120 Vac D4PR11A 120 Vac D4PR21A 24 Vdc D4PR11T1 24 Vdc D4PR21T1 3 3 Notes 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 2 Socket has built-in hold down spring. 3 Additional coil voltages available--consult sales office or customer support center. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3 3 V9-T3-15 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D5 Series 3 Industrial rated 300V, 15A relay in two-pole and three-pole configurations Compact design can be panel or DIN rail mounted 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D5 Series 3 D5 Series 1 D5PR 3 1 A 3 3 Family Type D5PR = Standard relay D5PF = Full featured relay 3 Contact Configuration 2 = DPDT 3 = 3PDT 3 3 Options Blank = Plain cover (D5PR only) A = LED, test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag (D5PF only) 1 = Indicating light (D5PR only) 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 D5 Relay/Socket Quick Reference 3 3 3 3 Relay Type Socket Clip D5PR2 D5PAL PQC-1351 D5PF2 D5PA2 PQC-1351 D5PR3 D5PA3L PQC-1351 D5PF3 D5PA3S PQC-1351 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-16 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac G1 = 74 Vdc P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vdc W1 = 48 Vdc Logic Devices Relays 3.1 General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D5 Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Full Featured Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Plain Cover, continued 120 Vac DPDT 1,700 D5PF2AA 6 Vdc DPDT 32 D5PR2P1 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PF2AA1 12 Vac DPDT 18 D5PR2R 220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D5PF2AB 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PR2R1 12 Vdc DPDT 120 D5PF2AR1 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PR2T 24 Vac DPDT 72 D5PF2AT 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PR2T1 24 Vdc DPDT 470 D5PF2AT1 48 Vac DPDT 290 D5PR2W 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D5PF2AW1 48 Vdc DPDT 1,800 D5PR2W1 120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D5PF3AA 120 Vac 3PDT 1,700 D5PR3A 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PF3AA1 110/125 Vdc 3PDT 10,000 D5PR3A1 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7,200 D5PF3AB 220/240 Vac 3PDT 7200 D5PR3B 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PF3AR1 74 Vdc 3PDT 4,800 D5PR3G1 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PF3AT 6 Vac 3PDT 4.2 D5PR3P 6 Vdc 3PDT 32 D5PR3P1 DPDT 1,700 D5PR2A 12 Vac 3PDT 18 D5PR3R Plain Cover 120 Vac 110/125 Vdc DPDT 10,000 D5PR2A1 12 Vdc 3PDT 120 D5PR3R1 220/240 Vac DPDT 7,200 D5PR2B 24 Vac 3PDT 72 D5PR3T 74 Vdc DPDT 4,800 D5PR2G1 24 Vdc 3PDT 470 D5PR3T1 6 Vac DPDT 4.2 D5PR2P 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,800 D5PR3W 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 D5 Sockets and Accessories Description Standard Pack Catalog Number Socket 10 D5PAL 1 Socket 10 D5PA2 Socket 10 D5PA3L Socket 10 D5PA3S Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1351 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe), EN 60529 IP20. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-17 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D7 Series 3 Arc barrier equipped relay with high dielectric strength Panel, DIN rail and flange mounting 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D7 Series 3 D7 Series 1 D7PR 1 1 A 3 3 Type D7PR = Standard relay D7PF = Full featured relay 3 Contact Configuration 1 = SPDT 3 = 3PDT 2 = DPDT 4 = 4PDT 3 Options A = LED, test button, flag indicator, lock-down door, finger-grip cover, ID tag Blank = Plain cover 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection D7 Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Socket/Adapter D7PR1 D7PAA D7PR2 Clip PQC-1342 PQC-1349 3 D7PF1 D7PA9 PQC-1342 D7PF2 PFC-D2D72 -- 3 D7PR3 D7PAB 3 PQC-1783 PMC-1783 D7PF3 PFC-D73 3 D7PR4 D7PAD 3 D7PF4 3 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 -- PQC-1784 PMC-1784 PFC-D74 -- 3 3 V9-T3-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Coil Voltage A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac P = 6 Vac P1 = 6 Vdc R = 12 Vac R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc W = 48 Vdc W1 = 48 Vdc 3.1 Logic Devices Relays General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D7 Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Full Featured Coil Voltage Contact Configuration Coil Resistance (Ohms) Catalog Number Plain Cover 120 Vac SPDT 4,430 D7PF1AA 120 Vac SPDT 4,430 D7PR1A 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PF1AP 110/125 Vdc SPDT 11,000 D7PR1A1 6 Vdc SPDT 40 D7PF1AP1 220/240 Vac SPDT 15,720 D7PR1B 12 Vac SPDT 46 D7PF1AR 6 Vac SPDT 9.6 D7PR1P 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PF1AT1 12 dc SPDT 160 D7PR1R1 48 Vac SPDT 788 D7PF1AW 24 Vac SPDT 180 D7PR1T 48 Vdc SPDT 2,600 D7PF1AW1 24 Vdc SPDT 650 D7PR1T1 120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D7PF2AA 48 Vdc SPDT 2600 D7PR1W1 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PF2AA1 120 Vac DPDT 4,430 D7PR2A 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PF2AB 110/125 Vdc DPDT 11,000 D7PR2A1 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PF2AP 220/240 Vac DPDT 15,720 D7PR2B 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PF2AP1 6 Vac DPDT 9.6 D7PR2P 12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PF2AR 6 Vdc DPDT 40 D7PR2P1 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PF2AR1 12 Vac DPDT 46 D7PR2R 24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PF2AT 12 Vdc DPDT 160 D7PR2R1 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PF2AT1 24 Vac DPDT 180 D7PR2T 48 Vac DPDT 788 D7PF2AW 24 Vdc DPDT 650 D7PR2T1 48 Vdc DPDT 2,600 D7PF2AW1 120 Vac 3PDT 2,770 D7PR3A 120 Vac 3PDT 2,770 D7PF3AA 240 Vac 3PDT 12,100 D7PR3B 6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PF3AP 6 Vac 3PDT 6 D7PR3P 6 Vdc 3PDT 25 D7PF3AP1 12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 D7PR3R 12 Vac 3PDT 25.3 D7PF3AR 12 Vdc 3PDT 100 D7PR3R1 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PF3AT 24 Vac 3PDT 103 D7PR3T 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PF3AT1 24 Vdc 3PDT 400 D7PR3T1 48 Vac 3PDT 412 D7PF3AW 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,600 D7PR3W1 48 Vdc 3PDT 1,600 D7PF3AW1 120 Vac 4PDT 2,220 D7PR4A 120 Vac 4PDT 2,220 D7PF4AA 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7,340 D7PR4A1 110/125 Vdc 4PDT 7,340 D7PF4AA1 240 Vac 4PDT 9,120 D7PR4B 240 Vac 4PDT 9,120 D7PF4AB 6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PR4P 6 Vac 4PDT 5.4 D7PF4AP 24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PR4T 6 Vdc 4PDT 24 D7PF4AP1 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PR4T1 12 Vac 4PDT 21.2 D7PF4AR 48 Vdc 4PDT 1,550 D7PR4W1 12 Vdc 4PDT 96 D7PF4AR1 24 Vac 4PDT 84.5 D7PF4AT 24 Vdc 4PDT 388 D7PF4AT1 48 Vdc 4PDT 1,550 D7PF4AW 48 Vac 4PDT 410 D7PF4AW1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 D7 Sockets and Accessories Type 3 Standard Pack Catalog Number 1 Type Standard Pack Catalog Number 3 3 Socket -- D7PAA Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1342 Socket 1 D7PA9 Plastic ID clip 10 PQC-1349 Socket -- D7PAD 1 Metal spring clip 25 PQC-1784 Socket -- D7PAB 1 Plastic ID clip 10 PMC-1784 Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D2D72 Hold-down spring 25 PYC-B2 Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D73 Metal spring clip 10 PQC-1783 Flange mount adapter 25 PFC-D74 Plastic ID clip 10 PMC-1783 3 3 3 Note 1 Protection category (finger safe) EN 60529 IP20. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3 V9-T3-19 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D8 Series 3 3 Allows switching of 25A and 30A loads A high-capacity, high-withstand voltage relay compatible with momentary voltage drops No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D8 Series 3 D8 Series 1 D8PR 6 TE A 3 3 Type D8PR = Standard relay 3 Contact Configuration 6 = SPST-NO 7 = DPST-NO Options TE = E-bracket TF = Range mount 3 3 Product Selection 3 D8 Relay/Socket Quick Reference Relay Type Mounting Bracket Adapter Track/ Panel Mount Front Connecting Sockets Track/ Panel Mount D8PR6TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2 3 D8PR7TE D8PA5 D8PA1 D8PA2 3 Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com A B R1 T T1 = = = = = Coil Voltage 120 Vac 240 Vac 12 Vdc 24 Vac 24 Vdc Logic Devices Relays 3.1 D8 Series 3 Catalog Number Coil Voltage 3 SPST E-Bracket 24 Vac D8PR6TET 24 Vdc D8PR6TET1 3 3 SPST Flange Mount 120 Vac D8PR6TFA 24 Vdc D8PR6TFT1 3 D8PR7TEA 3 DPST E-Bracket 120 Vac 3 DPST Flange Mount 120 Vac D8PR7TFA 24 Vdc D8PR7TFT1 3 3 Accessories 3 D8 Series Sockets and Accessories 3 Standard Pack Catalog Number DIN rail adapter 10 D8PA1 Screw terminal adapter 10 D8PA2 Bracket adapter 10 D8PA5 3 100 PFP-M 3 Description 3 Sockets 3 Accessory DIN rail end stop 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-21 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D9 Series 3 3 Ideal for three-phase motor control applications No contact chattering for momentary voltage drops up to 50% of rated voltage Push-to-test button is a standard feature to check contact operation 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 General Purpose Plug-In Relays--D9 Series 3 D9 Series 1 D9PR 8B A 3 3 Type D9PR = Standard relay 3 Contact Configuration 8B = 4PST-NO 9B = 3PST-NO/SPST-NC 10B = DPST-NO/DPST-NC 3 3 Product Selection 3 D9 Series 3 Coil Voltage 4PST-NO Power Relay 24 Vac D9PR8BT 120 Vac D9PR8BA 3 240 Vac D9PR8BB 24 Vdc D9PR8BT1 3PST-NO/SPST-NC Power Relay D9PR9BA 3 120 Vac 3 24 Vac D9PR10BT 120 Vac D9PR10BA 3 24 Vdc D9PR10BT1 3 3 Coil Voltage R1 = 12 Vdc T = 24 Vac T1 = 24 Vdc Catalog Number 3 3 A = 120 Vac A1 = 110 Vdc B = 240 Vac DPST-NO/DPST-NC Power Relay Note 1 For deciphering catalog numbers. Do not use for ordering as not all combinations are readily available. 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.1 Logic Devices Relays Features General Purpose Type AA Relays Type AA panel mounted relays are rated (each pole) 40A up to 300 Vac, 50/60 Hz; 5A at 480/600 Vac, 50/60 Hz and 40A at 28 Vdc 9575H Series 3000 relays are ideal for applications when controlling smaller loads such as single-phase motors 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection General Purpose Type AA Relays 3 Type AA 3 3 9575H3 A 000 Type 9575H3 = Type AA relay 3 Option A B C D E H J K = 120 Vac = 240 Vac = 480/440 Vac = 600/550 Vac Coil Voltage = 208 Vac L = 24 Vac = 277 Vac M = 48 Vac = 6 Vac P = 110 Vdc = 12 Vac Q = 220 Vdc R S T W = 6 Vdc = 12 Vdc = 24 Vdc = 48 Vdc 000 = None 010 = Auxiliary switch 100 = Blowout magnets 110 = Auxiliary switch and blowout magnets 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Type AA Relays Relay Style Catalog Number 1 Relay (DPDT) 9575H3_000 Relay with auxiliary switch 9575H3_010 Relay with blowout magnets 9575H3_100 Relay with auxiliary switch and blowout magnets 9575H3_110 3 3 3 3 3 Coil Voltage Selection Table Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code Volts AC Coil Voltage Hz Suffix Code 3 Volts DC 120 50/60 A 110 -- P 240 50/60 B 220 -- Q 480/440 60/50 C 6 -- R 600/550 60/50 D 12 -- S 208 50/60 E 24 -- T 277 50/60 H 48 -- W 6 50/60 J 12 50/60 K 24 50/60 L 48 50/60 M 3 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Underscore (_) indicates missing coil voltage suffix code. See table above. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3 V9-T3-23 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features XTRE Control Relays 3 3 3 3 16A conventional thermal current (open at 60C Ith) Four-pole configurations 4NO 3NO-1NC 2NO-2NC Expandable to eight-pole with add-on front-mount auxiliary contacts Built-in surge suppression on DC coils 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 XTRE Control Relays 3 XTRE Relays XT RE 10 B 22 A 3 3 Product Line Prefix XT = XT IEC Power Control 3 Product Family Code RE = IEC Control Relay Conventional Thermal Current Rating 10 = 10A 3 3 3 3 3 Contact Configuration 40 = 4NO 31 = 3NO-1NC 22 = 2NO-2NC Frame B = 45 mm--standard Product Selection XTRE Control Relays Rated Operational Current AC-15 Ie (A) Conventional Thermal Current Ith (A), Open at 60C Contact Configuration 220-240V 380-414V 500V 16 4NO 6 4 1.5 16 3NO-1NC 6 4 1.5 16 2NO-2NC 6 4 1.5 Circuit Symbol A1 13 23 33 43 3 3 3 A1 13 21 33 43 3 3 3 XTRE10B40_ XTRE10B31_ A2 14 22 34 44 23 33 A1 13 21 31 43 43 24 32 34 44 A2 14 22 3 3 Catalog Number-- Screw Terminals 1 A2 14 24 34 44 3 3 Coil Code See table below. Coil Voltage Suffix Coil Voltage Suffix Code Coil Voltage Suffix Code Coil Voltage Suffix Code 110V 50 Hz, 120V 60 Hz A 24 Vdc TD 550V 50 Hz, 600V 60 Hz D 220V 50 Hz, 240V 60 Hz B 415V 50 Hz, 480V 60 Hz C 208V 60 Hz E 24V 50/60 Hz T Notes 1 Underscore (_) indicates magnet coil suffix required. See table above. 2 DC operated control relays XTRE(C)10B22_ can only be combined with two-pole auxiliary contacts. 3 V9-T3-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com XTRE10B22_ 2 3.1 Logic Devices Relays Front Mount Auxiliary Contacts for Use with XTRE Control Relays 1 3 Rated Operational Current AC-15 Ie (A) Conventional Thermal Current Ith (A), Open at 60C 16 Poles 220V 230V 240V 380V 400V 415V 500V Contact Configuration 2 6 3 1.5 2NO Circuit Symbol 53 63 Package Quantity Catalog Number-- Screw Terminals 5 XTCEXFAC20v 5 XTCEXFAC11 5 XTCEXFAC40 5 XTCEXFAC22 3 3 54 64 16 2 6 3 1.5 1NC-1NC 53 61 3 54 62 16 4 6 3 1.5 4NO 16 4 6 3 1.5 2NO-2NC 53 6373 83 3 3 54 6474 84 53 61 73 83 3 3 54 62 74 84 Note 1 Interlocked opposing contacts, to IEC/EN 60947-5-1 Annex L (positively driven), within the auxiliary contact modules (not NOE and NCL contacts) and between the auxiliary contacts and built-in contacts of the XTRE control relays. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-25 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features Solid-State Relays--D93 Series 3 3 3 3 3 All solid-state circuitry with no moving parts to wear Compact, panel mounting for flexible installation Isolated input and output terminals to protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry to protect the SSR from transients UL(R)/cUL(R) listed--UL 508 CSA(R) certified CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 Solid-State Relays--D93 Series 3 D93 Series 3 3 3 D93 3 25 A M D 2 Description D93 = Hockey puck D96 = Compact D99 = DIN rail Output Voltage 1 = 2-60 Vdc 2 = 24-280 Vac 3 = 3-200 Vdc 4 = 48-480 Vac 6 = 48-600 Vac 3 3 Current Output current in amps A B C D 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Contact Configuration = SPST-NO = SPST-NC = DPST-NO = DPST-NC Output Type C = SCR T = Triac M = MOSFET Turn On Type Z = Zero cross R = Random D = DC switch Input Voltage 1 = 90-280 Vac 2 = 3-32 Vdc 3 = 3.5-32 Vdc 4 = 4-15 Vdc 5 = 20-50 Vdc Product Selection D93 Series Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D93210ACZ2 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 10 D93210ATZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D93225ACZ2 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 25 D93225ATZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D93240ACZ2 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Triac 40 D93240ATZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 50 D93250ACZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 75 D93275ACZ2 3-32 Vdc 3-200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 12 D93312AMD2 3-32 Vdc 3-200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 25 D93325AMD2 3-32 Vdc 3-200 Vdc SPST-NO MOSFET 40 D93340AMD2 3 Accessory 3 Heat Sink Accessory Description Catalog Number 3 Heat sink D93HS1 V9-T3-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.1 Logic Devices Relays Features Solid-State Relays--D96 Series All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients UL/cUL listed--UL 508 CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Solid-State Relays--D96 Series 3 D96 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number 3.5-32 Vdc 3-50 Vdc SPST-NO DC switch 15 D96115ACZ3 3.5-32 Vdc 3-150 Vac SPST-NO DC switch 8 D96208ACZ3 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96210ACR2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96210ACZ2 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NC Random 10 D96210BCR2 90-280 Vac 48-480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR1 3-32 Vdc 48-480 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96410ACR2 90-280 Vac 48-480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 48-480 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96410ACZ2 90-280 Vac 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Random 10 D96610ACR1 90-280 Vac 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D96610ACZ2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-27 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features Solid-State Relays--D99 Series 3 3 3 3 3 3 All solid-state circuitry has no moving parts to wear Integral heat sink eliminates the need for added accessories and installation Flexible mounting allows DIN rail or panel mounting without additional hardware or tools Isolated input and output terminals protect the system from electrical noise Internal snubber circuitry protects the SSR from transients UL/cUL listed--UL 508 CSA certified CE marked RoHS compliant 3 3 Product Selection 3 Solid-State Relays--D99 Series 3 D99 Series 3 Input Voltage Output Voltage Contact Configuration Switching Type Rated Current Load (A) Catalog Number 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99210ACZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99225ACZ2 90-280 Vac 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 24-280 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99240ACZ2 3 90-280 Vac 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 10 D99610ACZ2 3 90-280 Vac 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 25 D99625ACZ2 3 90-280 Vac 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ1 3-32 Vdc 48-600 Vac SPST-NO Zero cross 40 D99640ACZ2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-28 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features Universal TR Series Timing Relays Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs) Universal input voltages from 12 or 24-240 Vac/Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil voltages Compact, DIN rail mountable case reduces panel size Advanced LED indication makes troubleshooting easy Staggered terminal locations allow access to lower-level terminals after wiring SPDT or DPDT contacts with 8A ratings cULus listed CE marked RoHS compliant IEC/EN 61812 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Universal TR Series Timing Relays 3 Universal TR Series 3 Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number 3 Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL04 3 Compact DIN rail mount, SPDT TRL07 Compact DIN rail mount, DPDT TRL27 Asymmetrical pulse generator, DPDT TRW27 4-Function 24-240 Vac/Vdc 7-Function 24-240 Vac/Vdc 12-240 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-29 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features TMR5 Series Timing Relays 3 3 Single timing range for each unit Ranges available from 0.02 sec. to 24 hours Wide variety of functions available 10A DPDT output contacts 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 TMR5 Series Timing Relays 3 TMR5 Series TMR5 N 05 120 3 3 Type TMR5 = TMR5 Series timing relays 3 N T L R1 3 3 3 Y1 = 3 3 3 = = = = Operational Mode 8-Pin Octal Sockets 11-Pin Octal Sockets ON delay F = OFF delay, control switch trigger Interval ON C = Single shot, control switch trigger Flasher W = Watchdog, control switch trigger (retriggerable single shot) Repeat cycle P = OFF delay, power trigger (OFF time first followed by G = Single shot, power trigger ON time and repeating) D = Watchdog, power trigger Repeat cycle (retriggerable single shot) (ON time first followed by OFF time and repeating) Input Voltage 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc 12 = 12 Vac/Vdc 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc Timing Range 23 03 = 0.02-2 sec. 16 = 0.6-60 min. 05 = 0.1-10 sec. 20 = 4.8-8 hr. 08 = 0.6-60 sec. 22 = 6 sec.-10 min. 12 = 3-300 sec. 23 = 14.4 min.-24 hr. 15 = 0.3-30 min. Product Selection TMR5 Time Delay Relays Input Voltage Socket Timing Range Catalog Number Input Voltage Socket Timing Range Catalog Number 3 ON Delay 0.1-10 sec. TMR5N05120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5C05120 3 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5N08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5C08120 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5N0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5C0524 3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5N0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5C0824 3 120 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5F05120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5R05120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5F08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5R08120 3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5F0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5R0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5F0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5R0824 3 Interval ON 0.1-10 sec. TMR5T05120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5Y05120 3 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5T08120 120 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5Y08120 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5T0524 24 Vac/Vdc 0.1-10 sec. TMR5Y0524 3 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5T0824 24 Vac/Vdc 0.6-60 sec. TMR5Y0824 3 3 120 Vac/Vdc Single Shot, Control Switch Trigger 8-pin OFF Delay, Control Switch Trigger 120 Vac/Vdc 11-pin 11-pin Repeat Cycle (OFF Time First Followed by ON Time and Repeating) 8-pin Repeat Cycle (ON Time First Followed by OFF Time and Repeating) 8-pin 8-pin Notes 1 Indicates DUAL knob unit. All dual knob units can have independently selectable and adjustable ON and OFF times. If different ON and OFF times are desired, add two codes for time ranges in the part number. The first code listed indicates the first timing range of the unit (OFF time for R, ON time for Y) and the second code indicates the second timing range (ON time for R, OFF Time for Y). 2 Any time range can be created as a custom unit. Contact Eaton for details. 3 Fixed time delay settings are available for orders of 50 pieces or more. V9-T3-30 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Relays 3.1 Features TMR6 Series Timing Relays Provides OFF delay function without requiring input voltage during OFF time delay Duplicates operation of pneumatic OFF delay timers Each unit has eight timing ranges built in, covering 0.05 seconds to 30 minutes Selecting a range is easy using a rotary switch (no math is required or DIP switches to set) Uses industry-standard 8-pin octal socket 10A DPDT output contacts cRUus UL listed (with Eaton socket) RoHS compliant CE marked 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection TMR6 Series Timing Relays 3 TMR6 Series 3 3 TMR6 X 00 120 Family Type TMR6 Operational Mode X = True OFF delay Timing Range 00 = Programmable 3 Input Voltage 120 = 120 Vac/Vdc 24 = 24 Vac/Vdc 240 = 240 Vac/Vdc 3 3 Product Selection 3 TMR6 True OFF Delay Relays Input Voltage Timing Range Catalog Number 120 Vac/Vdc 0.05 sec.-30 min. (user selectable, eight ranges) TMR6X00120 24 Vac/Vdc 3 3 TMR6X0024 3 TMR6X00240 240 Vac/Vdc 3 Accessories 3 Accessories for Use with TMR6 Time Delay Relays Description Standard Pack Catalog Number 8-pin socket 10 D3PA2 Hold-down spring 10 D65CHDS 3 3 3 True OFF Delay Input Power (Voltage) ON 3 OFF 3 3 ON Output (Load) Delay 3 OFF 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-31 3.1 3 Logic Devices Relays Features TMRP Series Timing Relays 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 TMRP Series Timing Relays 3 TMRP Timing Relays 3 3 Multiple user-selectable timing functions and timing ranges in a single unit reduce product variations and stock keeping units (SKUs) Universal input voltages from 12-240 Vac/Vdc eliminate the need to order and stock separate coil voltages Timing ranges up to 9990 hours Dual LED indication makes troubleshooting easy Flexible design for back-panel, through-panel (45 mm x 45 mm cutout), or DIN rail mounting SPDT or DPDT contacts with 12A ratings Plastic dust cover keeps out contaminants and eliminates accidental set point changes Use with standard Eaton D3 sockets UL recognized CE marked RoHS compliant Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number 10-Function 12-240 Vac/Vdc 3 Control switch trigger, DPDT TMRP5100 Control switch trigger, SPDT TMRP5101 Power trigger, DPDT TMRP5102 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-32 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers 3.2 Product Overview 3 Programmable Controllers Selection Guide 3 3 3 Description Fusion Integrated Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays MFD-Titan Multi-Functional Displays ELC Series PLCs Page V9-T3-36 Page V9-T3-37 Page V9-T3-40 Page V9-T3-46 3 3-, 4- or 5-line text (embedded) 4-line text (embedded) 4-line text and graphics (embedded) Text and graphics thru HMi or ELC-GP (external) 3 3 3 User Interface LCD display (text/graphics) Seven-segment display -- -- 4 characters (simulated) PA only = 2 digital Keypad for programming Yes Optional Optional -- Hand-held programmer -- -- -- Available for all Potentiometers Simulated using display Simulated using optional display Simulated using optional display PC/PH = two embedded Embedded digital input types 3.5-30 Vdc 12 Vdc/24 Vdc 24 Vac or 110/240 Vac 24 Vac or 110/240 Vac (using MFD I/O) 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac 3 Embedded digital output types 24 Vdc transistor or high current relay (5A resistive) 24 Vdc transistor or high current relay (8A resistive) 24 Vdc transistor or high current relay (8A resistive) (using MFD I/O) 24 Vdc transistor or relay 3 Embedded digital inputs/outputs per unit 10 control inputs 3 counter inputs/ 2 transistors 5 relays easy500 = 8/4 easy700/800 = 12 (6 or 8) 12/4 (using MFD I/O) PA = 4/2 PB = 8/6 PC/PH = 8/4 PV = 16/12 3 3 I/O Digital 3 3 Expansion digital input types -- 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac 24 Vdc or 110/240 Vac Expansion digital output types -- 24 Vdc transistor or high current relay (8A resistive) 24 Vdc transistor or high current relay (8A resistive) 24 Vdc transistor, relay or high current relay (6A resistive) Max. digital I/O includes embedded and expansion 20 easy500 = 12 easy700/800 = 40 easy800 (link up to 8 expanded units using easyNet) = 320 (link up to 8 expanded units with easyNet) = 320 PA/PB/PC/PH = 112 in/112 out and embedded PV = 240 in/240 out embedded Optional on 24 Vac or DC input units easy500 = 2 easy700 = 4 easy819/821 = N/A easy820/822 = 1 All 0 to +10 Vdc Optional on 24 Vac or Vdc input units = 4 All 0 to +10 Vdc PA = 2 at either -10 to +10 Vdc or -20 to +20 mA 2 at 4-20 mA 2 at 0-10 Vdc 3 3 3 I/O Analog Embedded analog input quantity and types 3 3 3 3 Embedded analog input resolution 6.5 bit 10 bit 10 bit 12 bit Embedded analog outputs quantity and types 1 at 4-20 mA 1 at 0-10 Vdc Optional easy820/822 = 1 All 0 to +10 Vdc Available using MFD-RA17 or MFD-TA17 MFD I/O Modules = 1 All 0 to +10 Vdc PA = 2 at either -10 to +10 Vdc or -20 to +20 mA Embedded analog output resolution 6.5 bit 10 bit 10 bit 12 bit Expansion analog input types -- 0 0 -10 to +10 Vdc or -20 to +20 mA Expansion analog input resolution -- -- -- V = 12 bits, I = 11 or 13 bits 1 Expansion analog outputs types -- 0 0 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA 0 to 10 Vdc, 2 to 10 Vdc 1 3 3 3 3 3 Note 1 Combo modules have 11 bit resolution; analog input-only modules support 13 bit. 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-33 3.2 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Programmable Controllers Selection Guide, continued 3 3 Fusion Integrated Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays MFD-Titan Multi-Functional Displays Expansion analog output resolution -- -- -- Voltage = 14 bit Current = 11 or 12 bit 1 Max. expansion analog inputs/outputs -- 0/0 0/0 Up to 32/up to 32 (max. using eight combo modules = 32 in + 16 out) RTD PT100 -- -- -- Four point expansion module 3 Thermocouple -- -- -- Four point expansion module 3 Programming tools Software or front panel Software; on-board keypad; memory module transfer Software; on-board keypad; memory module transfer Software; memory module transfer; hand-held programmer Program size 100 rungs with up to 6 contacts and 1 coil per rung easy500/700 = 128 rungs easy800 = 256 rungs MFD = 256 rungs PB = 4k steps PA/PC/PH = 8k steps PV = 16k steps Programming languages Ladder Ladder; function block Ladder; function block Instructions, ladder, sequential function chart Timers 8 easy500/700 = 16 easy800 = 32 32 PB = 128 PA/PC/PH/PV = 244 standard with additional timers for subroutine and retentive applications General counters 8 easy500/700 = 16 easy800 = 32 32 PB = 128 PA/PC/PH = 235 PV = 253 High speed counters Quantity at max. speed (pulse train output use may limit maximum counter frequency) Up to 14 kHz with five presets and prewarn 1 kHz 3 kHz PB = up to 4, 2 at 20 kHz PA/PC = up to 6, 1 at 30 kHz and 1 at 10 kHz PH = up to 8, 1 at 100 kHz and 1 at 30 kHz PV = up to 8, 2 at 200 kHz 2 at 20 kHz; and 2 at 10 kHz Pulse train outputs Quantity at max. speed (high speed input use may limit maximum speed for outputs) -- -- -- PB = 2 at 10 kHz PA/PC = 1 at 30 kHz; and 1 at 10 kHz PH = 1 at 100 kHz; and 1 at 30 kHz PV = up to 2 at 200 kHz; and 1 at 40 kHz Real time clock Yes easy500 = Optional easy700/800 = Yes Yes PA/PC/PH/PV = Yes Not available on PB 3 3 3 3 3 3 Description I/O Specialty Inputs Programming 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 ELC Series PLCs I/O Analog Note 1 Combo modules have 11 bit resolution; analog input-only modules support 13 bit. For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-34 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers 3.2 Programmable Controllers Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Fusion Integrated Machine Controllers easy Programmable Relays MFD-Titan Multi-Functional Displays Ports 1 RS-232/RS-485 Programming only Programming only 1 RS-232 device or programming 1 RS-485 master or device DeviceNet -- easy700/800 = device only Device only PA/PB/PC/PH = device only PV = master and device Ethernet OPC -- easy700/800 = device only Device only PA/PB/PC/PH = device only PV = limited master and device ASi -- easy700/800 = device only Device only -- Description 3 ELC Series PLCs Communications 3 3 3 3 PROFIBUS-DP -- easy700/800 = device only Device only -- CANopen -- easy700/800 = device only Device only -- 3 Modbus Serial Device only -- -- ASCII/RTU master and device 3 -- Yes -- -- 3 General Specifications CSA Hazardous location Class I, Division 2 3 Agency certifications UL/cUL/CE UL/CSA/CE/C-Tick UL/CSA/CE/C-Tick cULus/CE/C-Tick Operating temperature range 0 to 50C (32 to 122F) -25 to 55C (-13 to 131F) -25 to 55C (-13 to 131F) Display -5 to 50C 0 to 55C (32 to 131F) Storage/transport temperature range -20 to 70C (-4 to 158F) -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -40 to 70C (-40 to 158F) -25 to 70C (-13 to 158F) Nominal operating power 100/240 Vac 24 Vdc 12 Vdc 100/240 Vac 24 Vdc 12 Vdc 100/240 Vac 24 Vdc 24 Vdc 110/240 Vac using ELC power supply 3 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-35 3.2 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Features Fusion(R) Integrated Machine Controller 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Fusion Integrated Machine Controller 3 Fusion Integrated Machine Controller 3 3 User-configurable operator interface with back-lit LCD display and 18-button tactile feedback keypad High-speed counter with five presets and prewarn, totalizer, batch counter and ratemeter 10 parameter sets 13 digital inputs (2) 4-20 mA inputs (2) 0-10V input (3) Form C, 2 Form A, 2 NPN transistor, (1) 4-20 mA, and (1) 0-10V output RS-232 and RS-485 serial communications 100-line ladder logic processor for ultimate flexibility Configuration software included Type 4X enclosure Description Catalog Number Fusion integrated machine controller--10-30 Vdc power 57550400 Fusion integrated machine controller--85-265 Vac power 57551400 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-36 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers 3.2 Features easy500/700/800 Programmable Relays easy500 Series--for controlling small applications with up to 12 input/output signals easy700 Series--for controlling medium-sized applications with up to 40 input/output signals easy800 Series--for controlling large-scale applications with up to 320 input/output signals; use easyNet for applications beyond 40 I/O Available with or without 2.5 in LCD display DIN rail mounted or panel mounted using optional mounting feet 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 easy Programmable Relays 3 easy500/700/800 EASY512 - AC - R C Module Type EASY5xx = 500 Series EASY7xx = 700 Series EASY8xx = 800 Series Digital Inputs AB = 24 Vac AC = 110-240 Vdc DA = 12 Vdc DC = 24 Vdc Digital Outputs R = Relay T = Transistor Clock C = Clock Blank = No clock 3 3 Display Blank = Display X = No display 3 3 3 Note: Not all combinations are possible. See selection tables. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-37 3.2 3 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Product Selection easy500--Display easy500 Programmable Relays (Standalone) Description 3 110-240 Vac 12 Vdc Outputs Relay Analog 1 24 Vdc Transistor Catalog Number Display 3 12 I/O, no clock 3 12 I/O, clock 3 Inputs 24 Vac easy500--No Display 3 -- 8 -- -- -- 4 -- EASY512-AC-R -- -- -- 8 2 4 -- EASY512-DC-R 8 -- -- -- 2 4 -- EASY512-AB-RC -- 8 -- -- -- 4 -- EASY512-AC-RC -- -- 8 -- 2 4 -- EASY512-DA-RC -- -- -- 8 2 4 -- EASY512-DC-RC -- -- -- 8 2 -- 4 EASY512-DC-TC No Display 3 8 -- -- -- 2 4 -- EASY512-AB-RCX 3 -- 8 -- -- -- 4 -- EASY512-AC-RCX -- -- 8 -- 2 4 -- EASY512-DA-RCX 3 -- -- -- 8 2 4 -- EASY512-DC-RCX -- -- -- 8 2 -- 4 EASY512-DC-TCX Outputs Relay Transistor Catalog Number 12 I/O, clock 3 3 easy700--Display easy700 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable) 3 Description 3 18 I/O, clock 110-240 Vac 12 Vdc Analog 1 24 Vdc Display 3 3 Inputs 24 Vac easy700--No Display 20 I/O, clock 12 -- -- -- 4 6 -- EASY719-AB-RC -- 12 -- -- -- 6 -- EASY719-AC-RC -- -- 12 -- 4 6 -- EASY719-DA-RC -- -- -- 12 4 6 -- EASY719-DC-RC -- -- -- 12 4 -- 8 EASY721-DC-TC No Display 3 12 -- -- -- 4 6 -- EASY719-AB-RCX 3 -- 12 -- -- -- 6 -- EASY719-AC-RCX -- -- 12 -- 4 6 -- EASY719-DA-RCX 3 -- -- -- 12 4 6 -- EASY719-DC-RCX -- -- -- 12 4 -- 8 EASY721-DC-TCX 18 I/O, clock 20 I/O, clock 3 3 easy800--Display 3 Description Inputs 110-240 Vac 24 Vdc Analog 1 Outputs Relay Transistor Analog Catalog Number Display 3 3 easy800 Programmable Relays (Expandable and Networkable) 12 -- -- 6 -- -- EASY819-AC-RC -- 12 4 6 -- -- EASY819-DC-RC 19 I/O, clock -- 12 4 6 -- 1 EASY820-DC-RC 20 I/O, clock -- 12 4 -- 8 -- EASY821-DC-TC 21 I/O, clock -- 12 4 -- 8 1 EASY822-DC-TC 18 I/O, clock easy800--No Display 3 No Display 3 12 -- -- 6 -- -- EASY819-AC-RCX -- 12 4 6 -- -- EASY819-DC-RCX 19 I/O, clock -- 12 4 6 -- 1 EASY820-DC-RCX 20 I/O, clock -- 12 4 -- 8 -- EASY821-DC-TCX 21 I/O, clock -- 12 4 -- 8 1 EASY822-DC-TCX 18 I/O, clock 3 3 3 Note 1 Analog inputs optional. Use of analog inputs will result in a decrease in the same number of available digital inputs. 3 V9-T3-38 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers EASY618_ 3.2 Digital I/O Expansion Modules Can be used via easyLink. 3 Outputs Supply Voltage Digital Inputs 100-240 Vac 12 24 Vdc 12 Transistor Catalog Number 3 6 -- EASY618-AC-RE 6 -- EASY618-DC-RE 3 Relay 10A (UL) 24 Vdc 12 -- 8 EASY620-DC-TE 24 Vdc 6 4 -- EASY410-DC-RE 24 Vdc 6 -- 4 EASY410-DC-TE 24 Vdc -- 2 -- EASY202-RE For distributed connection of a digital input/output expansion at up to 98 ft (30m) distance 3 3 3 EASY200-EASY 3 EASY406_ Inputs EASY209-SE 3 Analog I/O Expansion Modules Can be used via easyLink. 3 Digital Outputs Supply Voltage Digital/ Analog Can Be Used for Digital Relay 10A (UL) Transistor Analog Outputs Catalog Number 24 Vdc 1/2 2 -- 2 1 EASY406-DC-ME 24 Vdc 1/6 2 -- 2 2 EASY411-DC-ME 3 3 3 Ethernet Gateway Module 3 Catalog Number Description Ethernet gateway Serial interface easyRelay or MFD-...CP8/CP10_ to Ethernet, for connecting to easyOPC server, easySoft or easyCom 3 EASY209-SE 3 3 EASY204-DP 3 Network Interface Modules Catalog Number Description Addresses available 0 to 63 EASY222-DN PROFIBUS-DP interface module Device addresses available 1 to 126 EASY204-DP AS-Interface interface module with 4 in and 4 out Device: 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 4 parameter bits Addresses available 0 to 31 EASY205-ASI CANopen interface module Addresses available 1 to 127 EASY221-CO DeviceNet interface module 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-39 3.2 3 MFD-80-B 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers MFD-Titan Display/Operator Unit Monochrome display 132 x 64 pixels with switchable backlight and removable front frame. Keypad 3 MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated -- -- MFD-80-X MFD display, NEMA 4X indoor rated -- MFD-80 3 MFD display/keypad, NEMA 4X in conjunction with MFD-XM-80 protective diaphragm -- MFD-80-B-X MFD display/keypad, NEMA 4X in conjunction with MFD-XM-80 protective diaphragm MFD-80-B 3 3 MFD-CP4 MFD-Titan Text/Graphics Display Modules Combine with MFD-80-_ to use as remote text/graphics display. 3 Supply Voltage 3 100-240 Vac 3 24 Vdc 3 3 3 MFD-CP Supply Voltage 3 100-240 Vac 3 24 Vdc 3 3 MFD-R16 3 3 Catalog Number AC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-AC-CP4 AC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-500 AC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-AC-CP4-800 DC power supply / communication module (no cable) MFD-CP4 DC module for easy500/700 relays and cable MFD-CP4-500-CAB5 MFD-CP4-500 DC module for easy800 relays and cable MFD-CP4-800-CAB5 MFD-CP4-800 Description Catalog Number Program and screen memory MFD-AC-CP8-ME Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-AC-CP8-NT Program and screen memory MFD-CP8-ME Program and screen memory, with easyNet MFD-CP8-NT Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8) MFD-CP10-ME Double program and screen memory (as MFD-CP8), with easyNet MFD-CP10-NT MFD-Titan I/O Modules Attach to back of MFD-Titan controller modules. Inputs 1 Description Digital 100-240 Vac 16 I/O 12 -- 12 4 24 Vdc 3 3 MFD-TP_ 17 I/O Transistor Analog Catalog Number 4 -- -- MFD-AC-R16 4 -- -- MFD-R16 Relay 12 4 -- 4 -- MFD-T16 4 4 -- 1 MFD-RA17 12 4 -- 4 1 MFD-TA17 MFD-Titan I/O Modules with Temperature Detection For use with MFD-CP8-_ from device version 08, MFD-CP10. Supply Voltage 3 Analog 12 Inputs 3 Outputs Supply Voltage 24 Vdc 3 3 Description MFD-Titan Controller Module Attach to MFD-80-_ display/operator unit and add MFD-Titan I/O modules as needed. 3 3 Eaton Logo Catalog Number Description Digital Outputs Can Be Used For Analog Pt100 Relay 10A (UL) Transistor Analog Temperature Ranges Catalog Number 6 2 2 -- 4 -- -40 to +90C/0 to +250C/0 to +400C MFD-TP12-PT-A 6 2 2 -- 4 -- -200 to +200C/0 to +850C MFD-TP12-PT-B 6 2 -- -- 4 -- -40 to +90C/0 to +250C MFD-TP12-NI-A 3 6 2 2 -- 4 1 -40 to +90C/0 to +250C/0 to +400C MFD-TAP13-PT-A 6 2 2 -- 4 1 -200 to +200C/0 to +850C MFD-TAP13-PT-B 3 6 2 -- -- 4 1 -40 to +90C/0 to +250C MFD-TAP13-NI-A 24 Vdc 3 Note 1 Analog inputs optional. 3 V9-T3-40 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT 3.2 Features Combines the functions of an easy800 with direct connection to SmartWire-DT Exchange of data as well as power supply for the SmartWire-DT devices and contactors Up to 99 SmartWire-DT nodes in total with up to 166 inputs/ outputs that can be connected Up to eight easy806 controllers can be connected via easyNet easy806 controllers include four high-speed inputs, two of which can be outputs Serial interface for programming or connection of an MFD remote text display or XV touch panel 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 easy802/806 Programmable Relays with SmartWire-DT 3 Control relay for connection of SmartWire-DT and simultaneously for supply of power to the SmartWire-DT devices, such as switchgear and contactors. EASY802-DC-SWD 3 easy800 with SmartWire-DT Supply Voltage Description Catalog Number 24 Vdc Control relay with SmartWire-DT EASY802-DC-SWD 3 3 3 3 3 EASY806-DC-SWD 24 Vdc Control relay with SmartWire-DT, four inputs, two of which can be used as outputs (transistor 24 Vdc, 0.1A), easyNet onboard EASY806-DC-SWD 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-41 3.2 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Features XC152 PLC 3 3 3 3 3 3 Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes Ethernet and RS-485 serial ports on all models PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger than 3.5 inches Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys software Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O modules on the SmartWire-DT flat cable Web/remote visualization RISC CPU 32-bit 400 MHz 64 MB memory SD card slot 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 XC152 PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT 3 XC PLC XC - 152 - E6 - 11 3 3 Family Mounting 11 = DIN rail mount XC = Windows(R) CE operating system 3 3 Housing 152 = Plastic housing 3 Features Base Unit Variant D = Ethernet, RS-485 and USB host E = SmartWire-DT, Ethernet, RS-485 and USB host Features Additional COMM Options 3 = None 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-42 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Programmable Controllers 3.2 Product Selection XC PLC 3 XC PLC 3 CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet Catalog Number 3 Y CANopen Y Y XC-152-D6-11 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XC-152-D8-11 3 Plastic Housing 3 XC PLC SmartWire-DT 3 XC PLC SmartWire-DT CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Catalog Number 3 3 Plastic Housing Y None None Y Y XC-152-E3-11 Y CANopen Y Y Y XC-152-E6-11 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XC-152-E8-11 3 3 Accessories 3 XC PLC Accessories Description Catalog Number HMI-PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 1 HMI-PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 1 SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S 3 3 3 3 Note 1 For details on SW-XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 4. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-43 3.2 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Features XV Series HMI-PLC 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 High resolution resistive touch TFT displays Brilliant image display with 65,536 colors 3.5 in, 5.7 in or 7 in widescreen displays in robust plastic housings and bezels, or 5.7 in, 8.4 in or 10.4 in displays in high-end aluminum front bezels and metal housings Ethernet and RS-485 serial ports on all models PROFIBUS-DP or CANopen master on all models larger than 3.5 inches Programmable with IEC 61131-3 compliant XSoft-CoDeSys software Built-in SmartWire-DT master for 99 nodes Easy connection direct to motor control components or I/O modules on the SmartWire-DT flat cable Web/remote visualization RISC CPU 32-bit 400 MHz 64 MB memory SD card slot 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 XV Series HMI-PLCs with and without SmartWire-DT 3 XV HMI-PLC XV - 102 - E6 - 35TQRG - 10 3 3 3 3 Family Bezel 10 = Standard blank front bezel XV = Windows(R) CE operating system Housing 102 = Plastic housing 152 = Metal housing 3 Features Base Unit Variant B = Retentive memory D = Retentive memory, USB host, RS-485 E = SmartWire-DT, retentive memory, USB host, RS-485 Features Additional COMM Options 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS-DP E = SmartWire-DT Display Size 35 = 3.5 in 57 = 5.7 in 70 = 7.0 in 84 = 8.4 in 10 = 10.4 in Display Technology TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive TWR = TFT (WGA) resistive 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-44 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com OS Build C = XSoft-CoDeSys 3.2 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Product Selection XV HMI-PLC 3 XV HMI-PLC Display Resolution CoDeSys Firmware 3.5 in TFT Resistive QVGA 320x240 5.7 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 7.0 in TFT Resistive WGA 800x480 Display Size/Type 3 Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet Catalog Number 3 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10 3 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10 Y CANopen Y Y XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10 Plastic Housing 3 3 3 Metal Housing 5.7 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10 8.4 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10 10.4 in TFT Resistive VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10 3 3 3 3 XV HMI-PLC with SmartWire-DT 3 XV HMI-PLC SmartWire-DT Display Size/Type Display Resolution CoDeSys Firmware Fieldbus Type RS-485 Ethernet SmartWire-DT Catalog Number 3 3.5 in TFT QVGA 320x240 Y None None Y Y XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 3 5.7 in TFT VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10 3 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10 WGA 800x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10 3 3 Plastic Housing 7.0 in TFT Metal Housing 5.7 in TFT 8.4 in TFT 10.4 in TFT VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10 VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10 VGA 640x480 Y CANopen Y Y Y XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10 Y PROFIBUS-DP Y Y Y XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10 3 3 3 3 Accessories 3 XV HMI-PLC Accessories 3 Description Catalog Number HMI-PLC programming software, single seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 1 HMI-PLC programming software, multiple seat license SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 1 SD memory card MEMORY-SD-A1-S XV-102 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-57-KG-1 XV-152 parts kit (1 power conductor, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen) ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1 3 3 3 3 Note 1 For details on SW-XSoft-CoDeSys software, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 4. 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-45 3.2 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Features ELC Programmable Logic Controllers 3 3 Modular PLC logic platform with a range of basic to sophisticated CPUs Ethernet and DeviceNet master communications Distributed I/O for EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet and Modbus serial networks 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 ELC Series Programmable Logic Controllers 3 Controllers and Expansion Modules ELC - PA 10 A A D R 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 PA PB PC PH PV AN EX PT TC Device Types = Analog model = Base model = Clock/calendar model = High-speed model = Advanced model = Analog expansion module = Digital expansion module = Platinum RTD expansion module = Thermocouple expansion module I/O Count xx = Total number of I/O Analog Inputs A = Analog N = None Analog Outputs A = Analog N = None A D S N Digital Inputs = AC = DC = Switch = None Master Communication Modules 3 ELC - CO ENETM 3 Device Type CO = Communication interface model 3 Module Type DNETM = DeviceNet master module 1 ENETM = Ethernet module 1 3 3 Distributed I/O Adapter Modules 3 ELC - CA ENET 3 Device Type CA = Distributed I/O communication adapter 3 3 3 3 ENET DNET RS485 PBDP = = = = Module Type Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP adapter DeviceNet adapter Modbus serial RS-485 adapter PROFIBUS-DP adapter Note 1 Left side communications module. 3 V9-T3-46 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com T R I N P Digital Outputs = Transistor NPN = Relay = High current relay = None = Transistor PNP Logic Devices Programmable Controllers 3.2 Product Selection 3 Controllers 3 Description Inputs Outputs Analog High Speed I/O Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) ELC-PB Model and 14 I/O built-in (8) 24 Vdc (6) Relay, 1.5A -- (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDR (8) 24 Vdc (6) Transistor, 100 mA -- (2) 20 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PB14NNDT ELC-PC Model and 12 I/O built-in Catalog Number (8) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A -- (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDR (8) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor, 100 mA -- (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNDT (8) 110 Vac (4) Relay, 1.5A -- (1) 30 kHz inputs 150 mA ELC-PC12NNAR ELC-PH Model and 12 I/O built-in (8) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor, 100 mA -- (1) 100 kHz inputs 170 mA ELC-PH12NNDT ELC-PA Model and 10 I/O built-in (4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADR (4) 24 Vdc (2) Relay, 1.5A (2) In and (2) Out (1) 30 kHz inputs 210 mA ELC-PA10AADT (16) 24 Vdc (12) Relay, 1.5A -- (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDR (16) 24 Vdc (12) Transistor, 100 mA -- (2) 200 kHz inputs 220 mA ELC-PV28NNDT ELC-PV Model and 28 I/O built-in 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Distributed I/O Adapter Modules Description Catalog Number Modbus TCP/EtherNet/IP I/O adapter ELC-CAENET Modbus serial RS-485 I/O adapter ELC-CARS485 DeviceNet I/O adapter ELC-CADNET PROFIBUS-DP I/O adapter ELC-CAPBDP 3 3 3 3 Network Communication Master Modules (Left Side Bus) Description Catalog Number Ethernet Modbus TCP (master/node) ELC-COENETM DeviceNet scanner (master/node) ELC-CODNETM 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-47 3.2 3 3 Logic Devices Programmable Controllers Digital Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) Description Inputs Outputs Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number 3 8 DC input module (8) 24 Vdc -- 50 mA ELC-EX08NNDN 16 DC input module (16) 24 Vdc -- 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDN 3 8 DC input/output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDT 16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDT 16 DC input/output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Transistor (source), 0.3A 100 mA ELC-EX16NNDP 8 DC input/relay output module (4) 24 Vdc (4) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNDR 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 16 DC input/relay output module (8) 24 Vdc (8) Relay, 1.5A 90 mA ELC-EX16NNDR 8 AC input module (8) 110 Vac -- 50 mA ELC-EX08NNAN ELC-EX08NNNT 8 Transistor output module -- (8) Transistor (sink), 0.3A 70 mA 8 Relay output module -- (8) Relay, 1.5A 70 mA ELC-EX08NNNR 6 High current relay output module -- (6) Relay, 6A 70 mA ELC-EX06NNNI 8 Toggle switch input module (8) Switches -- 20 mA ELC-EX08NNSN Analog and Temperature Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) Analog Inputs Description Analog Outputs Maximum Current Consumption (at 24 Vdc) Catalog Number 4 Analog input module 4 -- 90 mA ELC-AN04ANNN 2 Analog output module -- 2 125 mA ELC-AN02NANN 4 Analog output module -- 4 170 mA ELC-AN04NANN 6 Analog input/output module 4 2 90 mA ELC-AN06AANN 4 Thermocouple input module (J, K, R, S and T) 4 -- 90 mA ELC-TC04ANNN 4 Platinum RTD input module (PT100) 4 -- 90 mA ELC-PT04ANNN 3 3 3 3 3 Specialty Expansion Modules (Right Side Bus) Description Catalog Number Single axis motion control module (Add up to 8 modules per controller) ELC-MC01 RS-485 Easy Connect adapter (DB9, RJ12, 2-pin connections to RS-485) ELC-485APTR Accessories and Software 3 Description Catalog Number ELC programming software ELCSOFT 3 24 Vdc, 1A power supply ELC-PS01 24 Vdc, 2A power supply ELC-PS02 3 Cable to connect a PC or a GP unit to ELC, 1 meter (DB9 pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC1 Cable to connect a PC or a GP unit to ELC, 3 meters (DB9 pin female to 8-pin DIN) ELC-CBPCELC3 Cable to connect a PC to a GP unit, 3 meters (DB9 pin female to DB9 pin female) ELC-CBPCGP3 Program transfer module for ELC controllers ELC-ACPGMXFR Plate mount for specialty modules, qty. 10 ELC-ACCOVER 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-48 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Preset Counters 3.3 Product Overview 3 Preset Counters Selection Guide 3 3 3 3 3 Description E5-148-C1400 E5-648-C Series Eclipse Series Page V9-T3-50 Page V9-T3-50 Page V9-T3-51 Display Two-line LCD Two-line LCD LED Power supply Replaceable lithium batteries 10-30 Vdc or 90-260 Vac 9-30 Vdc or 85-265 Vac Number of digits 6 6 6 Panel cut-out size 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN) Scaling capability -- Yes Yes Number of presets 1 2 or 4 2 Max. counting speed 25 Hz 10 kHz Up to 8,250 Hz Front panel protection IP65 IP65 Type 4X Other features/functions -- Timer/rate indicator Analog retransmission/RS-485 communications Relay rating(s) 2A 3A 5A 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-49 3.3 3 Logic Devices Preset Counters Features 1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter Battery powered Two-line LC displays count, preset and level of the output Replacement for electromechanical preset counters No power supply necessary (battery operated) Count and reset input electrically separated from counter through optocoupler input range 12-250 Vac/Vdc 3 3 3 3 AC/DC powered Two-line LCD with optional two-color display Programmable as impulse counter, frequency meter or time meter with sign and zero blanking Batch mode Add/subtract/ratio functions 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 1/16 DIN LCD Preset Counter 3 LCD Preset Counter E5 1 48 C 2 400 3 3 3 Type E5 = E5 Series Counter Type 1 = Pulse counter 6 = Multifunction counter with rate/ratio 3 Front Dimension 48 = 48 x 48 mm Display C = LCD Presets 2 = 2 presets 4 = 4 presets Power 421 = AC power with backlit LCD display 422 = DC power with backlit LCD display 461 = AC power with two-color LCD display 3 3 Product Selection 3 1/16 DIN LCD 3 Description Catalog Number Battery Powered 1 Preset LCD E5-148-C1400 3 Battery power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) 3 90-260 Vac power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C2421 10-30 Vdc power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C2422 3 3 AC/DC Powered 2 Preset LCD AC Powered 4 Preset Two-Color LCD 90-260 Vac power 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) E5-648-C4461 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-50 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Preset Counters 3.3 Features 1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter 3 1/8 DIN cutout Type 4X front panel protection Seven-segment LED display 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 1/18 DIN Eclipse Series Preset Counter 3 Eclipse Series Preset Counter 3 3 577 00 48 1 Type 577 = Eclipse Series 3 Outputs Power 00 = DC power 01 = AC power Function 48 = Counter 1 = Dual relay out 2 = Analog output (4-20 mA + 0-10V) 3 = Dual relay + analog output 4 = RS-485 communications 5 = Dual relay + RS-485 communications 6 = Analog output + RS-485 communications 7 = Dual relay, RS-485 communications + analog output 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 LED Count Control, 6-Digit Description Catalog Number Relay out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700481 Relay out, 85-265 Vac power 57701481 Relay and analog out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700483 Relay and analog out, 85-265 Vac power 57701483 Relay and RS-485 out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700485 Relay and RS-485 out, 85-265 Vac power 57701485 Relay, analog and RS-485 out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700487 Relay, analog and RS-485 out, 85-265 Vac power 57701487 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-51 3.4 3 3 Logic Devices Ratemeters Product Overview Ratemeters Selection Guide 3 3 3 Description Courier Series Eclipse Series Page V9-T3-53 Page V9-T3-54 3 Display LCD LED Power supply Replaceable lithium battery 9-30 Vdc or 85-265 Vac 3 Number of digits 5 6 3 Panel cut-out size 68 x 33 mm 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN) Scaling capability Yes Yes 3 Number of presets -- 2 (with optional relay out model) 500 ms 3 3 3 Update time 700 ms Front panel protection Type 4X Type 4X Other features/functions Optional backlight, optional extended temperature range Analog retransmission/RS-485 communications Relay rating(s) -- 5A For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-52 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Ratemeters 3.4 Features Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter 3 1/Tau ratemeter Scaling capabilities Type 4X protection Internal battery: 3V, lithium 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection Courier Series Battery Powered Ratemeter 3 Courier Series 3 3 533 0 0 404 Type 533 = Courier Series Power 0 = Battery powered Counter 0 = No option 1 = Extend temperature range 2 = Backlight option (24 Vdc required) 3 Function 404 = Ratemeter 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 1/Tau LCD Ratemeter Description Catalog Number Battery powered 53300404 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-53 3.4 3 Logic Devices Ratemeters Features Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter 3 1/8 DIN cutout Type 4X front panel protection Front panel programming 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN LED Ratemeter 3 Eclipse Series 577 00 47 1 3 3 Type 577 = Eclipse Series 3 Power 00 = DC power 01 = AC power Function 47 = Ratemeter 3 3 Outputs 1 = Dual relay out 2 = Analog output (4-20 mA + 0-10V) 3 = Dual relay + analog output 4 = RS-485 communications 5 = Dual relay + RS-485 communications 6 = Analog output + RS-485 communications 7 = Dual relay, RS-485 communications + analog output 3 3 3 Product Selection Eclipse Series 5-Digit LED Ratemeter Description Catalog Number 3 9-30 Vdc 57700470 9-30 Vdc, alarms 57700471 3 9-30 Vdc, analog out 57700472 9-30 Vdc, alarms, analog out 57700473 3 9-30 Vdc, RS-485 57700474 3 9-30 Vdc, alarms, RS-485 57700475 9-30 Vdc, analog out, RS-485 57700476 3 9-30 Vdc, alarms, analog out, RS-485 57700477 85-265 Vac 57701470 3 85-265 Vac, alarms 57701471 85-265 Vac, analog out 57701472 85-265 Vac, alarms, analog out 57701473 3 85-265 Vac, RS-485 57701474 85-265 Vac, alarms, RS-485 57701475 3 85-265 Vac, analog out, RS-485 57701476 85-265 Vac, alarms, analog out, RS-485 57701477 3 3 3 V9-T3-54 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Hour Meters 3.5 Product Overview 3 Hour Meters Selection Guide 3 3 Description T48 Series 6-T-3H Series E5-224 Series Page V9-T3-56 Page V9-T3-56 Page V9-T3-57 Page V9-T3-57 Panel cut-out size 45 x 45 mm (1/16 DIN) 50.8 mm (2 in) round 22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN) 52.3 mm (2.06 in) round OR 24 x 36.8 mm Display type Mechanical Mechanical LCD LCD Number of digits 7 for AC versions, 8 for DC versions 6 8 6 Power supply 10-30 Vdc or 100-130 Vac 115 Vac Internal battery 12-60 Vdc or 48-230 Vac 3 E42 Series Timing method Synchronous motor Quartz Solid-state Solid-state Front panel protection IP65 Type 4X IP65 No protection ratings Resolution 0.1 hour 0.1 hour 0.1 second 0.1 hour 3 3 3 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-55 3.5 3 Logic Devices Hour Meters Features Electromechanical Hour Meters 1/16 DIN High shock-resistance Without reset Data retention if power is lost 3 3 3 71.1 mm round 6-digit hour meter for round panel cut-out Low cost Waterproof Type 4X protection 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 Electromechanical Hour Meters 3 Hour Meters 6 T - 3H 508R PM - 406 3 3 3 Number of Digits 6 = 6 digits 7 = 7 digits 8 = 8 digits Function T = Time meter 3 Option 65 = IP65 seal 3H = 3-hole mount Size 508R = 50.8 mm round 4848 = 48 x 48 mm square Mounting PM = Panel mount 3 3 3 Product Selection Electromechanical Hour Meters Description Catalog Number 3 1/16 DIN 10-30 Vdc, 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) 8-T-65-4848PM-402 3 100-130 Vac, 1.89 x 1.89 in (48 x 48 mm) 7-T-65-4848PM-406 3 3 71.1 mm Round 115 Vac, 2.80 in (71.1 mm) round 6-T-3H-508RPM-406 10-80 Vdc, 2.80 in (71.1 mm) round 6-T-3H-508RPM-402 3 Accessories 3 DIN Rail Adapter 3 3 DIN Rail Adapter Description Catalog Number DIN rail adapter for DIN electromechanical hour meter T4848DINADAPT 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-56 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Voltage 402 = DC voltage 406 = AC voltage Logic Devices Hour Meters 3.5 Features Electronic LCD Hour Meters Battery powered Low price and high efficiency Large 8-digit LCD display, height of the figures 0.31 in (8 mm) Different time ranges from 0.1 second to 100,000 hours Lifetime of the battery is approximately eight years AC/DC powered Solid-state hour meters Record and display up to 99,999.9 hours, rollover and continue timing EEPROM memory can retain data for 25+ years Time accumulation indicated by flashing hourglass icon 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection Electronic LCD Hour Meters 3 LCD Hour Meters 3 Description Catalog Number 3 Hours/minutes, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0440 3 Hours/minutes, 10-260V input, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0448 Minutes/seconds, 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0450 Minutes/seconds, 10-260V input 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-224-C0458 3 Elapsed hour meter, 48-150 Vdc/100-230 Vac E42DIR48230 Elapsed hour meter w/reset, 48-150 Vdc/100-230 Vac E42DIR48230R 3 Elapsed hour meter, 12-48 Vdc/20-60 Vac E42DIR1260 Battery Powered 1/32 DIN 8-Digit LCD 3 AC/DC Powered Round LCD 3 AC/DC Powered Compact Rectangular LCD Elapsed hour meter, 48-150 Vdc/100-230 Vac E42DI2448230 Elapsed hour meter, w/reset, 48-150 Vdc/100-230 Vac E42DI2448230R Elapsed hour meter, 12-48 Vdc/20-60 Vac E42DI241260 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-57 3.6 3 3 Logic Devices Totalizers Product Overview Totalizers Selection Guide 3 3 Electromechanical Micro SE Series E5-024-C Series E5-x24-E Series Page V9-T3-59 Page V9-T3-59 Page V9-T3-60 Page V9-T3-60 Display type Mechanical Mechanical LCD LED 3 Number of digits 7 6 8 6 3 Power supply 12 Vdc 12 or 24 Vdc, 120 or 240 Vac Internal battery 10-30 Vdc Mounting configuration(s) Front panel (13 x 30 mm cut-out) Base mount, bottom mount, top mount, or front panel mount Front panel 22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN) Front panel 22 x 45 mm (1/32 DIN) 3 3 Description Maximum counting speed 25 Hz 10 Hz 12 kHz 20 kHz 3 Count reset method(s) -- -- Front panel or electronic, can be locked out Front panel or electronic, can be locked out 3 Front panel protection IP65 -- IP65 IP65 3 Totalizers Selection Guide, continued 3 3 3 Description 3 Display type Courier Series E5-496 Series Eclipse Series Page V9-T3-61 Page V9-T3-62 Page V9-T3-62 LCD LED LED 3 Number of digits 8 6 6 Power supply Replaceable battery 10-30 Vdc or 90-260 Vac 9-30 Vdc or 85-265 Vac 3 Mounting configuration(s) Front panel 68 x 33 mm Front panel 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN) Front panel 92 x 45 mm (1/8 DIN) 3 Maximum counting speed 10 kHz 60 kHz 8.2 kHz Count reset method(s) Front panel or electronic, can be locked out Front panel or electronic, can be locked out Front panel or electronic, can be locked out Front panel protection Type 4X IP65 Type 4X 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-58 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 3.6 Logic Devices Totalizers Features Electromechanical Totalizers Micro display Low power consumption; suitable for battery consumption Small dimensions Long service life 3 3 3 3 SE Series Low-cost electromechanical counter Multiple voltage ranges for almost any application Compact with various mounting options 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection Electromechanical Totalizers 3 Totalizers 3 3 6 - Y - 41610 - 401 - SE Number of Digits 6 = 6 digits 7 = 7 digits Function Y = Compact electromechanical totalizer Mounting Configuration 41610 = Bottom mount 41622 = Special base mount 41611 = Base mount 41623 = Special top mount 41612 = Top mount 42613 = Snap-in mount 41613 = Panel mount 3013PM = 30 x 13 mm panel mount Voltage 401 = 12 Vdc 402 = 24 Vdc 406 = 120 Vac 407 = 240 Vac Contact Configuration SE = SE Series Blank = Micro display counter 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Micro Display Counter Description Catalog Number Micro display counter--12 Vdc 7-Y-3013PM-401 3 3 3 SE Series Electromechanical Totalizers Description 3 Catalog Number Order Number 6-Digit Counter Description Catalog Number Order Number 6-Digit Counter, continued Bottom mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41610-401-SE 41610401 Panel mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41613-406-SE 41613406 Bottom mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41610-402-SE 41610402 Panel mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41613-407-SE 41613407 Bottom mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41610-406-SE 41610406 Special base mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41622-401-SE 41622401 Bottom mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41610-407-SE 41610407 Special base mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41622-402-SE 41622402 Base mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41611-401-SE 41611401 Special base mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41622-406-SE 41622406 Base mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41611-402-SE 41611402 Special base mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41622-407-SE 41622407 Base mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41611-406-SE 41611406 Special top mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41623-401-SE 41623401 Base mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41611-407-SE 41611407 Special top mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41623-402-SE 41623402 Top mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41612-401-SE 41612401 Special top mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41623-406-SE 41623406 Top mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41612-402-SE 41612402 Special top mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41623-407-SE 41623407 Top mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-41612-406-SE 41612406 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-42613-401-SE 42613401 Top mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-41612-407-SE 41612407 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-42613-402-SE 42613402 Panel mount sub-miniature 12 Vdc 6-Y-41613-401-SE 41613401 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 120 Vac 6-Y-42613-406-SE 42613406 Panel mount sub-miniature 24 Vdc 6-Y-41613-402-SE 41613402 Snap-in mount sub-miniature 240 Vac 6-Y-42613-407-SE 42613407 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-59 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3.6 3 Logic Devices Totalizers Features Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers Battery powered LCD Low price and high efficiency Large 8-digit LCD display, height of the figures 0.31 in (8 mm) Lifetime of the battery is approximately 8 years 3 3 3 DC Powered LED Display counter adding and subtracting Position display Frequency counter/ratemeter Timer Supply voltage: 10-30 Vdc with reverse polarity protection Polarity of inputs: programmable, NPN or PNP 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection 3 Electronic 1/32 DIN Totalizers 3 Electronic Totalizers E5 - 4 - 24 - E - 0 40 2 3 3 3 Type E5 = E5 Series Function 0 = Totalizer 4 = Multi-function totalizer/ timer/ratemeter 5 = Double function totalizer/ timer/ratemeter 3 3 3 3 Size 24 = 24 x 48 mm 1/32 DIN LCD Totalizers Description 3 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0400 10-260V input 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0408 Count up/down 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) LCD totalizer E5-024-C0410 3 3 3 3 3 Presets 0=0 Product Selection 3 3 Display C = LCD E = LED Option 40 = None 41 = Bi-directional 43 = Quadrature Catalog Number Battery Powered 8-Digit LCD Totalizer DC Powered 6-Digit LED Totalizer LED single channel totalizer, 10-30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-024-E0402 LED multifunction totalizer/timer/ratemeter, 10-30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-424-E0402 LED double-function totalizer/timer/ratemeter, 10-30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-524-E0402 LED totalizer with quadrature, 10-30 Vdc power 0.94 x 1.89 in (24 x 48 mm) E5-024-E0432 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-60 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Options 40 = Battery 41 = Battery with 10-260V input signal 43 = 10-30 Vdc Logic Devices Totalizers 3.6 Features Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers 3 8-digit totalizer 1/Tau ratemeter is an additional capability on the 53300405 only Scaling capabilities Remote reset terminal Type 4X protection Internal battery: 3V, lithium, replaceable battery 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Catalog Number Selection Electronic Courier Series Battery Powered LCD Totalizers 3 Courier Series 3 3 533 00 400 Type 533 = Courier Series 3 Function Option 00 = None 01 = Ext. temperature range 02 = Backlight 400 = Totalizer 401 = Add/subtract (10 kHz, PNP input) 402 = Add/subtract (20 kHz, NPN/contact input) 403 = Quadrature 405 = Totalizer/ratemeter 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Courier Series, 8-Digit LCD Totalizers Description Catalog Number Totalizer, battery 53300400 Add/subtract (10k Hz, PNP input) totalizer, battery 53300401 Add/subtract (20 Hz, NPN/contact input) totalizer, battery 53300402 Quadrature (10k Hz, PNP input) totalizer, battery 53300403 Totalizer/ratemeter, battery 53300405 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-61 3.6 3 Logic Devices Totalizers Features Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers LED Multifunction Display counter adding and subtracting Position display Frequency counter/ratemeter Display: 6-digit red, 7-segment LED display; 0.55 in (14 mm) high Polarity of inputs: programmable, NPN or PNP for all inputs 3 3 3 3 Eclipse Series 1/8 DIN cutout Type 4X front panel protection Front panel programming 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Electronic 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers 3 1/8 DIN LED Totalizers 3 3 3 Description Catalog Number LED Multifunction Counter/Timer/Ratemeter 90-260 Vac power 3.78 x 1.89 in (96 x 48 mm) E5-496-E0401 10-30 Vdc power 3.78 x 1.89 in (96 x 48 mm) E5-496-E0402 Eclipse Series LED Totalizer 9-30 Vdc power 57700480 85-265 Vac power 57701480 3 Analog out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700482 Analog out, 85-265 Vac power 57701482 3 RS-485 out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700484 RS-485 out, 85-265 Vac power 57701484 3 RS-485 out and analog out, 9-30 Vdc power 57700486 RS-485 out and analog out, 85-265 Vac power 57701486 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-62 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Logic Devices Encoders 3.7 Product Overview 3 Encoders Selection Guide 3 3 3 3 Description Cube Right-Angled Page V9-T3-64 Page V9-T3-64 Power supply 5-28 Vdc 5-28 Vdc Output signal NPN transistor NPN transistor Pulses per revolution Up to 600 Up to 1,800 Maximum shaft speed 6000 RPM 8000 RPM Mounting configuration(s) Face or base mounted Flange mounted Shaft size 3/8 in 3/8 in Maximum axial loading 10 lbs 80 lbs Quadrature output available Yes Yes 3 3 3 3 3 3 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E and PG05400001E. 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T3-63 3.7 3 Logic Devices Encoders Features Shaft Encoders Cube style 5-28 Vdc input power Single channel and quadrature models 3/8 in (9.5 mm) double-ended shaft 3 3 3 Right-angled 5-28 Vdc input power Quadrature output, two square waves Flange mounting 3/8 in (9.5 mm) shaft diameter 3 3 3 3 3 Product Selection 3 Shaft Encoders 3 Cube Shaft Encoders 3 3 3 3 Description Catalog Number Single Channel 60 pulses per revolution 38150060 100 pulses per revolution 38150100 120 pulses per revolution 38150120 600 pulses per revolution 38150600 Quadrature 3 60 pulses per revolution 38151060 100 pulses per revolution 38151100 3 120 pulses per revolution 38151120 600 pulses per revolution 38151600 3 3 Right-Angled Shaft Encoders, Size 20 Description Catalog Number 100 pulses per revolution 38159100 3 120 pulses per revolution 38159120 600 pulses per revolution 38159600 3 1000 pulses per revolution 381591000 1800 pulses per revolution 381591800 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V9-T3-64 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices 4.1 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M22--22.5 mm Modular Pushbutton . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10250T--30 mm Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 4.3 V9-T4-49 V9-T4-50 Panel Meters Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Panel Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 V9-T4-4 V9-T4-37 Stacklights Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E26 Stacklights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stacklights V9-T4-2 V9-T4-54 V9-T4-55 Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC-GP Graphics Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HMi Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XV Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XP Operator Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-T4-56 V9-T4-59 V9-T4-60 V9-T4-62 V9-T4-65 Panel Meters 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-1 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Product Overview Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices Selection Guide 4 4 4 4 Description M22--22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons 10250T--30 mm Pushbuttons Page V9-T4-4 Page V9-T4-37 Yes Ease of Use 4 Mounting nut on operator installation Yes Mounting adapter installation/removal Easy -- 4 Contact block installation Snaps on mounting adapter Screw in Contact block/light unit installation/removal Easy Easy 4 Visible actuator indication from rear Yes Yes 4 Optional spring cage terminations Yes -- Optional quick-connect terminations Yes Yes 4 Built-in or separate anti-rotation locking ring installation Built-in Built-in 4 4 Mounting time Low Low Removal time Low Low Yes -- Flexibility and Modularity Field convertible pushbuttons--color or inscribed button caps 4 Field convertible pushbuttons--maintained to momentary Yes -- Field convertible selector switches--momentary to maintained Yes -- 4 Field convertible key selector switches--key removal position Yes -- Universal voltage range LED light units 1 Yes -- 4 Stackable contact blocks Yes -- Enclosed limit switch contacts 2 Yes -- Yes Yes 4 Safety and Security 4 ISO/EN 13850/EN 418 rated E-stops Safety yellow E-stop enclosures Yes -- 4 Secure anti-rotation mounting Good Good Self-monitoring contact blocks Yes, available 4Q 2010 No 4 Communications 4 ASi bus network communications Yes -- DeviceNet network communications -- -- 4 PROFIBUS-DP network communications -- -- Low profile design Yes -- Low power integrated LED illuminated devices Yes -- Permanent and wear-resistant markings Yes -- Square bezel pushbuttons and pilot lights -- -- 4 4 4 Esthetics and Ergonomics 4 Notes 1 Eaton's M22 LED light units come in two convenient universal ranges: 12-30 Vac/Vdc and 85-244 Vac. 2 Eaton's M22 pushbutton, selector switch, and E-stop operators can be attached directly to Eaton's LS Series miniature limit switches. 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 V9-T4-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Pushbuttons and Pilot Devices Selection Guide, continued 4 4 4 M22--22.5 mm Modular Pushbuttons 10250T--30 mm Pushbuttons 4 Positive detent on selector switches Very good Fair 4 Ergonomic dome shaped E-stop and palm switches Yes -- 4 4 Description Esthetics and Ergonomics Specialty Operator Types Acoustic indicators (buzzers) Yes -- Double pushbutton operators Yes No Elevator E-stops (with mechanical flag indication) Yes -- EMO E-stops -- No Four-way pushbutton operators Yes -- Joysticks Yes -- Potentiometers Yes Yes Reset pushbutton operators Yes Yes Selector pushbutton (roto-push) operators -- -- Selector switches with key monitoring -- -- Toggle switches -- -- 4 China Compulsory Certification--CCC (China) Yes -- 4 Conformite Europeenne--CE (Europe) Yes Yes 4 4 4 4 4 Standards and Certifications Canadian Standard Association--CSA (Canada) Yes Yes Gosudarstvennyy Standart Russia--GOST R (Russia) Yes -- Underwriter's Laboratories--UL (United States) Yes Yes American Bureau of Shipping--ABS (United States) -- -- Bureau Veritas--BV (France) Yes -- Det Norske Veritas--DNV (Norway) Yes -- Germanischer Lloyd--GL (Germany) Yes -- Lloyd's Register--LR (United Kingdom) Yes -- Polski Regestre Statkow--PRS (Poland) -- -- Registro Italiano Navale--RINA (Italy) -- -- Russian Maritime Register of Shipping--RMRS (CIS) -- -- 4 4 4 Marine Classification Societies 4 4 4 4 4 Accessories USB socket bulkhead interface Yes -- RJ45 socket bulkhead interface Yes -- Padlock attachments for pushbuttons -- Yes Padlock attachments for selector switches -- Yes Padlock attachments for E-stops No -- Protective shrouds for E-stops Yes Yes DIN rail mounting adapter Yes -- 4 4 4 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-3 4.1 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices M22--22.5 mm Modular Pushbutton Features Highly modular and versatile line Field convertible functions (pushbuttons and selector switches), maintained to momentary Customizable laser engraving capabilities 4 4 LED indicators 100,000 hours of life in high-vibration environments Lenses specifically designed for LED illumination 4 4 Rugged design Most pushbutton operators and contact blocks exceed 5 million mechanical operations All components have IP66 rating, and some carry IP67 and IP69K for washdown environment; see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37 for further technical data 4 4 4 4 Innovative technologies ASi communicating devices Palm switches 4 4 Standards and Certifications 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Product Selection 4 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 4 Complete Devices M22-D-G-K10 Bezel Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Catalog Number Silver Black NO M22-D-S-K10 NC M22-D-S-K01 2NO M22-D-S-K20 2NC M22-D-S-K02 Red Green M22S-D-G-K10 Black Black Red Green 1NO-1NC M22-D-S-K11 NO M22-D-R-K10 NC M22-D-R-K01 2NO M22-D-R-K20 2NC M22-D-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-D-R-K11 NO M22-D-G-K10 NC M22-D-G-K01 2NO M22-D-G-K20 2NC M22-D-G-K02 1NO-1NC M22-D-G-K11 NO M22S-D-S-K10 NC M22S-D-S-K01 2NO M22S-D-S-K20 2NC M22S-D-S-K02 1NO-1NC M22S-D-S-K11 NO M22S-D-R-K10 NC M22S-D-R-K01 2NO M22S-D-R-K20 2NC M22S-D-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22S-D-R-K11 NO M22S-D-G-K10 NC M22S-D-G-K01 2NO M22S-D-G-K20 2NC M22S-D-G-K02 1NO-1NC M22S-D-G-K11 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-5 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush Components M22-XD-G Momentary Buttonless Operator Button Plates 1 Color Inscription 2 -- M22-XD-S Custom M22-XD-S-ETCH 3 4 STOP M22-XD-S-GB0 START M22-XD-S-GB1 4 CLOSE M22-XD-S-GB2 UP M22-XD-S-GB3 DOWN M22-XD-S-GB4 4 OFF M22-XD-S-GB5 ON M22-XD-S-GB6 4 TEST M22-XD-S-GB9 FORWARD M22-XD-S-GB15 REVERSE M22-XD-S-GB16 RAISE M22-XD-S-GB17 LOWER M22-XD-S-GB18 Black 4 4 4 4 4 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-D-X Silver M22-D-X M22S-D-X Black M22S-D-X M22-DG-X Silver guarded M22-DG-X Catalog Number M22-XD-S-X0 M22-XD-S-X1 4 M22-XD-S-X2 M22-XD-S-X4 4 Maintained Buttonless Operator 5 M22-XD-S-X5 M22-XD-S-X7 4 -- M22-XD-R 2 4 Custom M22-XD-R-ETCH 3 STOP M22-XD-R-GB0 4 OFF M22-XD-R-GB5 Red M22-XD-R-X0 4 -- M22-XD-G 2 4 Custom M22-XD-G-ETCH 3 START M22-XD-G-GB1 4 ON M22-XD-G-GB6 Green Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DR-X Silver M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X Black M22S-DR-X M22-XD-G-X1 4 Blue 4 4 -- M22-XD-B 2 Custom M22-XD-B-ETCH 3 RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 M22-XD-B-X6 White 4 4 -- M22-XD-W 2 Custom M22-XD-W-ETCH 3 START M22-XD-W-GB1 M22-XD-W-X1 -- M22-XD-Y 2 Custom M22-XD-Y-ETCH 3 4 Yellow 4 Black, red, green -- M22-XD-SRG Black, white, red, green, yellow, blue M22-XD-SWRGYB 4 -- Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 4 4 V9-T4-6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 4 Complete Devices M22-DH-R-K10 M22S-DH-R-K10 M22-DGH-R-K10 Bezel Button Color Silver Red Black Silver guarded Red Red Contact Block Configuration 1 Catalog Number NO M22-DH-R-K10 NC M22-DH-R-K01 2NO M22-DH-R-K20 2NC M22-DH-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-DH-R-K11 NO M22S-DH-R-K10 NC M22S-DH-R-K01 2NO M22S-DH-R-K20 2NC M22S-DH-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22S-DH-R-K11 NO M22-DGH-R-K10 NC M22-DGH-R-K01 2NO M22-DGH-R-K20 2NC M22-DGH-R-K02 1NO-1NC M22-DGH-R-K11 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-7 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Non-Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended Components M22-XDH-R Momentary Buttonless Operator Button Plates 1 Color Inscription 2 -- M22-XDH-S Custom M22-XDH-S-ETCH 3 4 STOP M22-XDH-S-GB0 START M22-XDH-S-GB1 4 CLOSE M22-XDH-S-GB2 UP M22-XDH-S-GB3 4 DOWN M22-XDH-S-GB4 4 OFF M22-XDH-S-GB5 ON M22-XDH-S-GB6 4 TEST M22-XDH-S-GB9 FORWARD M22-XDH-S-GB15 4 REVERSE M22-XDH-S-GB16 RAISE M22-XDH-S-GB17 LOWER M22-XDH-S-GB18 Black 4 4 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-D-X Silver M22-D-X M22S-D-X Black M22S-D-X M22-DG-X Silver guarded M22-DG-X Catalog Number 4 M22-XDH-S-X0 4 M22-XDH-S-X2 M22-XDH-S-X4 4 Maintained Buttonless Operator 5 M22-XDH-S-X5 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DR-X Silver M22-DR-X M22S-DR-X Black M22S-DR-X M22-XDH-S-X1 M22-XDH-S-X7 4 -- M22-XDH-R 2 4 Custom M22-XDH-R-ETCH 3 STOP M22-XDH-R-GB0 4 OFF M22-XDH-R-GB5 Red M22-XDH-R-X0 4 Green 4 4 -- M22-XDH-G 2 Custom M22-XDH-G-ETCH 3 START M22-XDH-G-GB1 ON M22-XDH-G-GB6 M22-XDH-G-X1 4 Blue 4 -- M22-XDH-B 2 Custom M22-XDH-B-ETCH 3 RESET M22-XDH-B-GB14 -- M22-XDH-W 2 Custom M22-XDH-W-ETCH 3 START M22-XDH-W-GB1 M22-XDH-B-X6 4 White 4 4 M22-XDH-W-X1 Yellow 4 Black, red, green 4 -- M22-XDH-Y 2 Custom M22-XDH-Y-ETCH 3 -- M22-XDH-SRG Black, white, red, -- green, yellow, blue 4 Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. M22-XDH-SWRGYB 4 4 V9-T4-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush, Momentary 4 Complete Devices M22-DL-G-K01-G Bezel Button Color Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Silver Red NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K01-R NC 85-264 Vac M22-DL-R-K01-230R 2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K02-R 2NC 85-264 Vac M22-DL-R-K02-230R 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22-DL-R-K11-230R NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K10-G NO 85-264 Vac M22-DL-G-K10-230G 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K20-G 2NO 85-264 Vac M22-DL-G-K20-230G Green White M22S-DL-G-K01-G Black Red Green White 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-G-K11-G 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22-DL-G-K11-230G 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K10-W NO 85-264 Vac M22-DL-W-K10-230W 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K20-W 2NO 85-264 Vac M22-DL-W-K20-230W 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DL-W-K11-W 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22-DL-W-K11-230W NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K01-R NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K01-230R 2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K02-R 2NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K02-230R 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-R-K11-230R NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K10-G NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K10-230G 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K20-G 2NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K20-230G 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-G-K11-G 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-G-K11-230G NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K10-W NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K10-230W 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K20-W 2NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K20-230W 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DL-W-K11-W 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DL-W-K11-230W 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-9 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Pushbuttons, Flush Components M22-XDL-G Red 4 Momentary Buttonless Operator Button Lenses 1 Color 4 Inscription 2 -- M22-XDL-R Custom M22-XDL-R-ETCH 3 STOP M22-XDL-R-GB0 OFF M22-XDL-R-GB5 4 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DL-X Silver M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X Black M22S-DL-X M22-DGL-X Silver guarded M22-DGL-X Catalog Number M22-XDL-R-X0 Green 4 4 -- M22-XDL-G 2 Custom M22-XDL-G-ETCH 3 START M22-XDL-G-GB1 ON M22-XDL-G-GB6 4 M22-XDL-G-X1 Blue 4 4 -- M22-XDL-B 2 Custom M22-XDL-B-ETCH 3 RESET M22-XDL-B-GB14 -- M22-XDL-W 2 Custom M22-XDL-W-ETCH 3 -- M22-XDL-Y 2 Custom M22-XDL-Y-ETCH 3 M22-XDL-B-X6 4 White 4 Yellow 4 4 Maintained Buttonless Operator 5 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DRL-X Silver M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X Black M22S-DRL-X 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-10 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended, Momentary 4 Complete Devices M22-DLH-R-K11-R Bezel Button Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Silver Red 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22-DLH-R-K11-230R 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-G-K20-G 2NO 85-264 Vac M22-DLH-G-K20-230G 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-DLH-W-K20-W 2NO 85-264 Vac M22-DLH-W-K20-230W Green White M22S-DLH-R-K11-R 4 Contact Block Configuration 1 Black Red Green White 4 1NO/1NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-R-K11-R 1NO/1NC 85-264 Vac M22S-DLH-R-K11-230R 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-G-K20-G 2NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DLH-G-K20-230G 2NO 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-DLH-W-K20-W 2NO 85-264 Vac M22S-DLH-W-K20-230W Note 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-11 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Pushbuttons, Extended Components M22-XDH-R Red 4 Momentary Buttonless Operator Button Lenses 1 Color 4 Inscription 2 -- M22-XDLH-R Custom M22-XDLH-R-ETCH 3 STOP M22-XDLH-R-GB0 OFF M22-XDLH-R-GB5 4 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DL-X Silver M22-DL-X M22S-DL-X Black M22S-DL-X M22-DGL-X Silver guarded M22-DGL-X Catalog Number M22-XDLH-R-X0 Green 4 4 -- M22-XDLH-G 2 Custom M22-XDLH-G-ETCH 3 START M22-XDLH-G-GB1 ON M22-XDLH-G-GB6 4 M22-XDLH-G-X1 Blue 4 4 -- M22-XDLH-B 2 Custom M22-XDLH-B-ETCH 3 RESET M22-XDLH-B-GB14 M22-XDLH-B-X6 4 White 4 Yellow 4 4 -- M22-XDLH-W 2 Custom M22-XDLH-W-ETCH 3 -- M22-XDLH-Y 2 Custom M22-XDLH-Y-ETCH 3 Maintained Buttonless Operator 5 Bezel Catalog Number 4 M22-DRL-X Silver M22-DRL-X M22S-DRL-X Black M22S-DRL-X 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 For complete listing of available button plates and contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDH-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 5 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Indicating Lights, Flush M22-L-R-R Lens Color M22S-DLH-R-K11-R 4 Complete Devices Light Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number White White 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-L-W-W Red Red M22-L-R-R Green Green M22-L-G-G Yellow White M22-L-Y-W Blue Blue M22-L-B-B Amber White M22-L-A-W White White Red Red M22-L-R-230R Green Green M22-L-G-230G Yellow White M22-L-Y-230W Blue Blue M22-L-B-230B Amber White M22-L-A-230W 85-264 Vac 4 4 4 4 4 M22-L-W-230W 4 4 4 4 Complete Press-to-Test Units Bezel Button Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Silver Red 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-T-R-R Blue M22-T-B-B Yellow M22-T-Y-W Green M22-T-G-G 85-264 Vac M22-T-R-230B Yellow M22-T-Y-230W Green M22-T-G-230G Red 4 4 4 M22-T-W-230W 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22S-T-B-B Yellow M22S-T-Y-W Green M22S-T-G-G White M22S-T-W-W 85-264 Vac 4 M22S-T-R-R Blue Red 4 M22-T-R-230R Blue White Black 4 M22-T-W-W White Red 4 4 4 4 M22S-T-R-230R Blue M22S-T-B-230B Yellow M22S-T-Y-230W Green M22S-T-G-230G White M22S-T-W-230W 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-13 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Components M22-XL-R 4 Lenses 1 Color Inscription Catalog Number Red -- M22-XL-R 2 Custom M22-XL-R-ETCH 3 OFF M22-XL-R-GB5 -- M22-XL-G 2 4 Custom M22-XL-G-ETCH 3 ON M22-XL-G-GB6 4 REVERSE M22-XL-G-GB16 -- M22-XL-B 2 Custom M22-XL-B-ETCH 3 FAULT M22-XL-B-GB8 -- M22-XL-W 2 4 Custom M22-XL-W-ETCH 3 OFF M22-XL-W-GB5 4 ON M22-XL-W-GB6 FAULT M22-XL-W-GB8 4 FORWARD M22-XL-W-GB15 -- M22-XL-Y 2 Custom M22-XL-Y-ETCH 3 -- M22-XL-A 2 Custom M22-XL-A-ETCH 3 4 Green Blue 4 4 White Yellow 4 Amber 4 4 4 M22-L-X Lensless Indicating Light Catalog Number M22-L-X 4 4 4 Notes 1 For complete listing of available lenses and light units, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XL-R-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-14 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Non-Illuminated Emergency Stops M22-PV-K01 4 Complete Devices Type Color Push-pull Red Twist-to-release Red Key release Red Contact Block Configuration 1 Catalog Number NC M22-PV-K01 2NC M22-PV-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PV-K12 NC M22-PVT-K01 2NC M22-PVT-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PVT-K12 NC M22-PVS-K01 2NC M22-PVS-K02 1NO-2NC M22-PVS-K12 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Components 4 Operators Only 2 M22-PV Type Color Catalog Number Push-pull Red M22-PV Black M22S-PV 4 4 4 4 M22S-PVT Twist-torelease Red M22-PVT Black M22S-PVT 4 4 4 Key release 3 Red 4 M22-PVS 4 M22-PVS-MS2 4 M22-PVS-MS3 M22-PVS-MS4 4 M22-PVS-MS5 M22-PVS-MS6 4 M22-PVS-MS7 4 M22-PVS-MS8 Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 3 Key included. For identical locks and keys, use the same key code. One key is included with actuator; additional keys are available as accessories. 4 Includes Key Code MS1. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-15 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Emergency Stops M22-PVL-K01-R 4 Complete Devices Type Button Color LED Color Push-pull Red Red Contact Block Configuration 1 Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K01-R 2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K02-R 1NO-2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVL-K12-R 4 NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVL-K01-230R 2NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVL-K02-230R 4 1NO-2NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVL-K12-230R NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K01-R 2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K02-R 4 1NO-2NC 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-PVLT-K12-R NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVLT-K01-230R 4 2NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVLT-K02-230R 1NO-2NC 85-264 Vac M22-PVLT-K12-230R 4 Twist-to-release 4 4 4 Components Operators Only 2 4 4 M22-PVL Type Color Catalog Number Push-pull Red M22-PVL Black M22S-PVL Red M22-PVLT Black M22S-PVLT 4 4 4 M22S-PVLT 4 Twist-to- release 4 4 Notes 1 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-16 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches M22-WKV-K10 4 Complete Devices, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Bezel Contact Block Configuration 2 Catalog Number Two-position Maintained Silver NO M22-WRK-K10 1NO-1NC M22-WRK-K11 2NO-2NC M22-WRK-K22 NO M22S-WRK-K10 1NO-1NC M22S-WRK-K11 2NO-2NC M22S-WRK-K22 NO M22-WKV-K10 1NO-1NC M22-WKV-K11 Black Maintained V Silver Black Three-position Maintained Silver Black 2NO-2NC M22-WKV-K22 NO M22S-WKV-K10 1NO-1NC M22S-WKV-K11 2NO-2NC M22S-WKV-K22 2NO M22-WRK3-K20 2NO-2NC M22-WRK3-K22 2NO M22S-WRK3-K20 2NO-2NC M22S-WRK3-K22 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-17 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, continued Components M22-WK 4 Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Bezel Catalog Number Two-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WK Black M22S-WK Silver M22-WRK Black M22S-WRK 4 4 Maintained 4 4 Maintained V 4 4 Three-position Momentary 2 Silver M22-WKV Black M22S-WKV Silver M22-WK3 Black M22S-WK3 Silver M22-WRK3 Black M22S-WRK3 4 4 Maintained 4 4 Maintained, return from left Silver M22-WRK3-2 Black M22S-WRK3-2 Silver M22-WRK3-1 Black M22S-WRK3-1 Silver M22-WRK4 Black M22S-WRK4 4 Maintained, return from right 4 4 Four-position 4 Maintained 4 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Non-Illuminated Selector Switches, continued 4 Components M22S-WR3-X94 4 Operators Only, Rotary Type 1 Type Switching Position Bezel Inscription Catalog Number Two-position Momentary 2 Silver I-O M22-W Black I-O M22S-W Silver I-O M22-WR Custom M22-WR-ETCH 3 AUTO-HAND M22-WR-X91 II-I M22-WR-X92 I-O M22S-WR Custom M22S-WR-ETCH 3 AUTO-HAND M22S-WR-X91 4 4 4 Maintained Black Three-position Momentary 2 Maintained II-I M22S-WR-X92 Silver I-O-II M22-W3 Black I-O-II M22S-W3 Silver I-O-II M22-WR3 Custom M22-WR3-ETCH 3 AUTO-O-MAN M22-WR3-X94 I-O-II M22S-WR3 Custom M22S-WR3-ETCH 3 Black Four-position Maintained AUTO-O-MAN M22S-WR3-X94 Silver 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-WR4 Black 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22S-WR4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37. 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-WR3-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X88, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-19 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Selector Switches Components M22-WLK-W Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position 2 Bezel Button Color Catalog Number White M22-WLK-W Red M22-WLK-R 4 Green M22-WLK-G Yellow M22-WLK-Y 4 Blue M22-WLK-B White M22S-WLK-W Red M22S-WLK-R 4 Green M22S-WLK-G Yellow M22S-WLK-Y 4 Blue M22S-WLK-B White M22-WRLK-W Red M22-WRLK-R 4 Green M22-WRLK-G Yellow M22-WRLK-Y 4 Blue M22-WRLK-B White M22S-WRLK-W Red M22S-WRLK-R Green M22S-WRLK-G Yellow M22S-WRLK-Y Blue M22S-WRLK-B White M22-WLKV-W 4 Red M22-WLKV-R Green M22-WLKV-G 4 Yellow M22-WLKV-Y Blue M22-WLKV-B White M22S-WLKV-W 4 Red M22S-WLKV-R Green M22S-WLKV-G 4 Yellow M22S-WLKV-Y Blue M22S-WLKV-B Two-position 4 Momentary Silver Black 4 Maintained 4 Silver Black 4 4 4 Maintained V 4 Silver Black 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Illuminated Selector Switches, continued 4 Components M22-WLK3-W 4 Operators Only, Knob Type 1 Type Switching Position Bezel Button Color Catalog Number Three-position Momentary 2 Silver White M22-WLK3-W Red M22-WLK3-R Green M22-WLK3-G Yellow M22-WLK3-Y Blue M22-WLK3-B White M22S-WLK3-W Red M22S-WLK3-R Green M22S-WLK3-G Yellow M22S-WLK3-Y Blue M22S-WLK3-B White M22-WRLK3-W Red M22-WRLK3-R Green M22-WRLK3-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-B White M22S-WRLK3-W Red M22S-WRLK3-R Green M22S-WRLK3-G Yellow M22S-WRLK3-Y Blue M22S-WRLK3-B White M22-WRLK3-1-W Red M22-WRLK3-1-R Green M22-WRLK3-1-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-1-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-1-B White M22S-WRLK3-1-W Red M22S-WRLK3-1-R Green M22S-WRLK3-1-G Yellow M22S-WRLK3-1-Y Blue M22S-WRLK3-1-B Black Maintained Silver Black Maintained, return from right Silver Black Maintained, return from left Silver Black White M22-WRLK3-2-W Red M22-WRLK3-2-R Green M22-WRLK3-2-G Yellow M22-WRLK3-2-Y Blue M22-WRLK3-2-B White M22S-WRLK3-2-W Red M22S-WRLK3-2-R Green M22S-WRLK3-2-G Yellow M22S-WRLK3-2-Y Blue M22S-WRLK3-2-B 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37. 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-21 4.1 4 4 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Key-Operated Selector Switches 12 For additional key code options, see Volume 7--Solid-State Motor Control, CA08100008E, Tab 37. Components 4 4 Operator Interface Operators Only 3 Type M22-WS Two-position Switching Position Momentary 4 Key Code Bezel Key Removal Position Catalog Number MS1 Silver Return from right, key removable left M22-WS Black Return from right, key removable left M22S-WS MS1 Silver Key removable left M22-WRS-A1 Key removable left/right M22-WRS MS1 Black Key removable left M22S-WRS-A1 Key removable left/right M22S-WRS Silver Return from left/right, key removable center M22-WS3 Black Return from left/right, key removable center M22S-WS3 4 4 4 M22S-WRS Two-position Maintained 4 4 4 4 M22-WS3-X93 Three-position Momentary 4 MS1 4 Key removable center M22-WRS3-A1 Key removable center/left M22-WRS3-A2 Key removable center/right M22-WRS3-A3 Key removable left/right M22-WRS3 4 Return from left, key removable center M22-WRS3-A7 4 Return from left, key removable center/right M22-WRS3-A6 Return from right, key removable left/center M22-WRS3-A4 Return from right, key removable center M22-WRS3-A5 Maintained 4 MS1 Silver 4 4 4 4 Key removable center M22S-WRS3-A1 Key removable center/left M22S-WRS3-A2 Key removable center/right M22S-WRS3-A3 Key removable left/right/center M22S-WRS3 Return from left, key removable center M22S-WRS3-A7 4 Return from left, key removable center/right M22S-WRS3-A6 4 Return from right, key removable left/center M22S-WRS3-A4 4 Return from right, key removable center M22S-WRS3-A5 Black 4 4 4 4 Black 4 Notes 1 Includes one key. 2 Key removal positions can be modified in the field using coding adapters; see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37. 3 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 4 Momentary selector switches can be converted in the field to maintained operation with the removal of a color coded adapter. See Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions CA08100008E, Tab 37. 4 4 4 V9-T4-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1 4 Momentary Complete Devices M22-DP-R-K01 M22S-DP-R-K01 Bezel Button Color Silver Red Black Red Contact Block Configuration 2 4 Catalog Number 4 NC M22-DP-R-K01 2NC M22-DP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22-DP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22-DP-R-K11 4 4 NC M22S-DP-R-K01 2NC M22S-DP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22S-DP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22S-DP-R-K11 4 4 4 4 Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons, Maintained 1 3 4 Complete Devices M22-DP-R-K01 M22S-DP-R-K01 Bezel Button Color Silver Red Black Red Contact Block Configuration 4 4 Catalog Number NC M22-DRP-R-K01 2NC M22-DRP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22-DRP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22-DRP-R-K11 NC M22S-DRP-R-K01 2NC M22S-DRP-R-K02 1NO-2NC M22S-DRP-R-K12 1NO-1NC M22S-DRP-R-K11 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 3 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 4 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-23 4.1 4 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Non-Illuminated Mushroom Head Pushbuttons 1 Components M22-XDP-G Mushroom Head Plates M22-DP-G-X Momentary Insertless Mushroom Head Operators Color Inscription Catalog Number Black --- M22-XDP-S 2 Bezel Custom M22-XDP-S-ETCH 3 Silver 4 STOP M22-XDP-S-GB0 START M22-XDP-S-GB1 Green M22-DP-G-X 4 FORWARD M22-XDP-S-GB15 Yellow M22-DP-Y-X REVERSE M22-XDP-S-GB16 Black M22S-DP-S-X 4 UP M22-XDP-S-GB3 Red M22S-DP-R-X DOWN M22-XDP-S-GB4 Green M22S-DP-G-X OFF M22-XDP-S-GB5 Yellow M22S-DP-Y-X ON M22-XDP-S-GB6 4 4 4 Black Color Catalog Number Black M22-DP-S-X Red M22-DP-R-X M22-XDP-S-X0 4 M22-XDP-S-X1 4 M22-XDP-S-X5 M22-XDP-S-X4 Red 4 4 4 Green 4 Yellow 4 Catalog Number Black M22-DRP-S-X M22-DRP-R-X Custom M22-XDP-R-ETCH 3 Green M22-DRP-G-X STOP M22-XDP-R-GB0 Yellow M22-DRP-Y-X OFF M22-XDP-R-GB5 Black M22S-DRP-S-X M22-XDP-R-X0 Red M22S-DRP-R-X -- M22-XDP-G 2 Green M22S-DRP-G-X Custom M22-XDP-G-ETCH 3 Yellow M22S-DRP-Y-X START M22-XDP-G-GB1 ON M22-XDP-G-GB6 M22-XDP-G-X1 4 Color Red M22-XDP-G-X0 White Bezel M22-XDP-R 2 4 4 Maintained Insertless Mushroom Head Operators 4 -- M22-XDP-S-X7 4 M22-DRP-G-X -- M22-XDP-W 2 Custom M22-XDP-W-ETCH 3 -- M22-XDP-Y 2 Custom M22-XDP-Y-ETCH 3 Silver Black Notes 1 35 mm diameter mushroom head button. 2 Minimum order quantity of (10). 3 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XDP-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 Maintained pushbuttons can be converted in the field to momentary operation by switching the locking ring, which is accessible through the side of the operator body. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Components 4 Double Pushbuttons, Extended Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary 4 Operators Only 1 Color M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 Inscription Bezel Top Bottom Silver Green Red Top Bottom Catalog Number 4 -- -- M22-DDL-GR Custom Custom M22-DDL-GR-ETCH 2 START STOP M22-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 -- -- M22-DDL-WS 4 4 M22-DDL-GR-X1-X0 White Black Custom Custom M22-DDL-WS-ETCH 4 2 4 M22-DDL-WS-X1-X0 Black Black START STOP M22-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0 -- -- M22-DDL-S Custom Custom M22-DDL-S-ETCH 2 -- -- 4 4 M22-DDL-S-X4-X5 4 M22-DDL-S-X7-X7 M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0 Black Green Red 4 -- -- M22S-DDL-GR Custom Custom M22S-DDL-GR-ETCH 2 START STOP M22S-DDL-GR-GB1-GB0 -- -- M22S-DDL-WS Custom Custom M22S-DDL-WS-ETCH 2 4 M22S-DDL-GR-X1-X0 White Black 4 M22S-DDL-WS-X1-X0 Black Black 4 START STOP M22S-DDL-WS-GB1-GB0 -- -- M22S-DDL-S Custom Custom M22S-DDL-S-ETCH 2 -- M22S-DDL-S-X4-X5 4 4 4 M22S-DDL-S-X7-X7 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DDL-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-25 4.1 4 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbuttons and Center Light, Momentary Operators Only 1 4 4 Operator Interface Color M22-DDLF-GR Top Bottom Top Bottom Catalog Number Silver Green Red -- -- M22-DDLF-GR Custom Custom M22-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2 -- -- M22-DDLF-WS Custom Custom M22-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2 4 White 4 4 4 M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 Inscription Bezel Black Black Green Red M22-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22-DDLF-WS-X1-X0 Green Red -- -- M22S-DDLF-GR Custom Custom M22S-DDLF-GR-ETCH 2 -- -- M22S-DDLF-WS Custom Custom 4 White 4 Green Red M22S-DDLF-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22S-DDLF-WS-X1-X0 4 4 Black Double Pushbuttons, Flush Top Pushbutton and Center Light, Extended Bottom Pushbutton, Momentary 4 Operators Only 1 4 Bezel Top Bottom Silver Green Red 4 M22S-DDLF-WS-ETCH 2 Color M22-DDLM-GR Inscription Black Top Bottom Catalog Number -- -- M22-DDLM-GR Custom Custom M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2 -- -- M22-DDLM-WS Custom Custom 4 White 4 Green Red M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22-DDLM-WS-X1-X0 Green Red M22-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2 4 4 M22-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 Black -- Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-GR-ETCH 2 -- -- M22S-DDLM-WS Custom Custom M22S-DDLM-WS-ETCH 2 4 White 4 Green Red M22S-DDLM-GR-X1-X0 White Black M22S-DDLM-WS-X1-X0 4 Black M22S-DDLM-GR -- Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Four-Way Pushbuttons, Momentary 4 Components M22-D4-S-X7 4 Operators Only 1 Type Bezel Color Inscription Catalog Number Non-interlocked Silver Black -- M22-D4-S Black Interlocked Silver Black Black Black Black Custom M22-D4-S-ETCH 2 Directional arrows M22-D4-S-X7 -- M22S-D4-S Custom M22S-D4-S-ETCH 2 Directional arrows M22S-D4-S-X7 -- M22-DI4-S Custom M22-DI4-S-ETCH 2 Directional arrows M22-DI4-S-X7 -- M22S-DI4-S Custom M22S-DI4-S-ETCH 2 Directional arrows M22S-DI4-S-X7 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Joysticks 4 Components 4 M22-WJ2H 4 Operators Only 1 Bezel Number of Directions Switching Position Catalog Number Silver Two-position horizontal Momentary M22-WJ2H Two-position horizontal Maintained M22-WRJ2H Two-position vertical Momentary M22-WJ2V 4 M22-WJ2V-2P Two switch points Two-position vertical Maintained M22-WRJ2V Four-position Momentary M22-WJ4 4 4 M22-WJ4-2P Two switch points Four-position Maintained M22-WRJ4 Two-position horizontal Momentary M22S-WJ2H 4 4 M22S-WJ2H-2P Two switch points Two-position horizontal Maintained M22S-WRJ2H Two-position vertical Momentary M22S-WJ2V 4 4 M22S-WJ2V-2P Two switch points Two-position vertical Maintained M22S-WRJ2V Four-position Momentary M22S-WJ4 4 M22S-WJ4-2P Two switch points Four-position 4 M22-WJ2H-2P Two switch points Black 4 Maintained 4 M22S-WRJ4 4 Notes 1 Includes contact block mounting adapter. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-DDLM-GR-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_ 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-27 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Potentiometers Complete Devices M22-R10K Bezel Resistance Rk Catalog Number Silver 1 M22-R1K 4 4.7 M22-R4K7 10 M22-R10K 4 47 M22-R47K 100 M22-R100K 4 470 M22-R470K 1 M22S-R1K 4.7 M22S-R4K7 4 10 M22S-R10K 47 M22S-R47K 4 100 M22S-R100K 470 M22S-R470K 4 Black 4 4 Oversized Knob 1 M22-R1K-RH 4.7 M22-R4K7-RH 10 M22-R10K-RH 47 M22-R47K-RH 100 M22-R100K-RH 470 M22-R470K-RH 1 M22S-R1K-RH 4 4.7 M22S-R4K7-RH 10 M22S-R10K-RH 4 47 M22S-R47K-RH 100 M22S-R100K-RH 4 470 M22S-R470K-RH Decibel Rating Catalog Number Silver 4 4 4 4 4 4 Black Acoustic Devices M22-AMC-XAM 4 Description 4 4 4 4 Complete Devices M22-XAM Indicator with buzzer, black continuous tone, 18-30 Vac/Vdc 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC-XAM Indicator with buzzer, black pulsed tone, 18-30 Vac/Vdc 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC-XAMP Components 4 Description Decibel Rating 4 Indicator without buzzer, black 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-AMC 4 Buzzer only, continuous tone, 18-30 Vac/Vdc 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-XAM 4 Buzzer only, pulsed tone, 18-30 Vac/Vdc 83 dB/ 10 cm M22-XAMP Catalog Number 4 4 V9-T4-28 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Through-the-Door Operators 1 M22-DZ-B-X6 4 Complete Devices Color Blue Inscription Catalog Number -- M22-DZ-B RESET M22-DZ-B-GB14 4 4 4 M22-DZ-B-X6 Red M22-DZ-R -- 4 M22-DZ-R-X0 STOP M22-DZ-X M22-DZ-R-GB0 4 4 Buttonless Operator Bezel Catalog Number Silver M22-DZ-X 4 4 4 M22-XD-B 4 Button Plates 2 Color Inscription Catalog Number Blue -- M22-XD-B 3 RESET M22-XD-B-GB14 4 4 M22-XD-B-X6 Red 4 M22-XD-R 3 -- M22-XD-R-X0 STOP 4 M22-XD-R-GB0 4 Bulkhead Interfaces M22-USB-SA 4 USB Socket 45 Description Catalog Number Used for USB connection USB 2.0 Type A plug IP65 when closed IP20 when connected M22-USB-SA 4 4 4 4 4 M22-RJ45-SA 4 RJ45 Socket 6 Description Catalog Number Used for RJ45 Ethernet connection IP65 when closed IP20 when connected M22-RJ45-SA 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 The pushrod is 3.24 in long and can be cut to length. 2 Any combination of plate color and inscription is available. 3 Minimum order quantity of (10). 4 USB interface is complete with 2-ft-long USB cable. 5 UL and CSA pending. 6 RJ45 interface is an eight-wire connector. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4 4 4 V9-T4-29 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices ASi Adapter Modules Complete Devices M22-ASI Description Catalog Number 4 ASi adapter module M22-ASI ASi adapter module for base mounting M22-ASI-C 4 ASi adapter module for E-stop M22-ASI-S ASi adapter module for E-stop base mounting M22-ASI-CS 4 4 Complete Devices 4 4 Operator, Base and Contact Blocks 1 Button Color FAK-S-KC11-I 4 Catalog Number 1NO-1NC FAK-S-KC11-I Red 1NO-1NC FAK-R-KC11-I Yellow 1NO-1NC FAK-Y-KC11-I NC FAK-R-V-KC01-IY 2NC FAK-R-V-KC02-IY 1NO-2NC FAK-R-V-KC12-IY 1NO-1NC FAK-R-V-KC11-IY Momentary Black 4 4 Contact Block Configuration 2 FAK-R-V-KC01-IY 4 Maintained Red 4 4 Notes 1 For complete listing of available contact blocks, see Accessories, Pages V9-T4-31 to V9-T4-36. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-30 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Accessories 4 Mounting Adapters M22-A Description Catalog Number Contact block mounting adapter. 1 M22-A 4 4 4 M22-A4 Contact block mounting adapter, four-position (for use with four-way pushbuttons, joysticks and four-position selector switches only). 1 4 M22-A4 4 4 M22-LS Allows mounting of M22 pushbuttons to LS-Titan limit switch bodies (for the full LS-Titan catalog section, see PG08301004E). 4 M22-LS 4 4 M22-K10; 4 Contact Blocks Mounting Location Terminal Type Front Screw Base Front Spring cage Contact Configuration 2 Package Qty. Catalog Number NO 1 M22-K10 NO 25 M22-K10-B25 NO 100 M22-K10-B100 NO, early-make 1 M22-K10P NC 1 M22-K01 NC 25 M22-K01-B25 NC 100 M22-K01-B100 NC, late-break 1 M22-K01D NO 1 M22-KC10 NO 25 M22-KC10-B25 NO 100 M22-KC10-B100 NC 1 M22-KC01 NC 25 M22-KC01-B25 NC 100 M22-KC01-B100 NO 1 M22-CK10 NC 1 M22-CK01 NC, late-break 1 M22-CK01D 2NO 3 1 M22-CK20 3 1 M22-CK02 NO-NC 3 1 M22-CK11 NO 1 M22-CKC10 NC 1 M22-CKC01 2NC Base 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Included with each operator. 2 All NC contact blocks are positively driven contact. 3 Not stackable. 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-31 4.1 4 M22-LED-W 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Light Units Terminal Type Mounting Location LED Color Light Unit Voltage Catalog Number Screw Front White 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-LED-W 4 4 Red M22-LED-R Green M22-LED-G M22-LED-B Blue White 4 85-264 Vac M22-LED230-W Red M22-LED230-R 4 Green M22-LED230-G Blue M22-LED230-B 4 White Red M22-LED230H-R 4 Green M22-LED230H-G 207-264 Vac M22-LED230H-B Blue 4 Base White M22-LED230H-W 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-LEDC-W 4 Red M22-LEDC-R Green M22-LEDC-G 4 Blue M22-LEDC-B White 4 85-264 Vac M22-LEDC230-W Red M22-LEDC230-R 4 Green M22-LEDC230-G 4 White M22-LEDC230-B Blue 4 4 Spring cage Front 207-264 Vac M22-LEDC230H-W Red M22-LEDC230H-R Green M22-LEDC230H-G Blue M22-LEDC230H-B White 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLED-W 4 Red M22-CLED-R Green M22-CLED-G 4 Blue 4 Red M22-CLED230-R Green M22-CLED230-G Blue M22-CLED230-B White 4 Base 4 4 White M22-CLED-B 85-264 Vac 12-30 Vac/Vdc M22-CLEDC-W Red M22-CLEDC-R Green M22-CLEDC-G M22-CLEDC-B Blue 4 M22-CLED230-W White 85-264 Vac M22-CLEDC230-W 4 Red M22-CLEDC230-R Green M22-CLEDC230-G 4 Blue M22-CLEDC230-B 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-32 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices M22-XLED60 4.1 LED Resistor and Test Elements 4 Terminal Type Mounting Location Element Type Voltage Catalog Number Screw Front Resistor 12 42-60 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED60 220 Vdc M22-XLED220 12-240 Vac/Vdc M22-XLED-T 85-264 Vac M22-XLED230-T Test 4 4 4 4 Legend Plate Holders and Inserts, Pushbuttons and Double Pushbuttons M22S-ST-X 3 4 Description Inscription Catalog Number Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for pushbuttons -- M22S-ST-X 4 Legend plate holder, without legend plate insert, for double pushbuttons -- M22S-STDD-X 4 4 M22-XST-GB0 Legend plate insert -- M22-XST Custom M22-XST-ETCH 4 STOP M22-XST-GB0 START M22-XST-GB1 OFF M22-XST-GB5 ON M22-XST-GB6 RUN M22-XST-GB7 FAULT M22-XST-GB8 OFF ON M22-XST-GB10 MAN. AUTO M22-XST-GB11 MAN. O AUTO M22-XST-GB12 HAND AUTO M22-XST-D11 HAND O AUTO M22-XST-D12 1 M22-XST-X52 2 M22-XST-X53 OI M22-XST-X88 O-I M22-XST-X89 I O II M22-XST-X93 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Resistor units to be used with 12-30V light units. 2 Refer to IL04716002E for use of resistor elements in series for higher DC voltage. 3 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13. 4 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 Example To order a legend plate for a pushbutton with non-standard markings (FORWARD): 1. Select legend plate holder--M22S-ST-X. 4 2. Select legend plate insert--M22-XST-ETCH. 4 3. Select FORWARD from the Symbols Library, Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37, identified by GB15 suffix. 4 4. Indicate on the order form in the order notes--suffix GB15, line item # ___ . 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-33 4.1 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Legend Plates, Complete 1 4 4 Operator Interface Description M22S-ST-GB0 Inscription Catalog Number STOP M22S-ST-GB0 START M22S-ST-GB1 OFF M22S-ST-GB5 ON M22S-ST-GB6 RUN M22S-ST-GB7 4 FAULT M22S-ST-GB8 1 M22S-ST-X52 4 2 M22S-ST-X53 OFF ON M22S-ST-GB10 MAN. AUTO M22S-ST-GB11 4 MAN. O AUTO M22S-ST-GB12 HAND AUTO M22S-ST-D11 4 HAND O AUTO M22S-ST-D12 OI M22S-ST-X88 O-I M22S-ST-X89 I O II M22S-ST-X93 For use with pushbuttons and indicating lights Legend plate holder with insert 4 4 Selector switches -- 4 4 4 M22-XZK Emergency-stop operators Rectangular yellow legend plate 4 -- M22-XZK Custom M22-XZK-ETCH 2 EMERGENCY-STOP M22-XZK-GB99 4 M22-XYK -- M22-XYK -- M22-XYK-ETCH 2 EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XYK1 EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XYK5 -- M22-XAK 4 Custom M22-XAK-ETCH 2 EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XAK1 4 EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XAK5 -- M22-XBK Custom M22-XBK-ETCH 2 EMERGENCY-STOP four-language M22-XBK1 EMERGENCY-STOP (top and bottom) M22-XBK5 4 Square yellow legend plate 4 4 Round yellow legend plate, 90 mm M22-XBK1 Round yellow legend plate, 60 mm 4 4 4 M22-XCK1 4 4 4 Four-way pushbutton, joystick and four-position selector switches Silver square legend plate -- M22-XCK Custom M22-XCK-ETCH 2 Four directional arrows M22-XCK1 0-1-0-2-0-3-0-4 M22-XCK2 Two directional arrows M22-XCK3 Notes 1 Legend plates are IP66 and NEMA 4X/13. 2 When ordering, specify inscription per catalog number suffix from the Symbols Library (see Volume 7-- Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E, Tab 37) into the Order Notes. For example, M22-XD-S-ETCH; Order Notes: Mark with symbol X91, Line item #_. 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-34 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices M22-IY1-PG Surface Mounting Enclosures 1 Selector Switch Accessories Description Catalog Number Description Catalog Number Yellow top, black base for emergency-stop operators M22-IY1-PG Plunger bridge 2 M22-XW M22-XW 4 4 4 M22-XWS M22-IY-PG M22-EY1 One-element enclosure M22-I1-PG Two-element enclosure M22-I2-PG Three-element enclosure M22-I3-PG Four-element enclosure M22-I4-PG Six-element enclosure M22-I6-PG M20 connecting screw M22-XI M20 cord grip V-M20 Key cover 4 M22-XWS 4 M22-XC-R Key withdraw adapter 3 4 M22-XC-R 4 4 M22-XC-Y Coding adapter M22-XC-Y M22-XGWK Guard ring M22-XGWK 4 4 Flush Mounting Plates, Aluminum Finish Rating Catalog Number Yellow paint for emergency-stop operators -- M22-EY1 Gray anodized IP65 M22-E1 IP65 M22-E2 IP65 M22-E3 IP65 M22-E4 One Hole 4 4 Two Holes Emergency Stop Operator Accessories Gray anodized Three Holes M22-XGPV Gray anodized Description Catalog Number Yellow guard ring M22-XGPV Five Holes 4 M22G-XGPV Gray anodized IP65 M22-E5 IP40 M22-E6 Gray guard ring M22G-XGPV 4 M22-PL-PV M22-H1 Sealing shroud M22-PL-PV Shrouds, Plastic Description Rating Catalog Number One-element IP55 M22-H1 Two-element IP55 M22-H2 Three-element IP55 M22-H3 Four-element IP40 M22-H4 Five-element IP40 M22-H5 Six-element IP40 M22-H6 Mounting plate -- M22-XE5 Plaster keys for flush mounting -- M22-UPE 4 4 Six Holes Anodized 4 4 Four Holes Gray anodized 4 4 4 4 M22-B Blanking Plugs Color Catalog Number Gray M22-B Black M22S-B 4 4 4 Notes 1 Requires use of base mounted contact blocks. 2 Plunger needed to actuate center-mounted contact blocks. Used for non-illuminated three-position selector switches only. 3 Enables a keyed selector switch to be set to user-selected key withdraw position. 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-35 4.1 M22-TC and M22-TA 4 4 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Mounting Accessories 4 4 Operator Interface M22-IVS Description Catalog Number Telescopic clip with top-hat rail M22-TC Telescopic clip M22-TA Telescopic clip extension M22-TCV DIN rail mounting adapter M22-IVS 4 4 4 M22-GR Mounting ring M22-GR M22-MS Mounting ring tool M22-MS 4 4 4 4 M22-T-D and M22-T-DD M22-ADC4 Protective Diaphragm For Use with ... Catalog Number Flush pushbuttons and indicating lights M22-T-D Double pushbuttons M22-T-DD Dust Covers Description Catalog Number Contact block dust cover M22-XKDP Operator dust cover, max three contact blocks M22-ADC Operator dust cover, max four contact blocks M22-ADC4 Kits Description Catalog Number Includes one each: M22-XW, M22-XC-R, M22-XC-Y, M22S-B, M22-A, M22-XD-SWRGYB M22-KT1 4 4 4 M22S-R30 Adapter ring set for 30 mm holes M22S-R30 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-36 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Features 10250T--30 mm Pushbuttons 4 Heavy-duty zinc die-cast construction Enclosed silver contacts with reliability nibs Diaphragm seals with drainage holes Grounding nibs on the operator casing 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Product Selection 4 10250T--30 mm Pushbuttons Flush Button 4 Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Units--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Catalog Number Contact Type Button Color Flush Button Extended Button Mushroom Button Jumbo Mushroom 1 1NO Black 10250T23B 10250T25B 10250T26B 10250T27B Red 10250T23R 10250T112-53 10250T122-53 10250T172-53 Green 10250T23G 10250T25G 10250T26G 10250T27G Yellow 10250T23Y 10250T25Y 10250T26Y 10250T27Y Red--Engraved EMERG. STOP -- -- -- 10250T17213-53 Extended Button 1NC Mushroom Button 1NO-1NC Jumbo Mushroom 2NO 2NC Black 10250T101-51 10250T111-51 10250T121-51 10250T171-51 Red 10250T102-51 10250T25R 10250T26R 10250T27R Green 10250T103-51 10250T113-51 10250T123-51 10250T173-51 Yellow 10250T104-51 10250T120-51 10250T124-51 10250T174-51 Red--Engraved EMERG. STOP -- -- -- 10250T29 Black 10250T30B 10250T31B 10250T32B 10250T33B Red 10250T30R 10250T31R 10250T32R 10250T33R Green 10250T30G 10250T31G 10250T32G 10250T33G Yellow 10250T30Y 10250T31Y 10250T32Y 10250T33Y Red--Engraved EMERG. STOP -- -- -- 10250T33 Black 10250T101-2 10250T111-2 10250T121-2 10250T171-2 Red 10250T102-2 10250T112-2 10250T122-2 10250T172-2 Green 10250T103-2 10250T113-2 10250T123-2 10250T173-2 Yellow 10250T104-2 10250T120-2 10250T124-2 10250T174-2 Red--Engraved EMERG. STOP -- -- -- 10250T17213-2 Black 10250T101-3 10250T111-3 10250T121-3 10250T171-3 Red 10250T102-3 10250T112-3 10250T122-3 10250T172-3 Green 10250T103-3 10250T113-3 10250T123-3 10250T173-3 Yellow 10250T104-3 10250T120-3 10250T124-3 10250T174-3 Red--Engraved EMERG. STOP -- -- -- 10250T17213-3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Anodized aluminum head is not suitable for use in ultraviolet light applications. 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-37 4.1 4 24V Full Voltage Illuminated Pushbutton 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Illuminated Pushbutton Units--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Catalog Number Type 4 Voltage LED/Lamp Number Illuminated Pushbutton 1NO 1NO-1NC 1NC Bayonet base 10250T397LRD24-53 10250T397LRD24-1 10250T397LRD24-51 10250T397LGD24-53 10250T397LGD24-1 10250T397LGD24-51 Amber 10250T397LAD24-53 10250T397LAD24-1 10250T397LAD24-51 Yellow 10250T397LYD24-53 10250T397LYD24-1 10250T397LYD24-51 Blue 10250T397LLD24-53 10250T397LLD24-1 10250T397LLD24-51 10250T397LWD24-51 Color LED Lamp Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 4 Red Green 4 4 4 120 Vac 4 4 4 Transformer 120 Vac 4 4 4 4 White 10250T397LWD24-53 10250T397LWD24-1 Red 10250T397LRD2A-53 10250T397LRD2A-1 10250T397LRD2A-51 Green 10250T397LGD2A-53 10250T397LGD2A-1 10250T397LGD2A-51 Amber 10250T397LAD2A-53 10250T397LAD2A-1 10250T397LAD2A-51 Yellow 10250T397LYD2A-53 10250T397LYD2A-2 10250T397LYD2A-51 Blue 10250T397LLD2A-53 10250T397LLD2A-1 10250T397LLD2A-51 White 10250T397LWD2A-53 10250T397LWD2A-1 10250T397LWD2A-51 Red 10250T411LRD06-53 10250T411LRD06-1 10250T411LRD06-51 Green 10250T411LGD06-53 10250T411LGD06-1 10250T411LGD06-51 Amber 10250T411LAD06-53 10250T411LAD06-1 10250T411LAD06-51 Yellow 10250T411LYD06-53 10250T411LYD06-1 10250T411LYD06-51 Blue 10250T411LLD06-53 10250T411LLD06-1 10250T411LLD06-51 White 10250T411LWD06-53 10250T411LWD06-1 10250T411LWD06-51 Incandescent Lamp 10250T476C21-53 10250T476C21-1 10250T476C21-51 Green 10250T476C22-53 10250T476C22-1 10250T476C22-51 Amber 10250T476C43-53 10250T476C43-1 10250T476C43-51 Yellow 10250T476C23-53 10250T476C23-1 10250T476C23-51 4 Blue 10250T476C24-53 10250T476C24-1 10250T476C24-51 Clear 10250T476C25-53 10250T476C25-1 10250T476C25-51 4 White 10250T476C26-53 10250T476C26-1 10250T476C26-51 10250T471C21-53 10250T471C21-1 10250T471C21-51 Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 4 4 Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 4 Red Red #757 120MB Green 10250T471C22-53 10250T471C22-1 10250T471C22-51 Amber 10250T471C43-53 10250T471C43-1 10250T471C43-51 Yellow 10250T471C23-53 10250T471C23-1 10250T471C23-51 4 Blue 10250T471C24-53 10250T471C24-1 10250T471C24-51 Clear 10250T471C25-53 10250T471C25-1 10250T471C25-51 4 White 10250T471C26-53 10250T471C26-1 10250T471C26-51 10250T75R 1 10250T76R 1 10250T77R 1 Green 10250T75G 1 10250T76G 1 10250T77G 1 Amber 10250T75A 1 10250T76A 1 10250T77A 1 Yellow 10250T75Y 1 10250T76Y 1 10250T77Y 1 10250T75B 1 10250T76B 1 10250T77B 1 10250T75C 1 10250T76C 1 10250T77C 1 4 Transformer 4 4 4 120 Vac Red Blue Clear 4 White #755 10250T75W 1 10250T76W 1 Note 1 For flashing module catalog number 10250TFL1, add suffix code FM to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T75RFM. 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-38 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 10250T77W 1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Indicating Light Units 24V Full Voltage Illuminated Light 4 Indicating Light Units--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 1 Type Voltage Color 24 Vac/Vdc Red LED/Lamp Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 4 24V Full Voltage Indicating Light--Red Catalog Number 10250T206NC1N 120V AC Transformer PresTest--Green Catalog Number 10250T74NG 4 10250T197LRP24 10250T297LRP24 4 LED Lamp 120 Vac Transformer PresTest Full voltage 10250T197LGP24 10250T297LGP24 Amber 10250T197LAP24 10250T297LAP24 Yellow 10250T197LYP24 10250T297LYP24 Blue 10250T197LLP24 10250T297LLP24 White 10250T197LWP24 10250T297LWP24 Red 10250T197LRP2A 10250T297LRP2A Green 10250T197LGP2A 10250T297LGP2A Amber 10250T197LAP2A 10250T297LAP2A Yellow 10250T197LYP2A 10250T297LYP2A Blue 10250T197LLP2A 10250T297LLP2A White 10250T197LWP2A 10250T297LWP2A Red 10250T181LRP06 10250T221LRP06 Green 10250T181LGP06 10250T221LGP06 Amber 10250T181LAP06 10250T221LAP06 Yellow 10250T181LYP06 10250T221LYP06 Blue 10250T181LLP06 10250T221LLP06 White 10250T181LWP06 10250T221LWP06 10250T206NC1N 10250T235NC21 Green 10250T206NC2N 10250T235NC22 Amber 10250T206NC19N 10250T235NC43 Yellow 10250T206NC3N 10250T235NC23 Blue 10250T206NC4N 10250T235NC24 Clear 10250T206NC5N 10250T235NC25 10250T206NC6N 10250T235NC26 10250T201NC1N 10250T231NC21 Green 10250T201NC2N 10250T231NC22 Amber 10250T201NC19N 10250T231NC43 Yellow 10250T201NC3N 10250T231NC23 Blue 10250T201NC4N 10250T231NC24 Clear 10250T201NC5N 10250T231NC25 10250T201NC6N 10250T231NC26 10250T34R 10250T74NR Green 10250T34G 10250T74NG Amber 10250T34A 10250T74NA Yellow 10250T34Y 10250T74NY Blue 10250T34B 10250T74NB Clear 10250T34C 10250T74NC White 10250T34W 10250T74NW Green 120 Vac Transformer 120 VAC Bayonet base 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Incandescent Lamp Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc Red #757 White Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc Red 120MB White Transformer 2 120 VAC Red #755 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Standard indicating lights are rated UL (NEMA) 3S as well. 2 For flashing lamp, add letter F to listed catalog number. Example: 10250T34RF. 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-39 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Two-Position Push-Pull Units--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 4 Operator Position 1 4 Pull Push 4 Two-Position Maintained Push, Maintained Pull Contact Type Button Type/Color 10250T5B62-1X 4 O X X O 40 mm/red Mounting Location A B Catalog Number 10250T5B62-1X 1NO 1NC 4 4 10250T5B63-1X 4 O X X O 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 10250T5B63-1X 1NO 1NC 4 4 10250T5J63-1X O X X O 65 mm aluminum engraved EMERG. STOP/red 4 10250T5J63-1X 1NO 1NC 4 4 10250ED1080-2 O X X O 4 65 mm aluminum engraved EMERG. STOP/red 1NO Special security jumbo mushroom head 1NC 10250ED1080-2 4 4 4 10250T_ Three-Position Push-Pull Units--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 4 Pull Intermediate Push 4 Three-Position Maintained Push, Momentary Pull Button Type/Color X X 4 O X O O Contact Type Mounting Location A Catalog Number 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T9B60-3X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T9B62-3X 10250T9B63-3X 40 mm engraved EMERG. STOP/red 4 B Three-Position Momentary Push, Momentary Pull 4 X X O X O O 40 mm/black 1NC 10250T4B60-3X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T4B62-3X O X O O X O 40 mm/black 1NO 10250T10B60-1X 40 mm/red 1NC 10250T10B62-1X 4 4 4 Note 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-40 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Two-Position PushPull Operator Two-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Maintained Pull--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 4 Operator Position 1 Maintained-- Pull Maintained-- Push O X X O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Mounting Location Type A B LED Full Voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC Transformer LED/Lamp Number Bayonet base X O Incandescent 10250T597LRD24-1X 10250T597LRD2A-1X 10250T589LRD06-1X 24 Vac 10250T563LRD06-1X 120 Vac O X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO #757 10250T579C47-1X Resistor 120 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120MB 10250T580C47-1X #755 10250T589C47-1X Transformer 24 Vac 10250T563C47-1X 120 Vac 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Three-Position PushPull Operator 4 Three-Position Illuminated Momentary Push, Momentary Pull--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 Momentary-- Pull O X Maintained-- Intermediate O O Momentary-- Push X O Lamp Type Voltage Contact Type LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac 1NC Transformer X X O X O O Full voltage Transformer O X O O X O Incan- Full voltage descent Resistor Transformer Mounting Location LED/ Lamp Number A B Bayonet base O X O O 10250T1097LRD24-1X 10250T1097LRD2A-1X 24 Vac 10250T1089LRD06-1X 120 Vac 10250T1063LRD06-1X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Bayonet base 10250T497LRD24-3X 10250T497LRD2A-3X 24 Vac 10250T489LRD06-3X 120 Vac 10250T463LRD06-3X 24 Vac/Vdc 1NO 120 Vac 1NC 24 Vac #757 10250T1079C47-1X 120MB 10250T1080C47-1X #755 10250T1089C47-1X 10250T1063C47-1X 120 Vac X X Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC #757 10250T479C47-3X Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T480C47-3X Transformer 24 Vac #755 10250T489C47-3X 120 Vac 10250T463C47-3X 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-41 4.1 4 Three-Position PushPull Operator Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Three-Position Illuminated Maintained Push, Momentary Pull--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 Momentary-- Pull 4 4 X X 4 Maintained-- Intermediate O X Momentary-- Push O O Lamp Type Voltage LED Full voltage 24 Vac/Vdc 1NC 120 Vac 1NC Transformer 4 O X O O Incandescent 4 4 Bayonet base 4 10250T963LRD06-3X 1NC #757 10250T979C47-3X Resistor 120 Vac 1NC 120MB 10250T980C47-3X 24 Vac #755 Potentiometer with Knob and Standard Dial Plate--Linear Type 10%-- UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 12, 13 Catalog Number 2 Watt (60V Max.) Single Potentiometer with Standard Aluminum Dial Plate 34 4 1000 10250T331 2500 10250T332 4 5000 10250T338 10000 10250T333 4 25000 10250T334 4 4 50000 10250T335 Operator only 5 10250T330 Alternative--black plastic large legend with standard markings E34LP99 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 Shown with standard aluminum dial plate. 3 Large dial plate with space for legend is available at no charge. To order, add suffix 36 to catalog number. Example: 10250T33136. To order separately, see footnote 4 below. 4 Large dial plate has space at top for 15 letters. 3/32 in high. For custom stamped legend plates, order legend plate as separate item 10250TR30 and specify stamping. 5 For use with commercially purchased potentiometers having shaft dimensions per dimension drawing 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-42 10250T997LRD2A-3X 24 Vac/Vdc Potentiometers Potentiometer Ohms 10250T997LRD24-3X 10250T989LRD06-3X 24 Vac 120 Vac Vertical or Horizontal 2 One-Hole Mounting Red Standard Push-Pull Catalog Number Full voltage Transformer 4 4 Mounting Location LED/ Lamp Number A B 120 Vac X X 4 4 Contact Type Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 10250T989C47-3X 10250T963C47-3X 4.1 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Selector Switch Units Two-Position Maintained Switch 4 Two-Position Selector Switch--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated Operator Action 2 Three-Position Maintained Switch X O O X M Contact Type Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 10250T20KB 1NC M Illuminated--120V Transformer 10250T20LB 10250ED1117-KR 10250ED1117-LR 1NO Operator Action 2 Contact Type 4 4 4 4 Three-Position Selector Switch--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 4 Non-Illuminated Illuminated--120V Transformer Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever A B Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 1NO 10250T21KB 10250T21LB 10250ED1117-2KR 10250ED1117-2LR 10250T22KB 10250T22LB 10250ED1117-3KR 10250ED1117-3LR 4 4 X O O O O X 1NO X O O 1NO O X O 2NC (Series) 4 O O X 1NO 4 M M M 4 4 4 Four-Position Maintained Switch 4 Four-Position Selector Switch--UL (NEMA) Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12, 13 Operator Position 1 Non-Illuminated Operator Action 2 X O O O O X O O O O X O O O M Contact Type Mounting Location Black Knob Black Lever Red Knob Red Lever Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 Catalog Number 3 A B 10250T46KB 1NC M Illuminated--120V Transformer 10250T46LB 10250ED1117-4KR 10250ED1117-4LR 4 4 1NO 4 O 1NO 4 X 1NC 4 M M 4 Color Selection Illuminated 4 Non-Illuminated Color Code Letter Red Green R G Color Code Letter White Blue W B Color Code Letter Amber Clear A C Color Code Letter Black Red B R Color Code Letter Green White G W Color Code Letter 4 Blue Orange L O 4 Notes 1 X = closed circuit, O = open circuit. 2 M = Maintained. 3 To order different type or color selector switch, substitute the underlined character with appropriate suffix code from the Color Selection table. Example: 10250T20KG. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-43 4.1 4 4 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Legend Plates For Pushbutton Operators and Indicating Lights--Standard Square Legend Plate Legend 4 4 Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Blank--see table on Page V9-T4-46. 1/2 Round Legend Plate Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/16 in High 10250TS90 10250TM90 OFF Red 10250TS24 10250TM24 4 CLOSE 10250TS73 10250TM11 ON Black 10250TS25 10250TM25 DOWN 10250TS74 10250TM12 OPEN 10250TS26 10250TM26 4 EMERG. STOP Red 10250TS13 10250TM13 OUT 10250TS27 10250TM27 FAST Black 10250TS75 10250TM14 POWER ON 10250TS80 10250TM80 FASTER 10250TS87 10250TM87 RAISE 10250TS28 10250TM28 4 FEEDER ON 10250TS94 10250TM94 READY 10250TS86 10250TM86 FEEDER OFF 10250TS95 10250TM95 RESET 10250TS29 10250TM29 4 FORWARD 10250TS15 10250TM15 REVERSE 10250TS30 10250TM30 HIGH 10250TS16 10250TM16 RUN 10250TS31 10250TM31 IN 10250TS17 10250TM17 SAFE 10250TS85 10250TM85 4 INCH 10250TS18 10250TM18 SLOW 10250TS32 10250TM32 JOG 10250TS19 10250TM19 SLOWER 10250TS88 10250TM88 4 JOG FOR. 10250TS20 10250TM20 START 10250TS33 10250TM33 JOG REV. 10250TS21 10250TM21 STOP Red 10250TS34 10250TM34 LOW 10250TS22 10250TM22 TEST Black 10250TS83 10250TM83 LOWER 10250TS23 10250TM23 TRANSFER 10250TS93 10250TM93 LUBE-FAIL 10250TS92 10250TM92 TRIP 10250TS84 10250TM84 MOTOR RUN 10250TS81 10250TM81 UNCLAMP 10250TS91 10250TM91 MOTOR STOP 10250TS82 10250TM82 UP 10250TS35 10250TM35 CLAMP 4 4 4 4 4 Black 4 4 Blank Plastic Legend Plates--Square 4 Lettering 4 Color Field Standard Catalog Number Jumbo 2 Catalog Number Extra Large Catalog Number Black White or silver 3 10250TSP76 10250TLP76 10250TEP76 White Red or black 3 10250TSP77 10250TLP77 10250TEP77 Notes 1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 2 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. 3 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-44 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Square Legend Plate 4.1 For Selector Switch and Roto-Push Operators--Standard Size Color of Field Legend Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Legend Color of Field Square 1 Catalog Number 1/2 Round Catalog Number Blank--see table on Page V9-T4-46. 1/2 Round Legend Plate Two-Position--5/32 in High Lettering 70 mm Round--Plastic Legend Plate Three-Position--1/8 in High Lettering 10250TS38 10250TM38 AUTO OFF HAND 10250TS49 10250TM49 HAND AUTO 10250TS39 10250TM39 HIGH LOW 10250TS40 10250TM40 FOR. OFF REV. 10250TS50 10250TM50 FOR. SAFE REV. 10250TS69 10250TM69 JOG RUN 10250TS41 MAN. AUTO 10250TS67 10250TM41 HAND OFF AUTO 10250TS51 10250TM51 10250TM67 MAN. OFF AUTO 10250TS68 10250TM68 OFF ON 10250TS42 10250TM42 OPEN OFF CLOSE 10250TS53 10250TM53 OPEN CLOSE 10250TS43 10250TM43 RUN SAFE JOG 10250TS70 10250TM70 RUN JOG 10250TS44 10250TM44 UP OFF DOWN 10250TS54 10250TM54 SAFE RUN 10250TS45 10250TM45 ON STOP SAFE 10250TS71 10250TM71 START JOG 10250TS46 10250TM46 START STOP 10250TS47 10250TM47 UP DOWN 10250TS48 10250TM48 FOR. REV. Black Black Red 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 45 mm and 70 mm Plastic--Round 4 Color Lettering 4 Field Catalog Number Yellow or red 2 10250TRP78 2 10250TRP76 4 45 mm Blank 4 70 mm Blank Yellow or red Red EMERG. STOP Yellow 4 10250TRP79 4 For Push-Pull Units 3 Color of Field Legend Square 1 Catalog Number 4 1/2 Round Catalog Number 4 Standard Size--Letters on Legend Plates Below are 3/32 in High PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP2 10250TR2 PUSH ON/PULL OFF Black 10250TPP5 10250TR5 4 4 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP8 10250TR8 PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP11 10250TR11 4 4 Jumbo Size--Letters on Legend Plates Below are 1/8 in High PULL START/PUSH STOP Green/red 10250TPP3 10250TR3 PULL ON/PUSH OFF Black 10250TPP6 10250TR6 PULL OPEN/PUSH CLOSE Black 10250TPP9 10250TR9 PULL UP/PUSH DOWN Black 10250TPP12 10250TR12 4 4 Notes 1 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 2 If legend plate is to be engraved, specify field color required. 3 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols [ in the center of the plate. 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-45 4.1 4 4 4 Style Square 5 1/2 Round 4 4 4 4 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Blank and Custom Engraved Legend Plates 4 4 Operator Interface Color Small Catalog Number Standard Catalog Number Jumbo 1 Catalog Number Extra Large 2 Catalog Number Four-Position Selector Switch Standard Custom 3 Catalog Number Catalog Number Push-Pull with Symbols 4 Standard Jumbo 1 Catalog Number Catalog Number Black 10250TMS36 10250TS36 10250TL36 -- 10250TS76 10250TS72 10250TPP17 Red 10250TMS37 10250TS37 10250TL37 -- -- -- -- -- Green/red -- -- -- -- -- -- 10250TPP20 10250TPP21 Satin alum. -- -- -- 10250TNP99 -- -- -- -- Black 10250TP36 10250TM36 10250TJ36 -- -- 10250TM72 10250TR17 10250TR18 Red 10250TP37 10250TM37 10250TJ37 -- -- -- -- -- Green/red -- -- -- -- -- -- 10250TR20 10250TR21 Satin alum. -- 10250TM89 10250TJ89 -- -- -- -- -- Notes 1 Cannot be used on cast enclosures except for top row. Suitable for most sheet metal enclosures. 2 When used to meet Ford Motor Co. specifications, specify engraved legend. Cannot be used on standard cast or sheet metal enclosures. 3 Slightly larger than standard size for legends requiring more space--fits cast enclosures. 4 All push-pull legend plates include the symbols [ in the center of the plate. 5 Square legend plates have a satin aluminum field. Color is on lower portion. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-46 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 10250TPP18 Operator Interface Pushbutton and Pilot Devices 4.1 Accessories 4 Accessories Description Description Catalog Number 10250TA26 10250TA36 10250TA38 10250TA63 10250TA64 10250TA11 Padlocking Attachment for 10250TA2 Flush Pushbutton Operators Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. Will not lock NO contact. Padlocking Attachment for Use with Extended Pushbutton Permits locking NC contacts in open position with 1/4 in padlock. 10250TA26 Padlocking Cover Guard Cover locked over flush button makes it unaccessible or on extended button locks NC contacts open. Takes 1/4 in shank size padlock. 10250TA36 Padlock Hasp or Flip-Up Guard 10250TA38 When used with a 1/4 in padlock, makes flush and long button and knob selector switch unaccessible, but not locked down. Without the padlock, it is a flip-up guard. Padlock hasp can be removed before assembly. Padlocking Attachment for Use with 10250TA63 Flexible Weather Resistant Boot Used on long button operators. Stainless steel. Use only for locking NC contacts open. Padlock Attachment For use with illuminated pushbuttons and maintained push-pull operators having standard button or lens only. Use 1/4 in padlock. Locks in down position only. 10250TA64 Padlocking Attachment for NonIlluminated Knob Selector Switches Provision for up to 5, 1/4 in padlocks. 10250TA11 10250TA_ 10250TA25 10250TA4_ Flexible Weather Resistant Boot For use with button operators (extended buttons preferred). Temperature to -25F (-32C). (See Page V9-T4-48 for 10250TA96 Tightening Tool.) Black 4 4 10250TA3 Red 10250TA4 1 Green 10250TA10 Transparent Boot For regular illuminated pushbutton operators and PresTest--Temperature to -38F (-39C). 2 Boot for Flush Pushbutton Clear 10250TA25 10250TK5 56-9337 10250TA46 10250TA47 Red 10250TA48 Green 10250TA49 10250TK3 Shroud for Mushroom Head Operator Prevents accidental operation. (Not for push-pull operators.) 10250TA6 10250TA3_ Special Retaining Nut To accommodate thick panel: Indicating lights Extended Retaining Nut Replaces standard nut and provides guard for flush head pushbutton operators. 10250TA12 10250TA62 Terminal Block Two terminals, each will accommodate two wire terminations. 4 4 4 4 4 10250TA30 PresTest, pushbuttons and selector switches 10250TA31 10250TA12 4 4 56-9337 Shrouds and Guards 10250TA6 4 4 Contact Block Tape Seal 10250TK5 Seals plunger openings on last contact block. Order in multiples of 10 pieces. Selector Switch Operator Gasket Seals out dust from getting in between the cam and contact block plungers. Supplied as standard with all selector switches. 4 4 Black Thrust Washers To meet Ford Motor Co. mounting specifications. 4 4 Hardware and Kits 10250TK3 4 4 Boots Padlock Attachments 10250TA2 Catalog Number 10250TA62 4 4 4 4 10250TA15 Guard for Illuminated Pushbutton 10250TA56_ Shroud For jumbo mushroom head operator. Gray Half Shroud--Yellow For jumbo mushroom head operator. 10250TA8 Spacer Ring Used when legend plate is not required. 10250TA8 10250TA79 10250TA56 10250ED1241 Stacking Screw Replaces transformer mounting screws on indicating light so terminal block 10250TA62 can be mounted to light to support and connect a series resistor. This screw also fits all contact blocks. Order in multiples of 10. 10250TA79 Fingerproof Shroud 10 per package Fits new style contact blocks and light units. 4 4 4 Notes 1 Should not be used on flush button for STOP function. 2 Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 10250TA101 4 4 10250TA56Y Yellow 10250ED1241 10250TA15 4 10250TA101 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-47 4.1 Description 10250TA2_ 4 Base Mounting Spacers 1 Equivalent to contact block in depth-- complete with screws, washers, etc. 1 block deep 2 block deep 10250TKG_ 4 4 4 10250TA7_ 4 4 Grounding Kits Kits consist of a ring connector and a #6 screw for mounting connector to rear of contact block mounting screw. All components except standard indicating lights and PresTest indicating lights. 4 Special Operators and Attachments 4 1000 per pkg. 10250TA5 10250TA14 4 10250TFL_ Flasher Module Changes any AC illuminated device to a controlled flashing light. Fits 10250T, E30 and E34 devices. 24V 10250TKG1 10250TKG3 2 4 Master Test (Dual Input) Module Internal Form C relay suitable for either AC or DC applications. Total electrical isolation between monitored and test circuit. Fits all illuminated 10250T, E22, E30 and E34 devices. 48 Vdc 10250TMT8 10250TA23 PresTest indicating lights 1000 per pkg. 10250TA79 10250TA22 10250TKG2 2 Contact Block Terminal Jumpers Available in multiples of 100 only. Terminal to terminal--within block (short) 100 per pkg. 120V 10250ED986-4 10250TA_ 4 4 4 10250TA7 10250TA71 10250TA71-2 Wobble Stick Complete with retaining nut--fits standard button. 10250TA5 Lever Operator For use with two vertically mounted flush pushbuttons. 10250TA14 Maintained Contact Attachment Release Button Assembly 1 Mechanically interlocks with another pushbutton and contact block (not included). Provides mode indication. Minimum hole centers 1.62 in (41.1 mm), maximum 2.31 in (58.8 mm). Black 10250TA17 10250TA18 4 Green 10250TA19 Yellow 10250TA20 4 Same with long button--black 10250TA39 4 4 4 Maintained Contact Attachment 1 Mechanically interlocks two buttons and provides position indication for one. Use with two pushbutton operators and one or more contact blocks. 4 Roto-Push Lever Operator Used to provide lever operation for Roto-Push operators. 10250TA7 Tools Octagonal 10250T (notched to fit over selector switch lever), E29 and E30 10250TA95 E22CW E22, E30, E34 and octagonal 10250T (will not fit over selector switch levers) E22CW 10250TA96 Tool for Tightening Boots Used to install boot Catalog Numbers 10250TA3, A4, A10 and A25. 10250TA96 10250TA102 10250T, E34 Allen Wrench Used for removal of jumbo mushroom head. 10250TA102 10250TA74 Lamp Removal Tools 10250TA74 For transformer type illuminated pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches. Fits #12 lamp. E30KV1 For full voltage and resistor type illuminated E30KV1 pushbuttons, push-pull and selector switches and E30. E29KLT Standard indicating lights. Fits #44, #755, #6S6 and #10S6. 10250TA1 10250TA13 Plug For unused holes--steel, painted gray (stainless steel, use E30KT5) 2 E29KLT Notes Component only. Not to be used for custom built (factory assembled) stations. Not suitable for single contact block depth cast enclosure. Cover is too thick. 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-48 10250ED986-4 10250TA95 1 10250TA13 10250TFL1 Hole Plugs 10250TA70-2 Red 10250TA1 Flashing Incandescent Lamp For use with 120V transformer type or 6V full voltage type indicating lights including PresTest and most E29 devices. 10250TFL2 10250TA70 4 4 Catalog Number Special Light Modules Standard indicating lights Terminal to terminal--block to block (long) 100 per pkg. 4 Description Catalog Number Hardware and Kits, continued 4 4 Pushbutton and Pilot Devices Accessories, continued 4 4 Operator Interface Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Stacklights 4.2 Product Overview 4 Product Selection Guide 4 4 4 4 4 Description 4 E26 4 Page V9-T4-50 Standards and Certifications 4 CE 60947-5-1 UL 508--File #E131568 cUL C22.2 No. 14--File #E131568 Ingress protection Stacklight base and light units: IP65, Type 4, 4X and 13 Alarm units: IP20, Type 1 Electrical shock protection Stacklight base and light unit: IP2X Alarm units: IP0X 4 4 4 Technical Data and Specifications Mechanical ratings Shock (IEC 68-2-27): 11 ms, 15g Vibration (IEC 68-2-6): 10 sweeps 10-150 Hz, 2g Bump (IEC 68-2-29): 1000 pulses, 6 ms, 15g Climate conditions Operating: maximum 104F (40C) at 95% RH, Temperature -4 to 140F (-20 to 60C) Storage: temperature -40 to 176F (-40 to 80C) Materials Cover: polycarbonate Lenses: polycarbonate Stacklight base: nylon Extension tubes: aluminum Mounting base: zinc die cast Terminals 14-30 AWG (2.5-0.05 mm2) for single conductors and 18-26 AWG (0.75-0.14 mm2) for two conductors of the same size. Do not mix solid and stranded wire in the same terminal. Recommended tightening torque is 4.4-5.3 lb-in (0.5-0.6 Nm) Electrical ratings Insulation voltage (Ui): 690V Operational voltage (Ue): 250V Impulse withstand voltage (Uimp): 1.5 kV Bulb specifications Incandescent lamp type: BA15d Maximum lamp wattage: 6W Bulbs--average life: Incandescent: 7,000-12,000 hrs. (based on voltage) Xenon flasher: 20,000 hrs. LED: 60,000-100,000 hrs. (based on colors) LED/Incandescent comparison 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Incandescent lamps Average operating life of 7,000 hours Each lamp can be used with any color lens Low cost results in short-term savings 4 4 LED lamps Average operating life of 60,000-100,000 hours Low power consumption Extended life results in long-term savings 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-49 4.2 4 E26 Stacklights Operator Interface Stacklights Features 4 4 4 4 4 Modular construction Six lens colors Variety of lamp types and voltages Mono-tonal, bi-tonal and intermittent audible alarms Combination of visible and audible alarms Modular components reduce inventory requirements, increase flexibility Steady and flashing modes allow one light to signal multiple conditions No-tools assembly permits easy lamp replacement One, two and three-Light assembled stacklights: Base mountable Incandescent or LED versions 24V and 120V versions 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-50 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.2 Operator Interface Stacklights Catalog Number Selection 4 E26 Stacklights 4 E26X 9 KM L 39R W - V 4 4 Mounting Base 1 Code W 4 8 9 Component Catalog No. -- E26S104 E26S108 E26S109 Description None (base mount) 3/4 in NPT hub, chrome Standard three-hole Standard four-hole Code V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 4 Alarm Code W Q N P Description None Mono-tonal Bi-tonal Intermittent Component Catalog No. 2 -- E26BQ_ E26BN_ E26BP_ Voltage 5 Description 12V 24V 48V 120V 240V HM JM KM MM HU JU KU MU RU Description None (base mount) Gray Aluminum 20 mm 3/4 in NPT 160 mm 3/4 in NPT 360 mm 3/4 in NPT 760 mm 3/4 in NPT Black Aluminum 20 mm 3/4 in NPT 160 mm 3/4 in NPT 360 mm 3/4 in NPT 760 mm 3/4 in NPT Right angle 3/4 in NPT Component Catalog No. -- E26BHM E26BJM E26BKM E26BMM E26BHU E26BJU E26BKU E26BMU E26BRU Stacklight Base Code L F Description Standard Flashing 3 Component Catalog No. 2 E26BL E26BF_ Light Module Code 0 2 3 4 6 9 W R G Y B A W1 R1 G1 Y1 B1 A1 M E U V K Z X0 X2 X3 X4 X6 X9 4 4 4 Extension Tube Code W 4 Component Catalog No. 2 E26B0_ E26B2_ E26B3_ E26B4_ E26B6_ E26B9_ E26BW_ E26BR_ E26BG_ E26BY_ E26BB_ E26BA_ E26BW1_ E26BR1_ E26BG1_ E26BY1_ E26BB1_ E26BA1_ Description Clear incandescent Red incandescent Green incandescent Yellow incandescent Blue incandescent Amber incandescent White cluster LED with clear lens Red cluster LED with red lens Green cluster LED with green lens Yellow cluster LED with yellow lens Blue cluster LED with blue lens Amber cluster LED with amber lens White cylindrical LED with clear lens 4 Red cylindrical LED with red lens 4 Green cylindrical LED with green lens 4 Yellow cylindrical LED with yellow lens 4 Blue cylindrical LED with blue lens 4 Amber cylindrical LED with amber lens 4 Flashing white cluster LED with clear lens Flashing red cluster LED with red lens Flashing green cluster LED with green lens Flashing yellow cluster LED with yellow lens Flashing blue cluster LED with blue lens Flashing amber cluster LED with amber lens Xenon flasher with clear lens Xenon flasher with red lens Xenon flasher with green lens Xenon flasher with yellow lens Xenon flasher with blue lens Xenon flasher with amber lens E26BM_ E26BE_ E26BU_ E26BV_ E26BK_ E26BZ_ E26BX0_ E26BX2_ E26BX3_ E26BX4_ E26BX6_ E26BX9_ 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Voltage Codes Voltage Code Incandescent Lamp Cluster LED Cylindrical LED Xenon Flasher Flasher Base/Alarm (Blank) No lamp supplied No LED supplied No LED supplied -- -- V1 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc 12 Vac/Vdc V2 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc 24 Vac/Vdc V3 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc 48 Vac/Vdc V4 120 Vac/Vdc 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac 120 Vac/Vdc V5 240 Vac/Vdc 240 Vac -- 240 Vac 240 Vac/Vdc 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 Unless base mount is specified, an extension tube must be selected for a complete unit. 2 Component catalog numbers for flashing bases, alarm units and light modules are incomplete and require the addition of a suffix code to specify the required voltage rating. See table above. 3 Flashing base is for use with incandescent lamps. 4 240V not available for cylindrical LEDs. 5 If no voltage is specified, assembled stacklight will be supplied without lamps or LEDs. 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-51 4.2 4 4 Operator Interface Stacklights Product Selection Assembled Units One-Light Unit Stacklight 4 Volts AC/DC 4 24V None 24V None 24V None 4 24V 4 4 4 4 4 First Level Color Alarm Illumination Type Catalog Number Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL2W-V2 Red Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLR1W-V2 Green Incandescent--steady E26XWWL3W-V2 None Green Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1W-V2 24V None Amber Incandescent--steady E26XWWL9W-V2 24V None Amber Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLA1W-V2 120V None Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL2W-V4 E26XWWLR1W-V4 1 None Red Cylindrical LED--steady 120V None Green Incandescent--steady E26XWWL3W-V4 120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1W-V4 120V 120V None Amber Incandescent--steady E26XWWL9W-V4 120V 1 None Amber Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLA1W-V4 4 4 4 4 4 Two-Light Unit Stacklight Volts AC/DC Alarm 24V None 24V None 120V None 120V 1 None First Level Color Illumination Type Second Level Color Illumination Type Catalog Number Green Incandescent--steady Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL32W-V2 Green Cylindrical LED--steady Red Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V2 Green Incandescent--steady Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL32W-V4 Green Cylindrical LED--steady Red Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1R1W-V4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Three-Light Unit Stacklight Volts AC/DC Alarm First Level Color Illumination Type Second Level Color Illumination Type Third Level Color Illumination Type Catalog Number 24V None Green Incandescent--steady Amber Incandescent--steady Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL392W-V2 24V None Green Cylindrical LED--steady Amber Cylindrical LED--steady Red Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V2 120V None Green Incandescent--steady Amber Incandescent--steady Red Incandescent--steady E26XWWL392W-V4 120V 1 None Green Cylindrical LED--steady Amber Cylindrical LED--steady Red Cylindrical LED--steady E26XWWLG1A1R1W-V4 Note 1 LED modules have very low current draw and should not be used with triac output devices like PLC triac output modules. It is recommended that dry contact outputs be used to switch 120 Vac modules. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-52 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Stacklights 4.2 Replacement Parts 4 Stacklight Replacement Parts Typical Stacklight Assemblies Description Notes Diagram Catalog Number Replacement cover Normally included with stacklight base 1 E26S68 Replacement lens O-ring Normally included with light modules 2 E26S106 1 Replacement lenses Clear 3 E26S38 Red E26S39 Green E26S40 Yellow E26S41 Blue E26S42 Replacement diffusers 4 12 Vac/Vdc Alarm 4 4 4 b O-Ring 4 4 Lens c E26S34 48 Vac/Vdc E26S35 120 Vac E26S36 240 Vac E26S37 White--normally supplied with incandescent light modules 4 4 d Light Diffuser 4 4 E26S31 4 Lamp e E26S32 5 12V 4 E26S33 24 Vac/Vdc Clear--normally supplied with LED light modules Replacement lamps 4 E26S43 Amber Replacement Xenon strobe dual high (does not include lenses) a Cover 4 E26S8 24V E26S9 48V E26S10 120V E26S11 E26S12 240V Terminal Board Replacement extension tube O-rings Normally included with extension tubes 6 E26S107 2 Replacement mounting gasket 3 Normally included with stacklight base 7 E26S105 Lamp removal tool For E26 and E22 incandescent lamps E22BA3 4 O-Ring b Set Screw Recommended Tightening Torque Is 7 in-lb (0.79 Nm) 4 4 Stacklight Base 4 4 g Mounting Gasket O-Rings f 4 Extension Tube 4 4 Mounting Base 4 4 Typical Stacklight Assembly (Exploded View) 4 4 Panel 4 Myers Type ST-2 or ST-2CP Hub 4 4 Alternate Conduit Hub 4 Notes 1 Sold in packages of 5 pieces. 2 Sold in packages of 10 pieces. 3 Mounting gaskets have two sets of mounting holes--one set with center-to-center spacing of 1.75 in (44.5 mm) and another set with center-to-center spacing of 1.65 in (42 mm). Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4 V9-T4-53 4.3 4 4 Operator Interface Panel Meters Product Overview Product Selection Guide 4 4 Description 4 Page V9-T4-55 Page V9-T4-55 Number of digits 5 4 Display technology 7-segment LED 7-segment LED Display character height 8 mm 14 mm Panel cut-out size 1/32 DIN (25 x 50 mm) 1/8 DIN (45 x 92 mm) 4 4 4 4 E5 Panel Meters Eclipse Series Panel Meters Available outputs None Dual relay, analog, RS-485 Available inputs 0-10V/2-10V/0-20 mA/4-20 mA DC volt, AC volt, DC amp, AC amp, 5A AC, Temperature (J, K, T, PT100 RTD), 4-20 mA/0-10V/1-5V Front panel protection IP65 NEMA 4X 4 Connection method Screw terminal Depluggable screw terminals Scaling Programmable end points, linear interpolation Programmable end points, linear interpolation 4 Input power options 10-30 Vdc 9-30 Vdc or 85-264 Vac Update time 500 ms 400 ms Automatic min/max capture Yes Yes Input for display-hold Yes -- 4 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-54 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 4.3 Operator Interface Panel Meters Features Digital Panel Meters E5-324-E digital panel meters Galvanic isolation with protection against incorrect polarity Automatic min/max value detection Freely programmable characteristic curve end points Input range: Single current measuring input (0/4-20 mA) Single voltage measuring input (0/2-10V) Eclipse Series digital panel meters Four full digits 1/8 DIN size Red, LED display Scalable display Flashing alarms Min/max data hold Optional analog, relay and RS-485 outputs Type 4X 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection Digital Panel Meters 4 Eclipse Series 4 4 5770 X - 4 X X Power Supply 0 = DC (9-30 Vdc) 1 = AC (85-265 Vac) 4 Input Option 0 = DC volt 1 = AC volt TRMS 2 = DC amp 3 = AC amp TRMS 4 = 5A AC TRMS 5 = Process (4-20 mA, 0-10V, 1-5V) 6 = Temperature (J, K, T, PT100 RTD) Output Option 1 4 0 = No option 1 = Dual relay 2 = Analog output (4-20 mA and 0-10V) 3 = Dual relay, analog output (4-20 mA and 0-10V) 4 = RS-485 communications 5 = Dual relay, RS-485 6 = Analog, RS-485 (4-20 mA and 0-10V) 7 = Dual relay, analog, RS-485 (4-20 mA and 0-10V) 4 4 4 Product Selection E5-324-E0402 4 E5-324-E0402 Description Catalog Number LED digital panel meter, 24 x 48 mm E5-324-E0402 4 4 4 Eclipse Series 4 Eclipse Series Description Catalog Number Digital ammeter--5A AC, 85-264 Vac power 57701440 Digital ammeter--5A AC, 85-264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701441 Digital process meter--4-20 mA/0-10V, 85-264 Vac power 57701450 Digital process meter--4-20 mA/0-10V, 85-264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701451 Digital process meter--4-20 mA/0-10V, 85-264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs and analog retransmission 57701453 Digital temperature meter, 85-264 Vac power 57701460 Digital temperature meter, 85-264 Vac power, 2 relay outputs 57701461 4 4 4 4 4 Note 1 Output options 0, 2, 4 are not available for models -41X and -43X. 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-55 4.4 4 4 Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Product Overview Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Description ELC-GP Graphics Panel HMi Operator Interface Page V9-T4-59 Page V9-T4-60 Screen size Two-line and four-line 3.5 in, 5.7 in, 8.0 in and 10.4 in Screen options Monochrome Blue mode, grey scale, 256 color STN or 65k color TFT Interface Keypad only Resistive touchscreen only or touchscreen and keypad Communication ports 2 serial 3 serial; 1 or 2 USB; Expansion port for Ethernet Modbus TCP or Local I/O 4 Simultaneous protocols 1 3 or 4 Ethernet drivers -- Yes 4 Upload/download Serial cable Serial, Ethernet, and/or USB Operating system Proprietary Proprietary 4 Third-party software support -- -- Screen saver -- Yes 4 4 Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Selection Guide, continued 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Description XV Operator Interface XP Operator Interface Page V9-T4-62 Page V9-T4-65 Screen size 3.5 in, 5.7 in, 7.0 in, 8.4 in and 10.4 in 8.4 in, 10.4 in, 12.1 in, 15.0 in and blind node (no screen) Screen options Color TFT, 64k colors; resolutions from QVGA (320 x 240) to WVGA (800 x 480) Color TFT, 16 million colors; resolutions from SVGA (800 x 600) to UVGA (1600 x1200) Interface Resistive touchscreen Infrared, non-reflective safety glass Communication ports Ethernet, RS-232 and/or RS-485, USB 2 serial; 2 Ethernet; removable CompactFlash; 4 USB; VGA 4 Simultaneous protocols 3 5 or 8 Ethernet drivers Yes Yes 4 Upload/download Serial, Ethernet, USB Serial, Ethernet, USB Operating system Windows CE 5.0 Professional Windows XP Embedded (protected) 4 Third-party software support -- Yes Screen saver Yes Yes 4 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E. 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-56 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4.4 Software Product Selection Guide 4 4 4 4 Description Visual Designer Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP Overview Feature-rich software package with SCADA functionality and web serving capabilities that can be run on XV, XP, ePro PS operator interfaces or personal computers Intuitive visualization tool. Use Galileo on XV-102-H_ units or on XV units running CoDeSys when a stronger visualization package is needed Use HMi Soft to create, edit, upload and download applications to the HMi family of operator interfaces Use ELCSoftGP to create, edit, upload and download applications to ELC Graphics Panels Runtime software for a PC 4 4 Catalog ID Development software seat license 4 VISUALDCE (CE hardware) SW-GALILEO-S VISUALDXP5 (5-pack of VISUALDXP) SW-GALILEO-M VISUALDCE5 (5-pack of VISUALDCE) VISUALDXP (PCs, XPe, and CE hardware) HMISOFT VISUALRTPC N/A * ELCSOFTGP 4 4 N/A 4 4 Time-Saving Editor Features Online and offline simulation * * * -- Macro capability * * * -- VB scripting * -- -- -- Math and Logic * * * -- Multi-language * * * -- 4 4 System/internal variables * * * -- Auto-scale application to different resolution/screen size * * * -- 4 Scripting (IF, THEN, ELSE, GOTO) * * * -- 4 Symbol factory/library * * * -- Master pages * Screen groups * Screen groups * -- User-created controls * * -- -- Customizable application symbols * * -- -- Action lists/math worksheets * * With macros * With macros -- Reusable controls, images and pages * Via indirect tag and/ or PLC assignments * -- -- 4 4 4 4 4 Advanced search and replace * * -- -- Advanced context sensitive help * * -- -- Conversion of legacy PanelMateTM configurations * -- -- -- 4 4 Optional PanelBuilderTM conversion utility * -- -- -- Online configuration/editing * -- -- -- 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-57 4.4 4 Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Software Product Selection Guide, continued 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Description Visual Designer Galileo HMiSoft ELCSoftGP Runtime Features Clock synchronization * * * * Sound actions or control * * * * Security * Advanced multi-level * * Multi-level * Pop-up screens * And group screens * * -- -- Animated graphics * * * Real-time trending * * * -- Recipes * * * -- Report generation * * -- -- Timer scheduling * * * -- Calendar scheduling * -- -- -- Notification of data and events via e-mail/text messaging * -- -- -- Data archiving * * * -- Archive to shared network drive * No (-) -- -- Alarm and event archiving * * -- -- Historical trending * * * -- Import/export from XML * * -- -- Database interface * ADO.net compliant -- -- -- Vision system interfaces * * -- -- Secure document and Web network browser * -- -- -- Remote access and control without having to install software on the remote PC * Web Thin Client with Internet Explorer -- -- -- -- -- -- Automatic scaling of Web clients * 4 Remote desktop * With UltraVNC and RemoteClient * VNC and RemoteClient -- -- Launch/control third-party applications * -- -- -- 4 2-touch controls for safety * -- -- -- Embedded PLC logic -- -- * -- 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-58 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4.4 Features ELC-GP Graphics Panel Simple to program and easily connects to ELC products Protocols--include Modbus ASCII/RTU, ASCII Slave and vendor-specific protocols from Allen-Bradley(R), Siemens(R), Mitsubishi(R), Koyo(R) and many more 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection ELC-GP Graphics Panel 4 ELC-GP 4 4 ELC-GP 02 4 Series ELC-GP = ELC Graphics Panel Display 02 = Monochromatic, two-line 04 = Monochromatic, four-line 4 4 4 Product Selection 4 Graphics Panels Description Catalog Number 160 x 32 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP02 128 x 64 pixels, 10 function keys, monochrome ELC-GP04 4 4 Accessories 4 Software and Accessories 4 Description Catalog Number Programming software for GP units ELCSOFTGP Program transfer module ELC-GPXFERMOD Cable, PC to ELC-GPxx, 9.8 ft (3m) ELC-CBPCGP3 Power supply, 24 watt, 1 amp ELC-PS01 Power supply, 48 watt, 2 amp ELC-PS02 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-59 4.4 4 Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Features HMi Operator Interface 4 4 All units offer RS-232, RS-485 and RS-422 communications 6-, 8- and 10-inch models offer Ethernet communication options Retentive internal data storage 4 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection 4 HMi Operator Interface 4 HMi 4 HMI 04 C UNB 4 Series HMi = Operator interface HMi VU = Advanced operator interface 4 4 Display 04 = 4 in LCD 06 = 6 in LCD 08 = 8 in LCD 10 = 10 in LCD Options C = Color TFT Options EUNB = No Ethernet UNBE = Ethernet onboard 4 4 Product Selection 4 HMi Operator Interface 4 4 4 Description Catalog Number 4-inch color TFT without expansion slot HMI04CU 6-inch color TFT, no Ethernet HMIVU06CUNB 8-inch color TFT, with Ethernet HMIVU08CUNBE 10-inch color TFT, with Ethernet HMIVU10CUNBE 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-60 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4.4 Accessories 4 Software and Accessories Description Catalog Number Programming software HMISOFT 4 4 4 Kits Description Catalog Number HMi spare parts kits (includes several power connectors, battery doors, gaskets, mounting clips, etc.) HMI-SPKIT 4 4 4 Cable Description Catalog Number 1 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC1 3 meter cable to connect between the HMi and Eaton Logic Controller (ELC) ELC-CBPCELC3 4 4 4 4 Power Supply Description Catalog Number 1 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS01 2 amp 24 Vdc power supply ELC-PS02 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-61 4.4 4 Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Features XV Operator Interface 4 4 4 All XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE operating system Pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags, three simultaneous communication drivers, and one Web session Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, three drivers, and two, four or eight simultaneous Web sessions 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection 4 XV Operator Interface 4 XV XV - 102 - B3 - 35TQRG - 10 4 4 4 4 Family XV = Microsoft Windows CE operating system Performance Class 102 = CE, plastic housing, 2nd gen 152 = CE, metal housing, 2nd gen 4 4 Branding and Bezel 10 = Standard blank front bezel with Eaton branded product label Features Base Unit Variant 1 B = Retentive memory D = Retentive memory, USB host, RS-232 E = Retentive memory, USB host, SmartWire-DT H = Galileo only unit, USB host Features Additional COMM Options 3 = 1-RS-232 4 = 1-RS-485 6 = 1-CANopen 8 = 1-PROFIBUS E = 1-SmartWire-DT Display Size 35 = 3.5-inch 57 = 5.7-inch 70 = 7.0-inch 84 = 8.4-inch 10 = 10.4-inch Display Technology TQR = TFT (QVGA) resistive TVR = TFT (VGA) resistive TWR = TFT (widescreen) resistive 4 4 Product Selection 4 XV Operator Interface XV Operator Interface with Visual Designer Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-232 XV-102-B3-35TQRG-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet and RS-485 XV-102-B4-35TQRG-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-57TVRG-10 4 XV 7.0-inch TFT wide screen, plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-102-D4-70TWRG-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-57TVRG-10 4 XV 8.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-84TVRG-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT, metal housing, resistive touch, Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 XV-152-D4-10TVRG-10 4 4 4 Notes 1 All 1xx performance class units have 400 MHz processor, 64 MB DRAM, 1 x 10/100 Ethernet, and 1 x USB device. 2 Standard software on embedded hardware. These XV models have a Microsoft Windows CE 5.0 Professional operating system and are pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime for up to 1500 tags, 3 simultaneous communication drivers, and 1 Web session. Field upgrades are available for up to 4000 tags, 3 drivers, and 2, 4 or 8 simultaneous Web sessions. 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-62 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com OS Build C = XSoft-CoDeSys/Galileo G = CE Professional OS and Visual Designer runtime 1500 tags 2 L = Galileo only unit Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4.4 XV Operator Interface with XSoft-CoDeSys Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-B6-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-B8-35TQRC-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, SmartWire-DT XV-102-BE-35TQRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-D6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-D8-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E8-57TVRC-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-102-D6-70TWRC-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-102-D8-70TWRC-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E6-70TWRC-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-102-E8-70TWRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-57TVRC-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-57TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-84TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-84TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-84TVRC-10 XV 8.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-84TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen XV-152-D6-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS XV-152-D8-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, CANopen, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E6-10TVRC-10 XV 10.4-inch TFT metal housing, resistive touch, PROFIBUS, SmartWire-DT XV-152-E8-10TVRC-10 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 XV Operator Interface with Galileo Only Description Catalog Number XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-35TQRL-10 XV 3.5-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-35TQRL-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-57TVRL-10 XV 5.7-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-57TVRL-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-232 XV-102-H3-70TWRL-10 XV 7.0-inch TFT plastic housing, resistive touch, Ethernet RS-485 XV-102-H4-70TWRL-10 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-63 4.4 4 Visual Designer Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Visual Designer Software Description Catalog Number 4 Visual Designer Development Software License Key For CE hardware VISUALDCE 4 For PCs, XPe and CE hardware VISUALDXP For CE hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDCE VISUALDCE5 For PCs, XPe hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDXP VISUALDXP5 4 4 4 Galileo Software 4 Galileo Development Software Description Catalog Number Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M 4 4 4 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 4 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software Description Catalog Number Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 4 4 4 Accessories 4 XV Family Accessories 4 Description Catalog Number SD memory card for all XV models MEMORY-SD-A1-S 4 Spare part kit for XV-102 models--1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-57-KG-1 XV-102 4 Spare part kit for XV-152 models--1 power connector, 8 mounting brackets, 1 sealing strip, 1 touch pen ACC-TP-10-12-RES-1 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-64 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software 4.4 Features XP Operator Interface All XP models have a Microsoft Windows XP embedded operating system Pre-licensed with Visual Designer runtime Standard models are licensed for 4000 tags, five simultaneous communication drivers, and one Web session Enterprise models are licensed for 64,000 tags, eight simultaneous communication drivers, and one Web session Field upgrades are available for up to 64,000 tags, eight drivers, and 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256 simultaneous Web sessions 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Catalog Number Selection XP Operator Interface 4 XP 4 XP - 702 - F0 - 84TSIK - 10 Family XP = X86 Microsoft Windows XPe operating system 4 Branding and Bezel 10 = Standard blank front bezel with Eaton branded product label Performance Class 702 = XPe, metal housing, 2nd gen Features Base Unit Variant 1 E = 1 GHz Celeron with 1 GB RAM 4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF F = 1.8 GHz Pentium with 2GB RAM 4 GB C drive CF and 1 GB D drive CF Features Additional COMM Options 0 = No additional communication options Display Size 84 =8.4 in 10 =10.4 in 12 =12.1 in 15 =15.0 in BOX = Blind node (no display) Display Technology TSI = TFT (SVGA) Infrared TXI = TFT (XVGA) Infrared Blank = No display OS Build 2 J = XPe OS and License Visual Designer Runtime 4000 tags K = XPe OS and License Visual Designer Runtime 64,000 tags 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Notes 1 All 7xx Performance Class units have 1 x 10/100, 1 x 10/100/1000 Ethernet, 4 x USB Host V2.0, 2 x RS-232. 2 Standard software on embedded hardware. 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T4-65 4.4 4 4 Operator Interface Operator Interfaces and Programming Software Product Selection XP Operator Interface XP Operator Interface Description Catalog Number 4 XP 8.4 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-84TSIJ-10 XP 10.4 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-10TSIJ-10 4 XP 12.1 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-12TXIJ-10 XP 15.0 in TFT, 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-15TXIJ-10 XP blind node (no display), 1 GHz Celeron, 1 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 4000 tags, 5 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-E0-BOXJ-10 4 XP 8.4 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-84TSIK-10 XP 10.4 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-10TSIK-10 4 XP 12.1 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-12TXIK-10 XP 15.0 in TFT, 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-15TXIK-10 4 XP blind node (no display), 1.8 GHz Pentium, 2 GB RAM, 4 GB C drive, 1 GB D drive, 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session XP-702-F0-BOXK-10 4 4 Visual Designer 4 Description Catalog Number Visual Designer Development Software License Key 4 4 4 4 Visual Designer Software Galileo Software 4 4 For PCs, XPe and CE hardware VISUALDXP For PCs, XPe hardware, 5-pack of VISUALDXP VISUALDXP5 For a PC Runtime software license with a maximum of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTPC Visual Designer development software and PC runtime software licenses for a max of 64k tags, 8 drivers, 1 Web session VISUALRTDEVPC Galileo Development Software Description Catalog Number Single-seat license SW-GALILEO-S Multiple-seat license SW-GALILEO-M 4 4 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 XSoft-CoDeSys-2 Software 4 Description Catalog Number Single Seat License SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-S 4 Multiple Seat License (3) SW-XSOFT-CODESYS-2-M 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V9-T4-66 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches 5.1 Limit Switches Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E47 Precision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compact Prewired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E49 Mini Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Inductive Sensors 5.3 5.4 V9-T5-4 V9-T5-5 V9-T5-6 V9-T5-7 V9-T5-9 V9-T5-10 V9-T5-12 V9-T5-13 V9-T5-15 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-17 V9-T5-19 V9-T5-20 V9-T5-21 V9-T5-22 V9-T5-23 Connectivity Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Plus Connector Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 5 Inductive Sensors Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iProx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E57 Premium+ Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Proximity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E52 Cube Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connectivity V9-T5-3 Photoelectric Sensors Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced 50 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comet Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E58 Harsh-Duty Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Photoelectric Sensors V9-T5-2 V9-T5-24 V9-T5-25 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 For our complete product offering, see Volume 8--Sensing Solutions, CA08100010E, 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-1 5.1 5 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Product Overview Limit Switches Selection Guide 5 5 5 E47 Precision Switches Compact Prewired Switches E49 Mini Metal Switches E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-in Switches LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches 5 Description 5 Page V9-T5-3 Page V9-T5-4 Page V9-T5-5 Page V9-T5-6 Page V9-T5-7 Overview Specified when accurate repeatability, choice of operating forces and travel characteristics and tightly controlled action of cam or target in space restricted areas is of prime importance. Costeffective and compact Designed to be a versatile, slim device for hard-to-fit applications where sealing integrity is required; stackable ridge for ganged operations Suitable for OEMs who require a small, cost-effective solution but cannot sacrifice durability and mechanical life as would be the case with a plastic IEC style switch Versatile in design; high reliability; low maintenance costs with installation ease; best choice for heavy-duty limit switch applications; withstands physical and chemical abuse of harsh industrial environments Eaton's LS-Titan limit switch line is a complete offering of safety position switches designed for worldwide application; economical insulated plastic or rugged metal enclosures and modular, plug-in operating heads and bodies make LS-Titan a flexible switching solution Applications Overhead, folding and elevator doors, sliding gates, automated guided vehicles and commercial instrumentation Machine tool, food processing and packaging Automatic vending machines, electronic assembly machines, elevators and lifts, injection molding, packaging Punch presses, waste water treatment, machine tool, automotive, retrieval systems, industrial truck, car wash lines Packaging, material handling, conveying, sorting and counting, positioning, and safety applications requiring positive opening contacts Product features Self-contained switches or with an enclosed cast housing for increased durability and conduit connection (1/2 in NPT) High current capacity for power load switching and motor handling capability Screw and solder terminations Rugged aluminum alloy die cast housing Sealed construction with enclosure ratings of Type 4, 6 and 13 Prewired with 3M of 18 AWG, AWM 2517, 300V cable Long life--rated for 10 million operations Pre-wired units with custom cable lengths available for high volume customers "Fingerproof" terminals protect against accidental shock Modular operating heads, switch bodies and receptacles are interchangeable without field adjustment Order as complete assemblies or components for stocking and manufacturing flexibility 90 degree total travel, 5 degree pretravel characteristics are standard features Modular, plug-in system (head and body components) Positive opening NC contacts for safety applications Wide variety of economical plastic and rugged metal versions available Operating heads can be rotated 90 degrees to suit specific direction of operation Unique electronic safety position switches (LSE models) provide analog (0-10 Vdc or 4- 20 mA) outputs proportional to the actuator position and allow for easy configuration of a custom trip point Can be ordered as separate components (head and body) or as completely assembled switches Contact ratings NEMA A600, R300, AC-15, DC-13 15A/20A, 125 or 250 Vac NEMA B300 5A at 250 Vac 5A at 30 Vdc NEMA A600, R300 Lighted versions A150, R150 6A, 120 Vac; 10A continuous 5 AC-15, DC-13 6A at 240 Vac 3A at 24 Vdc 200 mA at 24 Vdc (LSE models) Enclosure ratings Enclosed--Type 1 IP65 Type 1, 3, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 13 IP67 IP66, IP67 5 Type 4, 6 and 13 IP67 Construction Basic--phenolic Enclosed--aluminum die cast Aluminum alloy die cast Zinc alloy Zinc die cast TBD Approvals UL(R) recognized CSA(R) certified cULus UL recognized UL listed CSA certified IEC 947-5-1 TUV Safety function by positive opening contacts per IEC/EN 60947-5-1 up to Category 4 per EN 954-1 TUV-Rheinland certified for functional-safety (LSE models) CSA certified ULT listed CE CCC 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 For our complete product offering, see Volume 8--Sensing Solutions, CA08100010E, V9-T5-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5.1 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Features E47 Precision The cost-effective solution for highly accurate switching applications Compact housings are ideal for use where space is restricted Precision, snap-action operators provide accurate repeatability of electrical and mechanical operating characteristics High current capacity (up to 20A) allows power load switching and motor handling capability Enclosed boot versions (shown on the left, in gray) shield actuators from debris Solder and spade terminals available 15A models shown, 20A models also available 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 E47 Precision Basic Switches Enclosed Switches Description Type Catalog Number 15A Straight lever Screw terminal E47BMS22 1 Specifications OF max.--2.47 oz (70g) Screw terminal E47BMS20 Description Catalog Number Specifications Roller lever E47BLS32 OF max.--20.1 oz (570g) RF min.--6.0 oz (1700g) PT max.--0.394 in (10 mm) PT max.--0.157 in (4.0 mm) OT max.--0.220 in (5.6 mm) OT max.--0.236 in (6.0 mm) MD max.--0.051 in (1.3 mm) MD max.--0.016 in (0.4 mm) Booted roller lever OF max.--3.53 oz (100g) PT max.--0.197 in (5.0 mm) RF min.--0.99 oz (28g) OT max.--0.236 in (6.0 mm) PT max.--0.197 in (5.0 mm) MD max.--0.016 in (0.4 mm) Booted roller plunger FP max.--0.976 in (24.8 mm) E47BMS11 Screw terminal E47BMS42 E47BLS08 OF max.--17.64 oz (500g) E47BLS12 (cross roller unit) RF min.--3.53 oz (100g) PT max.--0.039 in (1.0 mm) OP--0.748 in (19 mm) OT max.--0.138 in (3.5 mm) OF max.--12.3 oz (350g) MD max.--0.005 in (0.12 mm) RF max.--4.02 oz (114g) OP--1.957 in (49.7 mm) PT max.--0.016 in (0.4 mm) Extended roller lever OF max.--22.57 oz (640g) RF min.--8.11 oz (230g) MD max.--0.039 in (1.0 mm) Screw terminal E47BLS33 OP--0.748 in (19 mm) OT max.--0.079 in (2.0 mm) Cross roller plunger 5 RF min.--0.49 oz (14g) FP max.--1.11 in (28.2 mm) Standard lever 5 1 Booted wobble E47BLS14 RF min.--0.88 oz (25g) MD max.--0.002 in (0.05 mm) PT max.--0.520 in (13.2 mm) OP--1.315 in (33.4 mm) OT max.--0.315 in (8.0 mm) RF min.--0.78 oz (22g) PT max.--0.28 in (7.1 mm) OT max.--0.16 in (4 mm) MD max.--0.039 in (1.0 mm) Note 1 OF = Operating Force; RF = Return Force; PT = Pre-Travel; OT = Overtravel; MD = Movement Differential; FP = Free Position; OP = Operating Position. 5 5 5 5 5 5 OF max.--5.64 oz (160g) RF min.--1.48 oz (42g) 5 PT max.--0.106 in (2.7 mm) OT max.--0.094 in (2.4 mm) 5 MD max.--0.02 in (0.5 mm) FP Mmax.--1.28 in (32.5 mm) 5 OP--1.189 in (30.2 mm) Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5 5 OP--1.189 in (30.2 mm) E47BMS30 5 5 FP max.--1.437 in (36.5 mm) Screw terminal 5 5 MD max.--0.04 in (1.02 mm) Roller lever 5 5 OF max.--2.11 oz (60g) OT max.--0.14 in (3.58 mm) OF max.--5.64 oz (160g) 5 V9-T5-3 5.1 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Features Compact Prewired 5 5 Rugged and dependable compact limit switch Rugged aluminum alloy die cast housing Sealed construction with enclosure ratings of Type 4, 6 and 13 Prewired with 3m of 18 AWG, AWM 2517, 300V cable Stackable ridge for ganged operation 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 Compact Prewired 5 Compact Prewired 5 Pre-Travel Movement Differential (Maximum) Operating Position Catalog Number 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 0.62 0.04 in (15.7 1 mm) E47BCC05 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 0.99 0.04 in (24.9 1 mm) E47BCC06 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 0.04 in (28.5 1 mm) E47BCC07 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.35 0.04 in (34.3 1 mm) E47BCC08 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 0.04 in (28.5 1 mm) E47BCC11 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.35 0.04 in (34.3 1 mm) E47BCC12 Actuator Type Operating Force (Maximum) Reset Force (Minimum) Overtravel (Minimum) Pin plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 5 Sealed plunger 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) Roller plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 5 Sealed roller plunger 63.5 oz (1.8 kg) Cross roller plunger 5 Sealed cross roller plunger 5 5 5 Bevel plunger 42.3 oz (1.2 kg) 15.9 oz (450g) 0.118 in (3 mm) 0.07 in (1.8 mm) 0.008 in (0.2 mm) 1.12 0.04 in (28.5 1 mm) E47BCC13 Roller lever 20.5 oz (580g) 5.3 oz (150g) 40 25 max. 3 -- E47BCC15 Wobble stick 5.3 oz (150g) -- -- 15 max. -- -- E47BCC20 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches 5.1 Features E49 Mini Metal Long life--rated for 10 million operations "Fingerproof" terminals protect against accidental shock Double-spring mechanism for contact reliability Captive screws on enclosure cover make wiring hassle-free SPDT double break 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 E49 Mini Metal 5 E49 Mini Metal Specifications Operating Head Type Travel to Operate Contacts Travel to Reset Contacts Side rotary lever 20 12 Total Travel Force to Operate Contacts Minimum Return Force Catalog Number--Assembled Units (Switch Body and Head) 1NO-1NC Contacts 70 750g 100g E49G31AP3 Adjustable side rotary lever 20 12 70 750g 100g E49G31UP3 Top pushbutton 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31BP3 Top push roller 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31CP3 Top push roller (90 degree roller) 0.06 in (1.5 mm) 0.04 in (1 mm) 0.22 in (5.5 mm) 900g 150g E49G31C1P3 Adjustable rod lever 20 12 70 750g 100g E49G31DP3 Wobble stick (nylon coil) 1.18 in (30 mm) -- -- 150g -- E49G31NP3 Wobble stick (metal coil) 1.18 in (30 mm) -- -- 150g -- E49G31VP3 Wobble stick (metal rod) 1.18 in (30 mm) -- -- 150g -- E49G31MP3 Wobble stick (whisker) 1.18 in (30 mm) -- -- 150g -- E49G31XM3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-5 5.1 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Features E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In 5 5 5 5 5 5 Modular, plug-in components (head, body and receptacle) provide application flexibility, reduced inventory and less downtime Manufactured to take the physical and environmental abuse (including cutting fluids and chemicals) of harsh industrial environments Chemical-resistant Viton(R) gaskets, seals and boots are standard, and so are captive, posi-drive screws 600V rating, ridge-topped contacts and wiping action assure continuity even to logic level circuits Rotary heads are field convertible clockwise, counterclockwise or both, without special tools 5 5 Product Selection 5 E50 Heavy-Duty Plug-In 5 Assembled Switches--Standard 5 5 Note: Order assembled (as shown in this product guide) or as head, body, receptacle and lever components. Operating Head Type Catalog Number Side rotary (requires an operating lever) 5 5 Standard spring return--E50DR1 1 E50AR1 Low force spring return--E50DL1 1 E50AL1 Maintained two-position--E50DM1 E50AM1 Side pushbutton, spring return--E50DS1 E50AS1 Side pushbutton, adjustable spring return--E50DS2 E50AS2 Side push roller, spring return--E50DS3 2 E50AS3 Side pushbutton, maintained--E50DH1 E50AH1 Top pushbutton, spring return--E50DT1 E50AT1 5 Top pushbutton, adjustable spring return--E50DT2 E50AT2 5 Wobble head, spring return (requires a wobble operator) 5 5 5 5 Top push roller, spring return--E50DT3 2 E50AT3 Standard duty--E50DW1 E50AW1 Heavy-duty high strength steel--E50DW2 E50AW2 Notes 1 CW (clockwise) and CCW (counterclockwise) operation, easily convertible to CW only or CCW only operation. 2 Roller can be converted in the field between horizontal and vertical. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5.1 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Features LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches Modular, plug-in system (head and body components) Safety rated, with positive opening contacts and TUV certification on electronic (LSE) models Wide variety of economical plastic and rugged metal versions available Operating heads can be rotated 90 degrees to suit specific direction of operation Unique electronic safety position switches (LSE models) provide analog (0-10 Vdc or 4-20 mA) outputs proportional to the actuator position and allow for easy configuration of a custom trip point Can be ordered as separate components (head and body) or as completely assembled switches 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 LS-Titan Miniature DIN Switches 5 Plastic Safety Switches 5 Switch Body Catalog Number LS-S02 LS-S20A LS-S11S Output Function 2NC with positive opening contacts 2NC with slow make/break 1NO and 1NC with positive opening contact Terminal Connection Screw terminal 1 Screw terminal 1 Screw terminal 1 Contact Sequence 11 21 12 22 5 5 21 13 23 13 14 24 14 22 5 Description Operating Head Type Catalog Number--Heads Only Catalog Number--Assembled Switches Top push roller plunger LS-XP LS-S02-P LS-S20A-P LS-S11S-P Short roller lever LS-XLS LS-S02-LS LS-S20A-LS LS-S11S-LS Angled roller LS-XLA LS-S02-LA LS-S20A-LA LS-S11S-LA Rotary lever LS-XRL LS-S02-RL LS-S20A-RL LS-S11S-RL Adjustable roller lever (with 18 mm roller) LS-XRLA LS-S02-RLA LS-S20A-RLA LS-S11S-RLA 5 Adjustable roller lever (with 40 mm roller) LS-XRLA40 LS-S02-RLA40 LS-S20A-RLA40 LS-S11S-RLA40 5 LS-XS LS-S02-S LS-S20A-S LS-S11S-S 5 Spring rod (wobble) 2 5 5 5 Notes 1 Cage clamp versions available. Contact Application Engineering. 2 Not to be used as a safety position switch. Use only in conjunction with snap-action contact. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-7 5.1 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Limit Switches Plastic Electronic Safety Position Switches 5 5 5 Switch Body Catalog Number LSE-AI LSE-AU Output Function Analog 4-20 mA Analog 0-10V Safety Functions and Approvals Additional diagnostic output that registers a 0V signal in the event of a fault. Self-test function continuously tests both outputs for overloads, short circuits to 0V and short circuits to +Ue. Certified by TUV to EN 954-1, Category 3 or 4. Suitable for protection of people or processes. Contact Sequence Analog 4-20 mA Analog 0-10V Description Operating Head Type Catalog Number--Heads Only Catalog Number--Assembled Switches Top push roller plunger LS-XP LSE-AI-P LSE-AU-P Short roller lever LS-XLS LSE-AI-LS LSE-AU-LS 5 Angled roller LS-XLA LSE-AI-LA LSE-AU-LA Rotary lever LS-XRL LSE-AI-RL LSE-AU-RL 5 Adjustable roller lever (with 18 mm Roller) LS-XRLA LSE-AI-RLA LSE-AU-RLA Adjustable roller lever (with 40 mm roller) LS-XRLA40 LSE-AI-RLA40 LSE-AU-RLA40 5 Spring rod (wobble) 1 LS-XS LSE-AI-S LSE-AU-S 5 Note 1 Not to be used as a safety position switch. Use only in conjunction with snap-action contact. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors 5.2 Product Overview 5 Photoelectric Sensors Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 Description Overview Sensing types and ranges Product features Operating voltage 5 Enhanced 50 Series SM Series Comet Series E58 Harsh-Duty Series Page V9-T5-10 Page V9-T5-12 Page V9-T5-13 Page V9-T5-15 Provides outstanding optical performance and application flexibility in a self-contained, industry-standard compact rectangular Provides high performance and ease of use in an economical, miniature package This high-performance, 18 mm flat tubular sensor family features a wide variety of models in all sensing modes Designed to withstand the harshest physical, chemical and optical environments; available in 18 and 30 mm tubular enclosures Thru-beam: 200 and 500 ft Reflex: 30 ft Polarized reflex: 16 ft Diffuse reflective: 5 and 10 ft Clear object detector: 45 in Infrared fiber optic: range varies with fiber Visible fiber optic: range varies with fiber Thru-beam: 50 ft Polarized reflex: 10 ft Diffuse reflective: 8 in Perfect Prox(R) background rejection: 2 and 4 in Thru-beam: 20 and 80 ft Reflex: 25 ft Polarized reflex: 15 and 10 ft Diffuse reflective: 8 and 24 in Focused diffuse reflective: 1.6 in Wide single diffuse: 6 in Fine spot Perfect Prox: 2 in Perfect Prox background rejection: 2, 4, 6 and 9 in Glass and plastic fiber optic: range varies with fiber Thru-beam: 800 ft Reflex: 59 ft Polarized reflex: 34 ft Perfect Prox background rejection: 2, 4, 6 and 11 in High optical performance, including 10-ft diffuse and 500-ft thru-beam versions Output options include a highcurrent 10A SPDT relay Built-in light/dark selection on all models Highly visible LED indicators for power, output and alignment (TargetLock) TargetLock simplifies setup and ensures that the sensor operates at the highest level of reliability possible Perfect Prox models sense different colored targets at the same range and ignore objects in the background The 18 mm tubular body has flat sides for added mounting flexibility Available in universal voltage AC/DC versions as well as DC only models Short circuit protection on all models Designed to be the most rugged photoelectric sensor available Perfect Prox background rejection technology for unmatched optical performance Output status indictor is the brightest available and is visible from any angle and in any lighting condition 24-240 Vac and 12-240 Vdc 10-40 Vdc 18-264 Vac and 18-50 Vdc 10-30 Vdc 90-132 Vac and 18-50 Vdc 20-264 Vac and 15-30 Vdc 10-30 Vdc Two-wire models: 90-132 Vac and 18-50 Vac Three- and four-wire models: 20-132 Vac and 15-30 Vdc 10-30 Vdc 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Output function Selectable light or dark operate Light and dark operate models available Selectable light or dark operate Light and dark operate models available Maximum load current DC units: 250 mA AC/DC units: 300 mA to 10A AC/DC units--200 mA DC units--100 mA (NPN or PNP) AC/DC units--300 mA DC units--250 mA (NPN), 100 mA (PNP) AC/DC units--300 mA (100 mA for 18 mm diameter units) DC units--250 mA (NPN), 100 mA (PNP) 5 5 Enclosure ratings IP67 Type 1, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12 and 13 IP68 Type 1, 2, 3, 4, 4X, 6, 12 and 13 Type 1, 2, 3, 3R, 3S, 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 12K and 13 IP69K Response time range DC operation: 2 ms AC operation: 15 ms DC operation: 1 ms AC operation: 16 ms DC operation: 1 ms AC operation: 10 ms 2W AC/DC operation: 32 ms 2 ms to 35 ms Approvals CSA approved Certified to UL standard, UL 508 UL listed cUL listed UL recognized cUL recognized UL listed cUL listed 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-9 5.2 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors Features Enhanced 50 Series 5 5 5 5 5 High-optical performance models, including a 500 ft (152m) thru-beam and a 10 ft (3m) diffuse reflective unit Output options include a 3A SPDT relay All units offer light/dark selection Logic options include ON-delay, OFF-delay and one-shot delay Fully potted construction for use in areas subject to washdown, high shock and/or vibration Choice of pre-wired power cable, built-in mini-connector, built-in micro-connector and pigtail micro-connector versions; standard pre-wired cable length is 6 ft (1.8m) 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 Enhanced 50 Series 5 Enhanced 50 Series Sensors 5 Description 5 Thru-beam standard range Voltage Range Sensing Range Optimum Range Sensing Beam Thru-Beam Component 10-40 Vdc 200 ft (61m) 0.1-100 ft (0.03-31m) Infrared Source N/A N/A Detector NPN/PNP 250 mA No 0.1-100 ft (0.03-31m) Infrared Source N/A N/A Detector Isolated output solid-state relay No 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 5 200 ft (61m) 5 5 5 Thru-beam extended range 10-40 Vdc 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 5 5 5 500 ft (152m) 500 ft (152m) 0.1-250 ft (0.03-77m) Infrared 0.1-250 ft (0.03-77m) Infrared Output Type Time Delay Catalog Number 4-pin Euro (micro) connector 1150E-6547 4-pin micro connector 1150E-6543 1250E-6547 1250E-6543 1150E-6504 Source N/A N/A 4-pin mini-connector Detector SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1250E-6504 Source N/A N/A 1151E-6547 Detector NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro) connector Source N/A N/A 4-pin micro connector 1151E-6543 Detector Isolated output solid-state relay No 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc 1251E-6547 1251E-6543 N/A N/A 4-pin mini-connector 1151E-6504 SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1251E-6504 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-10 Connection Type Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors 5.2 Reflex, Diffuse, and Clear Object Sensors 5 Description Voltage Range Sensing Range 1 Optimum Range 1 Sensing Beam Output Type Time Delay Standard reflex 10-40 Vdc 30 ft (9m) 0.5-15 ft (0.2-4.6m) Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro) connector 1450E-6547 5 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 30 ft (9m) 0.5 5 ft (0.2-4.6m) Visible red isolated output solid-state relay 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc No 4-pin micro connector 1450E-6543 5 SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1450E-6504 5 No 4-pin Euro (micro) connector 1451E-6547 No 4-pin micro connector 1451E-6543 5 5 Polarized reflex 2 Diffuse reflective extended range Clear object detector 10-40 Vdc 16 ft (4.9m) 0.5-8 ft (0.2-2.5m) Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA Yes Connection Type Catalog Number 1451E-8547 5 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 16 ft (4.9m) 0.5-8 ft (0.2-2.5m) Visible red Isolated output solid-state relay 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1451E-6504 10-40 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 3 1-60 in (25-1520 mm) 3 Infrared NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro) connector 1351E-6547 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 10 ft (3m) 3 1-60 in (25-1520 mm) 3 Infrared Isolated output solid-state relay 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc No 4-pin micro connector 1351E-6543 5 SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1351E-6504 5 10-40 Vdc 45 in (1.2m) 1-24 in (25-610 mm) Visible red NPN/PNP 250 mA No 4-pin Euro (micro) connector 1452E-6547 5 12-240 Vdc 24-240 Vac 45 in (1.2m) 1-24 in (25-610 mm) Visible red Isolated output solid-state relay 300 mA at 240 Vac/Vdc No 4-pin micro connector 1452E-6543 5 SPDT EM relay 3A at 120 Vac No 5-pin mini-connector 1452E-6504 5 Notes 1 Ranges based on 3 in retroreflector for reflex sensors. 2 Polarized sensors may not operate with reflective tape. Test tape selection before installation. 3 Ranges based on 90% reflectance white card for diffuse reflective sensors. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-11 5.2 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors Features SM Series 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 SM Series 5 SM Series Sensors 5 Description 5 Operating Voltage Sensing Range 1 Thru-beam Polarized reflex 5 5 5 10-30 Vdc 50 ft (1m) Cutoff Range 0.1-25 ft (30 mm-7.5m) -- Diffuse reflective Perfect Prox 5 Thru-Beam Component Connection Type Light Operate Catalog Number Dark Operate Catalog Number 10 in (254 mm) diameter at 10 ft (3m) Source 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMTS15-HAD -- Detector 4-pin micro DC connector -- E65-SMTD15-HDD 10 ft (3m) 0.1-5 ft (30 mm-1.5m) -- 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) -- 4-pin micro AC connector -- E65-SMPR3-GDD 10-30 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 0.1-5 ft (30 mm-1.5m) -- 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) -- 4-pin micro AC connector -- E65-SMPR3-HDD 18-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 18-50 Vdc 8 in (200 mm) 0.25-5 in (6-127 mm) -- 2 in (50 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) -- 4-pin micro AC connector E65-SMSD200-GLD -- 10-30 Vdc 8 in (200 mm) 0.25-5 in (6-127 mm) -- 2 in (50 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) -- 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMSD200-HLD -- 18-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 18-50 Vdc 2 in (50 mm) 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 2.3 in (58 mm) and beyond 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (57 mm) -- 4-pin micro AC connector E65-SMPP050-GLD -- 10-30 Vdc 2 in (50 mm) 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 2.3 in (58 mm) and beyond 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (57 mm) -- 4-pin micro DC connector E65-SMPP050-HLD -- 5 5 Field of View 18-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 18-50 Vdc 5 5 Optimum Range 2 Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors 5 5 TargetLock technology makes SM SeriesTM the easiest photoelectric sensor to set up and use Highly visible LED indicators for power, output and TargetLock TargetLock simplifies setup and ensures the sensor operates at the highest level of reliability possible Perfect Prox models sense different colored targets at the same range and ignore objects in the background Visible beam on all models lets you see exactly where the sensor is pointing Compact size to fit in tight spaces Multiple mounting options, including industry-standard 18 mm threads Reverse polarity, overload and short circuit protection Full family includes thru-beam, polarized reflex, diffuse reflective and Perfect Prox background rejection Notes 1 Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance white card at this range. 2 Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance white card at this range. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors 5.2 Features Comet Series Industry-standard 18 mm diameter threaded body has flat sides allowing it to be mounted like a tubular sensor or against any flat surface Right-angle viewing models mount in a depth of only 6/10th of an inch Perfect Prox technology provides exceptional background rejection and application problem-solving Visible sensing beams let you see where the beam is aimed for quick setup and alignment Solid polyurethane housing completely encapsulates internal circuits for high resistance to shock and vibration 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection Comet Series 5 Reflex Sensors 5 Description Operating Voltage Sensing Range 1 Optimum Range 1 Field of View 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 25 ft (7.6m) 0.1-15 ft (0.03-4.5m) 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 25 ft (7.6m) 20-64 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) Sensing Beam Connection Type Catalog Number 5 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro AC connector 14102AQD03 5 0.1-15 ft (0.03-4.5m) 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro DC connector 14102AQD07 15 ft (4.5m) 0.1-15 ft (0.03-4.5m) 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro AC connector 14101AQD03 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 15 ft (4.5m) 0.1-10 ft (0.03-4.5m) 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro DC connector 14101AQD07 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 10 ft (3m) 0.1-15 ft (0.03-4.5m) 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro AC connector 14101RQD03 15-30 Vdc 10 ft (3m) 0.1-15 ft (0.03-1.5m) 1 in (25 mm) diameter at 50 in (1.3m) Visible red beam 4-pin micro DC connector 14101RQD07 Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors Standard reflex forward viewing Polarized reflex forward viewing 2 Polarized reflex right-angle viewing 23 5 Operating Voltage 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) Sensing Range 4 Optimum Range Field of View 24 in (610 mm) 0.1-15 in (3-380 mm) 5 in (127 mm) diameter at 15 in (380 mm) Connection Type Catalog Number Infrared beam 4-pin micro AC connector 13100AQD03 13100AQD07 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 24 in (610 mm) 0.1-15 in (3-380 mm) 5 5 Sensing Beam 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) Diffuse reflective rightangle viewing 5 5 Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors Diffuse reflective forward viewing 5 5 Diffuse Reflective and Focused Diffuse Reflective Sensors Description 5 5 in (127 mm) diameter at 15 in (380 mm) Infrared beam 4-pin micro AC connector 13100RQD03 13100RQD07 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 5 5 5 5 5 Notes 1 Ranges based on a 3 in diameter retroreflector. 2 Polarized reflex sensors may not operate with retroreflective tape. Test selected tape prior to installation. 3 Right-angle viewing polarized reflex models are rated Type 1 only. 4 Sensor will detect a 90% reflective white card at this range. 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-13 5.2 5 5 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors Perfect Prox Background Rejection Sensor Description Perfect Prox forward viewing 5 Perfect Prox right-angle viewing 4 in (100 mm) sharp cutoff 0.5-3 in (13-76 mm) 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff 4-pin micro AC connector 13104AQD03 5 in (127 mm) and beyond 0.35 in (9 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) Visible red 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 2.25 in (57 mm) and beyond 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (64 mm) Visible red 4 in (100 mm) sharp cutoff 0.5-3 in (13-76 mm) 5 in (127 mm) and beyond 0.35 in (9 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) Visible red 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 2.25 in (57 mm) and beyond 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (64 mm) Visible red 4 in (100 mm) sharp cutoff 0.5-3 in (13-76 mm) 5 in (127 mm) and beyond 0.35 in (9 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) Visible red 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 2.25 in (57 mm) and beyond 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (64 mm) Visible red 4 in (100 mm) sharp cutoff 0.5-3 in (13-76 mm) 5 in (127 mm) and beyond 0.35 in (9 mm) diameter at 5 in (127 mm) Visible red 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff 0.9-1.8 in (23-45 mm) 2.25 in (57 mm) and beyond 0.05 in (1.3 mm) diameter at 1.7 in (43 mm) Visible red 4-pin micro AC connector 13105AQD03 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff 0.9-1.8 in (23-45 mm) 2.25 in (57 mm) and beyond 0.05 in (1.3 mm) diameter at 1.7 in (43 mm) Visible red 4-pin micro DC connector 13105AQD07 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 5 Fine spot Perfect Prox forward viewing 5 5 2.25 in 57 mm) and beyond Visible red 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 5 5 0.4-1.8 in (10-45 mm) 0.25 in (6 mm) diameter at 2.25 in (64 mm) 20-264 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc (NPN) 5 5 2 in (50 mm) sharp cutoff Catalog Number 5 5 Cutoff Range 2 Connection Type 10-30 Vdc (NPN and PNP) 5 5 Optimum Range Field of View Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors 5 5 Nominal Range 1 Sensing Beam Type Operating Voltage Notes 1 Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance card at this range. 2 Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance card at this range. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-14 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 13101AQD03 4-pin micro DC connector 13104AQD07 13101AQD07 4-pin micro AC connector 13104RQD03 13104RS5003 4-pin micro DC connector 13104RQD07 13104RS5007 Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors 5.2 Features E58 Harsh-Duty Series Sensors are available in 18 mm and 30 mm diameters Refined optics provide long range detection through high levels of lens or airborne contamination Perfect Prox technology provides exceptional background rejection and extremely high excess gain Resistant to the wide range of chemicals used in the automotive, food processing and forest products industries Suitable for high-temperature, high-pressure washdown (1200 psi) Visible sensing beam on all models lets you see where the beam is aimed for quick setup and alignment Output status indicator is the brightest available and is visible from any angle and in any lighting condition 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection E58 Harsh-Duty Series 5 Thru-Beam and Reflex Sensors 5 Description Operating Voltage Sensing Range Optimum Range Field of View 800 ft (250m) 0.1-300 ft (0.03-90m) 33 in (830 mm) diameter at 25 ft (7.6m) Thru-Beam Component Connection Type Catalog Number 5 Source 4-pin micro AC connector E58-30TS250-GAP 5 Detector 4-pin micro AC connector E58-30TD250-GDP 5 Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors 30 mm diameter thru-beam 30 mm diameter reflex 30 mm diameter polarized reflex 20-132 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc 10-30 Vdc 800 ft (250m) 0.1-300 ft (0.03-90m) 33 in (830 mm) diameter at 25 ft (7.6m) Detector 4-pin micro DC connector E58-30TD250-HDP 5 20-132 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc 59 ft (18m) 1-40 ft (0.03-12m) 6 in (150 mm) diameter at 20 ft (6m) -- 4-pin micro AC connector E58-30RS18-GDP 5 10-30 Vdc 59 ft (18m) 1-40 ft (0.03-12m) 6 in (150 mm) diameter at 20 ft (6m) -- 4-pin micro DC connector E58-30RS18-HDP 5 20-132 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc 34 ft (10m) 1-20 ft (0.03-6m) 6 in (150 mm) diameter at 20 ft (6m) -- 4-pin micro AC connector E58-30RP10-GDP 5 10-30 Vdc 34 ft (10m) 1-20 ft (0.03-6m) 6 in (150 mm) diameter at 20 ft (6m) -- 4-pin micro DC connector E58-30RP10-HDP 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-15 5.2 5 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Photoelectric Sensors Perfect Prox Background Rejection Sensors Description Operating Voltage Nominal Range 1 Optimum Range 2 Cutoff Range 90-132 Vac 50/60 Hz or 18-50 Vdc 4 in (100 mm) 0.5-3 in (13-76 mm) 5 in (127 mm) and beyond Connection Type Catalog Number 0.38 in (10 mm) diameter at 4 in (100 mm) 2m cable E58-18DP100-EL Field of View Two-Wire Sensors 5 18 mm diameter Perfect Prox 5 Three-Wire and Four-Wire Sensors 5 18 mm diameter Perfect Prox 10-30 Vdc 4 in (100 mm) 0.5-3 inches (13-76 mm) 5 in (127 mm) and beyond 0.38 in (10 mm) diameter at 4 in (100 mm) 4-pin micro DC connector E58-18DP100-HLP 30 mm diameter Perfect Prox 20-132 Vac 50/60 Hz or 15-30 Vdc 11 in (280 mm) 1-9 in (26-228 mm) 12.5 in (318 mm) 1.0 in (26 mm) diameter at 11 in (280 mm) 4-pin micro AC connector E58-30DPS280-GLP 10-30 Vdc 11 in (280 mm) 1-9 in (26-228 mm) 12.5 in (318 mm) 1.0 in (26 mm) diameter at 11 in (280 mm) 4-pin micro DC connector E58-30DPS280-HLP 5 5 5 5 Notes 1 Sensor will detect a 90% reflectance card at this range. 2 Sensor will ignore a 90% reflectance card at this range 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-16 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors 5.3 Product Overview 5 Inductive Sensors Selection Guide 5 5 E57 Premium+ Series 5 Description iProx E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel Page V9-T5-19 Page V9-T5-20 Page V9-T5-21 Overview Standard features include extended sensing ranges, high noise-immunity, extreme durability and includes autoconfigure technology. Optional advanced features include output delay, speed detection and cloning with the ProxView Software High-performance inductive sensors include stainless steel models, extended ranges and right-angle sensing Full featured sensors with shorter overall length than standard tubular sensors Applications Automotive, machine tool, material handling where high sensing performance and inventory consolidation is a priority A wide variety of applications, including those where customers require AC/DC universal inventory sensors Automation, robotics, transfer lines, conveyors, material handling Product features Auto-configure technology automatically detects a sinking (NPN) or sourcing (PNP) connection and switches the sensor accordingly, without any user intervention Optional computer programming cable and windows-based ProxView configuration software makes it easy to customize sensors Clone the sensor to match the characteristics of more than 4,800 competitive models, or configure it to match your specific application needs 12, 18 and 30 mm diameters Two-wire and three-wire AC and DC sensors AC/DC models operate on 20-250 Vac or Vdc Available in 12, 18 and 30 mm diameters Two-wire sensors offer 20-250 Vac or Vdc operation; AC only 20-135 Vac Three-wire models operate on 6-30 Vdc Output ratings AC--250-500 mA DC--300-500 mA AC mode--250-500 mA DC mode--200 mA AC--200-500 mA continuous DC--500 mA continuous Enclosure ratings Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13 IEC--IP67 Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13 IEC--IP67 Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13 IEC--IP67 Construction Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Semi-shielded models: nickel-plated brass Approvals cUL listed cUL listed UL listed CSA certified 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-17 5.3 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors Product Selection Guide, continued 5 5 5 5 Description Global Proximity E52 Cube Style Page V9-T5-22 Page V9-T5-23 Overview This full-line, tubular proximity sensor family provides a cost-effective solution for high volume OEM use A family of industry-standard, cube-sized inductive sensors with long range capabilities Applications Machine tool detection, press applications, cam detection, material handling, valve and shaft position, automotive assembly Automotive, manufacturing, machinery OEMs Product features 8, 12, 18 and 30 mm diameters Two-wire sensors available in AC or DC versions Three-wire sensors available in DC versions Long inductive proximity ranges available (up to 40 mm sensing distance) Four-wire DC models have complementary outputs (1NO-1NC) Four-wire DC models use auto-configure technology, which allows the sensor to automatically adapt for NPN or PNP without user intervention Output ratings AC mode--200 mA DC mode--100 mA AC--400 mA maximum DC--300 mA maximum Enclosure ratings IP67 Type 4, 4X, 6, 6P, 12, 13 IEC--IP67 Construction Nickel-plated brass 8 mm nano stainless steel Zinc alloy PPS, PL Approvals cCSAus cULus 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5.3 Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors Features iProx Available in AC two-wire, DC three-wire and unique DC fourwire with complementary (NO-NC) or dual NO outputs Auto-configure technology automatically detects a sinking (NPN) or sourcing (PNP) connection and switches the sensor accordingly, without any user intervention Reliably detect metal targets at ranges superior to conventional shielded or unshielded tubular sensors Quality construction using a stainless steel barrel, 360-degree dual-color LED indicator, Ryton(R) impact-resistant face cap and vibration-absorbing potting compound Resistant to extreme temperatures (-40C) 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 iProx 5 iProx Sensors 1 Operating Voltage Sensing Range Shielding Connection Type NO Output Catalog Number 5 12 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 4 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D1 5 10 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12C110D01-D1 18 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 8 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18A108D01-D1 18 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D1 30 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 15 mm Shielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M30A115D01-D1 29 mm Unshielded 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M30C129D01-D1 Description Three-Wire Sensors 5 5 5 5 iProx Complementary and Dual Output Shielding Output Type Connection Type Complementary Outputs (1NO-1NC) Catalog Number 4 mm Shielded NPN (sinking) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D3NN PNP (sourcing) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M12A105D01-D3PP 18 mm Unshielded NPN (sinking) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D3NN PNP (sourcing) 4-pin micro DC connector E59-M18C116D01-D3PP Operating Voltage Sensing Range 12 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 18 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc Description Four-Wire Sensors 5 5 5 5 5 Note 1 Sensors are ordered with pre-set outputs from the factory, but can be later programmed either NO or NC using ProxView software. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-19 5.3 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors Features E57 Premium+ Series 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 E57 Premium+ Series 5 E57 Premium+ Series 5 Description 5 High-performance inductive sensors include stainless steel models, extended ranges and right angle sensing New expanded offering of two-wire, three-wire, AC, DC, and AC/DC multiple range sensor models Designed with stainless steel barrel and new potting compound for robust, high-temperature, high-pressure washdown, as well as intense shock and vibration applications 360 output status indicator is visible from any angle and in any light condition Resettable short circuit protection and reverse polarity in select models Wide temperature range -13 to 158F (-25 to 70C) on cable, micro-style connections Operating Voltage Sensing Range (Sn) Shielding Connection Type 1 NO Output Catalog Number Three-Wire Sensors 2 mm (standard range) Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T110SD 5 2 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T111SD 4 mm (standard range) Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T110ED 5 4 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL12T111ED 5 mm (standard range) Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T110SD 5 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T111SD 5 8 mm (standard range) Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T110ED 8 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL18T111ED 5 20 mm (extended range) Non-embeddable (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18LE20-BD 5 mm Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57RAL18T111SD 10 mm (standard range) Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL30T111SD 15 mm (standard range) Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57LAL30T111ED 5 5 5 5 12 mm diameter end sensing 18 mm diameter end sensing 30 mm diameter end sensing 6-48 Vdc 6-48 Vdc 6-48 Vdc Note 1 For cable lengths longer than 2 meters, add the number of the desired length in meters to the end of the listed catalog number (for catalog numbers ending with a number, add an S and then the length). Examples for a 5-meter cable: E57-18LE12-A becomes E57-18LE12-A5; E57LAL12A2 becomes E57LAL12A2S5. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors 5.3 Features E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel The same quality constructions of the E57 Premium+ standard models, but much shorter Designed with stainless steel barrel and impact-absorbing new potting compound for robust, high-temperature, highpressure washdown, as well as intense shock and vibration applications 360 output status indicator is visible from any angle and in any light condition Resettable short circuit protection in AC/DC and DC models Reverse polarity protection in three-wire DC versions Small size to fit in tight spaces 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection E57 Premium+ Series Short Barrel 5 Short Barrel Length Proximity Sensors 5 Description Operating Voltage Sensing Range (Sn) Shielding Connection Type 1 NO Output Catalog Number 5 6-48 Vdc 2 mm Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T110SD 5 Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T111SD 4 mm Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T110ED Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL12T111ED 5 mm Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T110SD Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T111SD Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T110ED Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL18T111ED Shielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T110SD Shielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T111SD Unshielded (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T110ED Unshielded (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57SAL30T111ED Three-Wire Sensors 12 mm diameter 18 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 8 mm 30 mm diameter 6-48 Vdc 10 mm 15 mm 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Note 1 Cable models are supplied as standard with a 2-meter cable. A 5-meter cable is available by adding S5 to the catalog number. Example: E57SAL12T110 becomes E57SAL12T110S5. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-21 5.3 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors Features Global Proximity 5 5 5 5 5 Features solid performance and a basic feature set for reliable, cost-effective sensing Available in a variety of sizes to fit all applications: 8 mm, 12 mm, 18 mm and 30 mm diameters Operate on 10-30 Vdc in two-wire and three-wire (NPN or PNP) configurations Switching frequency of 2 kHz for DC models Shielded and unshielded versions available Terminations include 2m cable, micro-connector and nano-connector 5 5 5 Product Selection 5 Global Proximity 5 Global Proximity Sensors 5 Description 5 Operating Voltage Sensing Range Shielding 10-30 Vdc 3 mm (extended range) Shielded 8 mm diameter 6 mm (extended range) Unshielded 5 12 mm diameter 10-30 Vdc 5 5 18 mm diameter 10-30 Vdc 5 5 Connection Type Catalog Number Three-Wire Sensors 5 5 Output Type 5 mm (extended range) 10 mm (extended range) Unshielded 8 mm (extended range) Shielded 18 mm (extended range) 30 mm diameter 5 10-30 Vdc 15 mm (extended range) 29 mm (extended range) 5 Shielded Unshielded Shielded Unshielded NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE03-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE03-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE06-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-08GE06-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE05-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE05-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE10-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-12GE10-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE08-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE08-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE18-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-18GE18-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE15-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE15-GDB NO (NPN) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE29-CDB NO (PNP) 4-pin micro DC connector E57-30GE29-GDB 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5.3 Sensors and Limit Switches Inductive Sensors Features E52 Cube Rugged inductive sensors in industry-standard cube package Long inductive proximity ranges available (up to 40 mm sensing distance) Four-wire DC models have complementary outputs (1NO-1NC) Four-wire DC models use auto-configure technology, which allows the sensor to automatically adapt for NPN or PNP without user intervention Robust design featuring vibration and impact-absorbing potting compound Ideal for extreme temperatures or high-pressure washdown environments 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Product Selection Note: Micro-connector models shown; mini-connector models also available. 5 E52 Cube Style 5 E52 Cube Inductive Proximity Sensors Description Voltage Type Output Configuration 5 Shielding Output Type Sensing Range Connector Style Catalog Number Shielded 1NO-1NC 15 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL15SAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 15 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL15UAD01 Shielded 1NO-1NC 20 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL20SAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 20 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL20UAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 25 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL25UAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 30 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL30UAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 35 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL35UAD01 Unshielded 1NO-1NC 40 mm DC 4-pin micro E52Q-DL40UAD01 DC Four-Wire Sensors Cube package (40 x 40 x 40 mm) 10-48 Vdc NPN/PNP autoconfigure 1 Note 1 Autoconfigure technology allows the sensor to automatically adapt to NPN or PNP without user intervention. 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-23 5.4 5 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Connectivity Product Overview Connectivity Selection Guide 5 5 5 5 Description 5 Overview 5 Includes a wide variety of single- and double-connector cables in a variety of sizes (mini, micro, nano), lengths and jacket materials to fit any application Sensing types and ranges Nano (M8) Micro (M12) Mini Product features Industry standard connector types Industrial-duty polymer jackets consisting of PVC, PUR, or irradiated PUR Stranded copper conductors and polymer jackets provide a high resistance to bending motions Right angle units for applications that have constricted space Enclosure ratings Type 6P, IP68 Approvals UL, cUL, CSA Page V9-T5-25 5 5 5 5 5 Global Plus Connector Cables 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Sensors and Limit Switches Connectivity 5.4 Features Global Plus Connector Cables Cost effective and reliable quick-disconnect cables A wide variety of single- and double-connector cables available Custom lengths are available upon request from the factory A full offering of nano, micro and mini connector cables in a variety of lengths and jacket materials available Field wireable accessories Straight and right-angle connector ends 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Catalog Number Selection Global Plus Connector Cables 5 Global Plus 5 Note: This is a representative guide to the catalog numbering system. All possible combinations.may not be available for ordering. 5 CS D S 4 A 4 C Y 22 02 - D Product CS = Cordset 5 5 Connector Type D = Double-ended LN = LED NPN LP = LED PNP 5 5 Electrical Version/ Connector Type D = Euro (micro) connector A = AC micro connector M = AC/DC mini connector Cable Length 01 = 1m (3.2 ft) 01.5 = 1.5m (4.9 ft) 02 = 2m (6.5 ft) 03 = 3m (9.8 ft) 04 = 4m (13 ft) 05 = 5m (16.4 ft) 10 = 10m (32.8 ft) Connector Type S = Straight R = Right angle Wire Configuration 2 = 2-wire 5 = 5-wire 3 = 3-wire 9 = 9-wire 4 = 4-wire 5 5 5 Wire Gauge 24 = 24 AWG 22 = 22 AWG 16 = 16 AWG Pin Configuration 2 = 2-pin 5 = 5-pin 3 = 3-pin 9 = 9-pin 4 = 4-pin Wire Color Code A = IEC color code F = North American color code D = Industrial color code 5 5 5 5 Jacket Color Y = Yellow B = Black 5 5 Jacket Material C = PVC R = PUR 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-25 5.4 5 5 5 5 Sensors and Limit Switches Connectivity Product Selection Micro Style, Single-Connector Cables Description Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length PVC Jacket Catalog Number Pin Configuration/Wire Colors (Face View Female Shown) DC 4-pin 3-wire 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A3CY2202 1-Brown 2-No wire 3-Blue 4-Black 4-pin 4-wire 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A4CY2202 1-Brown 2-White 3-Blue 4-Black 5-pin 5-wire 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS5A5CY2202 Standard Cables Micro style straight female 5 5 5 5 1 4 5 5 Micro style straight female DC 5 5 5 5 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A3CY2202 1-Brown 2-No wire 3-Blue 4-Black 4-pin 4-wire 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A4CY2202 1-Brown 2-White 3-Blue 4-Black 5-pin 5-wire 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR5A5CY2202 1 2 5 4 5 Mini Style, Single-Connector Cables 5 Description 5 3 1-Brown 2-White 3-Blue 4-Black 5-Green/yellow 4-pin 3-wire 5 5 2 5 3 1-Brown 2-White 3-Blue 4-Black 5-Green/yellow Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length PVC Jacket Catalog Number Pin Configuration/Wire Colors (Face View Female Shown) AC/DC 4-pin 4-wire 16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS4A4CY1602 1-Black 2-Blue 3-Brown 4-White AC/DC 4-pin 5-wire 16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS5D5CY1602 1-White 2-Red 3-Green 4-Orange 5-Black Standard Cables Mini style straight female 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V9-T5-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 5.4 Sensors and Limit Switches Connectivity Nano Style, Single-Connector Cables Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length PVC Jacket Catalog Number Nano style straight female -- 3-pin 3-wire 24 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSNS3A3CY2402 Nano style right angle female -- 3-pin 3-wire 24 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSNR3A3CY2402 Description Pin Configuration/Wire Colors (Face View Female Shown) Standard Cables 5 5 1-Brown 3-Blue 4-Black 5 5 Voltage Style Number of Pins Gauge Length PVC Jacket Catalog Number Pin Configuration/Wire Colors (Face View Female Shown) DC 4-pin 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDS4A4CY2202-D Face View Female 5 5 Standard Cables Micro style straight female/male 5 5 1-Brown 3-Blue 4-Black Micro and Mini Style, Double-Ended Connector Cables Description 5 Face View Male 5 5 Micro style straight female/ right angle male DC Mini style straight female/male AC/DC 4-pin 22 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSDR4A4CY2202-D Face View Female 5 Face View Male 5 3-pin 16 AWG 6 ft (2m) CSMS3F3CY1602-DP 5 Face View Face View Female Male 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T5-27 Machine Integration Modular Bus System 6.1 Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MDBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PDMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 6.3 6.5 V9-T6-5 V9-T6-6 V9-T6-8 V9-T6-10 V9-T6-11 V9-T6-12 V9-T6-13 V9-T6-14 V9-T6-15 Terminal Blocks and Accessories Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 6 6 6 6 6 Power Distribution Blocks Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CHDB Series--Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open . . . . . CH160 Series--Power Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSG Power Supplies V9-T6-4 Power Supplies Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PSG Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ELC Power Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 V9-T6-3 General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial Control Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Transformer V9-T6-2 V9-T6-16 V9-T6-17 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 For our complete product offering, see Volume 7--Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions, CA08100008E 6 6 CHDB Series Power Distribution 6 6 6 6 6 XB Terminal Blocks 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-1 6.1 6 6 Machine Integration Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers Product Overview Modular Bus System Selection Guide 6 6 6 6 6 Description 6 Technical Data 6 6 Modular Distribution Busbar System (MDBS) Power Distribution Busbar Module (PDBM) Page V9-T6-3 Page V9-T6-4 Type AC or DC or both DC Vdc to 110 Vdc nominal (77-137.5 Vdc) to 72 Vdc nominal (55-90 Vdc) Vac to 380 Vac nominal (342-424 Vac); 50/60 Hz -- 1, additional negative return busbar possible Voltage 6 Busbars 4 busbars Busbar rating 300A output 100A total output (up to 30A per breaker) 6 Mounting Front panel Front or rear panel Type Hydraulic-magnetic Hydraulic-magnetic 6 Series AMR, AM1P (three-pole AMR in parallel) J Series Ratings to 100A (single-pole), 300A (three-pole) to 30A 6 Terminals Plug-in bullet terminals Fast-on Breaker specifications 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Number of breakers 3 and 5 breaker modules (any combination) Maximum 12 positions (using 4-position modules) Auxiliary contact Via individual connections via trim trio connector Individual signals via SMS, SUBD, or DT connectors Dual control Available Available Dimensions Module only--H x W x D in (mm) 3-Breaker 3.31 x 2.25 x 4.095 (84 x 57.15 x 104) -- 4-Breaker -- 3.94 x 3.00 x 1.10 (100 x 76 x 28) 5-Breaker 3.31 x 3.74 x 4.095 (84 x 95 x 104) -- Module including mounting blade, busbar, auxiliary switch-- H x W x D in (mm) 3-Breaker 4.53 x 2.25 x 5.52 (115 x 57.15 x 140) -- 4-Breaker -- 3.94 x 3.00 x 1.46 (100 x 76 x 37) 5-Breaker 4.53 x 3.74 x 5.52 (84 x 95 x 104) -- Weight Weight (without busbars) 3-Breaker 200g (7 oz) -- 4-Breaker 1 -- 160g (5.65 oz) 5-Breaker 300g (10.6 oz) -- Note 1 With busbars. 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-2 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers 6.1 Features Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers--MDBS Compact power distribution bus system design Number, type (AC vs. DC) and location of loads can be easily changed by adjusting the busbar components Saves installation time Available with or without individual alarm auxiliary switches Utilizes pluggable breakers for quick connection and ability to disconnect 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers--MDBS 6 Modular Bus System--MDBS Model 6 6 MDBS 16 I AD 200 6 Type MDBS = Modular distribution busbar system Ratings 200 = Busbar current rating Number of Positions 10 = 10 positions 13 = 13 positions 15 = 15 positions Auxiliary Alarm I = Individual auxiliary alarm N = No auxiliary alarm 6 6 Voltage Ratings AC = AC only DC = DC only AD = AC/DC 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 Modular Bus System--MDBS Model Individual Auxiliary Alarm Yes No Voltage Number of Breaker Positions (Poles) Catalog Number 1 AC and DC 10 MDBS-10-1-AD-200 13 MDBS-13-1-AD-200 15 MDBS-15-1-AD-200 10 MDBS-10-N-AD-200 13 MDBS-13-N-AD-200 15 MDBS-15-N-AD-200 AC only 6 6 6 6 6 Note 1 These are typical catalog numbers that could be built using the modular system. Products are built-to-order according to specifications and can be provided with any number of positions. 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-3 6.1 6 Machine Integration Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers Features Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers--PDMB 6 6 6 Compact power distribution bus system design Number, type (AC vs. DC) and location of loads can be easily changed by adjusting the busbar components Saves installation time Available with or without individual alarm auxiliary switches Utilizes pluggable breakers for quick connection and ability to disconnect 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 Modular Bus System for Hydraulic Magnetic Circuit Breakers--PDMB 6 Modular Bus System--PDMB Model PDMB 12 C 100 6 6 Type PDMB = Power distribution busbar module 6 6 Number of Positions 4 = 4 positions 8 = 8 positions 12 = 12 positions 6 6 Ratings 100 = Busbar current rating Auxiliary Alarm I = Individual auxiliary alarm C = Common auxiliary alarm N = No auxiliary alarm 6 6 Product Selection 6 Modular Bus System--PDMB Model 6 Auxiliary Alarm Busbar Current Rating Common 100A 6 6 Individual 100A 6 6 No auxiliary alarm 6 6 6 100A Number of Breaker Positions (Poles) Catalog Number 1 4 PDMB-4-C-100 8 PDMB-8-C-100 12 PDMB-12-C-100 4 PDMB-4-1-100 8 PDMB-8-1-100 12 PDMB-12-1-100 4 PDMB-4-N-100 8 PDMB-8-N-100 12 PDMB-12-N-100 Note 1 These are typical catalog numbers that could be built using the modular system. Products are built-to-order according to specifications and can be provided with any number of positions. 6 6 V9-T6-4 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers 6.2 Product Overview 6 General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers Selection Guide 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Description 6 General Purpose Transformers Industrial Control Transformers Page V9-T6-6 Page V9-T6-8 Typically used to step-down voltage from a high voltage to a lower, safer voltage. Commonly installed in or on other electrical equipment, such as machinery, switchboards, and motor control centers. Also installed as loose equipment. Typically used to step-down voltage to a level suitable to operate a variety of electrically controlled devices. Must be installed inside an enclosure, panel, or other structure to provide protection from the surroundings. Maximum primary voltage rating 600 Vac 600 Vac Frequency 60 Hz standard (50/60 Hz optional) 50/60 Hz Enclosure rating Type 3R raintight Open Insulation system 180C (356F) 105C (221F)/130C (266F)/180C (356F) General applications 115C (239F) 55C (131F)/80C (176F)/120C (248F) Optional 80C (176F) -- UL(R) 506, UL 1561, CSA(R) C22.2 UL 506, CSA C22.2 Approvals 6 6 6 6 Ratings 50 VA 37.5 kVA single-phase 50 to 5,000 VA 3 kVA 75 kVA three-phase -- 6 6 Temperature rise Standard 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-5 6.2 6 Machine Integration General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers Features General Purpose Transformers 6 6 Totally enclosed non-ventilated Type 3R enclosure 180C insulation system Suitable for indoor or outdoor applications UL listed and CSA certified 6 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 General Purpose Transformers 6 General Purpose 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 T S 20 N 11 S 05 A Prefix Options C = CSA labeled ventilated transformer Marine Duty QS = EPM marine (1-Ph encapsulated) LY = EPTM Marine (3-Ph encapsulated) RT = DS-3M marine (1-Ph ventilated) MV = DT-3M marine (3-Ph ventilated) Suffix Options Type S = EP (single-phase encapsulated) Y = EPT (three-phase encapsulated) T = DS-3 (single-phase ventilated) V = DT-3 (three-phase ventilated) P = Mini-power center Z = Class 1 Division 2 Groups C and D X = Harmonic mitigating (three-phase ventilated) Nonlinear Nonlinear (three-phase ventilated) (single-phase ventilated) H = KT-4 J = KT-30 HT = KT-4 B = KT-9 A = KT-40 NT = KT-13 N = KT-13 K = KT-50 GT = KT-20 G = KT-20 13 = 110 x 220 12 = 120 10 = 120 x 240 29 = 208 72 = 200 25 = 220 Primary Voltage 23 = 230 43 = 416 24 = 240 44 = 440 20 = 240 x 480 45 = 450 27 = 277 48 = 480 38 = 380 57 = 575 39 = 400 60 = 600 Notes 1 Model number is not used on newly designed/redesigned transformers. 2 Copper windings. 3 Stainless steel enclosure (uses 316 stainless steel, does not imply a NEMA 4X rating). 4 Open type core and coil assembly. 5 Totally enclosed non-ventilated DS-3 or DT-3. 6 50/60 Hz. V9-T6-6 D E F G J K L M N R P = = = = = = = = = = = T = U = W= X = Taps 2 at +2.5%, 2 at -2.5% 1 at +5%, 1 at -5% 1 at -10% 2 at -5% 4 at -2.5% 1 at -10% x 2 at -5% 2 at -5% x 4 at -2.5% 2 at +2.5%, 4 at -2.5% None 1 at +5%, 2 at -5% 1 at +5%, 2 at -5% x 2 at +2.5%, 4 at -2.5% 1 at +4.2%, 1 at -4.2% 1 at +2.5%, 3 at -2.5% 1 at +3.5%, 1 at -3.5% 2 at +3.1%, 2 at -3.1% 42 = 2400 46 = 4160 49 = 4800 40 = Export model 54 = 120/208/240/277 7 8 9 j k Low sound design. LS47 indicates low sound equal to 47 dB; LS42 indicates 42 dB. Fungus proof. Certified test report of standard production tests for the specific serial number to be shipped. Certified sound level report. CE Marked. 04 = 12/24 06 = 16/32 08 = 24/48 14 = 110/220 12 = 120 10 = 120 x 240 11 = 120/240 54 = 127/254 19 = 190Y/110 l m n o p q 81 = 0.05 85 = 0.075 82 = 0.10 83 = 0.15 26 = 0.25 51 = 0.50 76 = 0.75 01 = 1 16 = 1.5 02 = 2 03 = 3 05 = 5 06 = 6 kVA 07 = 7.5 09 = 9 10 = 10 15 = 15 21 = 22.5 25 = 25 30 = 30 37 = 37.5 45 = 45 50 = 50 75 = 75 99 = 100 12 = 112.5 49 = 150 67 = 167 22 = 225 52 = 250 33 = 300 54 = 333 55 = 500 60 = 600 77 = 750 11 = 1000 14 = 1500 A = Buck and boost B = 80C rise Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com = = = = = = = = = 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SR CE T EE NON POS NEG THR = = = = = = = = j k l m n o p q 9 Phase F = 115C rise E = Electrostatic shield Secondary Voltage 28 = 208Y/120 21 = 240/480 29 = 208 27 = 277 25 = 220 delta 38 = 380 delta 31 = 220Y/127 37 = 380Y/220 26 = 220 delta/110 midtap 34 = 400Y/231 22 = 240 delta/120 midtap 51 = 416Y/240 64 = 240Y/139 35 = 440Y/254 24 = 240 delta 62 = 460Y/266 20 = 240 x 480 47 = 480Y/277 Thermal indicator embedded in center coil. Suffix "TT" indicates two thermal indicators of different temperature ratings, are installed. NEMA TP-1 Energy Star energy efficient. 0 phase-shift (used with HMTs). +15 phase-shift (used with HMTs). -15 phase-shift (used with HMTs). -30 phase-shift (used with HMTs). A...Y CU SS ZZ NV X LS_ _ AF TR S = Single T = Three 48 = 480 delta 60 = 600 delta 61 = 600Y/346 42 = 2400 41 = 4160Y/2400 46 = 4160 49 = 4800 Machine Integration General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers 6.2 Product Selection 6 Single-Phase Encapsulated, 240 x 480--120/240, 115C Rise kVA Catalog Number Outline # Wiring Diagram 0.05 S20N11S81N 52 3A 0.075 S20N11S85N 53 3A 0.1 S20N11S82N 54 3A 0.15 S20N11S83N 55 3A 0.25 S20N11S26N 56 3A 0.5 S20N11S51N 57 3A 0.75 S20N11S76N 58A 3A 1 S20N11S01N 59A 3A 1.5 S20N11S16N 67 3A 2 S20N11S02N 68 3A 3 S20N11S03N 176 3A 5 S20N11S05N 177 3A 7.5 S20N11S07N 178 3A 10 S20N11S10N 179 3A 15 S20N11S15N 180 3A 25 S20L11S25N 182 23A 37.5 S20L11S37 300A 248A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Single-Phase Transformer Sizing Chart Line current = (kVA x 1000)/line voltage. 6 6 Rated Line Voltage kVA 120 208 240 277 480 600 2400 4160 4800 0.5 4.2 2.4 2.1 1.8 1 0.8 0.2 0.1 0.1 1 8.3 4.8 4.2 3.6 2.1 1.7 0.4 0.2 0.2 1.5 12.5 7.2 6.3 5.4 3.1 2.5 0.6 0.4 0.3 2 16.7 9.6 8.3 7.2 4.2 3.3 0.8 0.5 0.4 3 25 14.4 12.5 10.8 6.3 5 1.3 0.7 0.6 5 41.7 24 20.8 18.1 10.4 8.3 2.1 1.2 1 7.5 62.5 36.1 31.3 27.1 15.6 12.5 3.1 1.8 1.6 10 83.3 48.1 41.7 36.1 20.8 16.7 4.2 2.4 2.1 15 125 72.1 62.5 54.2 31.3 25 6.3 3.6 3.1 25 208.3 120.2 104.2 90.3 52.1 41.7 10.4 6 5.2 37.5 312.5 180.3 156.3 135.4 78.1 62.5 15.6 9 7.8 50 416.7 240.4 208.3 180.5 104.2 83.3 20.8 12 10.4 75 625 360.6 312.5 270.8 156.3 125 31.3 18 15.6 100 833.3 480.8 416.7 361 208.3 166.7 41.7 24 20.8 167 1391.7 802.9 695.8 602.9 347.9 278.3 69.6 40.1 34.8 250 2083.3 1201.9 1041.7 902.5 520.8 416.7 104.2 60.1 52.1 333 2775 1601 1387.5 1202.2 693.8 555 138.8 80 69.4 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-7 6.2 6 Machine Integration General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers Features Industrial Control Transformers 6 6 Epoxy encapsulated 130C insulation system 50/60 Hz operation UL listed and CSA certified 6 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection 6 Industrial Control Transformers 6 Industrial Control CE 0250 E 2F CE 6 6 6 Type C = Industrial control transformer CE = CE Marked control transformer Voltage Primary 6 6 6 6 6 6 0025 0050 0075 0100 0150 0200 0250 0300 0350 0500 0750 VA Rating = 25 1000 = 1000 = 50 1500 = 1500 = 75 2000 = 2000 = 100 3000 = 3000 = 150 5000 = 5000 = 200 Type AP Only: = 250 0003 = 3000 = 300 0005 = 5000 = 350 0007 = 7500 = 500 0010 = 10000 = 750 0015 = 15000 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Transformer Design E = MTE K = MTK P = AP AC AG 1B 2A = = = = 2B 2C 2F 2G 2U = = = = = 2V 2W 3A 3B 3C 3D 4B 4C 4D 4E 4H 4W 5E = = = = = = = = = = = = = 6U = 7G 1 = 380 x 415 208/240/277/380/480 120 x 240 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440 240 x 480 240 x 480 230/460 230/460 220/380/440/550, 230/400/460/575, 240/416/480/600 208/230/400/460/575 208/230/400/460/575 208/277 115 230/460/575 208/380/416 208/230/460/575 550/575/600 380/400/415 208/230/460/575 380/400/415 550/575/600 200/220/440, 208/230/460, 240/480 240/416/480/600, 230/400/460/575, 220/380/440/550, 208/500 240 x 480 Secondary 24 24 24 120/115/110 24 120 x 240 115 115/230 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 24/115/230 115/230 120 24 115/95 115/95 24 110/115/120 110 x 220 115 22/23/24 22/23/24 23/110, 24/115, 25/120 Modifications Type MTE/MTK CE = CE marked control transformer FB = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block for rejection type fuses FBN = Factory-mounted two-pole primary fuse block for non-rejection type fuses Q = Secondary fuse clips for 1/4 x 1-1/4 in fuses XX = No secondary fuse clips RT = Ring type terminals for connection to fuse block ES = Electrostatic shield FS = Factory-mounted finger-safe terminal shields Type AP B = Bottom mounted S = Side/wall mounted ES = Electrostatic shield CU = Copper windings Type MTA/MTC FB = Factory-mounted three-pole fuse block (two-pole primary rejection type with single-pole secondary non-rejection type) ES = Electrostatic shield L = Lead terminations 99/120/130, 95/115/125, 91/110/120, 85/100/110 120/240 Note 1 Type AP only. 6 V9-T6-8 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration General Purpose and Industrial Control Transformers 6.2 Product Selection 6 Primary 240 x 480, 230 x 460, 220 x 440-- Secondary 120/115/110 Primary 240 x 480-- Secondary 24 Primary 120 x 240-- Secondary 24 VA Catalog Number VA Catalog Number VA Catalog Number 25 C0025E2A 50 C0050E2B 50 C0050E1B 50 C0050E2A 75 C0075E2B 75 C0075E1B 75 C0075E2A 100 C0100E2B 100 C0100E1B 100 C0100E2A 150 C0150E2B 150 C0150E1B 150 C0150E2A 200 C0200E2B 200 C0200E1B 200 C0200E2A 250 C0250E2B 250 C0250E1B 250 C0250E2A 300 C0300E2B 300 C0300E1B 300 C0300E2A 350 C0350E2B 350 C0350E1B 350 C0350E2A 500 C0500E2B 500 C0500E1B 500 C0500E2A 750 C0750E2B 750 C0750E2A 1000 C1000E2A 1500 C1500E2A 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-9 6.3 6 6 Machine Integration Power Supplies Product Overview Power Supplies Selection Guide 6 6 6 6 6 PSG Power Supplies ELC Power Supplies Page V9-T6-11 Page V9-T6-12 Output voltage 24 Vdc 24 Vdc Input voltage 100-240 Vac/120-375 Vdc or 400-500 Vac/450-800 Vdc 100-240 Vac Mounting DIN rail DIN rail/panel 6 Outrush current (current boost/surge) 150% of nominal 110% of nominal Class 1, Division 2 Yes Yes 6 Semi 47 approved Yes -- Housing material Metal Plastic 6 Adjustable output voltage 22-28 Vdc -- Redundancy allowed Yes -- Connection Large screw terminals Large screw terminals Overload/short circuit protection Yes Yes 6 6 6 6 6 Description Technical Data 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-10 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Power Supplies 6.3 Features PSG Power Supplies Universal input voltages: 100-240 Vac for single-phase units, 400-500 Vac for three-phase units Rugged aluminum housing stands up to harsh environments Compact size, with common depth and height across all models allows for common panel depths and family consistency Heavy-duty screw terminals with finger-safe protective cover allow use of ring-lug terminals Class 1, Division 2 hazardous location rated 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection PSG Power Supplies 6 PSG 6 6 PSG 120 E Model PSG = General purpose power supply Wattage Rating 60 = 60 Watts 120 = 120 Watts 240 = 240 Watts 480 = 480 Watts 6 Nominal Input Voltage E = 100-240 Vac single-phase F = 400-500 Vac three-phase 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 Semi F47 Certified for Voltage Sag Immunity PSG Power Supply Description Catalog Number Single-phase 100-240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG60E Three-phase 400-500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG60F Single-phase 100-240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG120E Three-phase 400-500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG120F Single-phase 100-240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG240E Three-phase 400-500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG240F Single-phase 100-240 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG480E Three-phase 400-500 Vac input, 24 Vdc/2.5A output PSG480F 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-11 6.3 6 Machine Integration Power Supplies Features ELC Power Supplies 6 6 6 Compact and low-cost source for 24 Vdc power Universal input voltage: 100-240 Vac Compact size, with common depth and height across models allows for common panel depths and family consistency Power On indication LED Integrated mounting hardware for panel mounting or DIN rail mounting 6 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 ELC Power Supplies 6 ELC 6 6 Description Catalog Number 24W, 1A power supply ELC-PS01 48W, 2A power supply ELC-PS02 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-12 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Power Distribution Blocks 6.4 Product Overview 6 Power Distribution Blocks Selection Guide 6 6 6 6 6 Description CHDB Series (Open Style) CHDB Series (Enclosed Style) 6 CH160 Series Page V9-T6-14 Page V9-T6-14 Page V9-T6-15 UL listing UL 1953 for feeder circuits UL 1953 for feeder circuits UL 1059 for branch circuits Protection degree N/A--covers available IP20 finger-safe N/A--covers available Number of poles 3 1 1, 2 or 3 Maximum current 310A 570A 840A High SCCR Yes Yes No 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-13 6.4 6 Machine Integration Power Distribution Blocks Features CHDB Series--Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open 6 6 6 6 6 High short-circuit current rating (SCCR) applications up to 200,000 amperes 600 Vac or Vdc (UL 1953), 690 Vac or Vdc DIN rail or panel mount (CHDB330F is panel mount only) Captive termination screws prevent lost screws Single-pole, gang mountable for multi-pole applications UL listed 1953, guide QPQS, file E256146 CSA certified, class 6228-01, file 15364 (enclosed style) CE component IEC 60947-7-1 (enclosed style) IEC 60529, IP20 (finger-safe) under specific wiring conditions (enclosed style) 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 CHDB Series--Power Distribution Blocks, Enclosed and Open 6 CHDB Series 6 Line Connection Load Connection 2/0-#8 AWG Configuration Amperes Style Poles Catalog Number (4) #4-#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB2203 2/0-#8 AWG (6) #4-#14 AWG 175 Open 3 CHDB3213 300 kcmil-#4 AWG (6) #4-#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3233 300 kcmil-#4 AWG (12) #4-#14 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3703 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 (6) #2-#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713 (3) 1/0-#12 AWG 310 Open 3 CHDB3713 2/0-#8 AWG 2/0-#8 AWG 175 Enclosed 1 1 CHDB204F 500 kcmil-#6 AWG (6) #2-#14 AWG 380 Enclosed 1 1 CHDB330F 300 kcmil-#4 AWG (12) #4-#14 AWG 570 Enclosed 1 1 CHDB377F 300 kcmil-#4 AWG 6 6 6 6 Note 1 Finger-safe. 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-14 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Power Distribution Blocks 6.4 Features CH160 Series--Power Terminal Blocks 6 Ratings to 840A, 600V Molded material, black; UL rated 94V-0 thermoplastic Operating temperature: 302F (150C) Optional cover UL recognized CSA certified 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 CH160 Series--Power Terminal Blocks 6 CH160 Series Line Connection Load Connection Connector Material and Ampacity Catalog Number 1 6 6 CH162 Series #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 115A CH16200_ 1/0-#14 Cu 1/0-#14 Cu Cu 150A CH16201_ 2/0-#8 Cu/Al 2/0-#8 Cu/Al Al 175A CH16204_ 2/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al (4) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16220_ 6 250 MCM-#6 Cu 250 MCM-#6 Cu Cu 255A CH16301_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 310A CH16303_ 6 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 380A CH16306_ 2/0-#14 Cu/Al (6) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 175A CH16321_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16323_ (2) 2/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al (6) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 350A CH16325_ 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 380A CH16330_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (3) #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_ (2) 1/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16332_ 6 CH163 Series 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (12) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16370_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (6) #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_ (3) 1/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16371_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (21) #10-#14 Cu/#10 Al Al 310A CH16372_ 350 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (3) 1/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_ (14) #10-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 310A CH16373_ 600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (12) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16375_ 600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (6) #2-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_ (3) 1/0-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 420A CH16376_ (2) 350 MCM-4 Cu/Al Al 620A CH16500_ (2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al Al 760A CH16504_ (2) 600 MCM-#2 Cu/Al (4) 3/0-#8 Cu/Al Al 840A CH16528_ (4) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 840A CH16528_ (2) 500 MCM-#6 Cu/Al (12) #4-#14 Cu/#8 Al Al 760A CH16530_ 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 CH165 Series (2) 350 MCM-4 Cu/Al 6 6 6 Note 1 Incomplete catalog number--add code suffix -1, -2, -3 for number of poles. Example: For a 150A 1/0-#14 Cu to 1/0-#14 Cu three-pole PDB, order CH16201-3. Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 6 V9-T6-15 6.5 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Product Overview Terminal Blocks and Accessories Selection Guide 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Description XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks Available connections Screw terminal, spring cage, insulation displacement (IDC) Page V9-T6-17 Insulation material Polyamide 6.6 Dielectric strength 600 kV/cm Creep resistance 600 CTI 6 Flammability rating UL 94 V0 Continuous operating temperature -40 to 257F (-40 to 125C) 6 UL recognized Yes CE approved Yes 6 ATEX approved Yes Jumpers/bridging Flexible jumper system with dual channel configurations 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-16 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 6.5 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Features XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks Maintenance-free connections Multi-conductor connections Flexible plug-in bridge system UL and cUL(R) recognized, CE approved LVD1 (Not all standards apply to all terminal blocks. Contact Eaton for details) EN-60947-7-1; EN-60947-7-2; EN-60998-2-3; EN-60352-4/A1 ATEX approval (EExe applications) 6 6 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 XB Series IEC Terminal Blocks 6 6 Screw Connection Single Level--Through-Feed Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/41/26-10 750/30/38/26-10 600/30/26-10 Catalog Number 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/57/24-8 750/40/50/24-8 600/50/24-8 Catalog Number Color Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/32/26-12 750/22/28/26-12 600/20/26-12 Catalog Number Gray -- XBUT25 XBUT4 XBUT6 Blue -- XBUT25BU XBUT4BU XBUT6BU Orange -- -- XBUT4OR -- Yellow -- -- XBUT4YE -- Red -- -- XBUT4RD -- White -- -- XBUT4WH -- Black -- -- XBUT4BK -- Green -- -- XBUT4GN -- 6 Gray -- XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 6 6 6 6 Product Selection Screw connection single level--through-feed 6 6 6 Accessories End cover Partition plate Gray -- XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 -- 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 -- 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 -- 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 -- 6 6 6 6 Note 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-17 6.5 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Screw Connection Single Level--Through-Feed Terminal Blocks, continued Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/32/26-12 750/22/28/26-12 600/20/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/41/26-10 750/30/38/26-10 600/30/26-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/57/24-8 750/40/50/24-8 600/50/24-8 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBUT10 XBUT16 XBUT35 Blue -- XBUT10BU XBUT16BU XBUT35BU Orange -- XBUT10OR -- -- Yellow -- XBUT10YE -- -- 6 Red -- XBUT10RD -- -- White -- -- -- -- 6 Black -- -- -- -- Green -- -- -- -- Gray -- XBACUT10 XBACUT16 2 -- 6 6 6 Description Color Product Selection Screw connection single level--through-feed 6 6 6 6 6 Accessories End cover Partition plate Gray -- XBATUT10 -- Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216 3 -- -- -- 5 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 2 XBUT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-18 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 6.5 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Screw Connection Single Level--Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Number of Positions 10.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/26-12 --/--/26-12 --/--/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 --/--/24-8 --/--/24-8 --/--/24-8 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Green/ yellow -- XBUT25PE XBUT4PE XBUT6PE End cover Gray -- XBACUT10 XBACUT10 XBACUT10 Partition plate Gray -- XBATUT10 XBATUT10 XBATUT10 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 -- 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 -- 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 -- 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 -- Description Color 6 6 6 6 Product Selection Screw connection single level ground block 6 Accessories 6 6 6 6 6 6 Screw Connection Single Level--Ground Blocks, continued Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Number of Positions 10.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/26-12 --/--/26-12 --/--/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 --/--/24-8 --/--/24-8 --/--/24-8 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 6 6 6 Product Selection Screw connection single level ground block Green/ yellow -- XBUT10PE XBUT16PE XBUT35PE Gray -- XBACUT10 XBACUT16 2 6 Accessories End cover Partition plate -- -- XBATUT10 -- -- Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS212 3 -- -- -- 5 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- 6 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2158 U. 2 XBUT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-19 6.5 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 6 Description 6 Screw connection multi-conductor 6 6 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/39/26-10 150/30/26-10 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBUT25D12 XBUT4D12 -- XBUT25D22 XBUT4D22 Product Selection 6 6 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/26-12 150/20/26-12 -- XBUT25D12BU XBUT4D12BU -- XBUT25D22BU XBUT4D22BU -- XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12 -- XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22 -- XBASUT4 XBASUT4 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12 XBATUTD22 XBATUTD22 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/26-12 --/--/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 Catalog Number Catalog Number Green/ yellow -- XBUT25D12PE XBUT4D12PE -- XBUT25D22PE XBUT4D22PE Gray -- XBACUT4D12 XBACUT4D12 -- XBACUT4D22 XBACUT4D22 -- XBASUT4 XBASUT4 Blue Accessories End cover Gray End cover segment Gray 6 Partition plate 6 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Screw Connection Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Product Selection Screw connection multi-conductor ground block Accessories 6 End cover 6 End cover segment Gray Partition plate -- -- XBATUTD12 XBATUTD12 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 6 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 6 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-20 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Screw Connection Double Level Terminal Blocks 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/26-10 --/--/26-10 Color Number of Positions 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/36/26-10 300/30/26-10 Catalog Number Catalog Number Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 Gray -- XBUTT4 -- Blue -- XBUTT4BU -- Red -- XBUTT4RD -- Screw connection double level--terminal block with potential distribution between the levels Gray -- XBUTT4PV -- 6 Screw connection double level--ground block Green/ yellow -- -- XBUTT4PE 6 End cover Gray -- XBACUTT4 XBACUTT4 Spacer plate Gray -- XBDPUTT4 XBDPUTT4 Partition plate -- -- XBATUTT4 XBATUTT4 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 3 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 Screw connection double level 6 Accessories 6 6 6 6 6 6 Screw Connection Triple Level Sensor/Actuator Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 250/26/24-12 -- 300/15/30-14 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 -- 250/30/24-12 300/15/30-14 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Screw connection triple level Gray blue -- XB3UKA25 XB3UKF25 Screw connection triple level w/red LED, 15-30 Vdc, 2.5-7.5A Gray -- XB3UKA25L24 -- Screw connection with ground connection Gray -- XB3UKA24PE XB3UKF24PE Screw connection with ground connection and LED indicator Gray -- XB3UKA24PEL24 -- Blue 80 XBAEB80DIKB XBAEB80DIKB Red 80 XBAEB80DIKR XBAEB80DIKR Blue 10 XBAEB10DIKB XBAEB10DIKB Red 10 XBAEB10DIKR XBAEB10DIKR White -- XBMZB6 1 XBMZB6 1 Description 6 6 6 6 Product Selection 6 6 6 Accessories Insertion bridge Blank marker strip (strip of 10) 6 6 6 Note 1 For information on Printed Marking Tag Options, see Page V9-T6-33. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-21 6.5 6 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Screw Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-3 in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnected Terminal Block in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Number of Positions 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/6.3/26-10 -- 600/6.3/26-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 1/10/24-8 -- 400/10/24-8 12 mm 6 AWG/16 mm2 2/2/20-4 800/10/20-6 300/20/22-6 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 6 Product Selection Fuse terminal block for 5 x 20 mm fuse Black -- XBUT4FBE -- XBUK10FBCE 6 Fuse terminal block for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 x 1-1/4 in) fuse Black -- -- XBUT6FBN XBUK10FBCN Fuse terminal block w/LED 12-30V, 1-2.5 mA Black -- XBUT4FBEL24 XBUT6FBNL24 -- Fuse terminal block w/LED 30-60V, 0.8-2.0 mA Black -- XBUT4FBEL60 XBUT6FBNL60 -- 6 Fuse terminal block w/LED 110-250V, 0.5-2.5 mA Black -- XBUT4FBEL250 XBUT6FBNL250 -- Fuse terminal block w/LED 15-30V, 1-2.5 mA, 5 x 20 mm Black -- -- -- XBUK10FBCEL24 6 Fuse terminal block w/LED 15-30V, 1-2.5 mA, 6.3 x 32 mm Black -- -- -- XBUK10FBCNL24 Fuse terminal block w/LED 110-250V, 0.5-1.1A, 5 x 20 mm Black -- -- -- XBUK10FBCEL250 6 Fuse terminal block w/LED 110-250V, 0.5-1.1A, 6.3 x 32 mm Black -- -- -- XBUK10FBCNL250 End cover -- -- 3 3 -- Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the bridge shaft Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 -- 3 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS38 -- 5 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS58 -- 10 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS108 -- 50 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS508 -- 6 6 6 Accessories 6 6 6 6 Notes Max. power dissipation at 23C (based on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7. When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified above is not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge fuse inserts 5 x 20 mm based on DIN EN 60 947-7-3: 2003-7. 6 Overload Protection 6 6 6 Terminal Block U (V) Individual Interconnected Imax. (A) XBUT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 6.3 If the fuse is defective, the downstream circuit is not off load. 1 2 3 As disconnect terminal block 400V, as fuse terminal block 250V. The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator. XBUT4FBE and XBUT6FBN have an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-22 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com 6.5 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Spring Cage Single Level--Through-Feed Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/31/28-12 550/25/21/24-12 600/20/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28-10 550/34/30/24-10 600/30/20-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 800/52/24-8 550/45/36/20-8 600/50/20-8 6 6 6 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBPT25 XBPT4 XBPT6 Blue -- XBPT25BU XBPT4BU XBPT6BU White -- XBPT25WH -- -- Red -- XBPT25RD -- -- Black -- XBPT25BK -- -- 6 6 6 Product Selection Spring cage single level--through-feed 6 6 Accessories End cover Gray -- XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6 Partition plate -- -- XBATPT4 XBATPT4 XBATPT6 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 -- 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 -- 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 -- 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 -- 6 6 6 6 6 Spring Cage Single Level--Through-Feed Terminal Blocks, continued Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 800/65/24-6 550/50/63/16-6 600/65/16-6 12 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 800/90/24-4 550/65/82/16-4 600/50/16-4 16 mm 2 AWG/35 mm2 800/125/14-2 750/108/14-2 600/115/14-2 6 6 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBPT10 XBPT16 XBPT35 Blue -- XBPT10BU XBPT16BU XBPT35BU White -- -- -- -- Red -- -- -- -- Black -- -- -- -- 6 End cover Gray -- XBACPT10 XBACPT16 2 6 Partition plate -- -- -- -- -- Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216 3 -- -- -- 5 -- -- -- 10 -- -- -- 50 -- -- -- Description 6 Product Selection Spring cage single level--through-feed 6 6 Accessories 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT6), KEMA 05ATEX2156 U (XBPT10). 2 XBPT35 has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-23 6.5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Screw Connection Single Level--Ground Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/28-12 --/--/24-12 --/--/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/28-10 --/--/24-10 --/--/20-10 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 --/--/24-8 --/--/20-8 --/--/20-8 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number -- XBPT25PE XBPT4PE XBPT6PE Product Selection Spring cage single level ground block Green/ yellow Accessories End cover Gray -- XBACPT25 XBACPT4 XBACPT6 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center -- 2 -- -- -- Number of Positions 10.2 mm 6 AWG/10 mm2 --/65/24-6 --/--/16-6 --/--/16-6 12 mm 4 AWG/16 mm2 --/90/24-4 --/--/16-4 --/--/16-4 16 mm 2 AWG/35 mm2 --/125/14-2 --/--/14-2 --/--/14-2 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number -- XBPT10PE XBPT16PE XBPT35PE Screw Connection Single Level--Ground Blocks, continued Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Product Selection 6 Spring cage single level ground block Green/ yellow 6 Accessories End cover Gray -- XBACPT10 XBACPT16 2 6 Plug-in Bridge -- for cross connections in the terminal center -- 2 XBAFBS210 XBAFBS212 XBAFBS216 6 Notes 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4PE, XBPT6PE), KEMA 05ATEX2156 U (9XBPT10PE). 2 XBPT35PE has an enclosed design. The use of an end cover is not required. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-24 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Spring Cage Multi-Conductor Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/28/28-12 550/25/21/24-12 600/20/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 800/40/28-10 550/34/29/24-10 600/30/20-10 6 6 6 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBPT25D12 XBPT4D12 -- XBPT25D22 XBPT4D22 -- XBPT25D12BU XBPT4D12BU -- XBPT25D22BU XBPT4D22BU -- XBPT25D22U XBPT4D22U 6 Gray -- XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12 -- -- XBACPT24D22 XBACPT4D22 6 Gray -- XBASPT25 XBASPT4 XBATPTD12 XBATPTD12 XBATPTD22 XBATPTD22 6 Product Selection Spring cage multi-conductor Blue Spring cage multi-conductor with interrupted busbar Gray 6 6 Accessories End cover End cover segment Partition plate Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 6 6 6 6 6 6 Spring Cage Multi-Conductor Ground Blocks Description 6 Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/28-12 --/--/24-12 --/--/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 --/--/28-10 --/--/24-10 --/--/20-10 Catalog Number Catalog Number 6 Green/ yellow -- XBPT25D12PE XBPT4D12PE 6 XBPT25D22PE XBPT4D22PE 6 Gray -- XBACPT25D12 XBACPT4D12 6 XBACPT25D22 XBACPT4D22 XBASPT25 XBASPT4 Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-2 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Color 6 Product Selection Spring cage multi-conductor ground block Accessories End cover End cover segment Gray -- 6 6 Note 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPT25D12, XBPT25D22), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPT4D12, XBPT4D22). 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-25 6.5 6 6 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Spring Cage Double Level Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Number of Positions 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/26/28-12 420/23/19/24-12 600/20/26-12 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 500/32/28-10 420/32/27/24-10 300/30/20-10 Catalog Number Catalog Number Product Selection Gray -- XBPTT25 XBPTT4 Blue -- XBPTT25BU XBPTT4BU Spring cage double level ground block Green/ yellow -- XBPTT25PE XBPTT4PE Spring cage double level--terminal block with potential distribution between the levels Gray -- XBPTT25PV XBPTT4PV End cover Gray -- XBACPTT25 XBACPTT4 Partition plate -- -- XBATPTT4 XBATPTT4 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 6 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 6 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 Spring cage double level block 6 6 6 6 6 Accessories 6 6 6 6 6 Spring Cage Triple Level Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color 5.2 mm 12 AWG/2.5 mm2 500/28/28-12 600/20/26-12 Number of Positions Catalog Number Product Selection Spring cage triple level block Gray -- XBPTK25 Spring cage triple level--terminal block with potential distribution between the levels Gray -- XBPTK25PV End cover Gray -- XBACPT25K Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS25 6 3 XBAFBS35 5 XBAFBS55 6 10 XBAFBS105 50 XBAFBS505 6 6 6 6 6 Accessories Note 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2154 U (XBPTT25, XBPTT25PE), KEMA 05ATEX2155 U (XBPTT4, XBPTT4PE). 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-26 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Block Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size IEC 60 947-7-3 with Fuse in V/A/AWG IEC 60 947-7-3 as Disconnect Terminal Block in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 6.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 1/1/28-10 250/6.3/28-10 300/6.3/24-10 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/10/28-10 400/10/28-10 300/10/24-10 6 6 6 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Fuse terminal block for 5 x 20 mm fuse Black -- XBPT4FBE -- Fuse terminal block w/LED 15-30V, 3.5-8.1A Black -- XBPT4FBEL24 -- Fuse terminal block w/LED 30-60V, 0.8-2.0A Black -- XBPT4FBEL60 -- Fuse terminal block w/LED 110-250V, 0.5-1.0A Black -- XBPT4FBEL250 -- Fuse terminal block for 6.3 x 32 mm (1/4 x 1-1/4 in) fuse Black -- -- XBPT4FBN Fuse terminal block w/LED 12-30V, 1.0-2.5 mA Black -- -- XBPT4FBNL24 Fuse terminal block w/LED 110-250V, 0.5-2.5 mA Black -- -- XBPT4FBNL250 6 Partition plate -- -- XBATPT4 XBATQTD12 6 Plug-in bridge--for cross connections in the terminal center Red 2 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS28 3 XBAFBS36 -- 5 XBAFBS56 -- 10 XBAFBS106 -- Description 6 Product Selection 6 6 6 Accessories 6 6 6 Notes The cartridge fuse holders should be selected according to the maximum power dissipation (self-heating) of the cartridge fuse inserts. The thermal conditions in closed fuse holes should be checked according to the application and installation. Higher ambient temperatures are an additional strain on fuse inserts. In applications of this kind, the shift of the rated current should be taken into consideration accordingly. Max. power dissipation at 23C (in acc. with IEC 60 947-7-3). When selecting cartridge fuse inserts, please ensure that the maximum power dissipation specified at right is not exceeded. Details can be obtained from the fuse suppliers. Cartridge fuse inserts 5 x 20 and 6.3 x 32 mm in acc. with IEC 60 947-7-3. Terminal Block U (V) Individual Interconnected XBPT4FBN 400 1.6W 1.6W XBPT4FBE 250 1.6W 1.6W 6 6 6 Overload Protection 6 6 Short Circuit Protection Only 1 XBPT4FBN 400 4W 2.5W XBPT4FBE 250 4W 2.5W 6 6 The current is determined by the fuse used, the voltage by the selected light indicator. See table above. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-27 6.5 6 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Insulation Displacement Connection--Single Level Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24-16 550/16/24-16 600/10/24-16 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/24/20-14 -- 600/15/20-14 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/20-14 -- --/--/20-14 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Gray -- XBQT15 -- XBQT25 -- Blue -- XBQT15BU -- XBQT25BU -- Green/ yellow -- -- XBQT15PE -- XBQT25PE End cover Gray -- XBACQT15 XBACQT15 XBACQT25 XBACQT25 Partition plate -- -- XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 XBATQT25 Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 6 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 6 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 Number of Positions 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24-16 550/16/24-16 600/10/24-16 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 800/24/20-14 -- 600/15/20-14 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 --/--/20-14 -- --/--/20-14 Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number Catalog Number 6 Description Product Selection IDC terminal block--single level 6 6 6 6 IDC ground block--single level Accessories 6 6 6 6 6 6 Insulation Displacement Connection--Multi-Conductor Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description Color Product Selection IDC terminal block--multi-conductor 6 6 IDC ground block--multi-conductor 6 Accessories 6 End cover 6 End cover segment 6 6 XBQT15D12 -- XBQT25D12 -- XBQT15D22 -- XBQT25D12BU -- Blue -- -- XBQT15D12BU -- -- -- -- XBQT15D22BU -- -- -- Green/ yellow -- -- XBQT15D12PE -- XBQT25D12PE -- XBQT15D22PE -- -- Gray -- XBACQT15D12 XBACQT15D12 XBACQT25D12 XBACQT25D12 XBACQT15D22 XBACQT15D22 -- -- Gray -- Partition plate Plug-in bridge 6 6 6 -- -- Gray Red XBASQT15 XBASQT15 XBASQT25 XBASQT25 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 XBATQTD22 XBATQTD22 -- -- 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS26 XBAFBS26 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS36 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS56 XBAFBS56 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS106 XBAFBS106 50 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS506 XBAFBS506 Note 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U (XBQT15, XBQT15PE), KEMA 05ATEX2160 U (XBQT25, XBQT25PE). 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-28 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Insulation Displacement Connection--Double Level Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG EN 50 019 1 in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 800/17.5/24-16 420/15/24-16 600/10/24-16 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 --/--/24-16 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBQTT15 -- 6 6 6 6 Product Selection IDC terminal block--double level Blue -- XBQTT15BU -- Green/ yellow -- -- XBQTT15PE Gray -- XBACQTT15 XBACQTT15 Partition plate -- -- XBATQTT15 XBATQTT15 Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 20 XBAFBS505 XBAFBS505 IDC ground block--double level 6 6 Accessories End cover 6 6 6 6 6 6 Insulation Displacement Connection Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG Description 6.2 mm 14 AWG/2.5 mm2 2/6.3/20-14 300/15/20-14 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Black -- XBQT25FBE 6 6 6 Product Selection IDC fuse terminal block 6 With LED 12-30V, 1-2.5 mA XBQT25FBEL24 With LED 30-60V, 0.8-2.0 mA XBQT25FBEL60 With LED 110-250, 0.5-2.5 mA XBQT25FBEL250 6 6 Accessories Gray -- XBACQT25D12 Partition plate -- -- XBATQTD12 Plug-in bridge Red 2 XBAFBS26 3 XBAFBS36 5 XBAFBS56 10 XBAFBS106 End cover 6 6 6 6 Notes 1 EU type--examination certificate number: KEMA 05ATEX2157 U. 2 As disconnect terminal block, 400V; as fuse terminal block, 250V. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-29 6.5 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Insulation Displacement Connection Disconnect and Component Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 400/16/24-16 600/10/24-16 5.2 mm 16 AWG/1.5 mm2 400/16/24-16 600/10/24-16 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Gray -- XBQT15MT XBQT15TG End cover Gray -- XBACQT15D12 XBACQT15D12 6 End cover segment Gray -- XBASQT15 XBASQT15 Partition plate -- -- XBATQTD12 XBATQTD12 6 Plug-in bridge Red 6 Description 6 IDC disconnect and component terminal block 6 Product Selection Accessories 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 2 XBAFBS25 XBAFBS25 3 XBAFBS35 XBAFBS35 5 XBAFBS55 XBAFBS55 10 XBAFBS105 XBAFBS105 -- XBPCO Component plug Gray -- Fuse plug Black -- -- XBPFU Fuse plug with light indicator for 12-30V Black -- -- XBPFUL24 Fuse plug with light indicator for 110-250V Black -- -- XBPFUL250 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Miniature Circuit Breakers Connection Data in Vac/Vdc Description 250/65 Product Selection 6 Thermal miniature circuit breaker Nominal current 0.1A Black -- XBATCPT 6 Nominal current 0.25A Black -- XBATCPQ 6 Nominal current 0.5A Black -- XBATCPH Nominal current 1.0A Black -- XBATCP1 6 Nominal current 2.0A Black -- XBATCP2 Nominal current 3.0A Black -- XBATCP3 6 Nominal current 4.0A Black -- XBATCP4 Nominal current 6.0A Black -- XBATCP6 Nominal current 8.0A Black -- XBATCP8 Nominal current 10.0A Black -- XBATCP10 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-30 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Flat-Type Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 6 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 250/--/24-8 300/30/26-8 Color Number of Positions 8.2 mm 8 AWG/6 mm2 250/--/24-8 300/30/26-8 Catalog Number Catalog Number Black -- XBUK6FSI -- 6 LED Red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black -- -- XBUK6FSIL12 6 LED Red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black -- -- XBUK6FSIL24 Description 6 6 Product Selection Flat-type fuse terminal block Flat-type fuse terminal block with ... 6 6 Spring Cage Fuse Terminal Blocks Terminal Width Maximum Wire Size Connection Data in V/A/AWG UL-cUL Ratings in V/A/AWG 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/30/28-10 300/30/24-10 8.2 mm 10 AWG/4 mm2 400/30/28-10 300/30/24-10 6 6 Color Number of Positions Catalog Number Catalog Number Black -- XBPT4FSI -- 6 LED red 12 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black -- -- XBPT4FSIL12 LED red 24 Vdc, 2.0 mA Black -- -- XBPT4FSIL24 6 Description 6 Product Selection Spring cage fuse terminal block Spring cage fuse terminal block with ... 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-31 6.5 6 6 Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Accessories End-Stop End-Stops Marker Sheets Size Std. Pack Catalog Number Terminal Width (mm) 6 Description Snap-on end stops 35 mm 50 XBAES35N 6 Universal end stops 35 mm 50 XBAES35T 5.2 White 35 mm 50 XBAES35C 5.2 5.2 Blank Marker Sheets 6 6 6 DIN Rails DIN Rails--35 x 7.5 mm x 2m Size 6 25 Std. Pack Slotted XBANS3575P 6 6 Flat Marker Sheets Marker Strips 6 Marker Strips (Strip of 10) Terminal Width (mm) 6 5.2 Std. Pack 10 Std. Pack Catalog Number Marker Sheets (10 rows of 12) 50 XBMPZB5 Blue 50 XBMPZB5BU Red 50 XBMPZB5RD 5.2 Yellow 50 XBMPZB5YE 5.2 Green 50 XBMPZB5GN Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10) Catalog Number 6 Color Catalog Number XBMZB5 6.2 White 50 XBMPZB6 6.2 Blue 50 XBMPZB6BU 6.2 Red 50 XBMPZB6RD 6.2 Yellow 50 XBMPZB6YE 6.2 Green 50 XBMPZB6GN Flat Marker Sheets (10 rows of 10) 5.2 White 10 XBMPZBF5 5.2 Orange 10 XBMPZBF5OG 6.2 White 10 XBMPZBF6 6.2 Orange 10 XBMPZBF6OG 8.2 White 10 XBMPZBF8 Std. Pack Catalog Number 6.2 10 XBMZB6 8.2 10 XBMZB8 10.2 10 XBMZB10 12 10 XBMZB12 16 10 XBMZB15 1 10 XBMZBF5 -- 10 XBATSMPSMT XBMZBF6 Blue 10 XBATSMPSIHBU 10 XBMZBF8 White 10 XBATSMPSIHWH 10.2 10 XBMZBF10 Red 10 XBATSMPSIHRD 12 10 XBMZBF12 Black 10 XBATSMPSIHBK 16 10 XBMZBF15 4 mm -- 10 XBATSPSMT 6 Blue 10 XBATSPSIHBU White 10 XBATSPSIHWH 6 Red 10 XBATSPSIHRD Black 10 XBATSPSIHBK 6 6 6 6 6.2 6 8.2 6 6 6 Test Plugs Color 2.3 mm Flat 5.2 Test Plugs 10 Note 1 All markers are strips of 10, except XBMZB15 which is a strip of 5. 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V9-T6-32 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories 6.5 Printed Marking Tags Terminal Block Marking Tag 6 Marking Tags for 5.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks 6 Catalog Number Description ZB5 tags vertically numbered Horizontal Printed Marking Tag ZBF5 tags vertically numbered 1-10 1 XBMZB5V/1 11-20 XBMZB5V/11 21-30 XBMZB5V/21 31-40 XBMZB5V/31 41-50 XBMZB5V/41 51-60 XBMZB5V/51 61-70 XBMZB5V/61 71-80 XBMZB5V/71 81-90 XBMZB5V/81 91-100 XBMZB5V/91 1-10 1 XBMZBF5V/1 11-20 XBMZBF5V/11 21-30 XBMZBF5V/21 31-40 XBMZBF5V/31 41-50 XBMZBF5V/41 51-60 XBMZBF5V/51 61-70 XBMZBF5V/61 71-80 XBMZBF5V/71 81-90 XBMZBF5V/81 91-100 XBMZBF5V/91 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Marking Tags for 6.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Catalog Number 6 1-10 1 XBMZB6V/1 11-20 XBMZB6V/11 6 21-30 XBMZB6V/21 31-40 XBMZB6V/31 41-50 XBMZB6V/41 51-60 XBMZB6V/51 61-70 XBMZB6V/61 71-80 XBMZB6V/71 81-90 XBMZB6V/81 91-100 XBMZB6V/91 1-10 1 XBMZBF6V/1 11-20 XBMZBF6V/11 21-30 XBMZBF6V/21 31-40 XBMZBF6V/31 41-50 XBMZBF6V/41 51-60 XBMZBF6V/51 61-70 XBMZBF6V/61 71-80 XBMZBF6V/71 81-90 XBMZBF6V/81 91-100 XBMZBF6V/91 Description ZB6 tags vertically numbered ZBF6 tags vertically numbered 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Notes See Page V9-T6-34 for marking tags for 8.2-16 mm wide terminal blocks. 1 6 For text printed horizontally, change "V" in catalog number to "H." 6 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-T6-33 6.5 6 Terminal Block Marking Tag Machine Integration Terminal Blocks and Accessories Marking Tags for 8.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks Catalog Number Description 6 1-10 1 XBMZB8V/1 11-20 XBMZB8V/11 21-30 XBMZB8V/21 31-40 XBMZB8V/31 41-50 XBMZB8V/41 51-60 XBMZB8V/51 61-70 XBMZB8V/61 71-80 XBMZB8V/71 81-90 XBMZB8V/81 91-100 XBMZB8V/91 1-10 1 XBMZBF8V/1 11-20 XBMZBF8V/11 6 21-30 XBMZBF8V/21 31-40 XBMZBF8V/31 6 41-50 XBMZBF8V/41 51-60 XBMZBF8V/51 61-70 XBMZBF8V/61 6 71-80 XBMZBF8V/71 81-90 XBMZBF8V/81 6 91-100 XBMZBF8V/91 ZB8 tags vertically numbered 6 6 Horizontal Printed Marking Tag 6 6 6 ZBF8 tags vertically numbered 6 6 6 Marking Tags for 10.2 mm Wide Terminal Blocks 6 Description ZB10 tags vertically numbered 6 6 ZBF10 tags vertically numbered 6 Catalog Number 1-10 1 XBMZB10V/1 11-20 XBMZB10V/11 21-30 XBMZB10V/21 1-10 1 XBMZBF10V/1 11-20 XBMZBF10V/11 21-30 XBMZBF10V/21 6 Marking Tags for 12 mm Wide Terminal Blocks 6 Description ZB12 tags vertically numbered 6 6 ZBF12 tags vertically numbered 6 6 Catalog Number 1-10 1 XBMZB12V/1 11-20 XBMZB12V/11 21-30 XBMZB12V/21 11-10 1 XBMZBF12V/1 11-20 XBMZBF12V/11 21-30 XBMZBF12V/21 Marking Tags for 16 mm Wide Terminal Blocks 6 Catalog Number Description 6 ZB15 tags vertically numbered 6 ZBF15 tags vertically numbered 6 6 11-10 1 XBMZB15V/1 11-20 XBMZB15V/11 21-30 XBMZB15V/21 1-10 1 XBMZBF15V/1 11-20 XBMZBF15V/11 21-30 XBMZBF15V/21 Note 1 For text printed horizontally, change "V" in catalog number to "H." 6 V9-T6-34 Volume 9--OEM--Original Equipment Manufacturer CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Contents Eaton Terms & Conditions Description Page Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V9-A1-1 V9-A1-2 V9-A1-3 V9-A1-3 Selling Policy (Supersedes Selling Policy 25-000, dated February 20, 2006) Terms and Conditions of Sale The Terms and Conditions of Sale set forth herein, and any supplements which may be attached hereto, constitute the full and final expression of the contract for the sale of products or services (hereinafter referred to as Product(s) or Services by Eaton Corporation (hereinafter referred to as Seller) to the Buyer, and supersedes all prior quotations, purchase orders, correspondence or communications whether written or oral between the Seller and the Buyer. Notwithstanding any contrary language in the Buyer's purchase order, correspondence or other form of acknowledgment, Buyer shall be bound by these Terms and Conditions of Sale when it sends a purchase order or otherwise indicates acceptance of this contract, or when it accepts delivery from Seller of the Products or Services. THE CONTRACT FOR SALE OF THE PRODUCTS OR SERVICES IS EXPRESSLY LIMITED TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALE STATED HEREIN. ANY ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT TERMS PROPOSED BY BUYER ARE REJECTED UNLESS EXPRESSLY AGREED TO IN WRITING BY SELLER. No contract shall exist except as herein provided. Complete Agreement No amendment or modification hereto nor any statement, representation or warranty not contained herein shall be binding on the Seller unless made in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller. Prior dealings, usage of the trade or a course of performance shall not be relevant to determine the meaning of this contract even though the accepting or acquiescing party had knowledge of the nature of the performance and opportunity for objection. Quotations Written quotations are valid for 30 days from its date unless otherwise stated in the quotation or terminated sooner by notice. Verbal quotations, unless accepted, expire the same day they are made. A complete signed order must be received by Seller within 20 calendar days of notification of award, otherwise the price and shipment will be subject to re-negotiation. Termination and Cancellation Any order may be terminated by the Buyer only by written notice and upon payment of reasonable termination charges, including all costs plus profit. Seller shall have the right to cancel any order at any time by written notice if Buyer breaches any of the terms hereof, becomes the subject of any proceeding under state or federal law for the relief of debtors, or otherwise becomes insolvent or bankrupt, generally does not pay its debts as they become due or makes an assignment for the benefit of creditors. Volume 9--OEM Product Guide CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-1 Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Prices All prices are subject to change without notice. In the event of a price change, the effective date of the change will be the date of the new price or discount sheet, letter or telegram. All quotations made or orders accepted after the effective date will be on the new basis. For existing orders, the price of the unshipped portion of an order will be the price in effect at time of shipment. Price Policy--Products and Services When prices are quoted as firm for quoted shipment, they are firm provided the following conditions are met: 1. The order is released with complete engineering details. 2. Shipment of Products are made, and Services purchased are provided within the quoted lead time. 3. When drawings for approval are required for any Products, the drawings applicable to those Products must be returned within 30* calendar days from the date of the original mailing of the drawings by Seller. The return drawings must be released for manufacture and shipment and must be marked "APPROVED" or "APPROVED AS NOTED." Drawing re-submittals which are required for any other reason than to correct Seller errors will not extend the 30-day period. If the Buyer initiates or in any way causes delays in shipment, provision of Services or return of approval drawings beyond the periods stated above, the price of the Products or Services will be increased 1% per month or fraction thereof up to a maximum of 18 months from the date of the Buyer's order. For delays resulting in shipment or provision of Services beyond 18 months from the date of the Buyer's order, the price must be renegotiated. Price Policy--BLS Refer to Price Policy 25-050. Minimum Billing Orders less than $1,000 will be assessed a shipping and handling charge of 5% of the price of the order, with a minimum charge of $25.00 unless noted differently on Product discount sheets. Taxes The price does not include any taxes. Buyer shall be responsible for the payment of all taxes applicable to, or arising from the transaction, the Products, its sale, value, or use, or any Services performed in connection therewith regardless of the person or entity actually taxed. Terms of Payment Products Acceptance of all orders is subject to the Buyer meeting Seller's credit requirements. Terms of payment are subject to change for failure to meet such requirements. Seller reserves the right at any time to demand full or partial payment before proceeding with a contract of sale as a result of changes in the financial condition of the Buyer. Terms of Payment are either Net 30 days from the date of invoice of each shipment or carry a cash discount based on Product type. Specific payment terms for Products are outlined in the applicable Product discount schedules. Services Terms of payment are net within 30 days from date of invoice for orders amounting to less than $50,000.00. Terms of payment for orders exceeding $50,000.00 shall be made according to the following: 1. Twenty percent (20%) of order value with the purchase order payable 30 days from date of invoice. 2. Eighty percent (80%) of order value in equal monthly payments over the performance period payable 30 days from date of invoice. * 60 days for orders through contractors to allow time for their review and approval before and after transmitting them to their customers. V9-A1-2 Volume 9--OEM Product Guide CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Except for work performed (i) under a firm fixed price basis or (ii) pursuant to terms of a previously priced existing contract between Seller and Buyer, invoices for work performed by Seller shall have added and noted on each invoice a charge of 3% (over and above the price of the work) which is related to Seller compliance with present and proposed environmental, health, and safety regulations associated with prescribed requirements covering hazardous materials management and employee training, communications, personal protective equipment, documentation and record keeping associated therewith. Adequate Assurances If, in the judgment of Seller, the financial condition of the Buyer, at any time during the period of the contract, does not justify the terms of payment specified, Seller may require full or partial payment in advance. Delayed Payment If payments are not made in accordance with these terms, a service charge will, without prejudice to the right of Seller to immediate payment, be added in an amount equal to the lower of 1.5% per month or fraction thereof or the highest legal rate on the unpaid balance. Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Freight Warranty Freight policy will be listed on the Product discount sheets, or at option of Seller one of the following freight terms will be quoted. Risk of Loss Risk of loss or damage to the Products shall pass to Buyer at the F.O.B. point. F.O.B.--P/S--Frt./Ppd. and Invoiced Products are sold F.O.B. point of shipment freight prepaid and invoiced to the Buyer. Concealed Damage Except in the event of F.O.B. destination shipments, Seller will not participate in any settlement of claims for concealed damage. F.O.B.--P/S--Frt./Ppd. and Allowed Products sold are delivered F.O.B. point of shipment, freight prepaid and included in the price. F.O.B. Destination--Frt./Ppd. and Allowed At Buyer's option, Seller will deliver the Products F.O.B. destination freight prepaid and 2% will be added to the net price. The term "freight prepaid" means that freight charges will be prepaid to the accessible common carrier delivery point nearest the destination for shipments within the United States and Puerto Rico unless noted differently on the Product discount sheets. For any other destination contact Seller's representative. Shipment and Routing Seller shall select the point of origin of shipment, the method of transportation, the type of carrier equipment and the routing of the shipment. If the Buyer specifies a special method of transportation, type of carrier equipment, routing, or delivery requirement, Buyer shall pay all special freight and handling charges. When freight is included in the price, no allowance will be made in lieu of transportation if the Buyer accepts shipment at factory, warehouse, or freight station or otherwise supplies its own transportation. When shipment has been made on an F.O.B. destination basis, the Buyer must unpack immediately and, if damage is discovered must: 1. Not move the Products from the point of examination. 2. Retain shipping container and packing material. 3. Notify the carrier in writing of any apparent damage. 4. Notify Seller representative within 72 hours of delivery. 5. Send Seller a copy of the carrier's inspection report. Witness Tests/Customer Inspection Standard factory tests may be witnessed by the Buyer at Seller's factory for an additional charge calculated at the rate of $2,500 per day (not to exceed eight (8) hours) per Product type. Buyer may final inspect Products at the Seller's factory for $500 per day per Product type. Witness tests will add one (1) week to the scheduled shipping date. Seller will notify Buyer fourteen (14) calendar days prior to scheduled witness testing or inspection. In the event Buyer is unable to attend, the Parties shall mutually agree on a rescheduled date. However, Seller reserves the right to deem the witness tests waived with the right to ship and invoice Products. Held Orders For any order held, delayed or rescheduled at the request of the Buyer, Seller may, at its sole option (1) require payment to be based on any reasonable basis, including but not limited to the contract price, and any additional expenses, or cost resulting from such a delay; (2) store Products at the sole cost and risk of loss of the Buyer; and/ or (3) charge to the Buyer those prices under the applicable price policy. Payment for such price, expenses and costs, in any such event, shall be due by Buyer within thirty (30) days from date of Seller's invoice. Any order so held delayed or rescheduled beyond six (6) months will be treated as a Buyer termination. Warranty for Products Seller warrants that the Products manufactured by it will conform to Seller's applicable specifications and be free from failure due to defects in workmanship and material for one (1) year from the date of installation of the Product or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment of the Product, whichever occurs first. Drawing Approval Seller will design the Products in line with, in Seller's judgment, good commercial practice. If at drawing approval Buyer makes changes outside of the design as covered in their specifications, Seller will then be paid reasonable charges and allowed a commensurate delay in shipping date based on the changes made. Seller requires all nonconforming Products be returned at Seller's expense for evaluation unless specifically stated otherwise in writing by Seller. Drawing Re-Submittal When Seller agrees to do so in its quotation, Seller shall provide Buyer with the first set of factory customer approval drawing(s) at Seller's expense. The customer approval drawing(s) will be delivered at the quoted delivery date. If Buyer requests drawing changes or additions after the initial factory customer approval drawing(s) have been submitted by Seller, the Seller, at its option, may assess Buyer drawing charges. Factory customer approval drawing changes required due to misinterpretation by Seller will be at Seller's expense. Approval drawings generated by Bid Manager are excluded from this provision. In the event any Product fails to comply with the foregoing warranty Seller will, at its option, either (a) repair or replace the defective Product, or defective part or component thereof, F.O.B. Seller's facility freight prepaid, or (b) credit Buyer for the purchase price of the Product. All warranty claims shall be made in writing. This warranty does not cover failure or damage due to storage, installation, operation or maintenance not in conformance with Seller's recommendations and industry standard practice or due to accident, misuse, abuse or negligence. This warranty does not cover reimbursement for labor, gaining access, removal, installation, temporary power or any other expenses, which may be incurred in connection with repair or replacement. This warranty does not apply to equipment not manufactured by Seller. Seller limits itself to extending the same warranty it receives from the supplier. Volume 9--OEM Product Guide CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-3 Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Extended Warranty for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, the foregoing standard warranty for Products will be extended from the date of shipment for the period and price indicated below: 24 months--2% of Contract Price 30 months--3% of Contract Price 36 months--4% of Contract Price Special Warranty (In and Out) for Products If requested by the Buyer and specifically accepted in writing by Seller, Seller will, during the warranty period for Products, at an additional cost of 2% of the contract price, be responsible for the direct cost of: 1. Removing the Product from the installed location. 2. Transportation to the repair facility and return to the site. 3. Reinstallation on site. The total liability of Seller for this Special Warranty for Products is limited to 50% of the contract price of the particular Product being repaired and excludes expenses for removing adjacent apparatus, walls, piping, structures, temporary service, etc. V9-A1-4 Warranty for Services Seller warrants that the Services performed by it hereunder will be performed in accordance with generally accepted professional standards. The Services, which do not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within one (1) year after completion of the Services. Unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Seller, Seller assumes no responsibility with respect to the suitability of the Buyer's, or its customer's, equipment or with respect to any latent defects in equipment not supplied by Seller. This warranty does not cover damage to Buyer's, or its customer's, equipment, components or parts resulting in whole or in part from improper maintenance or operation or from their deteriorated condition. Buyer will, at its cost, provide Seller with unobstructed access to the defective Services, as well as adequate free working space in the immediate vicinity of the defective Services and such facilities and systems, including, without limitation, docks, cranes and utility disconnects and connects, as may be necessary in order that Seller may perform its warranty obligations. The conducting of any tests shall be mutually agreed upon and Seller shall be notified of, and may be present at, all tests that may be made. Warranty for Power Systems Studies Seller warrants that any power systems studies performed by it will conform to generally accepted professional standards. Any portion of the study, which does not so conform, shall be corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the Buyer within six (6) months after completion of the study. All warranty work shall be performed in a single shift straight time basis Monday through Friday. In the event that the study requires correction of warranty items on an overtime schedule, the premium portion of such overtime shall be for the Buyer's account. Limitation on Warranties for Products, Services and Power Systems Studies THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT FOR WARRANTY OF TITLE. SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CORRECTION OF NONCONFORMITIES IN THE MANNER AND FOR THE PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE SELLER'S SOLE LIABILITY AND BUYER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF SELLER TO MEET ITS WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS, WHETHER CLAIMS OF THE BUYER ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY), OR OTHERWISE. Volume 9--OEM Product Guide CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com Asbestos Federal Law requires that building or facility owners identify the presence, location and quantity of asbestos containing material (hereinafter "ACM") at work sites. Seller is not licensed to abate ACM. Accordingly, for any contract which includes the provision of Services, prior to (i) commencement of work at any site under a specific Purchase Order, (ii) a change in the work scope of any Purchase Order, the Buyer will certify that the work area associated with the Seller's scope of work includes the handling of Class II ACM, including but not limited to generator wedges and high temperature gaskets which include asbestos materials. The Buyer shall, at its expense, conduct abatement should the removal, handling, modification or reinstallation, or some or all of them, of said Class II ACM be likely to generate airborne asbestos fibers; and should such abatement affect the cost of or time of performance of the work then Seller shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the schedule, price and other pertinent affected provisions of the contract. Compliance with Nuclear Regulation Seller's Products are sold as commercial grade Products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes. Further certification will be required for use of the Products in any safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Appendix 1--Eaton Terms & Conditions Effective Date: November 1, 2008 Returning Products Authorization and shipping instructions for the return of any Products must be obtained from Seller before returning the Products. When return is occasioned due to Seller error, full credit including all transportation charges will be allowed. Product Notices Buyer shall provide the user (including its employees) of the Products with all Seller supplied Product notices, warnings, instructions, recommendations, and similar materials. Force Majeure Seller shall not be liable for failure to perform or delay in performance due to fire, flood, strike or other labor difficulty, act of God, act of any governmental authority or of the Buyer, riot, embargo, fuel or energy shortage, car shortage, wrecks or delays in transportation, or due to any other cause beyond Seller's reasonable control. In the event of delay in performance due to any such cause, the date of delivery or time for completion will be extended by a period of time reasonably necessary to overcome the effect of such delay. Liquidated Damages Contracts which include liquidated damage clauses for failure to meet shipping or job completion promises are not acceptable or binding on Seller, unless such clauses are specifically accepted in writing by an authorized representative of the Seller at its headquarters office. Patent Infringement Seller will defend or, at its option, settle any suit or proceeding brought against Buyer, or Buyer's customers, to the extent it is based upon a claim that any Product or part thereof, manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries and furnished hereunder, infringes any United States patent, other than a claim of infringement based upon use of a Product or part thereof in a process, provided Seller is notified in reasonable time and given authority, information and assistance (at Seller's expense) for the defense of same. Seller shall pay all legal and court costs and expenses and courtassessed damages awarded therein against Buyer resulting from or incident to such suit or proceeding. In addition to the foregoing, if at any time Seller determines there is a substantial question of infringement of any United States patent, and the use of such Product is or may be enjoined, Seller may, at its option and expense: either (a) procure for Buyer the right to continue using and selling the Product; (b) replace the Product with non-infringing apparatus; (c) modify the Product so it becomes noninfringing; or (d) as a last resort, remove the Product and refund the purchase price, equitably adjusted for use and obsolescence. In no case does Seller agree to pay any recovery based upon its Buyer's savings or profit through use of Seller's Products whether the use be special or ordinary. The foregoing states the entire liability of Seller for patent infringement. The preceding paragraph does not apply to any claim of infringement based upon: (a) any modification made to a Product other than by Seller; (b) any design and/or specifications of Buyer to which a Product was manufactured; or (c) the use or combination of Product with other products where the Product does not itself infringe. As to the aboveidentified claim situations where the preceding paragraph does not apply, Buyer shall defend and hold Seller harmless in the same manner and to the extent as Seller's obligations described in the preceding paragraph. Buyer shall be responsible for obtaining (at Buyer's expense) all license rights required for Seller to be able to use software products in the possession of Buyer where such use is required in order to perform any Service for Buyer. With respect to a Product or part thereof not manufactured by Seller or its subsidiaries, Seller will attempt to obtain for Buyer, from the supplier(s), the patent indemnification protection normally provided by the supplier(s) to customers. Limitation of Liability THE REMEDIES OF THE BUYER SET FORTH IN THIS CONTRACT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE ITS SOLE REMEDIES FOR ANY FAILURE OF SELLER TO COMPLY WITH ITS OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY PROVISION IN THIS CONTRACT TO THE CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY OR EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN PRODUCTS SOLD HEREUNDER, LOSS OF PROFITS OR REVENUE, LOSS OF USE OF PRODUCTS, COST OF CAPITAL, CLAIMS OF CUSTOMERS OF THE BUYER OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, REGARDLESS OF WHETHER SUCH POTENTIAL DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE OR IF SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO THIS CONTRACT WHETHER THE CLAIMS ARE BASED IN CONTRACT, IN TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR SERVICES ON WHICH SUCH LIABILITY IS BASED. Volume 9--OEM Product Guide CA08100011E--March 2013 www.eaton.com V9-A1-5